SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

(Read these precautions before using this product.)

Before using this product, please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully and pay full attention
to safety to handle the product correctly.
The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product only. For the safety precautions of the
programmable controller system, refer to the user's manual for the CPU module used.

In this manual, the safety precautions are classified into two levels: " CAUTION" and " WARNING".

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,

WARNING
resulting in death or severe injury.

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,

CAUTION resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage.

Under some circumstances, failure to observe the precautions given under " CAUTION" may lead to
serious consequences.
Observe the precautions of both levels because they are important for personal and system safety.

Make sure that the end users read this manual and then keep the manual in a safe place for future
reference.

[Design Precautions]
WARNING
● Do not write any data to the "system area" and "write-protect area" (R) of the buffer memory in the
intelligent function module. Also, do not use any "use prohibited" signals as an output signal from the
programmable controller CPU to the intelligent function module. Doing so may cause malfunction of
the programmable controller system.

[Design Precautions]
CAUTION
● Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power
cables. Keep a distance of 100mm or more between them. Failure to do so may result in malfunction
due to noise.

1
[Installation Precautions]
WARNING
● Shut off the external power supply (all phases) used in the system before mounting or removing a
module. Failure to do so may result in electric shock or cause the module to fail or malfunction.

[Installation Precautions]
CAUTION
● Use the programmable controller in an environment that meets the general specifications in the Safety
Guidelines provided with the CPU module or head module. Failure to do so may result in electric
shock, fire, malfunction, or damage to or deterioration of the product.
● To interconnect modules, engage the respective connectors and securely lock the module joint levers.
Incorrect interconnection may cause malfunction, failure, or drop of the module.
● Tighten the screw within the specified torque range. Undertightening can cause drop of the screw,
short circuit or malfunction. Overtightening can damage the screw and/or module, resulting in drop,
short circuit, or malfunction.
● Do not directly touch any conductive parts and electronic components of the module. Doing so can
cause malfunction or failure of the module.

[Wiring Precautions]
WARNING
● After installation and wiring, attach the included terminal cover to the module before turning it on for
operation. Failure to do so may result in electric shock.

[Wiring Precautions]
CAUTION
● Ground the FG terminal to the protective ground conductor dedicated to the programmable controller.
Failure to do so may result in electric shock or malfunction.
● Tighten the terminal block screw within the specified torque range. Undertightening can cause short
circuit, fire, or malfunction. Overtightening can damage the screw and/or module, resulting in drop,
short circuit, fire, or malfunction.
● Prevent foreign matter such as dust or wire chips from entering the module. Such foreign matter can
cause a fire, failure, or malfunction.
● A protective film is attached to the top of the module to prevent foreign matter, such as wire chips,
from entering the module during wiring. Do not remove the film during wiring. Remove it for heat
dissipation before system operation.
● Mitsubishi programmable controllers must be installed in control panels. Connect the main power
supply to the power supply module in the control panel through a relay terminal block. Wiring and
replacement of a power supply module must be performed by qualified maintenance personnel with
knowledge of protection against electric shock. For wiring methods, refer to the MELSEC-L CPU
Module User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection).

2
[Startup and Maintenance Precautions]
WARNING
● Do not touch any terminal while power is on. Doing so will cause electric shock or malfunction.
● Shut off the external power supply (all phases) used in the system before cleaning the module or
retightening the terminal block screw. Failure to do so may result in electric shock.

[Startup and Maintenance Precautions]

CAUTION
● Do not disassemble or modify the module. Doing so may cause failure, malfunction, injury, or a fire.
● Shut off the external power supply (all phases) used in the system before mounting or removing a
module. Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction.
● Tighten the terminal block screw within the specified torque range. Undertightening can cause drop of
the component or wire, short circuit, or malfunction. Overtightening can damage the screw and/or
module, resulting in drop, short circuit, or malfunction.
● After the first use of the product (module, display unit, and terminal block), the number of
connections/disconnections is limited to 50 times (in accordance with IEC 61131-2). Exceeding the
limit may cause malfunction.
● Before handling the module, touch a conducting object such as a grounded metal to discharge the
static electricity from the human body. Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction.

[Disposal Precautions]
CAUTION
● When disposing of this product, treat it as industrial waste.

3
 CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT
(1) Mitsubishi programmable controller ("the PRODUCT") shall be used in conditions;
i) where any problem, fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT, if any, shall not lead to any major
or serious accident; and
ii) where the backup and fail-safe function are systematically or automatically provided outside of
the PRODUCT for the case of any problem, fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT.

(2) The PRODUCT has been designed and manufactured for the purpose of being used in general
industries.
MITSUBISHI SHALL HAVE NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO ANY AND ALL RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY BASED ON CONTRACT,
WARRANTY, TORT, PRODUCT LIABILITY) FOR ANY INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONS OR
LOSS OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY CAUSED BY the PRODUCT THAT ARE OPERATED OR
USED IN APPLICATION NOT INTENDED OR EXCLUDED BY INSTRUCTIONS, PRECAUTIONS,
OR WARNING CONTAINED IN MITSUBISHI'S USER, INSTRUCTION AND/OR SAFETY
MANUALS, TECHNICAL BULLETINS AND GUIDELINES FOR the PRODUCT.
("Prohibited Application")
Prohibited Applications include, but not limited to, the use of the PRODUCT in;
• Nuclear Power Plants and any other power plants operated by Power companies, and/or any
other cases in which the public could be affected if any problem or fault occurs in the PRODUCT.
• Railway companies or Public service purposes, and/or any other cases in which establishment of
a special quality assurance system is required by the Purchaser or End User.
• Aircraft or Aerospace, Medical applications, Train equipment, transport equipment such as
Elevator and Escalator, Incineration and Fuel devices, Vehicles, Manned transportation,
Equipment for Recreation and Amusement, and Safety devices, handling of Nuclear or
Hazardous Materials or Chemicals, Mining and Drilling, and/or other applications where there is a
significant risk of injury to the public or property.

Notwithstanding the above, restrictions Mitsubishi may in its sole discretion, authorize use of the
PRODUCT in one or more of the Prohibited Applications, provided that the usage of the PRODUCT
is limited only for the specific applications agreed to by Mitsubishi and provided further that no
special quality assurance or fail-safe, redundant or other safety features which exceed the general
specifications of the PRODUCTs are required. For details, please contact the Mitsubishi
representative in your region.

4
 INTRODUCTION
Thank you for purchasing the Mitsubishi MELSEC-L series programmable controllers.
This manual describes the operating procedures, system configuration, parameter settings, functions, programming,
and troubleshooting of the L series temperature control module L60TCTT4/L60TCTT4BW/L60TCRT4/L60TCRT4BW
(hereafter abbreviated as L60TC4).

Before using this product, please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully and develop familiarity with the
functions and performance of the MELSEC-L series programmable controller to handle the product correctly.
When applying the program examples introduced in this manual to the actual system, ensure the applicability and
confirm that it will not cause system control problems.

„Relevant modules: L60TCTT4, L60TCTT4BW, L60TCRT4, L60TCRT4BW

Remark
Operating procedures are explained using GX Works2. When using GX Developer, refer to Page 419, Appendix 5.

5
 COMPLIANCE WITH EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE
DIRECTIVES

(1) Method of ensuring compliance

To ensure that Mitsubishi programmable controllers maintain EMC and Low Voltage Directives when incorporated
into other machinery or equipment, certain measures may be necessary. Please refer to the manual included with
the CPU module or head module. The CE mark on the side of the programmable controller indicates compliance
with EMC and Low Voltage Directives.

(2) Additional measures

To ensure that this product maintains EMC and Low Voltage Directives, please refer to the manual included with
the CPU module or head module.

6
 RELEVANT MANUALS

(1) CPU module user's manual

Manual name
Description
<manual number (model code)>
MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual Specifications of the CPU modules, power supply modules, display unit, SD
(Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection) memory cards, and batteries, information on how to establish a system,
<SH-080890ENG, 13JZ36> maintenance and inspection, and troubleshooting
MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual
(Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals) Functions and devices of the CPU module, and programming
<SH-080889ENG, 13JZ35>

(2) Head module user's manual

Manual name
Description
<manual number (model code)>
MELSEC-L CC-Link IE Field Network Head Module User's Manual Specifications, procedures before operation, system configuration, installation,
<SH-080919ENG, 13JZ48> wiring, settings, and troubleshooting of the head module

(3) Operating manual

Manual name
Description
<manual number (model code)>
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common) System configuration, parameter settings, and online operations (common to
<SH-080779ENG, 13JU63> Simple project and Structured project) of GX Works2
GX Developer Version 8 Operating Manual
Operating methods of GX Developer, such as programming, printing,
monitoring, and debugging
<SH-080373E, 13JU41>

7
 CONTENTS
CONTENTS

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
COMPLIANCE WITH EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
RELEVANT MANUALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
MANUAL PAGE ORGANIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
TERMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
PACKING LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

CHAPTER 1 WHAT CAN BE DONE WITH A TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE 16

1.1 Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
1.3 The PID Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.4 About the PID Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1.4.1 Operation method and formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1.4.2 The L60TC4 actions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1.4.3 Proportional action (P-action). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1.4.4 Integral action (I-action) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
1.4.5 Derivative action (D-action) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.4.6 PID action. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

CHAPTER 2 PART NAMES 29

CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 31
3.1 General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3.2 Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
3.2.1 Number of parameters to be set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
3.2.2 Type of usable temperature sensors, temperature measurement range, resolution,
and effect from wiring resistance of 1 ohm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3.2.3 Sampling cycle and control output cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

3.3 Function List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

3.4 I/O Signal List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
3.5 Buffer Memory List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 79

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 81

5.1 Total Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
5.2 Applicable Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
5.3 Precautions for System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 84

6.1 Installation Environment and Installation Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
6.2 Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
6.3 Wiring precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

8
 6.4 External wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
6.4.1 L60TCTT4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
6.4.2 L60TCTT4BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
6.4.3 L60TCRT4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
6.4.4 L60TCRT4BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

6.5 Heater disconnection detection wiring and setting example for three-phase heater . . . . . . . 105
6.6 Unused Channel Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

CHAPTER 7 VARIOUS SETTINGS 107

7.1 Addition of Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
7.2 Switch Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
7.3 Parameter Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
7.4 Auto Refresh. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
7.5 Auto Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
7.6 Sensor Correction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 115

8.1 Temperature Input Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
8.1.1 Conversion enable/disable function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
8.1.2 Temperature conversion method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
8.1.3 Alert output function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

8.2 Temperature Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

8.2.1 Control Mode Selection Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
8.2.2 Control output setting at CPU stop error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
8.2.3 Control method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
8.2.4 Manual Reset Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
8.2.5 Manual Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
8.2.6 Control output cycle unit selection function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
8.2.7 Auto tuning function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
8.2.8 Simple Two-degree-of-freedom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
8.2.9 Derivative Action Selection Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
8.2.10 Setting Change Rate Limiter Setting Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
8.2.11 Alert Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
8.2.12 RFB Limiter Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
8.2.13 Input/output (with another analog module) function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
8.2.14 ON delay output function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
8.2.15 Self-tuning function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
8.2.16 Peak current suppression function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
8.2.17 Simultaneous temperature rise function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
8.2.18 Forward/reverse action selection function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
8.2.19 Loop disconnection detection function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
8.2.20 Proportional band setting function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
8.2.21 Cooling method setting function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
8.2.22 Overlap/dead band function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
8.2.23 Temperature conversion function (using unused channels). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
8.2.24 Heater disconnection detection function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

9
 8.2.25 Output off-time current error detection function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

8.3 Common Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

8.3.1 Temperature process value (PV) scaling function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
8.3.2 Sensor compensation function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
8.3.3 Auto configuration at input range change function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
8.3.4 Buffer memory data backup function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
8.3.5 Error history function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
8.3.6 Module error history collection function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
8.3.7 Error clear function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

CHAPTER 9 DISPLAY UNIT 241

9.1 Display Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
9.2 Menu Transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
9.3 Setting Value Change Screen List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
9.4 Checking and Clearing Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING 250

10.1 Programming Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
10.2 When Using the Module in a Standard System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
10.2.1 When using the L60TC4 as a temperature input module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
10.2.2 Standard control (such as auto tuning, self-tuning, and error code read) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
10.2.3 Standard control (peak current suppression function, simultaneous temperature
rise function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
10.2.4 When performing the heating-cooling control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

10.3 When the Module is Connected to the Head Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 308

11.1 Before Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
11.2 Troubleshooting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
11.3 Checks Using LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
11.3.1 When the RUN LED flashes or turns off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
11.3.2 When the ERR. LED turns on or flashes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
11.3.3 When the ALM LED turns on or flashes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

11.4 Checks Using Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

11.4.1 When Module READY flag (Xn0) does not turn on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
11.4.2 When Error occurrence flag (Xn2) is on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
11.4.3 When Hardware error flag (Xn3) is on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
11.4.4 When the auto tuning does not start
(CH† Auto tuning status (Xn4 to Xn7) does not turn on) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
11.4.5 When the auto tuning does not complete
(CH† Auto tuning status (Xn4 to Xn7) stays on and does not turn off) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
11.4.6 When the self-tuning does not start
(CH† Auto tuning status (Xn4 to Xn7) does not turn on) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
11.4.7 When Back-up of the set value fail flag (XnA) is on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
11.4.8 When CH† Alert occurrence flag (XnC to XnF) is on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

10
 11.5 Troubleshooting by Symptom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
11.5.1 When the temperature process value (PV) is abnormal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

11.6 Error Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

11.7 Alarm Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
11.8 Check the L60TC4 Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

APPENDICES 323
Appendix 1 Details of I/O Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Appendix 1.1 Input signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Appendix 1.2 Output signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

Appendix 2 Details of the Buffer Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

Appendix 3 How to Check the Serial Number and Function Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Appendix 4 Differences with MELSEC-Q series Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Appendix 4.1 Differences with temperature control modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

Appendix 5 When Using GX Developer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419

Appendix 5.1 I/O assignment and intelligent function module switch setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Appendix 5.2 Initial setting and auto refresh setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

Appendix 6 External Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

INDEX 426
REVISIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
WARRANTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433

11
 MANUAL PAGE ORGANIZATION
In this manual, pages are organized and the symbols are used as shown below.
The following illustration is for explanation purpose only, and should not be referred to as an actual documentation.

"" is used for

screen names and items.

The chapter of
the current page is shown.
shows operating
procedures.

shows mouse
operations.*1

[ ] is used for items

in the menu bar and
the project window.

The section of
the current page is shown.

Ex. shows setting or

operating examples.

shows reference
manuals.

shows shows notes that

reference pages. requires attention.

shows useful
information.

*1 The mouse operation example is provided below.

Menu bar

Ex. [Online] [Write to PLC...]

Select [Online] on the menu bar,
and then select [Write to PLC...].

A window selected in the view selection area is displayed.

Ex. Project window [Parameter]

[PLC Parameter]
Select [Project] from the view selection
area to open the Project window.
In the Project window, expand [Parameter] and
select [PLC Parameter].

View selection area

12
 Pages describing buffer memory areas and functions are organized as shown below.
The following illustration is for explanation purpose only, and should not be referred to as an actual documentation.

These icons indicate modes

that can be used.

Icon Meaning
Common to all modes
This icon means that the buffer memory area or function can be used in both temperature control mode and
temperature input mode.
Common

Temperature control This icon means that the buffer memory area or function for temperature control can be used in the standard
mode control.
The buffer memory area and function can be used in the following control modes and channels:
• CH1 to CH4 in the standard control
Standard • CH3 and CH4 in the mix control (normal mode)
• CH3 and CH4 in the mix control (expanded mode)
This icon means that the buffer memory or function for temperature control can be used in the heating-cooling
control.
The buffer memory area and function can be used in the following control modes and channels:
• CH1 and CH2 in the heating-cooling control (normal mode)
Heating-cooling
• CH1 to CH4 in the heating-cooling control (expanded mode)
• CH1 in the mix control (normal mode)
• CH1 and CH2 in the mix control (expanded mode)
Temperature input mode

This icon means that the buffer memory area or function can be used in the temperature input mode.
Temperature
Input

13
 TERMS
Unless otherwise specified, this manual uses the following terms.

Term Description
L60TCTT4 The abbreviation for the L60TCTT4 temperature control module
The abbreviation for the L60TCTT4BW temperature control module with the
L60TCTT4BW
disconnection detection function
L60TCRT4 The abbreviation for the L60TCRT4 temperature control module
The abbreviation for the L60TCRT4BW temperature control module with the
L60TCRT4BW
disconnection detection function
A generic term for the L60TCTT4, L60TCTT4BW, L60TCRT4, and
L60TC4
L60TCRT4BW
A generic term for the proportional band (P), integral time (I), and derivative time
PID constants
(D)
Temperature sensor A generic term for thermocouples and platinum resistance thermometers
A generic term for two-position control, P control, PI control, PD control, and PID
Control method
control
Temperature input mode The mode to use the L60TC4 as a temperature input module
Temperature control mode The mode to use the L60TC4 as a temperature control module
A generic term for the standard control, heating-cooling control (normal mode),
heating-cooling control (expanded mode), mix control (normal mode), and mix
Control mode
control (expanded mode) when the L60TC4 is used in the temperature control
mode
Fixed value action The operating status of when the set value (SV) is fixed
A full input range. For example, when the selected input range is
Full scale
-200.0°C to 400.0°C, the full scale is 600.0.
Ramp action The operating status of when the set value (SV) is constantly changed
The number of feedback control systems (closed-loop control systems) that can
be configured using one module. Under the standard control, one loop consists
Number of loops
of one input and one output. Under the heating-cooling control, one loop
consists of one input and two outputs.
CPU module Another term for the MELSEC-L series CPU module
Head module The abbreviation for the LJ72GF15-T2 CC-Link IE Field Network head module
Display unit A liquid crystal display to be attached to the CPU module
External input The abbreviation for input from connectors for external devices
External output The abbreviation for output to connectors for external devices
Programming tool A generic term for GX Works2 and GX Developer
GX Works2 The product name of the software package for the MELSEC programmable
GX Developer controllers
The memory of an intelligent function module used to store data (such as setting
Buffer memory
values and monitored values) for communication with a CPU module

14
 PACKING LIST
The following items are included in the package of this product. Before use, check that all the items are included.

L60TCTT4, L60TCRT4

L60TCTT4, L60TCRT4 Before Using the Product

L60TCTT4BW, L60TCRT4BW

L60TCTT4BW, L60TCRT4BW Before Using the Product

15
CHAPTER 1 WHAT CAN BE DONE WITH A
TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE

1.1 Use

The L60TC4 performs PID operation to reach the target temperature based on input from an external temperature
sensor. The module controls temperature by outputting the operation result to a heater or others in transistor output.

The L60TCTT4BW and L60TCRT4BW are L60TCTT4 and L60TCRT4-based modules which possess an additional
function to detect heater disconnection using input from external current sensors.

Ex. Standard control (heating)

The input from a temperature sensor is processed with PID operation, and the heater temperature is
controlled.

Input from temperature sensor

L60TC4

Control output (heating)

Heater

16
 CHAPTER 1 WHAT CAN BE DONE WITH A TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE

Ex. Heating-cooling control (heating and cooling) 1

Heating and cooling are processed when the target temperature is lower than the ambient temperature or
when the temperature of the target subject is easy to change.

Input from temperature sensor

L60TC4

Cooling
equipment

Control output (cooling)

Control output (heating)

Heater

Ex. Temperature input (temperature input only)

The L60TC4 can be used as a temperature input module also.

Input from temperature sensor

L60TC4

1.1 Use

17
1.2 Features

This section describes the L60TC4 features. For functions not described here, refer to the list of functions. ( Page
39, Section 3.3)

(1) Optimum temperature adjustment control (PID control)

• The L60TC4 performs temperature adjustment control automatically when the user simply sets PID
constants necessary for PID operation: proportional band (P), integral time (I), derivative time (D), and
temperature set value (SV). No special instruction is necessary to perform PID control.
• Using the auto tuning function or self-tuning function enables the PID constants to be set automatically by
the L60TC4 . Complicated PID operational expressions to determine PID constants are not necessary.

(2) Combination of control mode

A control mode can be selected from the standard control (heating or cooling), heating-cooling control (heating
and cooling), or mix control (combination of the standard control and heating-cooling control).

Standard control

Heating-cooling control

Standard control Heating-cooling control

(3) Four loops on one module

The maximum of four loops of temperature adjustment control can be performed simultaneously.
In addition, loop control can be performed using analog modules in the system; input from an A/D converter
module or output to a D/A converter module can be processed.

One module controls up to four loops at the same time.

L60TC4

18
 CHAPTER 1 WHAT CAN BE DONE WITH A TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE

(4) Simultaneous temperature rise of multiple loops 1

Temperatures of multiple loops can be adjusted to simultaneously reach the set value of each; temperatures are
controlled evenly without any partial heat exaggeration.

Temperature
process value (PV) Matches temperature rise
completion time
CH1 Set value (SV)

CH2 Set value (SV)

CH3 Set value (SV)

CH4 Set value (SV)

Arrival point
Time

This function saves energy and cost.

Ex. Comparison of temperature rises on CH1 when using and not using the simultaneous temperature rise
function

Temperature
process value (PV) Useless energy

1.2 Features
CH1 Set value (SV)

CH2 Set value (SV)

CH3 Set value (SV)

CH4 Set value (SV)

Arrival point Arrival point

Time
(No simultaneous (Simultaneous
temperature rise) temperature rise)

No simultaneous temperature rise

Simultaneous temperature rise

(5) Suppression of peak current

Current flows into a heater can be suppressed by controlling output so that each channel's output does not turn
on at the same time as other channels.
This function saves energy and cost.

19
 (6) RFB limiter function
The RFB (Reset feed back) limiter suppresses overshoot which is liable to occur at a startup or when a
temperature process value (PV) is increased.

(7) Correction of temperature process value (PV)

The difference between the temperature process value (PV) and actual temperature can be corrected easily
using the following functions.
• 1-point sensor compensation (standard) function: Corrects the difference by setting the rate of correction
value to the full scale of the input range.
• 2-point sensor compensation function: Corrects the difference based on the inclination of the line on the two
points set in advance.
• Primary delay digital filter setting: Smoothens extreme noise, and absorbs drastic change.

(8) Non-volatile memory for backing up set values

The set values in the buffer memory, such as the setting related to PID control, can be stored into a non-volatile
memory for data backup. The values do not need to be reset after turning the power on from off or releasing the
CPU module from its reset status.
Using the test function of the programming tool to write data directly to the buffer memory, the minimum sequence
program required is "LD**" + "OUT Yn1".

(9) Detection of disconnection

Heater disconnection can be detected easily by the loop disconnection detection function.
The L60TCTT4BW and L60TCRT4BW can detect the disconnection of a heater accurately.

(10)Selectable sampling cycle

The module can be applied to wide range of systems since the sampling cycle can be selected from 250ms/4
channels or 500ms/4 channels.

(11)Use as a temperature input module

The L60TC4 can be used not only as a temperature control module, but also as a temperature input module. The
mode can be switched easily by a setting.
In addition, The temperature input can be processed through the primary delay digital filter, or output as an alert.
( Page 116, Section 8.1)

(12)Easy setting by GX Works2

Sequence program can be reduced by configuring the default setting or auto refresh setting on the screen. Also,
the setting status or operating status of the module can be checked easily.

20
 CHAPTER 1 WHAT CAN BE DONE WITH A TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE

1.3 The PID Control System 1

This section explains the PID control of the L60TC4.

(1) PID control system

The following figure shows a system of when performing the PID control.

L60TC4

Set value
Set value data (SV)
storage area Manipulated
value (MV) Manipulated
Temperature Control
PID operation value data storage
process object
Temperature area
value (PV)
process value
data storage area

Temperature
sensor

(2) PID control procedure

The PID control is performed in the following procedure.

Read the temperature

Import a signal from the temperature sensor and write it to the temperature
process value (PV)
process value data storage area as a temperature process value (PV).

1.3 The PID Control System

Perform PID operation Perform PID operation using the Set value (SV)/temperature process
value (PV) values in the set value/temperature process value data
storage area.

Output the manipulated

Convert manipulated value (MV) obtained by the PID operation to
value (MV)
transistor-output on time and output it.

21
 (3) PID control (simple two-degree-of-freedom)
The L60TC4 operates in "simple two-degree-of-freedom". In this form of PID control, parameters are simplified
compared to the two-degree-of-freedom PID control.
In the simple two-degree-of-freedom, the module controls the target subject using not only PID constants but also
the control response parameter. The parameter can be set to "fast", "normal", or "slow". This setting enables the
form of "response to the change of the set value (SV)" to change maintaining "response to the disturbance" in a
good condition. ( Page 153, Section 8.2.8)

Fast
Normal
Set value Set value
(SV) (SV)
Slow
Response to the change Response to the disturbance
of the set value (SV)

The following explains the difference between the one-degree-of-freedom PID control, two-degree-of-freedom
PID control, and simple two-degree-of-freedom PID control.

(a) One-degree-of-freedom PID control and two-degree-of-freedom PID control

• General PID control is called one-degree-of freedom PID control. In the one-degree-of freedom PID
control, when PID constants to improve "response to the change of the set value (SV)" are set, "response
to the disturbance" degrades. Conversely, when PID constants to improve "response to the disturbance"
are set, "response to the change of the set value (SV)" degrades.
• In the two-degree-of-freedom PID control, a manipulated value (MV) is determined considering the set
value (SV) or variations. In this form of PID control, "response to the change of the set value (SV)" and
"response to the disturbance" can be compatible with each other.

(b) Two-degree-of-freedom PID control and simple two-degree-of-freedom PID control

The following figure is a block diagram of the two-degree-of-freedom PID control.

PID control Object to be

Added function for 2-degree-of-freedom
controlled

Disturbance D

Set value + + 1 +
(SV) KP (1 + ) G(s)
TI s Manipulated
+ - + value (MV)

-
1
+ 1+ TI s

+ KP TD s
1 + TD s
-

Temperature
process value (PV)

By setting α, β, and γ above properly, optimum control can be achieved.

Note that required parameter settings increase and PID constants can hardly be auto-set by the auto tuning
function for complete two-degree-of-freedom PID control. Therefore, the L60TC4 operates in the simple two-
degree-of-freedom PID control for which parameters are simplified.

22
 CHAPTER 1 WHAT CAN BE DONE WITH A TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE

1.4 About the PID Operation 1

The L60TC4 can perform PID control in process-value incomplete derivation.

1.4.1 Operation method and formula

The PID control in process-value incomplete derivation is an operation method which puts a primary delay filter on
input from a derivative action and eliminate high-frequency noise component in order to perform a PID operation on
the deviation (E).

(1) Algorithm of PID control in process-value incomplete derivation

The algorithm of PID control in process-value incomplete derivation is shown below.

Disturbance D
L60TC4

Control response Control object

parameters
1
Set value (SV) Slow KP (1 ) G(s)
TI s Manipulated
Normal value (MV)
Fast

KP TD s
1 TD s

1.4.1 Operation method and formula

1.4 About the PID Operation
Temperature
KP Proportional gain Derivative process value (PV)
TI Integral time s Laplace transform conversion
TD Derivative time

(2) Formula
The formula used for the L60TC4 is shown below.

TD
MVn MVn 1 (PVn 1 PVn) MVn 1
TD TD

Sampling period
MV Incomplete derivative output
PV Temperature process value (PV)
TD Derivative time
Derivative

Remark
The PID control in process-value derivation is an operation method which uses the process value (PV) for the derivation
section in order to perform a PID operation. Not using deviation for the derivation section, drastic output change due to a
derivative action is reduced when deviation varies along with the setting value change.

23
1.4.2 The L60TC4 actions

The L60TC4 performs PID operations in forward actions and reverse actions.

(1) Forward action

In a forward action, the manipulated value (MV) is increased when the temperature process value (PV) increases
from the set value (SV).
A forward action is used for cooling control.

Manipulated Manipulated
value value

Time Time

Temperature Temperature
Set
value

Set
value
Time Time

Set value < Starting temperature Set value > Starting temperature

(2) Reverse action

In a reverse action, the manipulated value is increased when the temperature process value (PV) decreases from
the set value (SV).
A reverse action is used for heating control.

Manipulated Manipulated
value value

Time Time

Temperature Temperature
Set
value

Set
value
Time Time
Set value > Starting temperature Set value < Starting temperature

24
 CHAPTER 1 WHAT CAN BE DONE WITH A TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE

1.4.3 Proportional action (P-action)

1
A proportional action is an action to obtain the manipulated value (MV) proportional to the deviation (difference
between the set value (SV) and the process value (PV)).

(1) Proportional gain

In a proportional action, the relationship between changes in the deviation (E) and the manipulated value can be
expressed in the following formula:
MV = KP•E
where Kp is a proportional constant and is called proportional gain. The manipulated value (MV) varies in the
range from -5.0% to 105.0%.
The following table describes the difference of actions depending on the value of Kp, proportional gain.

Condition Proportional action

Kp is a small value The control action slows down.
The control action speeds up, though the temperature process
Kp is a large value
value (PV) tends to fluctuate around the set value.

A proportional action is as shown below for step responses where the deviation (E) is a fixed value.

Deviation
(E) E
Time

1.4.3 Proportional action (P-action)

1.4 About the PID Operation
Manipulated
value (MV) KP E

Time

(2) Offset
The certain amount of difference generates between the temperature process value (PV) and the set value (SV)
is called an offset (remaining deviation).
In an proportional action, an offset (remaining deviation) generates.

Set value Offset Set value Offset

(SV) (SV)

Temperature process value (PV) Temperature process value (PV)

Time Time

25
1.4.4 Integral action (I-action)

An integral action is an action which continuously changes the manipulated value (MV) to eliminate the deviation (E)
when there is any.
The offset caused by a proportional action can be eliminated.

In an integral action, the time from a deviation occurrence until when the manipulated value (MV) of the integral action
becomes equals to that of the proportional action is called integral time, and is indicated as TI.
The following table describes the difference of actions depending on the value of TI, integral time.

Condition Integral action

The integral effect gets large, and time to eliminate the offset gets
short.
TI is a small value
Though, the temperature process value (PV) tends to fluctuate
around the set value.
The integral effect gets small, and time to eliminate the offset gets
TI is a large value
long.

The following figure shows an integral action of step responses where the deviation (E) is a fixed value.

Deviation
(E) E
Time

Manipulated value of the Proportional action + Integral action

Manipulated value of the Integral action

Manipulated KP E Manipulated value of the Proportional action

value (MV)
TI

Time

An integral action is used as a PI action in combination with a proportional action, or PID action in combination with a
proportional and derivative actions.
An integral action cannot be used by itself.

26
 CHAPTER 1 WHAT CAN BE DONE WITH A TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE

1.4.5 Derivative action (D-action)

1
A derivative action adds the manipulated value (MV) proportional to the rate of change to eliminate the deviation (E)
when it occurs.
A derivative action can prevent the control target from changing significantly due to disturbance.

In an integral action, the time from a deviation occurrence until when the manipulated value (MV) of the derivative
action becomes equals to that of the proportional action is called derivative time, and is indicated as TD.
The following table describes the difference of actions depending on the value of TD, derivative time.

Condition Derivative action

TD is a small value The derivative effect gets small.
The derivative effect gets large.
TD is a large value Though, the temperature process value (PV) tends to fluctuate
around the set value in short cycles.

The following figure shows a derivative action of step responses where the deviation (E) is a fixed value.

Deviation E
(E)
Time

1.4.5 Derivative action (D-action)

1.4 About the PID Operation
Manipulated
value (MV) KP E Manipulated value of the Proportional action

TD

Time

A derivative action is used as a PD action in combination with a proportional action, or PID action in combination with
a proportional and integral actions.
A derivative action cannot be used by itself.

27
1.4.6 PID action

A PID action performs control using the manipulated value (MV) calculated by merging the proportional action, integral
action, and derivative action.
The following figure shows a PID action of step responses where the deviation (E) is a fixed value.

Deviation
(E)
Time

PID action

PI action I action
P action
Manipulated
value (MV)
D action
Time

28
 CHAPTER 2 PART NAMES

CHAPTER 2 PART NAMES

The following table shows part names of the L60TC4.

2
L60TCTT4, L60TCRT4 L60TCTT4BW, L60TCRT4BW
1)
1) 1)
2)
2)

3) 4) 3)

6)
5) 5)

1) 7) 1) 7) 1)

Number Name Description

1) Module joint levers Levers for connecting modules
RUN LED Indicates the operating status of the L60TC4.
ON Operating normally
• The power is not supplied.
• The watchdog timer error has occurred.
OFF
• CPU stop error has occurred when all channels are set to "CLEAR" on Switch Setting.
• A value out of the setting range was set on Switch Setting 2 to 5.
ERR. LED Indicates the error status of the L60TC4.
ON Hardware fault (Including no connection of a cold junction temperature compensation resistor)
Flicker Error occurring ( Page 334, Appendix 2 (1))
OFF Operating normally
2) ALM LED Indicates the alert status of the L60TC4.
ON Alert is occurring.
• Temperature process value (PV) came out of temperature measurement range.
Flicker • Loop disconnection was detected.
• Temperature sensor is not connected.
OFF Alert is not occurring.
HBA LED
(the L60TCTT4BW and Indicates the heater disconnection detection status of the L60TCTT4BW and L60TCRT4BW.
L60TCRT4BW only)
ON Heater disconnection was detected.
OFF Heater disconnection is not detected.

29
Number Name Description
Used for temperature sensor input and transistor output.
3) Terminal block for I/O
( Page 85, Section 6.2)
4) Terminal block for CT Used for current sensor (CT) input.
Cold junction
temperature
Used when cold junction temperature compensation is executed for the L60TCTT4 and
5) compensation resistor
L60TCTT4BW.
(the L60TCTT4 and
L60TCTT4BW only)
6) DIN rail hook A hook used to mount the module to a DIN rail.
Displays the serial number printed on the rating plate.
7) Serial number plate
For the L60TCTT4BW, L60TCRT4BW, the serial number is displayed on the terminal block for CT.

30
 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS

CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS

This chapter describes general specifications, performance specifications, the function list, the I/O signal list, and the
buffer memory list.

3.1 General Specifications 3

For the general specifications of the L60TC4, refer to the following manual.
"Safety Guidelines", the manual supplied with a CPU module or head module

3.1 General Specifications

31
3.2 Performance Specifications

The following table lists the performance specifications of the L60TC4.

Specifications
Item
L60TCTT4 L60TCRT4 L60TCTT4BW L60TCRT4BW
Control output Transistor output
Number of temperature input points 4 channels/module
Type of usable temperature sensors, the temperature
measurement range, the resolution, and the effect from Page 36, Section 3.2.2
wiring resistance of 1Ω
Ambient temperature:
Full scale × (±0.3%)
Indication 25±5°C
accuracy Ambient temperature: 0 to
Full scale × (±0.7%)
55°C

Cold junction Temperature process

Accuracy*1 temperature value (PV): -100°C or Within ±1.0°C Within ±1.0°C
compensation more
accuracy: Temperature process ⎯ ⎯
Within ±2.0°C Within ±2.0°C
(ambient value (PV): -150 to -100°C
temperature: Temperature process
0 to 55°C) Within ±3.0°C Within ±3.0°C
value (PV): -200 to -150°C
250ms/4 channels
Sampling cycle
500ms/4 channels
Control output cycle 0.5 to 100.0s
Input impedance 1MΩ
Input filter 0 to 100s (0: Input filter OFF)
Sensor correction value setting -50.00 to 50.00%
Operation at sensor input disconnection Upscale processing
Temperature control method PID ON/OFF pulse or two-position control
PID constants setting Can be set by auto tuning.
Proportional band (P) 0.0 to 1000.0% (0: Two-position control)
PID constants range
Integral time (I) 0 to 3600s (set 0 for P control and PD control.)
Derivative time (D) 0 to 3600s (set 0 for P control and PI control.)
Within the temperature range set in the thermocouple/platinum resistance
Set value (SV) setting range
thermometer to be used
Dead band setting range 0.1 to 10.0%
Output signal ON/OFF pulse
Rated load voltage 10 to 30VDC
Max. load current 0.1A/point, 0.4A/common
Transistor output Max. inrush current 0.4A 10ms
Leakage current at OFF 0.1mA or less
Max. voltage drop at ON 1.0VDC (TYP) at 0.1A 2.5VDC (MAX) at 0.1A
Response time OFF→ON: 2ms or less, ON→OFF: 2ms or less
Number of accesses to non-volatile memory Max. 1012 times
Between input terminal and programmable controller power supply: Transformer
Insulation method insulation
Between input channels: Transformer insulation

32
 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS

Specifications
Item
L60TCTT4 L60TCRT4 L60TCTT4BW L60TCRT4BW
Between input terminal and programmable controller power supply: 500VAC for
Dielectric withstand voltage 1 minute
Between input channels: 500VAC for 1 minute
Between input terminal and programmable controller power supply: 500VDC
Insulation resistance 20MΩ or more
Between input channels: 500VDC 20MΩ or more
Current sensor Page 82, Section 5.2 (4)
3
Heater disconnection
Input accuracy ⎯ Full scale × (±1.0%)
detection specifications
Number of alert delay 3 to 255
Number of occupied I/O points 16 points (I/O assignment: 16 intelligent points)
Number of occupied module 1 2
Connected terminal 18-point terminal block Two 18-point terminal blocks
Applicable wire size 0.3mm2 to 0.75mm2
Applicable solderless terminal R1.25-3 (Solderless terminal with sleeve is unavailable.)
Internal current consumption 0.30A 0.31A 0.33A 0.35A
Weight 0.18kg 0.33kg
Outline dimensions 28.5(W)mm × 90(H)mm × 117(D)mm 57.0(W)mm × 90(H)mm × 117(D)mm
*1 Calculate the accuracy in the following method (only when it is not affected by noise).
Accuracy (°C) = full scale × indication accuracy + cold junction temperature compensation accuracy

Ex. Accuracy at the input range of 38 (-200.0 to 400.0°C), the operating ambient temperature of 35°C, and the
temperature process value (PV) of 300°C

(Full scale) × (indication accuracy) + cold junction temperature compensation accuracy

= (400.0°C - (-200.0°C)) × (±0.007) + (±1.0°C)
= ± 5.2°C

3.2 Performance Specifications

For the noise immunity, dielectric withstand voltage, insulation resistance and others of the programmable controller
system which uses the L60TC4, refer to the following manual.
MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)
MELSEC-L CC-Link IE Field Network Head Module User's Manual

33
3.2.1 Number of parameters to be set

The total number of the parameters of the initial setting and of the auto refresh setting of the L60TC4 must be within
the number of parameters which can be set in the CPU module including the number of other intelligent function
module parameters.
For the maximum number of parameters which can be set in a CPU module (maximum number of set parameter), refer
to the following manual.
MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)
MELSEC-L CC-Link IE Field Network Head Module User's Manual

(1) Number of parameters of the L60TC4

The following table lists the number of parameters that can be set for one L60TC4.

Target module Initial setting Auto refresh setting

L60TCTT4
103 (Max.)
L60TCRT4
43
L60TCTT4BW
115 (Max.)
L60TCRT4BW

(2) Checking method

The current number and maximum number of the parameters set in the intelligent function module can be
checked by the following operation.

Project window [Intelligent Function Module] Right-click

[Intelligent Function Module Parameter List...]

1) 2) 3) 4)

No. Description
1) Total number of the parameters of the initial setting that is checked on the window
2) Maximum number of parameters of the initial setting

34
 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS

No. Description
3) Total number of the parameters of the auto refresh setting that is checked on the window
4) Maximum number of parameters of the auto refresh setting

3.2.1 Number of parameters to be set

3.2 Performance Specifications

35
3.2.2 Type of usable temperature sensors, temperature measurement
range, resolution, and effect from wiring resistance of 1 ohm

This section describes the types of temperature sensors that can be used with the L60TC4, the temperature
measurement range, the resolution, and the effect from wiring resistance of 1Ω.
Set the used temperature sensor in the following buffer memory area.
• CH† Input range (Un\G32, Un\G64, Un\G96, Un\G128) ( Page 345, Appendix 2 (12))

(1) L60TCTT4, L60TCTT4BW

The following table lists the types of thermocouples that can be used with the L60TCTT4 and L60TCTT4BW, the
temperature measurement range, the resolution, and the effect from wiring resistance of 1Ω.

°C
Thermocouple Temperature Effect from wiring Temperature Effect from wiring
type measurement Resolution resistance of 1Ω measurement Resolution resistance of 1Ω
range (°C/Ω)*1 range ( /Ω)*1
R 0 to 1700 1 0.030 0 to 3000 1 0.054
0 to 500
0 to 1000
0 to 800 1 1
0 to 2400
0 to 1300
-200.0 to 1300.0
K 0.005 0.008
-200.0 to 400.0
0.0 to 400.0 0.1 0.0 to 1000.0 0.1
0.0 to 500.0
0.0 to 800.0
0 to 500 0 to 1000
0 to 800 1 0 to 1600 1
0 to 1200 0 to 2100
J -200.0 to 1000.0 0.003 0.006
0.0 to 400.0
0.1 0.0 to 1000.0 0.1
0.0 to 500.0
0.0 to 800.0
-200 to 400
-200 to 200 0 to 700
1 1
0 to 200 -300 to 400
T 0.004 0.008
0 to 400
-200.0 to 400.0
0.1 0.0 to 700.0 0.1
0.0 to 400.0
S 0 to 1700 1 0.030 0 to 3000 1 0.054
B *2 1 0.038 *2 1 0.068
0 to 1800 0 to 3000
0 to 400
1 0 to 1800 1 0.005
0 to 1000
E 0.003
-200.0 to 1000.0
0.1 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
0.0 to 700.0
0 to 1300 1 0 to 2300 1 0.011
N 0.006
0.0 to 1000.0 0.1 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
0 to 400 0 to 700
1 1 0.009
U -200 to 200 0.004 -300 to 400
0.0 to 600.0 0.1 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

36
 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS

°C
Thermocouple Temperature Effect from wiring Temperature Effect from wiring
type measurement Resolution resistance of 1Ω measurement Resolution resistance of 1Ω
range (°C/Ω)*1 range ( /Ω)*1
0 to 400 0 to 800
1 1 0.006
0 to 900 0 to 1600
L 0.003
0.0 to 400.0
0.1 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
0.0 to 900.0 3
PLII 0 to 1200 1 0.005 0 to 2300 1 0.010
W5Re/W26Re 0 to 2300 1 0.017 0 to 3000 1 0.021
*1 Means temperature error per Ω of wiring resistance of the thermocouple. The temperature error can be corrected by the
sensor compensation function. ( Page 223, Section 8.3.2)
*2 While temperature can be measured within less than 400°C/800 , the accuracy cannot be guaranteed.

(2) L60TCRT4, L60TCRT4BW

The following table lists the types of platinum resistance thermometer that can be used with the L60TCRT4 and
L60TCRT4BW and temperature measurement range.

°C
Platinum resistance
Temperature Temperature
thermometer type Resolution Resolution
measurement range measurement range
-200.0 to 850.0 -300 to 1100 1
Pt100 -200.0 to 600.0 0.1
-300.0 to 300.0 0.1
-200.0 to 200.0
-200.0 to 640.0 -300 to 900 1
JPt100 -200.0 to 500.0 0.1
-300.0 to 300.0 0.1
-200.0 to 200.0

3.2.2 Type of usable temperature sensors, temperature measurement range, resolution, and effect
3.2 Performance Specifications
from wiring resistance of 1 ohm

37
3.2.3 Sampling cycle and control output cycle

This section describes the sampling cycle and control output cycle of the L60TC4.

(1) Sampling cycle

The L60TC4 performs PID operations in the order of CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4, CH1, CH2 .....
The time from when PID operation is started on the current channel (CHn) until PID operation is restarted on the
current channel (CHn) is called a sampling cycle. Select 250ms or 500ms as a sampling cycle. ( Page 108,
Section 7.2 (1))
The number of used channels and the settings of unused channels do not affect the sampling cycle.

CH1 PID CH2 PID CH3 PID CH4 PID CH1 PID CH2 PID
operation operation operation operation operation operation

Sampling cycle

Sampling cycle

(2) Control output cycle

The control output cycle is the ON/OFF cycle of transistor output.

ON ON

OFF OFF
Transistor output
Control output cycle Control output cycle

The manipulated value (MV) represents the ON time of the control output cycle in percentage. ( Page 339,
Appendix 2 (5))
Set the control output cycle in the following buffer memory area in the range of 1 to 100s.
• CH† Control output cycle setting (Un\G47, Un\G79, Un\G111, Un\G143) ( Page 364, Appendix 2 (23))
In the heating-cooling control, the following buffer memory areas are used for the manipulated value (MV) and
control output cycle.

Buffer memory area Buffer memory address

Data type Reference
name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
Manipulated value for
Un\G13 Un\G14 Un\G15 Un\G16
Manipulated heating (MVh)
Page 339, Appendix 2 (5)
value (MV) Manipulated value for
Un\G704 Un\G705 Un\G706 Un\G707
cooling (MVc)
Heating control output
Un\G47 Un\G79 Un\G111 Un\G143
Control output cycle setting
Page 364, Appendix 2 (23)
cycle Cooling control output
Un\G722 Un\G738 Un\G754 Un\G770
cycle setting

38
 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS

3.3 Function List

This section lists the L60TC4 functions.

(1) When the L60TC4 is used as a temperature input module

3
Item Description Reference

Conversion enable/disable Whether to enable or disable the temperature conversion can be set for each
Page 117, Section 8.1.1
function channel.
The measured temperature by each sampling cycle is stored in the buffer
Temperature conversion memory.
Page 117, Section 8.1.2
method The temperature process values (PV) can be smoothed and sudden changes
can be controlled by using the primary delay filter.
An alert is output if the temperature process value (PV) meets the condition set
Alert output function Page 120, Section 8.1.3
in advance. The alert has process alarm and rate alarm.

(2) When the L60TC4 is used as a temperature control module

: Enable, ×: Disable

Enable or disable
Heating-
Item Description Standard Reference
cooling
control
control
The control mode can be selected from the following modes.
• Standard control

3.3 Function List

Control mode selection • Heating-cooling control (normal mode) Page 126,
function • Heating-cooling control (expanded mode) Section 8.2.1
• Mix control (normal mode)
• Mix control (expanded mode)
Whether to clear or hold the transistor output status when a CPU
Output setting at CPU Page 128,
stop error occurs or when a CPU module is turned from RUN to
stop error function Section 8.2.2
STOP can be selected.
The following control methods can be used with the settings of
proportional band (P), integral time (I), and derivative time (D).
• Two-position control
Page 129,
Control method • P control
Section 8.2.3
• PI control
• PD control
• PID control
The stable status position in the P control or PD control can be Page 137,
Manual reset function
moved manually. Section 8.2.4
The manipulated value (MV) can be set manually by users without Page 139,
Manual control
automatic calculation by the PID control. Section 8.2.5
The unit for control output cycle can be selected from 1s or 0.1s
Control output cycle unit Page 140,
and switched between them. Setting the control output cycle to
selection function Section 8.2.6
0.1s allows a more detailed control to be performed.
Page 141,
Auto tuning function The L60TC4 sets the optimal PID constants automatically.
Section 8.2.7
In addition to the PID control, the response speed can be selected
Simple two-degree-of- Page 153,
from three levels. The simple two-degree-of-freedom PID control
freedom Section 8.2.8
can be realized.

39
 Enable or disable
Heating-
Item Description Standard Reference
cooling
control
control
Derivative action Dynamic performance can be improved by selecting the suitable Page 154,
selection function derivative action for the fixed value action and the ramp action. Section 8.2.9
Change rate setting of the set value (SV) per set time unit when
Setting change rate Page 155,
this value is changed. The batch setting or individual setting can be
limiter setting function Section 8.2.10
selected for the temperature rise and drop.
The modules goes to the alert status when the temperature
Page 157,
Alert function process value (PV) or deviation (E) meets the condition set in
Section 8.2.11
advance.
When the deviation (E) continues for a long time, the PID operation
result (manipulated value (MV)) by the integral action can be Page 171,
RFB limiter function
prevented from exceeding the effective range of the manipulated Section 8.2.12
value (MV).
Input/output (with another Data can be input and output using another analog module (A/D Page 172,
analog module) function conversion module or D/A converter module) on the system. Section 8.2.13
Setting with considering delay time (response/scan time delay) of Page 174,
ON delay output function
actual transistor output is possible. Section 8.2.14
The L60TC4 monitors the control status constantly. If the control
system oscillates due to a status soon after the control starts, a Page 175,
Self-tuning function ×
change of the set value (SV), and property fluctuation of a Section 8.2.15
controlled object, PID constants are changed automatically.
Changing automatically the upper limit output limiter value of each
Peak current suppression Page 185,
channel and dividing the timing of transistor output can suppress ×
function Section 8.2.16
the peak current.
Simultaneous This function allows several loops to reach the set value (SV) at the Page 190,
×
temperature rise function same time. Section 8.2.17
Forward action/reverse Whether to perform PID operations in the forward action or reverse Page 203,
×
action selection function action can be selected. Section 8.2.18
Loop disconnection Page 204,
Errors in the control system (control loop) can be detected. ×
detection function Section 8.2.19
Proportional band setting The proportional band (P) can be individually set for heating or Page 206,
×
function cooling. Section 8.2.20
When the auto tuning is executed, an auto tuning formula is
Cooling method setting Page 207,
automatically selected according to the selected cooling method ×
function Section 8.2.21
and the operation starts.
By changing the temperature where the cooling transistor output is
Overlap/dead band Page 209,
started, whether control stability is prioritized or energy saving is ×
function Section 8.2.22
prioritized can be selected.
Temperature conversion In heating-cooling control (normal mode) and mix control (normal
Page 212,
function (using unused mode), only temperature measurement is allowed by using unused ×
Section 8.2.23
channels) temperature input terminals.
Heater disconnection The current which flows in the heater main circuit can be measured Page 215,
detection function and disconnections can be detected. Section 8.2.24
Output off-time current Page 220,
An error of when the transistor output is off can be detected.
error detection function Section 8.2.25

40
 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS

(3) Common functions

Item Description Reference

Temperature process value The temperature process value (PV) can be converted to the set width and this
Page 221, Section 8.3.1
(PV) scaling function value can be imported into the buffer memory.
If a difference between a temperature process value (PV) and an actual 3
temperature occurs due to the measurement status, the error can be corrected.
Select a correction method from the following two types.
Sensor compensation
• 1-point sensor compensation (standard) function: The percentage of the full Page 223, Section 8.3.2
function
scale of the set input range can be corrected as an error corrected value.
• 2-point sensor compensation function: An error is corrected by setting any
two points (corrected offset value and corrected gain value).
Auto-setting at the input range When the input range is changed, the related buffer memory data is changed
Page 234, Section 8.3.3
change automatically so that errors outside the setting range does not occur.
Buffer memory data backup The buffer memory data can be stored and backed up in the non-volatile
Page 235, Section 8.3.4
function memory.
Up to 16 errors and alarms that occur on the L60TC4 are stored in the buffer
Error history function Page 237, Section 8.3.5
memory as history.
Error contents can be notified to the CPU module when errors and alarms
Module error history collection
occur on the L60TC4. Error information is held in the memory inside of the Page 239, Section 8.3.6
function
CPU module as module error history.
Error clear function When an error occurs, the error can be cleared on the system monitor. Page 240, Section 8.3.7

3.3 Function List

41
3.4 I/O Signal List

This section describes the assignment and applications of the L60TC4 input signals.

(1) Input signal list

Input signal (signal direction: CPU module ← L60TC4)

Device Temperature input
Standard control Heating-cooling control Mix control
No. mode
Xn0 Module READY flag Module READY flag Module READY flag Module READY flag
Setting/operation mode Setting/operation mode Setting/operation mode Setting/operation mode
Xn1
status status status status
Xn2 Error occurrence flag Error occurrence flag Error occurrence flag Error occurrence flag
Xn3 Hardware error flag Hardware error flag Hardware error flag Hardware error flag
Xn4 N/A CH1 Auto tuning status CH1 Auto tuning status CH1 Auto tuning status
Xn5 N/A CH2 Auto tuning status CH2 Auto tuning status CH2 Auto tuning status*2
Xn6 N/A CH3 Auto tuning status CH3 Auto tuning status*1 CH3 Auto tuning status

Xn7 N/A CH4 Auto tuning status CH4 Auto tuning status*1 CH4 Auto tuning status
Back-up of the set value Back-up of the set value Back-up of the set value Back-up of the set value
Xn8
completion flag completion flag completion flag completion flag
Default value write Default value write Default value write Default value write
Xn9
completion flag completion flag completion flag completion flag
Back-up of the set value fail Back-up of the set value fail Back-up of the set value fail Back-up of the set value fail
XnA
flag flag flag flag
Setting change completion Setting change completion Setting change completion Setting change completion
XnB
flag flag flag flag
XnC CH1 Alert occurrence flag CH1 Alert occurrence flag CH1 Alert occurrence flag CH1 Alert occurrence flag
XnD CH2 Alert occurrence flag CH2 Alert occurrence flag CH2 Alert occurrence flag CH2 Alert occurrence flag
XnE CH3 Alert occurrence flag CH3 Alert occurrence flag CH3 Alert occurrence flag CH3 Alert occurrence flag
XnF CH4 Alert occurrence flag CH4 Alert occurrence flag CH4 Alert occurrence flag CH4 Alert occurrence flag

*1 Available only under the heating-cooling control (expanded mode). For details on the expanded mode, refer to
Page 127, Section 8.2.1 (3).
*2 Available only under the mix control (expanded mode). For details on the expanded mode, refer to Page 127,
Section 8.2.1 (3).

42
 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS

(2) Output signal list

Output signal (signal direction: CPU module → L60TC4)

Device Temperature input
Standard control Heating-cooling control Mix control
No. mode
Yn0 N/A N/A N/A N/A
Setting/operation mode Setting/operation mode Setting/operation mode Setting/operation mode 3
Yn1
status instruction instruction instruction
Yn2 Error reset instruction Error reset instruction Error reset instruction Error reset instruction
Yn3 N/A N/A N/A N/A
Yn4 N/A CH1 Auto tuning instruction CH1 Auto tuning instruction CH1 Auto tuning instruction
Yn5 N/A CH2 Auto tuning instruction CH2 Auto tuning instruction CH2 Auto tuning instruction*2
Yn6 N/A CH3 Auto tuning instruction CH3 Auto tuning instruction*1 CH3 Auto tuning instruction

Yn7 N/A CH4 Auto tuning instruction CH4 Auto tuning instruction*1 CH4 Auto tuning instruction
Yn8 Set value backup instruction Set value backup instruction Set value backup instruction Set value backup instruction
Default setting registration Default setting registration Default setting registration Default setting registration
Yn9
instruction instruction instruction instruction
YnA N/A N/A N/A N/A
YnB Setting change instruction Setting change instruction Setting change instruction Setting change instruction
CH1 PID control forced stop CH1 PID control forced stop CH1 PID control forced stop
YnC N/A
instruction instruction instruction
CH2 PID control forced stop CH2 PID control forced stop CH2 PID control forced stop
YnD N/A
instruction instruction instruction*2
CH3 PID control forced stop CH3 PID control forced stop CH3 PID control forced stop
YnE N/A
instruction instruction*1 instruction

3.4 I/O Signal List

CH4 PID control forced stop CH4 PID control forced stop CH4 PID control forced stop
YnF N/A
instruction instruction*1 instruction

*1 Available only under the heating-cooling control (expanded mode). For details on the expanded mode, refer to
Page 127, Section 8.2.1 (3).
*2 Available only under the mix control (expanded mode). For details on the expanded mode, refer to Page 127,
Section 8.2.1 (3).

The functions of the L60TC4 cannot be guaranteed if any of the unavailable areas is turned on/off in a program.

43
3.5 Buffer Memory List

This section lists the L60TC4 buffer memory areas.

For details on the buffer memory, refer to Page 334, Appendix 2.

Do not write data in the system area or the write-protect area in a program in the buffer memory. Doing so may cause
malfunction.

(1) Buffer memory address by mode

This section describes the buffer memory assignments by mode.
For details on the modes, refer to Page 116, Section 8.1, Page 126, Section 8.2.1.

Depending on the control mode, some channels cannot be used for control under the temperature control
mode.
The channels which cannot be used for control are the following.
• For heating-cooling control (normal mode): CH3, CH4
• For mix control (normal mode): CH2
The channels which cannot be used for control can be used only for temperature input. For details, refer to
Page 212, Section 8.2.23.

44
 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS

(a) In the temperature input mode

: Enable, ×: Disable
Address Setting contents Non-volatile
Target Default Read/Write Automatic
(decimal memory write Reference
channel Temperature input mode value*1 *2 setting*3
(hexadecimal)) availability*4
Page 334, Appendix 2
0(0H) All CHs Error code 0 R × ×
(1)
1(1H) CH1 Decimal point position
3
2(2H) 0(TT)
CH2 Decimal point position Page 334, Appendix 2
1(RT) R × ×
3(3H) CH3 Decimal point position *5
(2)

4(4H) CH4 Decimal point position

5(5H) CH1 Alert definition

6(6H) CH2 Alert definition Page 336, Appendix 2

0 R × ×
7(7H) CH3 Alert definition (3)

8(8H) CH4 Alert definition

Temperature process value

9(9H) CH1
(PV)
Temperature process value
10(AH) CH2
(PV) Page 338, Appendix 2
0 R × ×
Temperature process value (4)
11(BH) CH3
(PV)
Temperature process value
12(CH) CH4
(PV)
13(DH)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
28(1CH)

Cold junction temperature Page 342, Appendix 2

3.5 Buffer Memory List

29(1DH) All CHs 0 R × ×
process value*6 (9)

30(1EH) All CHs System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

31(1FH) All CHs System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

2(TT)
Page 345, Appendix 2
32(20H) CH1 Input range*7 7(RT) R/W ×
*5
(12)

33(21H)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
44(2CH)

Page 363, Appendix 2

45(2DH) CH1 Sensor correction value setting 0 R/W ×
(21)
46(2EH) ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

47(2FH) ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

Primary delay digital filter Page 365, Appendix 2

48(30H) CH1 0 R/W ×
setting (24)
49(31H)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
63(3FH)

2(TT)
Page 345, Appendix 2
64(40H) CH2 Input range*7 7(RT) R/W ×
*5
(12)

65(41H)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
76(4CH)

45
 Address Setting contents Non-volatile
Target Default Read/Write Automatic
(decimal memory write Reference
channel Temperature input mode value*1 *2 setting*3 *4
(hexadecimal)) availability
Page 363, Appendix 2
77(4DH) CH2 Sensor correction value setting 0 R/W ×
(21)
78(4EH) CH2 System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

79(4FH) CH2 System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

Primary delay digital filter Page 365, Appendix 2

80(50H) CH2 0 R/W ×
setting (24)
81(51H)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
95(5FH)

2(TT)
Page 345, Appendix 2
96(60H) CH3 Input range*7 7(RT) R/W ×
*5
(12)

97(61H)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
108(6CH)

Page 363, Appendix 2

109(6DH) CH3 Sensor correction value setting 0 R/W ×
(21)
110(6EH) CH3 System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

111(6FH) CH3 System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

Primary delay digital filter Page 365, Appendix 2

112(70H) CH3 0 R/W ×
setting (24)
113(71H)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
127(7FH)

2(TT)
Page 345, Appendix 2
128(80H) CH4 Input range*7 7(RT) R/W ×
*5
(12)

129(81H)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
140(8CH)

Page 363, Appendix 2

141(8DH) CH4 Sensor correction value setting 0 R/W ×
(21)
142(8EH) CH4 System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

143(8FH) CH4 System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

Primary delay digital filter Page 365, Appendix 2

144(90H) CH4 0 R/W ×
setting (24)
145(91H)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
181(B5H)

Cold junction temperature Page 384, Appendix 2

182(B6H) All 0 R/W ×
compensation selection*6 (49)

Page 385, Appendix 2

183(B7H) All Control switching monitor 0 R × ×
(50)
184(B8H)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
195(C3H)

Process alarm alert output Page 387, Appendix 2

196(C4H) CH1 1 R/W ×
enable/disable setting*7 (53)

46
 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS

Address Setting contents Non-volatile

Target Default Read/Write Automatic
(decimal memory write Reference
channel Temperature input mode value*1 *2 setting*3 *4
(hexadecimal)) availability
0(TT)
Process alarm lower lower
197(C5H) CH1 −2000(RT) R/W
limit value*7 *5

0(TT)
Process alarm lower upper
198(C6H) CH1 −2000(RT) R/W
limit value*7 *5

1300(TT)
Page 388, Appendix 2
(54)
3
Process alarm upper lower
199(C7H) CH1 6000(RT) R/W
limit value*7 *5

1300(TT)
Process alarm upper upper
200(C8H) CH1 6000(RT) R/W
limit value*7 *5

Rate alarm alert output Page 389, Appendix 2

201(C9H) CH1 1 R/W ×
enable/disable setting*7 (55)

Rate alarm alert detection Page 389, Appendix 2

202(CAH) CH1 1 R/W ×
cycle*7 (56)

203(CBH) CH1 Rate alarm upper limit value*7 0 R/W × Page 390, Appendix 2
204(CCH) (57)
CH1 Rate alarm lower limit value*7 0 R/W ×

205(CDH)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
211(D3H)

Process alarm alert output Page 387, Appendix 2

212(D4H) CH2 1 R/W ×
enable/disable setting*7 (53)

0(TT)
Process alarm lower lower
213(D5H) CH2 −2000(RT) R/W
limit value*7 *5

3.5 Buffer Memory List

0(TT)
Process alarm lower upper
214(D6H) CH2 −2000(RT) R/W
limit value*7 *5
Page 388, Appendix 2
1300(TT) (54)
Process alarm upper lower
215(D7H) CH2 6000(RT) R/W
limit value*7 *5

1300(TT)
Process alarm upper upper
216(D8H) CH2 6000(RT) R/W
limit value*7 *5

Rate alarm alert output Page 389, Appendix 2

217(D9H) CH2 1 R/W ×
enable/disable setting*7 (55)

Rate alarm alert detection Page 389, Appendix 2

218(DAH) CH2 1 R/W ×
cycle*7 (56)

219(DBH) CH2 Rate alarm upper limit value*7 0 R/W × Page 390, Appendix 2
220(DCH) CH2 *7 0 R/W × (57)
Rate alarm lower limit value
221(DDH)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
227(E3H)

Process alarm alert output Page 387, Appendix 2

228(E4H) CH3 1 R/W ×
enable/disable setting*7 (53)

47
 Address Setting contents Non-volatile
Target Default Read/Write Automatic
(decimal memory write Reference
channel Temperature input mode value*1 *2 setting*3 *4
(hexadecimal)) availability
0(TT)
Process alarm lower lower
229(E5H) CH3 −2000(RT) R/W
limit value*7 *5

0(TT)
Process alarm lower upper
230(E6H) CH3 −2000(RT) R/W
limit value*7 *5
Page 388, Appendix 2
1300(TT) (54)
Process alarm upper lower
231(E7H) CH3 6000(RT) R/W
limit value*7 *5

1300(TT)
Process alarm upper upper
232(E8H) CH3 6000(RT) R/W
limit value*7 *5

Rate alarm alert output Page 389, Appendix 2

233(E9H) CH3 1 R/W ×
enable/disable setting*7 (55)

Rate alarm alert detection Page 389, Appendix 2

234(EAH) CH3 1 R/W ×
cycle*7 (56)

235(EBH) CH3 Rate alarm upper limit value*7 0 R/W × Page 390, Appendix 2
236(ECH) (57)
CH3 Rate alarm lower limit value*7 0 R/W ×

237(EDH)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
243(F3H)

Process alarm alert output Page 387, Appendix 2

244(F4H) CH4 1 R/W ×
enable/disable setting*7 (53)

0(TT)
Process alarm lower lower
245(F5H) CH4 −2000(RT) R/W
limit value*7 *5

0(TT)
Process alarm lower upper
246(F6H) CH4 −2000(RT) R/W
limit value*7 *5
Page 388, Appendix 2
1300(TT) (54)
Process alarm upper lower
247(F7H) CH4 6000(RT) R/W
limit value*7 *5

1300(TT)
Process alarm upper upper
248(F8H) CH4 6000(RT) R/W
limit value*7 *5

Rate alarm alert output Page 389, Appendix 2

249(F9H) CH4 1 R/W ×
enable/disable setting*7 (55)

Rate alarm alert detection Page 389, Appendix 2

250(FAH) CH4 1 R/W ×
cycle*7 (56)

251(FBH) CH4 Rate alarm upper limit value*7 0 R/W × Page 390, Appendix 2
252(FCH) CH4 *7 0 R/W × (57)
Rate alarm lower limit value
253(FDH)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
543(21FH)

2-point sensor compensation

Page 394, Appendix 2
544(220H) CH1 offset value (measured 0 R/W
*7
(63)
value)
2-point sensor compensation
Page 394, Appendix 2
545(221H) CH1 offset value(compensation 0 R/W
(64)
value)*7
2-point sensor compensation Page 395, Appendix 2
546(222H) CH1 0 R/W
gain value (measured value)*7 (65)

48
 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS

Address Setting contents Non-volatile

Target Default Read/Write Automatic
(decimal memory write Reference
channel Temperature input mode value*1 *2 setting*3 *4
(hexadecimal)) availability
2-point sensor compensation
Page 395, Appendix 2
547(223H) CH1 gain value (compensation 0 R/W
(66)
value)*7
2-point sensor compensation Page 396, Appendix 2
548(224H) CH1 0 R/W × ×
offset latch request*7 (67)

549(225H) CH1
2-point sensor compensation
offset latch completion
0 R × ×
Page 396, Appendix 2
(68)
3
2-point sensor compensation Page 397, Appendix 2
550(226H) CH1 0 R/W × ×
gain latch request*7 (69)

2-point sensor compensation Page 397, Appendix 2

551(227H) CH1 0 R × ×
gain latch completion (70)
552(228H)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
575(23FH)

2-point sensor compensation Page 394, Appendix 2

576(240H) CH2 0 R/W
(measured value)*7 (63)

2-point sensor compensation

Page 394, Appendix 2
577(241H) CH2 offset value (compensation 0 R/W
(64)
value)*7
2-point sensor compensation Page 395, Appendix 2
578(242H) CH2 0 R/W
gain value (measured value)*7 (65)

2-point sensor compensation Page 395, Appendix 2

579(243H) CH2 0 R/W
(compensation value)*7 (66)

2-point sensor compensation Page 396, Appendix 2

580(244H) CH2 0 R/W × ×
offset latch request*7 (67)

2-point sensor compensation Page 396, Appendix 2

581(245H) CH2 0 R × ×
offset latch completion (68)

3.5 Buffer Memory List

2-point sensor compensation Page 397, Appendix 2
582(246H) CH2 0 R/W × ×
gain latch request*7 (69)

2-point sensor compensation Page 397, Appendix 2

583(247H) CH2 0 R × ×
gain latch completion (70)
584(248H)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
607(25FH)

2-point sensor compensation

Page 394, Appendix 2
608(260H) CH3 offset value (measured 0 R/W
*7
(63)
value)
2-point sensor compensation
Page 394, Appendix 2
609(261H) CH3 offset value (compensation 0 R/W
*7
(64)
value)
2-point sensor compensation Page 395, Appendix 2
610(262H) CH3 0 R/W
gain value (measured value)*7 (65)

2-point sensor compensation

Page 395, Appendix 2
611(263H) CH3 gain value (compensation 0 R/W
*7
(66)
value)
2-point sensor compensation Page 396, Appendix 2
612(264H) CH3 0 R/W × ×
offset latch request*7 (67)

2-point sensor compensation Page 396, Appendix 2

613(265H) CH3 0 R × ×
offset latch completion (68)
2-point sensor compensation Page 397, Appendix 2
614(266H) CH3 0 R/W × ×
gain latch request*7 (69)

2-point sensor compensation Page 397, Appendix 2

615(267H) CH3 0 R × ×
gain latch completion (70)

49
 Address Setting contents Non-volatile
Target Default Read/Write Automatic
(decimal memory write Reference
channel Temperature input mode value*1 *2 setting*3 *4
(hexadecimal)) availability
616(268H)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
639(27FH)

2-point sensor compensation

Page 394, Appendix 2
640(280H) CH4 offset value (measured 0 R/W
(63)
value)*7
2-point sensor compensation
Page 394, Appendix 2
641(281H) CH4 offset value (compensation 0 R/W
(64)
value)*7
2-point sensor compensation Page 395, Appendix 2
642(282H) CH4 0 R/W
gain value (measured value)*7 (65)

2-point sensor compensation

Page 395, Appendix 2
643(283H) CH4 gain value (compensation 0 R/W
(66)
value)*7
2-point sensor compensation Page 396, Appendix 2
644(284H) CH4 0 R/W × ×
offset latch request*7 (67)

2-point sensor compensation Page 396, Appendix 2

645(285H) CH4 0 R × ×
offset latch completion (68)
2-point sensor compensation Page 397, Appendix 2
646(286H) CH4 0 R/W × ×
gain latch request*7 (69)

2-point sensor compensation Page 397, Appendix 2

647(287H) CH4 0 R × ×
gain latch completion (70)
648(288H)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
692(2B4H)

Conversion enable/disable Page 402, Appendix 2

693(2B5H) All CHs 000FH R/W ×
setting*7 (75)

694(2B6H)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
724(2D4H)

Process value (PV) scaling

Page 405, Appendix 2
725(2D5H) CH1 function enable/disable 0 R/W ×
*7
(80)
setting
Process value (PV) scaling
726(2D6H) CH1 0 R/W ×
lower limit value*7 Page 406, Appendix 2
Process value (PV) scaling (81)
727(2D7H) CH1 0 R/W ×
upper limit value*7
Process value (PV) scaling Page 406, Appendix 2
728(2D8H) CH1 0 R × ×
value (82)
729(2D9H)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
740(2E4H)

Process value (PV) scaling

Page 405, Appendix 2
741(2E5H) CH2 function enable/disable setting 0 R/W ×
(80)
*7

Process value (PV) scaling

742(2E6H) CH2 0 R/W ×
lower limit value*7 Page 406, Appendix 2
Process value (PV) scaling (81)
743(2E7H) CH2 0 R/W ×
upper limit value*7
Process value (PV) scaling Page 406, Appendix 2
744(2E8H) CH2 0 R × ×
value (82)

50
 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS

Address Setting contents Non-volatile

Target Default Read/Write Automatic
(decimal memory write Reference
channel Temperature input mode value*1 *2 setting*3 *4
(hexadecimal)) availability
745(2E9H)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
756(2F4H)

Process value (PV) scaling

Page 405, Appendix 2
757(2F5H) CH3 function enable/disable setting 0 R/W ×
3
(80)
*7

Process value (PV) scaling

758(2F6H) CH3 0 R/W ×
lower limit value*7 Page 406, Appendix 2
Process value (PV) scaling (81)
759(2F7H) CH3 0 R/W ×
upper limit value*7
Process value (PV) scaling Page 406, Appendix 2
760(2F8H) CH3 0 R × ×
value (82)
761(2F9H)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
772(304H)

Process value (PV) scaling

Page 405, Appendix 2
773(305H) CH4 function enable/disable setting 0 R/W ×
(80)
*7

Process value (PV) scaling

774(306H) CH4 0 R/W ×
lower limit value*7 Page 406, Appendix 2
Process value (PV) scaling (81)
775(307H) CH4 0 R/W ×
upper limit value*7
Process value (PV) scaling Page 406, Appendix 2
776(308H) CH4 0 R × ×
value (82)
777(309H)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
784(310H)

3.5 Buffer Memory List

Sensor compensation function Page 413, Appendix 2
785(311H) All CHs 0 R/W ×
selection*7 (91)

Temperature conversion Page 413, Appendix 2

786(312H) All CHs 0 R × ×
completion flag (92)
Page 414, Appendix 2
787(313H) All CHs Function extension bit monitor 0 R × ×
(93)
Page 414, Appendix 2
788(314H) All CHs Sampling cycle monitor 0 R × ×
(94)
789(315H)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
1278(4FEH)

1279(4FFH)

to Buffer memory areas for error history ( Page 76, Section 3.5 (2))
4095(FFFH)

4096(1000H)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
53247(CFFFH)

51
 *1 This default value is set after the module is turned off and on or after the CPU module is reset and the reset is cancelled.
*2 This column indicates whether data can be read from or written to the buffer memory area through sequence programs.
R: Reading enabled
W: Writing enabled
*3 This column indicates whether the setting in the buffer memory area is automatically changed when the input range is
changed. Enable/disable of automatic change can be set on Switch Setting. For details, refer to Page 234, Section
8.3.3.
*4 Whether writing to the non-volatile memory by turning off and on Set value backup instruction (Yn8) is enabled in this
column. For details, refer to Page 235, Section 8.3.4.
*5 (TT) indicates the L60TCTT4 and L60TCTT4BW. (RT) indicates the L60TCRT4 and L60TCRT4BW.
*6 Available only when the L60TCTT4 or L60TCTT4BW is used. With other models, this area is handled as a system area.
*7 Available only in the setting mode. To enable the setting contents, turn off, on, and off Setting change instruction (YnB)
when Setting/operation mode instruction (Yn1) is off (during setting mode). Note that a write data error (error code:
†††3H) occurs if the setting is changed during the operation mode.

52
 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS

(b) In the temperature control mode

: Enable, ×: Disable
Target Setting contents Non-
channel volatile
Address Default Read/ Automatic
or Heating- memory
(decimal Standard value Write setting Reference
current cooling Mix control *1 *2 *3 write
(hexadecimal)) control
sensor control availability
(CT) *4 3
Page 334,
0(0H) All CHs Error code 0 R × × Appendix 2
(1)
1(1H) CH1 Decimal point position

2(2H) CH2 Decimal point position 0(TT) Page 334,

1(RT) R × × Appendix 2
3(3H) CH3 Decimal point position *5 (2)
4(4H) CH4 Decimal point position

5(5H) CH1 Alert definition

6(6H) CH2 Alert definition Page 336,

0 R × × Appendix 2
7(7H) CH3 Alert definition (3)
8(8H) CH4 Alert definition

9(9H) CH1 Temperature process value (PV)

10(AH) CH2 Temperature process value (PV) Page 338,

0 R × × Appendix 2
11(BH) CH3 Temperature process value (PV) (4)
12(CH) CH4 Temperature process value (PV)

Manipulated Manipulated
Manipulated
13(DH) CH1 value for value for
value (MV)
heating (MVh) heating (MVh)
Manipulated

3.5 Buffer Memory List

Manipulated
Manipulated value for
14(EH) CH2 value for
value (MV) heating
heating (MVh)
(MVh)*7 Page 339,
Manipulated 0 R × × Appendix 2
Manipulated value for Manipulated (5)
15(FH) CH3
value (MV) heating value (MV)
(MVh)*6
Manipulated
Manipulated value for Manipulated
16(10H) CH4
value (MV) heating value (MV)
(MVh)*6
Temperature Temperature Temperature
17(11H) CH1 rise judgment rise judgment rise judgment
flag flag flag

Temperature Temperature Temperature

18(12H) CH2 rise judgment rise judgment rise judgment
flag flag flag*7
Page 340,
Temperature 0 R × × Appendix 2
Temperature Temperature
rise judgment (6)
19(13H) CH3 rise judgment rise judgment
flag
flag flag
*6

Temperature
Temperature Temperature
rise judgment
20(14H) CH4 rise judgment rise judgment
flag
flag flag
*6

53
 Target Setting contents Non-
channel volatile
Address Default Read/ Automatic
or Heating- memory
(decimal Standard value Write setting Reference
current cooling Mix control *1 *2 *3 write
(hexadecimal)) control
sensor control availability
(CT) *4

Heating Heating
Transistor
21(15H) CH1 transistor transistor
output flag
output flag output flag

Heating Heating
Transistor
22(16H) CH2 transistor transistor
output flag
output flag output flag*7 Page 341,
0 R × × Appendix 2
Heating
Transistor Transistor (7)
23(17H) CH3 transistor
output flag output flag
output flag*6
Heating
Transistor Transistor
24(18H) CH4 transistor
output flag *6
output flag
output flag
25(19H) CH1 Set value (SV) monitor

Set value (SV) Set value (SV) Set value (SV)

26(1AH) CH2
monitor monitor monitor*7 Page 342,
Set value (SV) Set value (SV) Set value (SV) 0 R × × Appendix 2
27(1BH) CH3 (8)
monitor monitor*6 monitor

Set value (SV) Set value (SV) Set value (SV)

28(1CH) CH4
monitor monitor*6 monitor

Page 342,
29(1DH) All CHs Cold junction temperature process value*8 0 R × × Appendix 2
(9)
Page 342,
30(1EH) All CHs MAN mode shift completion flag 0 R × × Appendix 2
(10)
Page 343,
31(1FH) All CHs Memory of PID constants read/Write completion flag 0 R × × Appendix 2
(11)
2(TT) Page 345,
32(20H) CH1 Input range*9 7(RT) R/W × Appendix 2
*5 (12)

Page 353,
33(21H) CH1 Stop mode setting 1 R/W × Appendix 2
(13)
Page 354,
34(22H) CH1 Set value (SV) setting 0 R/W Appendix 2
(14)
Heating Heating
Page 355,
Proportional proportional proportional
35(23H) CH1 30 R/W × Appendix 2
band (P) setting band (Ph) band (Ph)
(15)
setting setting
Page 357,
36(24H) CH1 Integral time (I) setting 240 R/W × Appendix 2
(16)
Page 357,
37(25H) CH1 Derivative time (D) setting 60 R/W × Appendix 2
(17)

38(26H) CH1 Alert set value 1 0 R/W

39(27H) CH1 Alert set value 2 0 R/W Page 358,

Appendix 2
40(28H) CH1 Alert set value 3 0 R/W (18)
41(29H) CH1 Alert set value 4 0 R/W

54
 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS

Target Setting contents Non-

channel volatile
Address Default Read/ Automatic
or Heating- memory
(decimal Standard value Write setting Reference
current cooling Mix control *1 *2 *3 write
(hexadecimal)) control
sensor control availability
(CT) *4

Heating upper Heating upper

Upper limit
42(2AH) CH1 limit output limit output 1000 R/W × Page 360,
output limiter
limiter limiter Appendix 2

43(2BH) CH1
Lower limit
System area System area 0 R/W ×
(19) 3
output limiter
Page 362,
44(2CH) CH1 Output variation limiter setting 0 R/W × Appendix 2
(20)
Page 363,
45(2DH) CH1 Sensor correction value setting 0 R/W × Appendix 2
(21)
Page 363,
46(2EH) CH1 Adjustment sensitivity (dead band) setting 5 R/W × Appendix 2
(22)
Heating control Heating control Page 364,
Control output
47(2FH) CH1 output cycle output cycle 30/300 R/W × Appendix 2
cycle setting
setting setting (23)
Page 365,
48(30H) CH1 Primary delay digital filter setting 0 R/W × Appendix 2
(24)
Page 366,
49(31H) CH1 Control response parameters 0 R/W × Appendix 2
(25)
Page 367,
50(32H) CH1 AUTO/MAN mode shift 0 R/W × Appendix 2
(26)
Page 368,

3.5 Buffer Memory List

51(33H) CH1 MAN output setting 0 R/W × Appendix 2
(27)
Page 369,
Setting change rate limiter/Setting change rate
52(34H) CH1 0 R/W × Appendix 2
*10
limiter (temperature rise)
(28)
Page 370,
53(35H) CH1 AT bias 0 R/W Appendix 2
(29)
Page 371,
Forward/reverse
54(36H) CH1 System area System area 1 R/W × Appendix 2
action setting
(30)
1300
(TT)
55(37H) CH1 Upper limit setting limiter 6000 R/W
(RT)
Page 372,
*5
Appendix 2
0(TT) (31)
-2000
56(38H) CH1 Lower limit setting limiter R/W
(RT)
*5

57(39H) CH1 System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

Page 373,
58(3AH) CH1 Heater disconnection alert setting*11 0 R/W × Appendix 2
(32)
Loop
Page 374,
disconnection
59(3BH) CH1 System area System area 480 R/W × Appendix 2
detection
(33)
judgment time

55
 Target Setting contents Non-
channel volatile
Address Default Read/ Automatic
or Heating- memory
(decimal Standard value Write setting Reference
current cooling Mix control *1 *2 *3 write
(hexadecimal)) control
sensor control availability
(CT) *4

Loop
Page 375,
disconnection
60(3CH) CH1 System area System area 0 R/W Appendix 2
detection dead
(34)
band
Page 376,
61(3DH) CH1 Unused channel setting 0 R/W × Appendix 2
(35)
Page 377,
62(3EH) CH1 Memory of PID constants read instruction 0 R/W × × Appendix 2
(36)
Page 378,
Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID
63(3FH) CH1 0 R/W × × Appendix 2
constants
(37)
2(TT) Page 345,
64(40H) CH2 Input range*9 7(RT) R/W × Appendix 2
*5 (12)

Page 353,
Stop mode Stop mode Stop mode
65(41H) CH2 1 R/W × Appendix 2
setting setting setting*7
(13)
Page 354,
Set value (SV) Set value (SV) Set value (SV)
66(42H) CH2 0 R/W Appendix 2
setting setting *7
setting
(14)

Heating Heating
Page 355,
Proportional proportional proportional
67(43H) CH2 30 R/W × Appendix 2
band (P) setting band (Ph) band (Ph)
(15)
setting setting*7
Page 357,
Integral time (I) Integral time (I) Integral time (I)
68(44H) CH2 240 R/W × Appendix 2
setting setting setting*7
(16)
Page 357,
Derivative time Derivative time Derivative time
69(45H) CH2 60 R/W × Appendix 2
(D) setting (D) setting *7
(D) setting
(17)

Alert set value Alert set value

70(46H) CH2 Alert set value 1 0 R/W
1 1*7

Alert set value Alert set value

71(47H) CH2 Alert set value 2 0 R/W Page 358,
2 2*7
Appendix 2
Alert set value Alert set value (18)
72(48H) CH2 Alert set value 3 0 R/W
3 3*7

Alert set value Alert set value

73(49H) CH2 Alert set value 4 0 R/W
4 4*7

Heating upper Heating upper

Upper limit
74(4AH) CH2 limit output limit output 1000 R/W × Page 360,
output limiter
limiter limiter*7 Appendix 2
Lower limit (19)
75(4BH) CH2 System area System area 0 R/W ×
output limiter

Output Output Page 362,

Output variation
76(4CH) CH2 variation limiter variation limiter 0 R/W × Appendix 2
limiter setting
setting setting*7 (20)

Page 363,
77(4DH) CH2 Sensor correction value setting 0 R/W × Appendix 2
(21)

Adjustment Adjustment
Adjustment Page 363,
sensitivity sensitivity
78(4EH) CH2 sensitivity (dead 5 R/W × Appendix 2
(dead band) (dead band)
band) setting (22)
setting setting*7

56
 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS

Target Setting contents Non-

channel volatile
Address Default Read/ Automatic
or Heating- memory
(decimal Standard value Write setting Reference
current cooling Mix control *1 *2 *3 write
(hexadecimal)) control
sensor control availability
(CT) *4

Heating control Heating control Page 364,

Control output
79(4FH) CH2 output cycle output cycle 30/300 R/W × Appendix 2
cycle setting
setting setting*7 (23)

Page 365,
3
80(50H) CH2 Primary delay digital filter setting 0 R/W × Appendix 2
(24)

Control Control Control Page 366,

81(51H) CH2 response response response 0 R/W × Appendix 2
parameters parameters parameters*7 (25)

AUTO/MAN Page 367,

AUTO/MAN AUTO/MAN
82(52H) CH2 mode shift 0 R/W × Appendix 2
mode shift mode shift
*7 (26)

MAN output Page 368,

MAN output MAN output
83(53H) CH2 setting 0 R/W × Appendix 2
setting setting
*7 (27)

Setting change rate limiter/Setting change rate Page 369,

84(54H) CH2 limiter (temperature rise) 0 R/W × Appendix 2
*10 (28)
Page 370,
85(55H) CH2 AT bias AT bias AT bias*7 0 R/W Appendix 2
(29)
Page 371,
Forward/reverse
86(56H) CH2 System area System area 1 R/W × Appendix 2
action setting
(30)
1300
(TT)
Upper limit Upper limit Upper limit
87(57H) CH2 6000 R/W

3.5 Buffer Memory List

setting limiter setting limiter setting limiter*7 (RT)
*5 Page 372,
Appendix 2
0 (31)
(TT)
Lower limit Lower limit Lower limit
88(58H) CH2 -2000 R/W
setting limiter setting limiter setting limiter*7 (RT)
*5

89(59H) CH2 System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

Heater
Heater Heater Page 373,
disconnection
90(5AH) CH2 disconnection disconnection 0 R/W × Appendix 2
alert
alert setting*11 alert setting*11 (32)
setting*7*11
Loop
Page 374,
disconnection
91(5BH) CH2 System area System area 480 R/W × Appendix 2
detection
(33)
judgment time
Loop
Page 375,
disconnection
92(5CH) CH2 System area System area 0 R/W Appendix 2
detection dead
(34)
band
Unused Page 376,
Unused channel Unused
93(5DH) CH2 channel 0 R/W × Appendix 2
setting channel setting
setting*7 (35)

Memory of PID Memory of PID Memory of PID Page 377,

94(5EH) CH2 constants read constants read constants read 0 R/W × × Appendix 2
instruction instruction instruction*7 (36)

57
 Target Setting contents Non-
channel volatile
Address Default Read/ Automatic
or Heating- memory
(decimal Standard value Write setting Reference
current cooling Mix control *1 *2 *3 write
(hexadecimal)) control
sensor control availability
(CT) *4

Automatic Automatic
Automatic
backup setting backup setting Page 378,
backup setting
95(5FH) CH2 after auto after auto 0 R/W × × Appendix 2
after auto tuning
tuning of PID tuning of PID (37)
of PID constants
constants constants*7
2(TT) Page 345,
96(60H) CH3 Input range*9 7(RT) R/W × Appendix 2
*5 (12)

Stop mode Page 353,

Stop mode Stop mode
97(61H) CH3 setting 1 R/W × Appendix 2
setting setting
*6 (13)
Page 354,
Set value (SV) Set value (SV) Set value (SV)
98(62H) CH3 0 R/W Appendix 2
setting setting*6 setting
(14)
Heating
Proportional Page 355,
Proportional proportional
99(63H) CH3 band (P) 30 R/W × Appendix 2
band (P) setting band (Ph)
setting (15)
setting*6
Page 357,
Integral time (I) Integral time (I) Integral time (I)
100(64H) CH3 240 R/W × Appendix 2
setting setting*6 setting
(16)
Page 357,
Derivative time Derivative time Derivative time
101(65H) CH3 60 R/W × Appendix 2
(D) setting (D) setting*6 (D) setting
(17)
Alert set value Alert set value
102(66H) CH3 Alert set value 1 0 R/W
1*6 1

Alert set value Alert set value

103(67H) CH3 Alert set value 2 0 R/W Page 358,
2*6 2
Appendix 2
Alert set value Alert set value (18)
104(68H) CH3 Alert set value 3 0 R/W
3*6 3

Alert set value Alert set value

105(69H) CH3 Alert set value 4 0 R/W
4*6 4

Heating upper
Upper limit Upper limit
106(6AH) CH3 limit output 1000 R/W × Page 360,
output limiter *6
output limiter
limiter Appendix 2
Lower limit Lower limit (19)
107(6BH) CH3 System area 0 R/W ×
output limiter output limiter
Output Output Page 362,
Output variation
108(6CH) CH3 variation limiter variation limiter 0 R/W × Appendix 2
limiter setting
setting*6 setting (20)

Page 363,
109(6DH) CH3 Sensor correction value setting 0 R/W × Appendix 2
(21)
Adjustment Adjustment
Adjustment Page 363,
sensitivity sensitivity
110(6EH) CH3 sensitivity (dead 5 R/W × Appendix 2
(dead band) (dead band)
band) setting (22)
setting*6 setting

Heating control Page 364,

Control output Control output
111(6FH) CH3 output cycle 30/300 R/W × Appendix 2
cycle setting cycle setting
setting*6 (23)

Page 365,
112(70H) CH3 Primary delay digital filter setting 0 R/W × Appendix 2
(24)

58
 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS

Target Setting contents Non-

channel volatile
Address Default Read/ Automatic
or Heating- memory
(decimal Standard value Write setting Reference
current cooling Mix control *1 *2 *3 write
(hexadecimal)) control
sensor control availability
(CT) *4

Control Control Control Page 366,

113(71H) CH3 response response response 0 R/W × Appendix 2
parameters parameters*6 parameters (25)

AUTO/MAN
Page 367,
3
AUTO/MAN AUTO/MAN
114(72H) CH3 0 R/W × Appendix 2
mode shift mode shift*6 mode shift
(26)
Page 368,
MAN output MAN output MAN output
115(73H) CH3 0 R/W × Appendix 2
setting *6 setting
setting
(27)
Page 369,
Setting change rate limiter/Setting change rate
116(74H) CH3 0 R/W × Appendix 2
*10
limiter (temperature rise)
(28)
Page 370,
117(75H) CH3 AT bias AT bias*6 AT bias 0 R/W Appendix 2
(29)
Page 371,
Forward/reverse Forward/revers
118(76H) CH3 System area 1 R/W × Appendix 2
action setting e action setting
(30)
1300
(TT)
Upper limit Upper limit Upper limit
119(77H) CH3 6000 R/W
setting limiter setting limiter*6 setting limiter
(RT)
*5 Page 372,
Appendix 2
0 (31)
(TT)
Lower limit Lower limit Lower limit
120(78H) CH3 -2000 R/W
setting limiter setting limiter*6 setting limiter
(RT)

3.5 Buffer Memory List

*5

121(79H) CH3 System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

Heater
Heater Heater Page 373,
disconnection
122(7AH) CH3 disconnection disconnection 0 R/W × Appendix 2
alert
alert setting*11 alert setting*11 (32)
setting*6*11
Loop Loop
Page 374,
disconnection disconnection
123(7BH) CH3 System area 480 R/W × Appendix 2
detection detection
(33)
judgment time judgment time
Loop Loop
Page 375,
disconnection disconnection
124(7CH) CH3 System area 0 R/W Appendix 2
detection dead detection dead
(34)
band band
Unused Page 376,
Unused channel Unused
125(7DH) CH3 channel 0 R/W × Appendix 2
setting channel setting
setting*6 (35)

Memory of PID Memory of PID Memory of PID Page 377,

126(7EH) CH3 constants read constants read constants read 0 R/W × × Appendix 2
instruction instruction*6 instruction (36)

Automatic Automatic
Automatic
backup setting backup setting Page 378,
backup setting
127(7FH) CH3 after auto after auto 0 R/W × × Appendix 2
after auto tuning
tuning of PID tuning of PID (37)
of PID constants
constants*6 constants

2(TT) Page 345,

128(80H) CH4 Input range*9 7(RT) R/W × Appendix 2
*5 (12)

59
 Target Setting contents Non-
channel volatile
Address Default Read/ Automatic
or Heating- memory
(decimal Standard value Write setting Reference
current cooling Mix control *1 *2 *3 write
(hexadecimal)) control
sensor control availability
(CT) *4

Page 353,
Stop mode Stop mode Stop mode
129(81H) CH4 1 R/W × Appendix 2
setting *6 setting
setting
(13)
Page 354,
Set value (SV) Set value (SV) Set value (SV)
130(82H) CH4 0 R/W Appendix 2
setting setting*6 setting
(14)
Heating
Proportional Page 355,
Proportional proportional
131(83H) CH4 band (P) 30 R/W × Appendix 2
band (P) setting band (Ph)
setting (15)
setting*6
Page 357,
Integral time (I) Integral time (I) Integral time (I)
132(84H) CH4 240 R/W × Appendix 2
setting *6 setting
setting
(16)
Page 357,
Derivative time Derivative time Derivative time
133(85H) CH4 60 R/W × Appendix 2
(D) setting *6 (D) setting
(D) setting
(17)
Alert set value Alert set value
134(86H) CH4 Alert set value 1 0 R/W
1*6 1

Alert set value Alert set value

135(87H) CH4 Alert set value 2 0 R/W Page 358,
2*6 2
Appendix 2
Alert set value Alert set value (18)
136(88H) CH4 Alert set value 3 0 R/W
3*6 3

Alert set value Alert set value

137(89H) CH4 Alert set value 4 0 R/W
4*6 4

Heating upper
Upper limit Upper limit
138(8AH) CH4 limit output 1000 R/W × Page 360,
output limiter output limiter
limiter*6 Appendix 2
Lower limit Lower limit (19)
139(8BH) CH4 System area 0 R/W ×
output limiter output limiter
Output Output Page 362,
Output variation
140(8CH) CH4 variation limiter variation limiter 0 R/W × Appendix 2
limiter setting
setting*6 setting (20)

Page 363,
141(8DH) CH4 Sensor correction value setting 0 R/W × Appendix 2
(21)
Adjustment Adjustment
Adjustment Page 363,
sensitivity sensitivity
142(8EH) CH4 sensitivity (dead 5 R/W × Appendix 2
(dead band) (dead band)
band) setting (22)
setting*6 setting

Heating control Page 364,

Control output Control output
143(8FH) CH4 output cycle 30/300 R/W × Appendix 2
cycle setting cycle setting
setting*6 (23)

Page 365,
144(90H) CH4 Primary delay digital filter setting 0 R/W × Appendix 2
(24)

Control Control Control Page 366,

145(91H) CH4 response response response 0 R/W × Appendix 2
parameters parameters*6 parameters (25)

AUTO/MAN Page 367,

AUTO/MAN AUTO/MAN
146(92H) CH4 mode shift 0 R/W × Appendix 2
mode shift mode shift
*6 (26)
Page 368,
MAN output MAN output MAN output
147(93H) CH4 0 R/W × Appendix 2
setting setting*6 setting
(27)

60
 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS

Target Setting contents Non-

channel volatile
Address Default Read/ Automatic
or Heating- memory
(decimal Standard value Write setting Reference
current cooling Mix control *1 *2 *3 write
(hexadecimal)) control
sensor control availability
(CT) *4

Setting change rate limiter/Setting change rate Page 369,

148(94H) CH4 limiter (temperature rise) 0 R/W × Appendix 2
*10 (28)

AT bias
Page 370, 3
149(95H) CH4 AT bias AT bias 0 R/W Appendix 2
*6
(29)
Page 371,
Forward/reverse Forward/revers
150(96H) CH4 System area 1 R/W × Appendix 2
action setting e action setting
(30)
1300
(TT)
Upper limit Upper limit Upper limit
151(97H) CH4 6000 R/W
setting limiter setting limiter*6 setting limiter
(RT)
*5 Page 372,
Appendix 2
0 (31)
(TT)
Lower limit Lower limit Lower limit
152(98H) CH4 -2000 R/W
setting limiter setting limiter*6 setting limiter
(RT)
*5

153(99H) CH4 System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

Heater
Heater Heater Page 373,
disconnection
154(9AH) CH4 disconnection disconnection 0 R/W × Appendix 2
alert
alert setting*11 alert setting*11 (32)
setting*6*11
Loop Loop
Page 374,
disconnection disconnection
155(9BH) CH4 System area 480 R/W × Appendix 2
detection detection

3.5 Buffer Memory List

(33)
judgment time judgment time
Loop Loop
Page 375,
disconnection disconnection
156(9CH) CH4 System area 0 R/W Appendix 2
detection dead detection dead
(34)
band band
Unused Page 376,
Unused channel Unused
157(9DH) CH4 channel 0 R/W × Appendix 2
setting channel setting
setting*6 (35)

Memory of PID Memory of PID Memory of PID Page 377,

158(9EH) CH4 constants read constants read constants read 0 R/W × × Appendix 2
instruction instruction*6 instruction (36)

Automatic Automatic
Automatic
backup setting backup setting Page 378,
backup setting
159(9FH) CH4 after auto after auto 0 R/W × × Appendix 2
after auto tuning
tuning of PID tuning of PID (37)
of PID constants
constants*6 constants

160(A0H)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
163(A3H)

Page 379,
164(A4H) All CHs Alert dead band setting 5 R/W × Appendix 2
(38)
Page 379,
165(A5H) All CHs Number of alert delay 0 R/W × Appendix 2
(39)
Page 380,
Heater disconnection/output off-time current error
166(A6H) All CHs 3 R/W × Appendix 2
detection delay count*11
(40)

61
 Target Setting contents Non-
channel volatile
Address Default Read/ Automatic
or Heating- memory
(decimal Standard value Write setting Reference
current cooling Mix control *1 *2 *3 write
(hexadecimal)) control
sensor control availability
(CT) *4

Page 380,
167(A7H) All CHs Temperature rise completion range setting 1 R/W × Appendix 2
(41)
Page 381,
168(A8H) All CHs Temperature rise completion soak time setting 0 R/W × Appendix 2
(42)
Page 381,
169(A9H) All CHs PID continuation flag 0 R/W × Appendix 2
(43)
Page 381,
170(AAH) All CHs Heater disconnection correction function selection*11 0 R/W × Appendix 2
(44)
171(ABH)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
174(AEH)

Page 382,
175(AFH) All CHs Transistor output monitor ON delay time setting 0 R/W × Appendix 2
(45)
Page 382,
176(B0H) All CHs CT monitor method switching*11 0 R/W × Appendix 2
(46)
Manipulated Manipulated
Manipulated
value of value of
value (MV) for
heating (MVh) heating (MVh)
177(B1H) CH1 output with 0 R × ×
for output with for output with
another analog
another analog another analog
module
module module

Manipulated Manipulated
Manipulated
value of value of
value (MV) for
heating (MVh) heating (MVh)
178(B2H) CH2 output with 0 R × ×
for output with for output with
another analog
another analog another analog
module
module module*7 Page 383,
Appendix 2
Manipulated
Manipulated Manipulated (47)
value of
value (MV) for value (MV) for
heating (MVh)
179(B3H) CH3 output with output with 0 R × ×
for output with
another analog another analog
another analog
module module
module*6
Manipulated
Manipulated Manipulated
value of
value (MV) for value (MV) for
heating (MVh)
180(B4H) CH4 output with output with 0 R × ×
for output with
another analog another analog
another analog
module module
module*6
Page 384,
Resolution of the manipulated value for output with
181(B5H) All CHs 0 R/W × Appendix 2
another analog module
(48)
Page 384,
182(B6H) All CHs Cold junction temperature compensation selection*8 0 R/W × Appendix 2
(49)
Page 385,
183(B7H) All CHs Control switching monitor 0 R × × Appendix 2
(50)

62
 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS

Target Setting contents Non-

channel volatile
Address Default Read/ Automatic
or Heating- memory
(decimal Standard value Write setting Reference
current cooling Mix control *1 *2 *3 write
(hexadecimal)) control
sensor control availability
(CT) *4

184(B8H) CH1 Auto tuning mode selection 0 R/W ×

Auto tuning
Auto tuning Auto tuning
185(B9H) CH2
mode selection mode selection
mode selection
*7
0 R/W ×
3
Page 385,
Auto tuning
Auto tuning Auto tuning Appendix 2
186(BAH) CH3 mode 0 R/W ×
mode selection mode selection (51)
*6
selection
Auto tuning
Auto tuning Auto tuning
187(BBH) CH4 mode 0 R/W ×
mode selection mode selection
selection*6
188(BCH)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
191(BFH)

192(C0H) CH1 Alert 1 mode setting*9 0 R/W ×

193(C1H) CH1 Alert 2 mode setting*9 0 R/W × Page 386,

Appendix 2
194(C2H) CH1 Alert 3 mode setting*9 0 R/W × (52)
195(C3H) CH1 Alert 4 mode setting*9 0 R/W ×

196(C4H)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
207(CFH)

Alert 1 mode Alert 1 mode Alert 1 mode

208(D0H) CH2 0 R/W ×
setting*9 setting*9 setting*7*9

3.5 Buffer Memory List

Alert 2 mode Alert 2 mode Alert 2 mode
209(D1H) CH2 0 R/W × Page 386,
setting*9 setting*9 setting*7*9
Appendix 2
Alert 3 mode Alert 3 mode Alert 3 mode (52)
210(D2H) CH2 0 R/W ×
setting*9 setting*9 setting*7*9
Alert 4 mode Alert 4 mode Alert 4 mode
211(D3H) CH2 0 R/W ×
setting*9 setting*9 setting*7*9
212(D4H)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
223(DFH)

Alert 1 mode Alert 1 mode Alert 1 mode

224(E0H) CH3 0 R/W ×
setting*9 setting*6*9 setting*9
Alert 2 mode Alert 2 mode Alert 2 mode
225(E1H) CH3 0 R/W × Page 386,
setting*9 setting*6*9 setting*9
Appendix 2
Alert 3 mode Alert 3 mode Alert 3 mode (52)
226(E2H) CH3 0 R/W ×
setting*9 setting*6*9 setting*9
Alert 4 mode Alert 4 mode Alert 4 mode
227(E3H) CH3 0 R/W ×
setting*9 setting*6*9 setting*9
228(E4H)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
239(EFH)

63
 Target Setting contents Non-
channel volatile
Address Default Read/ Automatic
or Heating- memory
(decimal Standard value Write setting Reference
current cooling Mix control *1 *2 *3 write
(hexadecimal)) control
sensor control availability
(CT) *4

Alert 1 mode Alert 1 mode Alert 1 mode

240(F0H) CH4 0 R/W ×
setting*9 setting*6*9 setting*9
Alert 2 mode Alert 2 mode Alert 2 mode
241(F1H) CH4 0 R/W × Page 386,
setting*9 setting*6*9 setting*9
Appendix 2
Alert 3 mode Alert 3 mode Alert 3 mode (52)
242(F2H) CH4 0 R/W ×
setting*9 setting*6*9 setting*9
Alert 4 mode Alert 4 mode Alert 4 mode
243(F3H) CH4 0 R/W ×
setting*9 setting*6*9 setting*9
244(F4H)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
255(FFH)

256(100H) CT1 Heater current measurement value*11

257(101H) CT2 Heater current measurement value*11
258(102H) CT3 Heater current measurement value*11
259(103H) CT4 Heater current measurement value*11 Page 390,
0 R × × Appendix 2
260(104H) CT5 Heater current measurement value*11 (58)
261(105H) CT6 Heater current measurement value*11
262(106H) CT7 Heater current measurement value*11
263(107H) CT8 Heater current measurement value*11
264(108H) CT1 CT input channel assignment setting*11
265(109H) CT2 CT input channel assignment setting*11
266(10AH) CT3 CT input channel assignment setting*11
267(10BH) CT4 CT input channel assignment setting*11 Page 391,
0 R/W × Appendix 2
268(10CH) CT5 CT input channel assignment setting*11 (59)
269(10DH) CT6 CT input channel assignment setting*11
270(10EH) CT7 CT input channel assignment setting*11
271(10FH) CT8 CT input channel assignment setting*11
272(110H) CT1 CT selection*9*11
273(111H) CT2 CT selection*9*11
274(112H) CT3 CT selection*9*11
275(113H) CT4 CT selection*9*11 Page 392,
0 R/W × Appendix 2
276(114H) CT5 CT selection*9*11 (60)
277(115H) CT6 CT selection*9*11
278(116H) CT7 CT selection*9*11
279(117H) CT8 CT selection*9*11
280(118H) CT1 Reference heater current value*11
281(119H) CT2 Reference heater current value*11
282(11AH) CT3 Reference heater current value*11
283(11BH) CT4 Reference heater current value*11 Page 393,
0 R/W × Appendix 2
284(11CH) CT5 Reference heater current value*11 (61)
285(11DH) CT6 Reference heater current value*11
286(11EH) CT7 Reference heater current value*11
287(11FH) CT8 Reference heater current value*11

64
 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS

Target Setting contents Non-

channel volatile
Address Default Read/ Automatic
or Heating- memory
(decimal Standard value Write setting Reference
current cooling Mix control *1 *2 *3 write
(hexadecimal)) control
sensor control availability
(CT) *4

288(120H) CT1 CT ratio setting*11

289(121H) CT2 CT ratio setting*11
290(122H) CT3 CT ratio setting*11 3
291(123H) CT4 CT ratio setting*11 Page 393,
800 R/W × Appendix 2
292(124H) CT5 CT ratio setting*11 (62)
293(125H) CT6 CT ratio setting*11
294(126H) CT7 CT ratio setting*11
295(127H) CT8 CT ratio setting*11
296(128H)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
543(21FH)

Page 394,
2-point sensor compensation offset value (measured
544(220H) CH1 0 R/W Appendix 2
*9
value)
(63)
Page 394,
2-point sensor compensation offset value
545(221H) CH1 0 R/W Appendix 2
(compensation value)*9
(64)
Page 395,
2-point sensor compensation gain value (measured
546(222H) CH1 0 R/W Appendix 2
value)*9
(65)
Page 395,
2-point sensor compensation gain value
547(223H) CH1 0 R/W Appendix 2
(compensation value)*9
(66)

3.5 Buffer Memory List

Page 396,
548(224H) CH1 2-point sensor compensation offset latch request*9 0 R/W × × Appendix 2
(67)
Page 396,
549(225H) CH1 2-point sensor compensation offset latch completion 0 R × × Appendix 2
(68)
Page 397,
550(226H) CH1 2-point sensor compensation gain latch request*9 0 R/W × × Appendix 2
(69)
Page 397,
551(227H) CH1 2-point sensor compensation gain latch completion 0 R × × Appendix 2
(70)
552(228H)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
563(233H)

Page 369,
564(234H) CH1 Setting change rate limiter (temperature drop)*12 0 R/W × Appendix 2
(28)
565(235H)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
572(23CH)

AT simultaneous
Page 398,
temperature rise
573(23DH) CH1 System area System area 0 R × × Appendix 2
parameter
(71)
calculation flag
Page 399,
Self-tuning
574(23EH) CH1 System area System area 0 R/W × Appendix 2
setting
(72)

65
 Target Setting contents Non-
channel volatile
Address Default Read/ Automatic
or Heating- memory
(decimal Standard value Write setting Reference
current cooling Mix control *1 *2 *3 write
(hexadecimal)) control
sensor control availability
(CT) *4

Page 400,
575(23FH) CH1 Self-tuning flag System area System area 0 R × × Appendix 2
(73)
Page 394,
2-point sensor compensation offset value (measured
576(240H) CH2 0 R/W Appendix 2
value)*9
(63)
Page 394,
2-point sensor compensation offset value
577(241H) CH2 0 R/W Appendix 2
(compensation value)*9
(64)
Page 395,
2-point sensor compensation gain value (measured
578(242H) CH2 0 R/W Appendix 2
*9
value)
(65)
Page 395,
2-point sensor compensation gain value
579(243H) CH2 0 R/W Appendix 2
(compensation value)*9
(66)
Page 396,
580(244H) CH2 2-point sensor compensation offset latch request*9 0 R/W × × Appendix 2
(67)
Page 396,
581(245H) CH2 2-point sensor compensation offset latch completion 0 R × × Appendix 2
(68)
Page 397,
582(246H) CH2 2-point sensor compensation gain latch request*9 0 R/W × × Appendix 2
(69)
Page 397,
583(247H) CH2 2-point sensor compensation gain latch completion 0 R × × Appendix 2
(70)
584(248H)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
595(253H)

Page 369,
596(254H) CH2 Setting change rate limiter (temperature drop)*12 0 R/W × Appendix 2
(28)
597(255H)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
604(25CH)

AT simultaneous
Page 398,
temperature rise
605(25DH) CH2 System area System area 0 R × × Appendix 2
parameter
(71)
calculation flag
Page 399,
Self-tuning
606(25EH) CH2 System area System area 0 R/W × Appendix 2
setting
(72)
Page 400,
607(25FH) CH2 Self-tuning flag System area System area 0 R × × Appendix 2
(73)
Page 394,
2-point sensor compensation offset value (measured
608(260H) CH3 0 R/W Appendix 2
*9
value)
(63)
Page 394,
2-point sensor compensation offset value
609(261H) CH3 0 R/W Appendix 2
*9
(compensation value)
(64)
Page 395,
2-point sensor compensation gain value (measured
610(262H) CH3 0 R/W Appendix 2
value)*9
(65)

66
 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS

Target Setting contents Non-

channel volatile
Address Default Read/ Automatic
or Heating- memory
(decimal Standard value Write setting Reference
current cooling Mix control *1 *2 *3 write
(hexadecimal)) control
sensor control availability
(CT) *4

Page 395,
2-point sensor compensation gain value
611(263H) CH3 0 R/W Appendix 2
*9
(compensation value)
(66)
Page 396, 3
612(264H) CH3 *9 0 R/W × × Appendix 2
2-point sensor compensation offset latch request
(67)
Page 396,
613(265H) CH3 2-point sensor compensation offset latch completion 0 R × × Appendix 2
(68)
Page 397,
614(266H) CH3 2-point sensor compensation gain latch request*9 0 R/W × × Appendix 2
(69)
Page 397,
615(267H) CH3 2-point sensor compensation gain latch completion 0 R × × Appendix 2
(70)
616(268H)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
627(273H)

Page 369,
628(274H) CH3 Setting change rate limiter (temperature drop)*12 0 R/W × Appendix 2
(28)
629(275H)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
636(27CH)

AT
AT simultaneous

3.5 Buffer Memory List

simultaneous Page 398,
temperature rise
637(27DH) CH3 System area temperature 0 R × × Appendix 2
parameter
rise parameter (71)
calculation flag
calculation flag
Page 399,
Self-tuning Self-tuning
638(27EH) CH3 System area 0 R/W × Appendix 2
setting setting
(72)
Page 400,
639(27FH) CH3 Self-tuning flag System area Self-tuning flag 0 R × × Appendix 2
(73)
Page 394,
2-point sensor compensation offset value (measured
640(280H) CH4 0 R/W Appendix 2
value)*9
(63)
Page 394,
2-point sensor compensation offset value
641(281H) CH4 0 R/W Appendix 2
(compensation value)*9
(64)
Page 395,
2-point sensor compensation gain value (measured
642(282H) CH4 0 R/W Appendix 2
value)*9
(65)
Page 395,
2-point sensor compensation gain value
643(283H) CH4 0 R/W Appendix 2
*9
(compensation value)
(66)
Page 396,
644(284H) CH4 2-point sensor compensation offset latch request*9 0 R/W × × Appendix 2
(67)
Page 396,
645(285H) CH4 2-point sensor compensation offset latch completion 0 R × × Appendix 2
(68)

67
 Target Setting contents Non-
channel volatile
Address Default Read/ Automatic
or Heating- memory
(decimal Standard value Write setting Reference
current cooling Mix control *1 *2 *3 write
(hexadecimal)) control
sensor control availability
(CT) *4

Page 397,
646(286H) CH4 2-point sensor compensation gain latch request*9 0 R/W × × Appendix 2
(69)
Page 397,
647(287H) CH4 2-point sensor compensation gain latch completion 0 R × × Appendix 2
(70)
648(288H)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
659(293H)

Page 369,
660(294H) CH4 Setting change rate limiter (temperature drop)*12 0 R/W × Appendix 2
(28)
661(295H)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
668(29CH)

AT
AT simultaneous
simultaneous Page 398,
temperature rise
669(29DH) CH4 System area temperature 0 R × × Appendix 2
parameter
rise parameter (71)
calculation flag
calculation flag
Page 399,
Self-tuning Self-tuning
670(29EH) CH4 System area 0 R/W × Appendix 2
setting setting
(72)
Page 400,
671(29FH) CH4 Self-tuning flag System area Self-tuning flag 0 R × × Appendix 2
(73)
672(2A0H)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
688(2B0H)

Temperature process value (PV) for input with

689(2B1H) CH1 0 R/W × ×
another analog module
Temperature
Temperature Temperature
process value
process value process value
(PV) for input
690(2B2H) CH2 (PV) for input (PV) for input 0 R/W × ×
with another
with another with another
analog module
analog module analog module
*7
Temperature
Temperature Temperature Page 402,
process value
process value process value Appendix 2
(PV) for input
691(2B3H) CH3 (PV) for input (PV) for input 0 R/W × × (74)
with another
with another with another
analog
analog module analog module
module*6
Temperature
Temperature Temperature
process value
process value process value
(PV) for input
692(2B4H) CH4 (PV) for input (PV) for input 0 R/W × ×
with another
with another with another
analog
analog module analog module
module*6
693(2B5H) ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

694(2B6H) ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

68
 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS

Target Setting contents Non-

channel volatile
Address Default Read/ Automatic
or Heating- memory
(decimal Standard value Write setting Reference
current cooling Mix control *1 *2 *3 write
(hexadecimal)) control
sensor control availability
(CT) *4

Temperature
conversion
695(2B7H) CH2 System area System area 0 R/W ×
setting
*14 3
Temperature
Page 403,
conversion
696(2B8H) CH3 System area System area 0 R/W × Appendix 2
setting
(76)
*13

Temperature
conversion
697(2B9H) CH4 System area System area 0 R/W ×
setting
*13

698(2BAH)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
703(2BFH)

Manipulated Manipulated
704(2C0H) CH1 System area value for value for 0 R × ×
cooling (MVc) cooling (MVc)
Manipulated
Manipulated
value for
705(2C1H) CH2 System area value for 0 R × ×
cooling
cooling (MVc)
(MVc)*7 Page 339,
Manipulated Appendix 2
value for (5)
706(2C2H) CH3 System area System area 0 R × ×
cooling
*6
(MVc)

3.5 Buffer Memory List

Manipulated
value for
707(2C3H) CH4 System area System area 0 R × ×
cooling
*6
(MVc)
Manipulated Manipulated
value of value of
cooling (MVc) cooling (MVc)
708(2C4H) CH1 System area 0 R × ×
for output with for output with
another analog another analog
module module

Manipulated Manipulated
value of value of
cooling (MVc) cooling (MVc)
709(2C5H) CH2 System area 0 R × ×
for output with for output with
another analog another analog
module module*7 Page 383,
Appendix 2
Manipulated
(47)
value of
cooling (MVc)
710(2C6H) CH3 System area System area 0 R × ×
for output with
another analog
module*6
Manipulated
value of
cooling (MVc)
711(2C7H) CH4 System area System area 0 R × ×
for output with
another analog
module*6

69
 Target Setting contents Non-
channel volatile
Address Default Read/ Automatic
or Heating- memory
(decimal Standard value Write setting Reference
current cooling Mix control *1 *2 *3 write
(hexadecimal)) control
sensor control availability
(CT) *4

Cooling Cooling
712(2C8H) CH1 System area transistor transistor 0 R × ×
output flag output flag
Cooling
Cooling
transistor
713(2C9H) CH2 System area transistor 0 R × ×
output flag
output flag
*7 Page 341,
Cooling Appendix 2
transistor (7)
714(2CAH) CH3 System area System area 0 R × ×
output flag
*6

Cooling
transistor
715(2CBH) CH4 System area System area 0 R × ×
output flag
*6

716(2CCH)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
718(2CEH)

Cooling Cooling Page 404,

719(2CFH) All CHs System area method setting method setting 0 R/W × Appendix 2
*9 *9 (77)
Cooling Cooling
Page 355,
proportional proportional
720(2D0H) CH1 System area 30 R/W × Appendix 2
band (Pc) band (Pc)
(15)
setting setting
Cooling upper Cooling upper Page 360,
721(2D1H) CH1 System area limit output limit output 1000 R/W × Appendix 2
limiter limiter (19)
Cooling control Cooling control Page 364,
722(2D2H) CH1 System area output cycle output cycle 30/300 R/W × Appendix 2
setting setting (23)
Page 404,
Overlap/dead Overlap/dead
723(2D3H) CH1 System area 0 R/W × Appendix 2
band setting band setting
(78)
Page 405,
724(2D4H) CH1 Manual reset amount setting 0 R/W × Appendix 2
(79)
Page 405,
Process value (PV) scaling function enable/disable
725(2D5H) CH1 0 R/W × Appendix 2
*9
setting
(80)

726(2D6H) CH1 Process value (PV) scaling lower limit value*9 0 R/W × Page 406,
Appendix 2
727(2D7H) CH1 Process value (PV) scaling upper limit value*9 0 R/W × (81)
Page 406,
728(2D8H) CH1 Process value (PV) scaling value 0 R × × Appendix 2
(82)
Page 407,
729(2D9H) CH1 Derivative action selection*9 0 R/W × Appendix 2
(83)
Simultaneous Page 407,
730(2DAH) CH1 temperature rise System area System area 0 R/W × Appendix 2
group setting*9 (84)

Simultaneous Page 408,

731(2DBH) CH1 temperature rise System area System area 0 R/W Appendix 2
gradient data (85)

70
 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS

Target Setting contents Non-

channel volatile
Address Default Read/ Automatic
or Heating- memory
(decimal Standard value Write setting Reference
current cooling Mix control *1 *2 *3 write
(hexadecimal)) control
sensor control availability
(CT) *4

Simultaneous Page 408,

732(2DCH) CH1 temperature rise System area System area 0 R/W Appendix 2
dead time (86)
Simultaneous
Page 409,
3
temperature rise
733(2DDH) CH1 System area System area 0 R/W × Appendix 2
AT mode
(87)
selection
Simultaneous Page 410,
734(2DEH) CH1 temperature rise System area System area 0 R × × Appendix 2
status (88)
Page 411,
735(2DFH) CH1 Setting change rate limiter unit time setting*9 0 R/W × Appendix 2
(89)

Cooling Cooling
Page 355,
proportional proportional
736(2E0H) CH2 System area 30 R/W × Appendix 2
band (Pc) band (Pc)
(15)
setting setting*7

Cooling upper Cooling upper Page 360,

737(2E1H) CH2 System area limit output limit output 1000 R/W × Appendix 2
limiter limiter*7 (19)

Cooling control Cooling control Page 364,

738(2E2H) CH2 System area output cycle output cycle 30/300 R/W × Appendix 2
setting setting*7 (23)

Page 404,
Overlap/dead Overlap/dead
739(2E3H) CH2 System area 0 R/W × Appendix 2
band setting *7
band setting
(78)

3.5 Buffer Memory List

Manual reset Page 405,
Manual reset Manual reset
740(2E4H) CH2 amount 0 R/W × Appendix 2
amount setting amount setting
setting*7 (79)

Process value Process value Process value

(PV) scaling (PV) scaling (PV) scaling Page 405,
741(2E5H) CH2 function function function 0 R/W × Appendix 2
enable/disable enable/disable enable/disable (80)
setting*9 setting*9 setting*7*9
Process value Process value Process value
(PV) scaling (PV) scaling (PV) scaling
742(2E6H) CH2 0 R/W ×
lower limit lower limit lower limit
value*9 value*9 value*7*9 Page 406,
Appendix 2
Process value Process value Process value (81)
(PV) scaling (PV) scaling (PV) scaling
743(2E7H) CH2 0 R/W ×
upper limit upper limit upper limit
value*9 value*9 value*7*9
Process value
Process value Process value Page 406,
(PV) scaling
744(2E8H) CH2 (PV) scaling (PV) scaling 0 R × × Appendix 2
value
value value (82)
*7

Derivative Derivative
Derivative action Page 407,
action action
745(2E9H) CH2 selection 0 R/W × Appendix 2
selection selection
*9 (83)
*9 *7*9

Simultaneous Page 407,

746(2EAH) CH2 temperature rise System area System area 0 R/W × Appendix 2
group setting*9 (84)

Simultaneous Page 408,

747(2EBH) CH2 temperature rise System area System area 0 R/W Appendix 2
gradient data (85)

71
 Target Setting contents Non-
channel volatile
Address Default Read/ Automatic
or Heating- memory
(decimal Standard value Write setting Reference
current cooling Mix control *1 *2 *3 write
(hexadecimal)) control
sensor control availability
(CT) *4

Simultaneous Page 408,

748(2ECH) CH2 temperature rise System area System area 0 R/W Appendix 2
dead time (86)
Simultaneous
Page 409,
temperature rise
749(2EDH) CH2 System area System area 0 R/W × Appendix 2
AT mode
(87)
selection
Simultaneous Page 410,
750(2EEH) CH2 temperature rise System area System area 0 R × × Appendix 2
status (88)
Setting change Setting change Setting change Page 411,
751(2EFH) CH2 rate limiter unit rate limiter unit rate limiter unit 0 R/W × Appendix 2
time setting*9 time setting*9 time setting*7*9 (89)

Cooling
Page 355,
proportional
752(2F0H) CH3 System area System area 30 R/W × Appendix 2
band (Pc)
(15)
setting*6
Cooling upper Page 360,
753(2F1H) CH3 System area limit output System area 1000 R/W × Appendix 2
limiter*6 (19)

Cooling control Page 364,

754(2F2H) CH3 System area output cycle System area 30/300 R/W × Appendix 2
setting*6 (23)

Page 404,
Overlap/dead
755(2F3H) CH3 System area System area 0 R/W × Appendix 2
*6
band setting
(78)
Manual reset Page 405,
Manual reset Manual reset
756(2F4H) CH3 amount 0 R/W × Appendix 2
amount setting amount setting
setting*6 (79)

Process value Process value Process value

(PV) scaling (PV) scaling (PV) scaling Page 405,
757(2F5H) CH3 function function function 0 R/W × Appendix 2
enable/disable enable/disable enable/disable (80)
setting*9 setting*6*9 setting*9
Process value Process value Process value
(PV) scaling (PV) scaling (PV) scaling
758(2F6H) CH3 0 R/W ×
lower limit lower limit lower limit
value*9 value*6*9 value*9 Page 406,
Appendix 2
Process value Process value Process value (81)
(PV) scaling (PV) scaling (PV) scaling
759(2F7H) CH3 0 R/W ×
upper limit upper limit upper limit
value*9 value*6*9 value*9

Process value Process value Process value Page 406,

760(2F8H) CH3 (PV) scaling (PV) scaling (PV) scaling 0 R × × Appendix 2
value value*6 value (82)

Derivative Derivative
Derivative action Page 407,
action action
761(2F9H) CH3 selection 0 R/W × Appendix 2
selection selection
*9 (83)
*6*9 *9

Simultaneous
Simultaneous Page 407,
temperature
762(2FAH) CH3 temperature rise System area 0 R/W × Appendix 2
rise group
group setting*9 (84)
setting*9

72
 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS

Target Setting contents Non-

channel volatile
Address Default Read/ Automatic
or Heating- memory
(decimal Standard value Write setting Reference
current cooling Mix control *1 *2 *3 write
(hexadecimal)) control
sensor control availability
(CT) *4

Simultaneous
Simultaneous Page 408,
temperature
763(2FBH) CH3 temperature rise System area 0 R/W Appendix 2
rise gradient
gradient data
data
(85)
3
Simultaneous Simultaneous Page 408,
764(2FCH) CH3 temperature rise System area temperature 0 R/W Appendix 2
dead time rise dead time (86)
Simultaneous Simultaneous
Page 409,
temperature rise temperature
765(2FDH) CH3 System area 0 R/W × Appendix 2
AT mode rise AT mode
(87)
selection selection
Simultaneous Simultaneous Page 410,
766(2FEH) CH3 temperature rise System area temperature 0 R × × Appendix 2
status rise status (88)
Setting change Setting change Setting change Page 411,
767(2FFH) CH3 rate limiter unit rate limiter unit rate limiter unit 0 R/W × Appendix 2
time setting*9 time setting*6*9 time setting*9 (89)

Cooling
Page 355,
proportional
768(300H) CH4 System area System area 30 R/W × Appendix 2
band (Pc)
(15)
setting*6
Cooling upper Page 360,
769(301H) CH4 System area limit output System area 1000 R/W × Appendix 2
limiter*6 (19)

Cooling control Page 364,

770(302H) CH4 System area output cycle System area 30/300 R/W × Appendix 2
setting*6 (23)

3.5 Buffer Memory List

Page 404,
Overlap/dead
771(303H) CH4 System area System area 0 R/W × Appendix 2
*6
band setting
(78)
Manual reset Page 405,
Manual reset Manual reset
772(304H) CH4 amount 0 R/W × Appendix 2
amount setting amount setting
setting*6 (79)

Process value Process value Process value

(PV) scaling (PV) scaling (PV) scaling
Page 405,
function function function
773(305H) CH4 0 R/W × Appendix 2
enable/disable enable/disable enable/disable
(80)
setting setting
setting*6*9
*9 *9

Process value Process value Process value

(PV) scaling (PV) scaling (PV) scaling
774(306H) CH4 0 R/W ×
lower limit lower limit lower limit
value *9
value *6*9
value *9 Page 406,
Appendix 2
Process value Process value Process value (81)
(PV) scaling (PV) scaling (PV) scaling
775(307H) CH4 0 R/W ×
upper limit upper limit upper limit
*9 *6*9 *9
value value value

Process value Process value Process value Page 406,

776(308H) CH4 (PV) scaling (PV) scaling (PV) scaling 0 R × × Appendix 2
value value*6 value (82)

Derivative Derivative
Page 407,
Derivative action action action
777(309H) CH4 0 R/W × Appendix 2
selection*9 selection selection
(83)
*6*9 *9

73
 Target Setting contents Non-
channel volatile
Address Default Read/ Automatic
or Heating- memory
(decimal Standard value Write setting Reference
current cooling Mix control *1 *2 *3 write
(hexadecimal)) control
sensor control availability
(CT) *4

Simultaneous
Simultaneous Page 407,
temperature
778(30AH) CH4 temperature rise System area 0 R/W × Appendix 2
rise group
group setting*9 (84)
setting*9
Simultaneous
Simultaneous Page 408,
temperature
779(30BH) CH4 temperature rise System area 0 R/W Appendix 2
rise gradient
gradient data (85)
data
Simultaneous Simultaneous Page 408,
780(30CH) CH4 temperature rise System area temperature 0 R/W Appendix 2
dead time rise dead time (86)
Simultaneous Simultaneous
Page 409,
temperature rise temperature
781(30DH) CH4 System area 0 R/W × Appendix 2
AT mode rise AT mode
(87)
selection selection
Simultaneous Simultaneous Page 410,
782(30EH) CH4 temperature rise System area temperature 0 R × × Appendix 2
status rise status (88)
Setting change Setting change Setting change Page 411,
783(30FH) CH4 rate limiter unit rate limiter unit rate limiter unit 0 R/W × Appendix 2
time setting*9 time setting*6*9 time setting*9 (89)

Peak current
Page 412,
suppression
784(310H) All CHs System area System area 0 R/W × Appendix 2
control group
(90)
setting*9
Page 413,
785(311H) All CHs Sensor compensation function selection*9 0 R/W × Appendix 2
(91)
Page 413,
786(312H) All CHs Temperature conversion completion flag 0 R × × Appendix 2
(92)
Page 414,
787(313H) All CHs Function extension bit monitor 0 R × × Appendix 2
(93)
Page 414,
788(314H) All CHs Sampling cycle monitor 0 R × × Appendix 2
(94)
789(315H)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
1278(4FEH)

1279(4FFH)

to Buffer memory for error history ( Page 76, Section 3.5 (2))
4095(FFFH)

4096(1000H)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
53247(CFFFH)

74
 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS

*1 This default value is set after the module is turned off and on or after the CPU module is reset and the reset is cancelled.
*2 This column indicates whether data can be read from or written to the buffer memory area through sequence programs.
R: Reading enabled
W: Writing enabled
*3 This column indicates whether the setting in the buffer memory area is automatically changed when the input range is
changed. Enable/disable of automatic change can be set on Switch Setting. For details, refer to Page 234, Section
8.3.3.
*4 Whether writing to the non-volatile memory by turning off and on Set value backup instruction (Yn8) is enabled in this
column. For details, refer to Page 235, Section 8.3.4.
*5 (TT) indicates the L60TCTT4 and L60TCTT4BW. (RT) indicates the L60TCRT4 and L60TCRT4BW. 3
*6 Available only when the heating-cooling control (expanded mode) is set on Switch Setting. With other models, this area
is handled as a system area.
*7 Available only when the mix control (expanded mode) is set on Switch Setting. With other models, this area is handled
as a system area.
*8 Available only when the L60TCTT4 or L60TCTT4BW is used. With other models, this area is handled as a system area.
*9 Available only in the setting mode. To enable the setting contents, turn off, on, and on Setting change instruction (YnB)
when Setting/operation mode instruction (Yn1) is off (during setting mode). Note that a write data error (error code:
†††3H) occurs if the setting is changed during the operation mode.
*10 By using the setting change rate limiter, whether to set temperature rise/temperature drop in a batch or individually can
be selected on Switch Setting. In the batch setting, the target of setting change rate limiter is only this area. In the
individual setting, this area is the setting target for the temperature rise. For details, refer to Page 155, Section
8.2.10.
*11 Available only when the L60TCTT4BW or L60TCRT4BW is used. With other models, this area is handled as a system
area.
*12 By using the setting change rate limiter, whether to set temperature rise/temperature drop in a batch or individually can
be selected on Switch Setting. In the batch setting, this area is handled as a system area. In the individual setting, this
area is the setting target for the temperature drop. For details, refer to Page 155, Section 8.2.10.
*13 Available only when the heating-cooling control (normal mode) is set on Switch Setting. With other models, this area is
handled as a system area.
*14 Available only when the mix control (normal mode) is set on Switch Setting. With other models, this area is handled as a
system area.

3.5 Buffer Memory List

75
 (2) Buffer memory address for error history

Non-
volatile
Address Read/ Automatic
Target Default memory
(decimal Setting contents Write setting Reference
channel value*1 write
(hexadecimal)) *2 *3
availability
*4

Page 415,
1279(4FFH) All CHs Latest address of error history 0 R × × Appendix 2
(95)
1280(500H) Error code

Upper 2 Lower 2
1281(501H)
digits of year digits of year
Page 415,
1282(502H) All CHs History 1 Error Month Day 0 R × × Appendix 2
occurrence (96)
1283(503H) time Hour Minute

Day of the
1284(504H) Second
week
1285(505H)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
1287(507H)

1288(508H)
Page 415,
Error code, error occurrence time (Data
to All CHs History 2 0 R × × Appendix 2
structure is the same as that of History 1.)
(96)
1292(50CH)

1293(50DH)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
1295(50FH)

1296(510H)
Page 415,
Error code, error occurrence time (Data
to All CHs History 3 0 R × × Appendix 2
structure is the same as that of History 1.)
(96)
1300(514H)

1301(515H)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
1303(517H)

1304(518H)
Page 415,
Error code, error occurrence time (Data
to All CHs History 4 0 R × × Appendix 2
structure is the same as that of History 1.)
(96)
1308(51CH)

1309(51DH)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
1311(51FH)

1312(520H)
Page 415,
Error code, error occurrence time (Data
to All CHs History 5 0 R × × Appendix 2
structure is the same as that of History 1.)
(96)
1316(524H)

1317(525H)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
1319(527H)

1320(528H)
Page 415,
Error code, error occurrence time (Data
to All CHs History 6 0 R × × Appendix 2
structure is the same as that of History 1.)
(96)
1324(52CH)

76
 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS

Non-
volatile
Address Read/ Automatic
Target Default memory
(decimal Setting contents Write setting Reference
channel value*1 write
(hexadecimal)) *2 *3
availability
*4

1325(52DH)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
1327(52FH) 3
1328(530H)
Page 415,
Error code, error occurrence time (Data
to All CHs History 7 0 R × × Appendix 2
structure is the same as that of History 1.)
(96)
1332(534H)

1333(535H)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
1335(537H)

1336(538H)
Page 415,
Error code, error occurrence time (Data
to All CHs History 8 0 R × × Appendix 2
structure is the same as that of History 1.)
(96)
1340(53CH)

1341(53DH)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
1343(53FH)

1344(540H)
Page 415,
Error code, error occurrence time (Data
to All CHs History 9 0 R × × Appendix 2
structure is the same as that of History 1.)
(96)
1348(544H)

1349(545H)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
1351(547H)

3.5 Buffer Memory List

1352(548H)
Page 415,
History Error code, error occurrence time (Data
to All CHs 0 R × × Appendix 2
10 structure is the same as that of History 1.)
(96)
1356(54CH)

1357(54DH)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
1359(54FH)

1360(550H)
Page 415,
History Error code, error occurrence time (Data
to All CHs 0 R × × Appendix 2
11 structure is the same as that of History 1.)
(96)
1364(554H)

1365(555H)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
1367(557H)

1368(558H)
Page 415,
History Error code, error occurrence time (Data
to All CHs 0 R × × Appendix 2
12 structure is the same as that of History 1.)
(96)
1372(55CH)

1373(55DH)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
1375(55FH)

1376(560H)
Page 415,
History Error code, error occurrence time (Data
to All CHs 0 R × × Appendix 2
13 structure is the same as that of History 1.)
(96)
1380(564H)

77
 Non-
volatile
Address Read/ Automatic
Target Default memory
(decimal Setting contents Write setting Reference
channel value*1 write
(hexadecimal)) *2 *3
availability
*4

1381(565H)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
1383(567H)

1384(568H)
Page 415,
History Error code, error occurrence time (Data
to All CHs 0 R × × Appendix 2
14 structure is the same as that of History 1.)
(96)
1388(56CH)

1389(56DH)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
1391(56FH)

1392(570H)
Page 415,
History Error code, error occurrence time (Data
to All CHs 0 R × × Appendix 2
15 structure is the same as that of History 1.)
(96)
1396(574H)

1397(575H)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
1399(577H)

1400(578H)
Page 415,
History Error code, error occurrence time (Data
to All CHs 0 R × × Appendix 2
16 structure is the same as that of History 1.)
(96)
1404(57CH)

1405(57DH)

to ⎯ System area ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
4095(FFFH)

*1 This default value is set after the module is turned off and on or after the CPU module is reset and the reset is cancelled.
*2 This column indicates whether data can be read from or written to the buffer memory area through sequence programs.
R: Reading enabled
W: Writing enabled
*3 This column indicates whether the setting in the buffer memory area is automatically changed when the input range is
changed. Enable/disable of automatic change can be set on Switch Setting. For details, refer to Page 234, Section
8.3.3.
*4 Whether writing to the non-volatile memory by turning off and on Set value backup instruction (Yn8) is enabled in this
column. For details, refer to Page 235, Section 8.3.4.

78
 CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION

CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION

This chapter describes the procedure before operating the L60TC4.

Using the module as a temperature input module Using the module as a temperature control module

Start Start

Module mounting Module mounting

Connect the L60TC4 in an arbitrary configuration. Connect the L60TC4 in an arbitrary configuration.
4
Wiring Wiring
Wire external devices to the L60TC4. Wire external devices to the L60TC4.
Page 93, Section 6.4 Page 93, Section 6.4

Initial setting Initial setting

Configure the initial setting using GX Works2. Configure the initial setting using GX Works2.
Page 107, CHAPTER 7 Page 107, CHAPTER 7

Programming Execution of auto tuning

Create and check the program of the temperature input Configure auto tuning to set PID constants.
processing. Page 144, Section 8.2.7 (5)
Page 250, CHAPTER 10

Programming
Warmup operation Create and check the program of the temperature
(when the L60TCTT4 or the L60TCTT4BW is used) control processing.
Configure warmup operation about 15 minutes before Page 250, CHAPTER 10
starting operation.

Warmup operation
Operation (when the L60TCTT4 or the L60TCTT4BW is used)
Configure warmup operation about 15 minutes before
starting operation.

Operation

When using the L60TCTT4 and the L60TCTT4BW which use the thermocouples as the temperature sensors, temperature
compensation must be executed properly. Perform warm-up operation about 15 minutes before starting operation.

79
Memo

80
 CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

This chapter describes the total configuration of the L60TC4, number of connectable modules, and applicable software
version.

5.1 Total Configuration

This section describes examples of system configurations when using the L60TC4.

(1) Connecting to a CPU module

5
Display unit
(optional)

I/O module or
intelligent function
Power supply module CPU module Temperature control module module END cover

5.1 Total Configuration

(2) Connecting to a head module

I/O module or
intelligent function
Power supply module Head module Temperature control module module END cover

81
5.2 Applicable Systems

(1) Number of connectable modules

A CPU module and a head module recognize one L60TCTT4BW or L60TCRT4BW as two modules. Therefore,
number of connectable modules reduces to half of other modules.
For the number of connectable modules, refer to the following manuals.
MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)
MELSEC-L CC-Link IE Field Network Head Module User's Manual

(2) Applicable software version

For applicable software version, refer to the following manuals.
MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)
MELSEC-L CC-Link IE Field Network Head Module User's Manual

(3) Temperature sensor

For usable temperature sensors, refer to the following.
• Types of usable temperature sensor ( Page 36, Section 3.2.2)

(4) Current sensor for heater disconnection detection

The following table lists current sensors for heater disconnection detection available with the L60TCTT4BW or
L60TCRT4BW.

Model name Remarks Manufacturer

CTL-12-S36-8 (0.0 to 100.0A)*1
CTL-12-S36-10 (0.0 to 100.0A)
CTL-12-S56-10 (0.0 to 100.0A) ⎯ U.R.D.Co., LTD.

CTL-6-P (0.00 to 20.00A)*1

CTL-6-P-H (0.00 to 20.00A)

*1 The CTL-12-S36-8 and CTL-6-P can be used although they have been discontinued.
For how to select current sensors for heater disconnection detection, refer to the following.
• Selecting a current sensor for heater disconnection detection ( Page 392, Appendix 2 (60))
• Setting of the number of second-winding of connected current sensor ( Page 393, Appendix 2 (62))

82
 CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

5.3 Precautions for System Configuration

The L60TC4 measures temperature based on the temperature of the terminal block. Therefore, depending on the
system configuration, temperature distribution of the terminal block can be uneven due to the effect of heat generated
from modules, and the measured temperature may differ from actual temperature (especially when two or more
L60TC4 modules are connected next to each other or the L60TC4 is mounted next to the power supply module or CPU
module).
In this case, the difference between measured value and actual temperature can be reduced by the following methods.

(1) Using the sensor compensation function

The measured temperature can be corrected to the actual temperature by this function.
For details on the sensor compensation function, refer to the following.
Page 223, Section 8.3.2
5

5.3 Precautions for System Configuration

83
CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING

This chapter describes the installation and wiring of the L60TC4.

6.1 Installation Environment and Installation Position

For precautions for installation environment and installation position, refer to the following.
MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)
MELSEC-L CC-Link IE Field Network Head Module User's Manual

84
 CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING

6.2 Terminal Block

(1) Precautions
Tighten the terminal block screws within the following specified torque range.
Undertightening screws may cause module dropping, failures, or malfunction. Overtightening screws can damage
the screw and/or module, resulting in module dropping, short-circuit, or malfunction.

Screw location Tightening torque range

Terminal screw (M3 screw) 0.42 to 0.58N • m
Terminal block mounting screw (M3.5 screw) 0.66 to 0.89N • m

The following table shows the applicable solderless terminal installed to the terminal block. For wiring, use the
wire applicable to the following wire and mount with the applicable tightening torque. Use a UL-approved
solderless terminal and tools recommended by the manufacturer of the solderless terminal. The sleeve solderless
terminal cannot be used.
6
Solderless terminal Wire
Applicable Temperature
Model name Wire diameter Type Material
tightening torque rating
R1.25-3 0.42 to 0.58N • m 22 to 18 AWG Stranded wire Copper wire 75°C or more

6.2 Terminal Block

85
 (2) Signal names of terminal blocks
The following shows signal names of terminal blocks.

(a) L60TCTT4, L60TCTT4BW (terminal block for I/O)

Terminal Temperature input Standard control
Indication
number Symbol Name Symbol Name
1 OUT1 ⎯ Unused L1 CH1 Output
2 OUT2 ⎯ Unused L2 CH2 Output
3 OUT3 ⎯ Unused L3 CH3 Output
4 OUT4 ⎯ Unused L4 CH4 Output
5 COM ⎯ Unused COM- Output common
6 NC NC Unused NC Unused
Monitor 1 CH1
7 IN1+ MT1+ CH1+
thermocouple + Thermocouple +
Monitor 2 CH2
8 IN2+ MT2+ CH2+
thermocouple + Thermocouple +
Monitor 1 CH1
9 IN1- MT1- CH1-
thermocouple - Thermocouple -
Monitor 2 CH2
10 IN2- MT2- CH2-
thermocouple - Thermocouple -
11 NC NC Unused NC Unused
Cold junction Cold junction
temperature temperature
12 CJ CJ CJ
compensation compensation
resistor resistor
13 NC NC Unused NC Unused
Cold junction Cold junction
temperature temperature
14 CJ CJ CJ
compensation compensation
resistor resistor
Monitor 3 CH3
15 IN3+ MT3+ CH3+
thermocouple + Thermocouple +
Monitor 4 CH4
16 IN4+ MT4+ CH4+
thermocouple + Thermocouple +
Monitor 3 CH3
17 IN3- MT3- CH3-
thermocouple - Thermocouple -
Monitor 4 CH4
18 IN4- MT4- CH4-
thermocouple - Thermocouple -

86
 CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING

Heating-cooling control Heating-cooling control Mix control Mix control

Terminal
Indication (normal mode) (expanded mode) (normal mode) (expanded mode)
number
Symbol Name Symbol Name Symbol Name Symbol Name
CH1 Heating CH1 Heating CH1 Heating CH1 Heating
1 OUT1 L1H L1H L1H L1H
output output output output
CH1 Cooling CH1 Cooling CH1 Cooling CH1 Cooling
2 OUT2 L1C L1C L1C L1C
output output output output
CH2 Heating CH2 Heating
3 OUT3 L2H L2H L3 CH3 Output L3 CH3 Output
output output
CH2 Cooling CH2 Cooling
4 OUT4 L2C L2C L4 CH4 Output L4 CH4 Output
output output
5 COM COM- Output common COM- Output common COM- Output common COM- Output common
6 NC NC Unused NC Unused NC Unused NC Unused
CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1
7 IN1+ CH1+ CH1+ CH1+ CH1+
Thermocouple + Thermocouple + Thermocouple + Thermocouple +
CH2 CH2 Monitor 2 CH2
8 IN2+ CH2+ CH2+ MT2+ CH2+
Thermocouple + Thermocouple + thermocouple + Thermocouple +
CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1
9 IN1- CH1-
Thermocouple -
CH1-
Thermocouple -
CH1-
Thermocouple -
CH1-
Thermocouple - 6
CH2 CH2 Monitor 2 CH2
10 IN2- CH2- CH2- MT2- CH2-
Thermocouple - Thermocouple - thermocouple - Thermocouple -
11 NC NC Unused NC Unused NC Unused NC Unused
Cold junction Cold junction Cold junction Cold junction
temperature temperature temperature temperature
12 CJ CJ CJ CJ CJ
compensation compensation compensation compensation
resistor resistor resistor resistor
13 NC NC Unused NC Unused NC Unused NC Unused
Cold junction Cold junction Cold junction Cold junction
temperature temperature temperature temperature
14 CJ CJ CJ CJ CJ
compensation compensation compensation compensation

6.2 Terminal Block

resistor resistor resistor resistor
Monitor 3 CH3 CH3 CH3
15 IN3+ MT3+ CH3+ CH3+ CH3+
thermocouple + Thermocouple + Thermocouple + Thermocouple +
Monitor 4 CH4 CH4 CH4
16 IN4+ MT4+ CH4+ CH4+ CH4+
thermocouple + Thermocouple + Thermocouple + Thermocouple +
Monitor 3 CH3 CH3 CH3
17 IN3- MT3- CH3- CH3- CH3-
thermocouple - Thermocouple - Thermocouple - Thermocouple -
Monitor 4 CH4 CH4 CH4
18 IN4- MT4- CH4- CH4- CH4-
thermocouple - Thermocouple - Thermocouple - Thermocouple -

Do not remove the cold junction temperature compensation resistor from the terminal block.

87
 (b) L60TCRT4, L60TCRT4BW (terminal block for I/O)
Terminal Temperature input Standard control
Indication
number Symbol Name Symbol Name
1 OUT1 ⎯ Unused L1 CH1 Output
2 OUT2 ⎯ Unused L2 CH2 Output
3 OUT3 ⎯ Unused L3 CH3 Output
4 OUT4 ⎯ Unused L4 CH4 Output
5 COM ⎯ Unused COM- Output common
6 NC NC Unused NC Unused
Monitor 1
CH1 Resistance
7 IN1 A MT1 A resistance CH1 A
thermometer A
thermometer A
Monitor 2
CH2 Resistance
8 IN2 A MT2 A resistance CH2 A
thermometer A
thermometer A
Monitor 1
CH1 Resistance
9 IN1 B MT1 B resistance CH1 B
thermometer B
thermometer B
Monitor 2
CH2 Resistance
10 IN2 B MT2 B resistance CH2 B
thermometer B
thermometer B
Monitor 1
CH1 Resistance
11 IN1 b MT1 b resistance CH1 b
thermometer b
thermometer b
Monitor 2
CH2 Resistance
12 IN2 b MT2 b resistance CH2 b
thermometer b
thermometer b
Monitor 3
CH3 Resistance
13 IN3 A MT3 A resistance CH3 A
thermometer A
thermometer A
Monitor 4
CH4 Resistance
14 IN4 A MT4 A resistance CH4 A
thermometer A
thermometer A
Monitor 3
CH3 Resistance
15 IN3 B MT3 B resistance CH3 B
thermometer B
thermometer B
Monitor 4
CH4 Resistance
16 IN4 B MT4 B resistance CH4 B
thermometer B
thermometer B
Monitor 3
CH3 Resistance
17 IN3 b MT3 b resistance CH3 b
thermometer b
thermometer b
Monitor 4
CH4 Resistance
18 IN4 b MT4 b resistance CH4 b
thermometer b
thermometer b

88
 CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING

Heating-cooling control Heating-cooling control Mix control Mix control

Terminal
Indication (normal mode) (expanded mode) (normal mode) (expanded mode)
number
Symbol Name Symbol Name Symbol Name Symbol Name
CH1 Heating CH1 Heating CH1 Heating CH1 Heating
1 OUT1 L1H L1H L1H L1H
output output output output
CH1 Cooling CH1 Cooling CH1 Cooling CH1 Cooling
2 OUT2 L1C L1C L1C L1C
output output output output
CH2 Heating CH2 Heating
3 OUT3 L2H L2H L3 CH3 Output L3 CH3 Output
output output
CH2 Cooling CH2 Cooling
4 OUT4 L2C L2C L4 CH4 Output L4 CH4 Output
output output
5 COM COM- Output common COM- Output common COM- Output common COM- Output common
6 NC NC Unused NC Unused NC Unused NC Unused
CH1 Resistance CH1 Resistance CH1 Resistance CH1 Resistance
7 IN1 A CH1 A CH1 A CH1 A CH1 A
thermometer A thermometer A thermometer A thermometer A
Monitor 2
CH2 Resistance CH2 Resistance CH2 Resistance
8 IN2 A CH2 A CH2 A MT2 A resistance CH2 A
thermometer A thermometer A thermometer A
thermometer A

9 IN1 B CH1 B
CH1 Resistance
CH1 B
CH1 Resistance
CH1 B
CH1 Resistance
CH1 B
CH1 Resistance 6
thermometer B thermometer B thermometer B thermometer B
Monitor 2
CH2 Resistance CH2 Resistance CH2 Resistance
10 IN2 B CH2 B CH2 B MT2 B resistance CH2 B
thermometer B thermometer B thermometer B
thermometer B
CH1 Resistance CH1 Resistance CH1 Resistance CH1 Resistance
11 IN1 b CH1 b CH1 b CH1 b CH1 b
thermometer b thermometer b thermometer b thermometer b
Monitor 2
CH2 Resistance CH2 Resistance CH2 Resistance
12 IN2 b CH2 b CH2 b MT2 b resistance CH2 b
thermometer b thermometer b thermometer b
thermometer b
Monitor 3
CH3 Resistance CH3 Resistance CH3 Resistance
13 IN3 A MT3 A resistance CH3 A CH3 A CH3 A
thermometer A thermometer A thermometer A

6.2 Terminal Block

thermometer A
Monitor 4
CH4 Resistance CH4 Resistance CH4 Resistance
14 IN4 A MT4 A resistance CH4 A CH4 A CH4 A
thermometer A thermometer A thermometer A
thermometer A
Monitor 3
CH3 Resistance CH3 Resistance CH3 Resistance
15 IN3 B MT3 B resistance CH3 B CH3 B CH3 B
thermometer B thermometer B thermometer B
thermometer B
Monitor 4
CH4 Resistance CH4 Resistance CH4 Resistance
16 IN4 B MT4 B resistance CH4 B CH4 B CH4 B
thermometer B thermometer B thermometer B
thermometer B
Monitor 3
CH3 Resistance CH3 Resistance CH3 Resistance
17 IN3 b MT3 b resistance CH3 b CH3 b CH3 b
thermometer b thermometer b thermometer b
thermometer b
Monitor 4
CH4 Resistance CH4 Resistance CH4 Resistance
18 IN4 b MT4 b resistance CH4 b CH4 b CH4 b
thermometer b thermometer b thermometer b
thermometer b

89
 (c) L60TCTT4BW (terminal block for CT), L60TCRT4BW (terminal block for CT)
Terminal Standard control
Indication
number Symbol Name
1 NC NC Unused
2 CT1 CT1 CT input 1
3 CT1 CT1 CT input 1
4 CT2 CT2 CT input 2
5 CT2 CT2 CT input 2
6 CT3 CT3 CT input 3
7 CT3 CT3 CT input 3
8 CT4 CT4 CT input 4
9 CT4 CT4 CT input 4
10 CT5 CT5 CT input 5
11 CT5 CT5 CT input 5
12 CT6 CT6 CT input 6
13 CT6 CT6 CT input 6
14 CT7 CT7 CT input 7
Terminal block Terminal block Terminal block Terminal block 15 CT7 CT7 CT input 7
for CT for I/O for CT for I/O
16 CT8 CT8 CT input 8
17 CT8 CT8 CT input 8
18 NC NC Unused

90
 CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING

(3) Removal and installation of the terminal block

The following shows how to remove and install the terminal block.

(a) Removal procedure

1. Open the terminal cover and loosen the terminal
block mounting screw.

Terminal block
mounting screw

2. Using the terminal block fixing hole as a supporting

6
point, remove the terminal block.

(b) Installation procedure

6.2 Terminal Block

1. Fully insert the projections on the top of the
Terminal block fixing hole terminal block into the terminal block fixing holes of
the module and press the terminal block until it
snaps into place.

2. Open the terminal cover and tighten the terminal

block mounting screw.

Terminal block
mounting screw

91
6.3 Wiring precautions

External wiring that is less susceptible to noise is required as a condition of enabling a highly reliable system and
making full use of the capabilities of the L60TC4.
The following figure shows the wiring precautions.
• Use separate cables with the AC control circuit and the L60TC4's external input signals to avoid the
influence of AC side surges and induction.
• Do not bunch the cables with the main circuit cable, high-voltage cable, or load cables from other than the
programmable controller, or install them close to each other.
Install the cables far apart from high-frequency circuit cable, such as the high-voltage cable and inverter load
main circuit, as much as possible.
This increases the noises, surges, and induction.
• Ground the shield line or shielded cable at one end on the programmable controller side. However,
depending on the external noise condition, it should be grounded externally.
• For conformance of this product with the EMC Directive and Low Voltage Directive, refer to the following.
MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)
MELSEC-L CC-Link IE Field Network Head Module User's Manual

92
 CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING

6.4 External wiring

The following figure shows the external wiring.

6.4.1 L60TCTT4

(1) In the temperature input mode

L60TCTT4

L1
Internal
circuit
L2

Unused
L4
Internal
circuit 6
COM-
Object to be
temperature-measured
*1
CH1+
Filter
CH1-

CH2+ Internal
Filter circuit
CH2-
*1

CH4+
Filter
CH4-

6.4.1 L60TCTT4
6.4 External wiring
*1 Use the shielded compensation lead wire.

Use the compensation lead wire for the cable of thermocouple. If the compensation lead wire is not used, and when the cold
junction temperature compensation resistor is away from the end tip of thermocouple, the (ambient) temperature difference
may lead to a faulty temperature process value (PV).

Reference junction
Thermocouple extension wire (OK) L60TCTT4(BW)

Shielded cable (NG)

A Cold junction
temperature
compensation
resistor Terminal block
B A: Reference junction of the
(Ambient) temperature difference
thermocouple
B: Cold junction temperature
compensation resistor

93
 (2) In the temperature control mode

(a) In the standard control

L60TCTT4
*2

L1
Internal
circuit
L2
*2
L4
Internal
circuit
COM-

24VDC
*1
CH1+
Filter
CH1-
Object to be
controlled Internal
CH2+
Filter circuit
CH2-
*1

CH4+
Filter
CH4-

*1 Use the shielded compensation lead wire.

*2 Use the shielded cable.

Use the compensation lead wire for the cable of thermocouple. If the compensation lead wire is not used, and when the cold
junction temperature compensation resistor is away from the end tip of thermocouple, the (ambient) temperature difference
may lead to a faulty temperature process value (PV).

Reference junction
Thermocouple extension wire (OK) L60TCTT4(BW)

Shielded cable (NG)

A Cold junction
temperature
compensation
resistor Terminal block
B A: Reference junction of the
(Ambient) temperature difference
thermocouple
B: Cold junction temperature
compensation resistor

94
 CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING

(b) In the heating-cooling control

L60TCTT4
*2
L1H
Internal
circuit

*2
L1C
Internal
circuit

*2
L2H
Internal
circuit

*2
L2C
Internal
circuit

6
COM-
24VDC
Heating Cooling
Object to be *1
controlled
CH1+
Filter
CH1-

Internal
circuit
*1
CH2+ Filter
CH2-

*1 Use the shielded compensation lead wire.

*2 Use the shielded cable.

6.4.1 L60TCTT4
6.4 External wiring
Use the compensation lead wire for the cable of thermocouple. If the compensation lead wire is not used, and when the cold
junction temperature compensation resistor is away from the end tip of thermocouple, the (ambient) temperature difference
may lead to a faulty temperature process value (PV).

Reference junction
Thermocouple extension wire (OK) L60TCTT4(BW)

Shielded cable (NG)

A Cold junction
temperature
compensation
resistor Terminal block
B A: Reference junction of the
(Ambient) temperature difference
thermocouple
B: Cold junction temperature
compensation resistor

95
6.4.2 L60TCTT4BW

(1) In the temperature input mode

L60TCTT4BW

L1
Internal
circuit
L2

Unused
L4
Internal
circuit
COM-

*1
CH1+
Filter
CH1-
Controlled
object
CH2+ Internal
Filter
CH2- circuit
*1
CH4+
Filter
CH4-

Connector
Connector

CT1
CT1

CT2 CT input circuit

Unused
CT2

CT8
CT8

*1 Use the shielded compensation lead wire.

Use the compensation lead wire for the cable of thermocouple. If the compensation lead wire is not used, and when the cold
junction temperature compensation resistor is away from the end tip of thermocouple, the (ambient) temperature difference
may lead to a faulty temperature process value (PV).

Reference junction
Thermocouple extension wire (OK) L60TCTT4(BW)

Shielded cable (NG)

A Cold junction
temperature
compensation
resistor Terminal block
B A: Reference junction of the
(Ambient) temperature difference
thermocouple
B: Cold junction temperature
compensation resistor

96
 CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING

(2) In the temperature control mode

(a) In the standard control

L60TCTT4BW
*2
L1
Internal
circuit
L2

*2
L4
Internal
circuit
COM-
Current sensor
(CT) 24VDC
*1
CH1+
Filter
CH1-

6
Object to be
controlled
CH2+ Internal
Filter
CH2- circuit
*1
CH4+
Filter
CH4-

Connector
Connector

*2
CT1
CT1

6.4.2 L60TCTT4BW
6.4 External wiring
CT2 CT input circuit
CT2

CT8
CT8

*1 Use the shielded compensation lead wire.

*2 Use the shielded cable.

● To use the heater disconnection detection function, the CT input channel assignment must be set. Since the CT1 is used
in the loop of CH1 in the above wiring example, set CH1(1) to CT1 CT input channel assignment setting (Un\G264).
● Use the compensation lead wire for the cable of thermocouple. If the compensation lead wire is not used, and when the
cold junction temperature compensation resistor is away from the end tip of thermocouple, the (ambient) temperature
difference may lead to a faulty temperature process value (PV).

Reference junction
Thermocouple extension wire (OK) L60TCTT4(BW)

Shielded cable (NG)

A Cold junction
temperature
compensation
resistor Terminal block
B A: Reference junction of the
(Ambient) temperature difference
thermocouple
B: Cold junction temperature
compensation resistor

97
 (b) In the heating-cooling control

L60TCTT4BW
*2
L1H
Internal
circuit

*2
L1C
Internal
circuit

*2
L2H
Internal
circuit

*2
L2C
Internal
circuit
Current
sensor COM-
(CT) Cooling 24VDC
*1
CH1+ Filter
Heating CH1-
Object to be
Internal
controlled circuit
*1

CH2+ Filter
CH2-
Connector
Connector
*2
CT1
CT1

CT2
CT2 CT input circuit

CT8
CT8

*1 Use the shielded compensation lead wire.

*2 Use the shielded cable.

● To use the heater disconnection detection function, the CT input channel assignment must be set. Since the CT1 is used
in the loop of CH1 in the above wiring example, set CH1(1) to CT1 CT input channel assignment setting (Un\G264).
● Use the compensation lead wire for the cable of thermocouple. If the compensation lead wire is not used, and when the
cold junction temperature compensation resistor is away from the end tip of thermocouple, the (ambient) temperature
difference may lead to a faulty temperature process value (PV).

Reference junction
Thermocouple extension wire (OK) L60TCTT4(BW)

Shielded cable (NG)

A Cold junction
temperature
compensation
resistor Terminal block
B A: Reference junction of the
(Ambient) temperature difference
thermocouple
B: Cold junction temperature
compensation resistor

98
 CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING

6.4.3 L60TCRT4

(1) In the temperature input mode

L60TCRT4

L1
Internal
circuit
L2

Unused
L4
Internal
circuit
COM-
Object to be
temperature-measured
*1
A
CH1 A Filter
B
CH1 B
b
CH1 b

CH2 A
CH2 B
Filter Internal
circuit
6
CH2 b
*1
CH4 A
Filter
CH4 B
CH4 b

*1 Use the shielded cable.

6.4.3 L60TCRT4
6.4 External wiring

99
 (2) In the temperature control mode

(a) In the standard control

L60TCRT4
*1
L1
Internal
circuit
L2
*1
L4
Internal
circuit
COM-

24VDC
*1
A
CH1 A Filter
B
CH1 B
b
CH1 b
Object to be
controlled
CH2 A
Filter Internal
CH2 B circuit
CH2 b
*1
CH4 A
Filter
CH4 B
CH4 b

*1 Use the shielded cable.

100
 CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING

(b) In the heating-cooling control

L60TCRT4
*1
L1H
Internal
circuit

*1
L1C
Internal
circuit

*1
L2H
Internal
circuit

*1
L2C
Internal
circuit

6
COM-
24VDC
Heating Cooling *1
A
CH1 A Filter
B
CH1 B
b
CH1 b
Object to be Internal
circuit
controlled *1

CH2 A
Filter
CH2 B
CH2 b

*1 Use the shielded cable.

6.4.3 L60TCRT4
6.4 External wiring

101
6.4.4 L60TCRT4BW

(1) In the temperature input mode

L60TCRT4BW

L1
Internal
circuit
L2

Unused
L4
Internal
circuit
COM-

*1
A
CH1 A Filter
B
CH1 B
b
CH1 b
Controlled
object
CH2 A
Filter Internal
CH2 B circuit
*1 CH2 b

CH4 A
Filter
CH4 B
CH4 b

Connector
Connector

CT1
CT1

CT2
Unused CT2 CT input circuit

CT8
CT8

*1 Use the shielded cable.

102
 CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING

(2) In the temperature control mode

(a) In the standard control

L60TCRT4BW
*1
L1
Internal
circuit
L2
*1
L4
Internal
circuit

Current sensor COM-

(CT) 24VDC
*1
A
CH1 A Filter
B
CH1 B
b
CH1 b
Object to be
controlled
CH2 A
CH2 B
Filter Internal
circuit
6
*1 CH2 b

CH4 A
Filter
CH4 B
CH4 b

Connector
Connector
*1
CT1
CT1

6.4.4 L60TCRT4BW
6.4 External wiring
CT2
CT2 CT input circuit

CT8
CT8

*1 Use the shielded cable.

To use the heater disconnection detection function, the CT input channel assignment must be set.
Since the CT1 is used in the loop of CH1 in the above wiring example, set CH1(1) to CT1 CT input channel assignment
setting (Un\G264).

103
 (b) In the heating-cooling control

L60TCRT4BW
*1
L1H
Internal
circuit

*1
L1C
Internal
circuit

*1
L2H
Internal
circuit

*1
L2C
Internal
circuit

COM-
Current
sensor 24VDC
(CT) Cooling *1
A
CH1 A Filter
B
CH1 B
Heating b
CH1 b Internal
Object to be circuit
controlled *1
CH2 A
Filter
CH2 B
CH2 b

Connector
Connector
*1
CT1
CT1

CT2
CT2 CT input circuit

CT8
CT8

*1 Use the shielded cable.

To use the heater disconnection detection function, the CT input channel assignment must be set.
Since the CT1 is used in the loop of CH1 in the above wiring example, set CH1(1) to CT1 CT input channel assignment
setting (Un\G264).

104
 CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING

6.5 Heater disconnection detection wiring and setting

example for three-phase heater

The following figure shows a wiring and setting example to detect a three-phase heater disconnection by using the
heater disconnection detection function.

L60TCTT4BW
L60TCRT4BW

L1
L2
L3
L4
COM-

Object to be CH1 6
controlled CH2
CH3
CH4

CT1
CT1
CT2
CT2
CT3

6.5 Heater disconnection detection wiring and setting example for three-phase heater
CT3
To three-phase heater (used in CH2 loop)
CT4
CT4
CT5
To single-phase heater (used in CH3 loop)
CT5
CT6
To single-phase heater (used in CH4 loop)
CT6
CT7
CT7
Unused
CT8
CT8

Three-phase heater disconnection detection is executed by measuring the currents of two of the three cables.
In the above wiring example, set CT† CT input channel assignment setting (Un\G264 to Un\G271) as indicated below.

CT input Buffer memory address Set value

CT1 Un\G264 1
CT2 Un\G265 1
CT3 Un\G266 2
CT4 Un\G267 2
CT5 Un\G268 3
CT6 Un\G269 4
CT7 Un\G270 0
CT8 Un\G271 0

105
6.6 Unused Channel Setting

When no temperature sensor is connected to a channel, the L60TC4 performs upscale processing for the channel.
Therefore, when a temperature sensor is not connected to a channel where no temperature control is performed, the
module determines that the temperature process value (PV) has exceeded the temperature measurement range for
the input range, and the ALM LED blinks.
Once the unused channel setting is configured, no alert will occur for a channel where a temperature sensor is not
connected. To prevent faulty alert detection, configure the unused channel setting.

(1) Setting method

Set a value in CH† unused channel setting (Un\G61, Un\G93, Un\G125, Un\G157).
For details on the setting, refer to the following.
Page 376, Appendix 2 (35)
The following table shows the relationship between the setting value and control status.

Control status
Set value
PID control Temperature judgment Alert judgment
The controls are performed.
0: Use
(However, it depends on other setting status.)
1: Unused The controls are not performed.

Remark
Even if the unused channel setting is configured, the sampling cycle does not change.

106
 CHAPTER 7 VARIOUS SETTINGS

CHAPTER 7 VARIOUS SETTINGS

This chapter describes the setting procedures of the L60TC4.

After writing the contents of the new module, switch setting, parameter setting and auto refresh setting into the CPU module,
reset the CPU module, switch STOP → RUN → STOP → RUN, or turn off and on the power, to enable the setting contents.

7.1 Addition of Modules

Add the model name of the L60TC4 to use on the project.

(1) Addition procedure

Open the "New Module..." window.

Project window [Intelligent Function Module] Right-click [New Module...]

7

7.1 Addition of Modules

Item Description
Module Type Set "Temperature Control Module".
Module Selection
Module Name Select the module name to connect.
Mounted Slot No. Set the slot No. where the module is connected.
The start I/O number (hexadecimal) of the target module is set
Mount Position
Specify start XY address according to the mounted slot No.. An arbitrary start I/O number can
be also set.
Title Setting Title Set an arbitrary title.

107
7.2 Switch Setting

Configure settings such as the output setting at CPU stop error and the control mode selection which are used in each
channel.

(1) Setting method

Open the "Switch Setting" window.

Project window [Intelligent Function Module] Module name [Switch Setting]

(a) When using the L60TC4 as a temperature input module

Select "Temperature
Input Mode".

Item Description Set value Reference

Set this item to change data of the
Auto-setting at related buffer memory automatically
• 0: Disable Page 234,
Input Range when the input range is changed so
• 1: Enable Section 8.3.3
Change that an error outside the setting range
does not occur.
Sampling
• 0: 500ms (default value) Page 117,
Cycle Select the sampling cycle.
• 1: 250ms Section 8.1.2
Selection*1

*1 Immediately after the setting is changed, a set value discrepancy error (error code: 0††EH) occurs. To clear the set
value discrepancy error, turn off, on, and off Set value backup instruction (Yn8).

108
 CHAPTER 7 VARIOUS SETTINGS

(b) When using the L60TC4 as a temperature control module

Select "Temperature
Control Mode".

Item Description Set value Reference

7.2 Switch Setting

Set whether to hold or clear the transistor output status
Output Setting at • 0: CLEAR (default value) Page 128,
when a CPU stop error occurs or when a CPU module is
CPU Stop Error • 1: HOLD Section 8.2.2
switched from RUN to STOP.
• 0: Standard Control
• 1: Heating/Cooling Control (Normal
Mode)
Control Mode Page 126,
Set the control mode. • 2: Heating/Cooling Control (Expanded
Selection*1 Section 8.2.1
Mode)
• 3: Mix Control (Normal Mode)
• 4: Mix Control (Expanded Mode)
• 0: Temperature Rise/Temperature Drop
Setting Change Select "batch" setting or "individual" setting for the Page 155,
Batch setting
Rate Limiter variation limiter set value at temperature rise and drop Section
• 1: Temperature Rise/Temperature Drop
Setting when setting the variation of the set value (SV). 8.2.10
Individual setting
Control Output
Cycle Unit Select 0.1s or 1s as a unit for the cycle of turning on and • 0: 1s cycle (default value) Page 140,
Selection off the transistor output. • 1: 0.1s cycle Section 8.2.6
Setting*1
Set this item to change data of the related buffer
Auto-setting at
memory automatically when the input range is changed • 0: Disable Page 234,
Input Range
so that an error which is out of the setting does not • 1: Enable Section 8.3.3
Change
occur.
Sampling Cycle • 0: 500ms (default value)
Select the sampling cycle. ⎯
Selection*1 • 1: 250ms

*1 Immediately after the setting is changed, a set value discrepancy error (error code: 0††EH) occurs. To clear the set
value discrepancy error, turn off, on, and off Set value backup instruction (Yn8).

109
7.3 Parameter Setting

Set the parameter for each channel.

By setting parameters here, the parameter setting is not required on a program.

(1) Setting method

Open the "Parameter" window.
1. Start up "Parameter" on the Project window.

Project window [Intelligent Function Module] Module name [Parameter]

Clear Value for

Gray Cells button

Pull-down list type

Text box type

2. Click to set items unnecessary for the mode set on Switch Setting to 0.
3. Double-click the item to change the setting, and enter the setting value.
• Items to select from a pull-down list
Double-click the item to set to display the pull-down list. Select the item.
• Items to enter in a text box
Double-click the item to set, and enter the value.

Remark
If writing is performed without setting unnecessary items for the mode set on Switch Setting to 0, a write data error (error
code: †††2H) may occur.

For details on setting values, refer to the following.

110
 CHAPTER 7 VARIOUS SETTINGS

Operation
Setting item Reference
mode
Input range Page 345, Appendix 2 (12)
Conversion enable/disable setting Page 402, Appendix 2 (75)
Sensor correction value setting Page 363, Appendix 2 (21)
Primary delay digital filter setting Page 365, Appendix 2 (24)
Process value (PV) scaling function enable/disable setting Page 405, Appendix 2 (80)
Process value (PV) scaling lower limit value
Page 406, Appendix 2 (81)
Process value (PV) scaling upper limit value
Cold junction temperature compensation selection Page 384, Appendix 2 (49)
Temperature
Process alarm alert output enable/disable setting Page 387, Appendix 2 (53)
Input Mode
Process alarm lower lower limit value
Process alarm lower upper limit value
Page 388, Appendix 2 (54)
Process alarm upper lower limit value
Process alarm upper upper limit value
Rate alarm alert output enable/disable setting Page 389, Appendix 2 (55)
Rate alarm alert detection cycle Page 389, Appendix 2 (56)
Rate alarm upper limit value
Page 390, Appendix 2 (57)
Rate alarm lower limit value
7

7.3 Parameter Setting

111
 Operation
Setting item Reference
mode
Input range Page 345, Appendix 2 (12)
Set value (SV) setting Page 354, Appendix 2 (14)
Unused channel setting Page 376, Appendix 2 (35)
Proportional band (P) setting/Heating control proportional band setting
(Ph) Page 355, Appendix 2 (15)
Cooling proportional band (Pc) setting
Integral time (I) setting Page 357, Appendix 2 (16)
Derivative time (D) setting Page 357, Appendix 2 (17)
Control output cycle setting/Heating control output cycle setting Page 364, Appendix 2 (23)
Control response parameter Page 366, Appendix 2 (25)
Stop Mode Setting Page 353, Appendix 2 (13)
PID continuation flag Page 381, Appendix 2 (43)
Forward/reverse action setting Page 371, Appendix 2 (30)
Upper limit setting limiter
Page 372, Appendix 2 (31)
Lower limit setting limiter
Setting change rate limiter or Setting change rate limiter (Temperature
Temperature rise) Page 369, Appendix 2 (28)
control mode Setting change rate limiter (Temperature drop)
Sensor correction value setting Page 363, Appendix 2 (21)
Primary delay digital filter setting Page 365, Appendix 2 (24)
Upper limit output limiter/Heating upper limit output limiter
Page 360, Appendix 2 (19)
Lower limit output limiter
Output variation limiter Page 362, Appendix 2 (20)
Adjustment sensitivity (dead band) setting Page 363, Appendix 2 (22)
Self-tuning setting Page 399, Appendix 2 (72)
Temperature conversion setting Page 403, Appendix 2 (76)
Cooling method setting Page 404, Appendix 2 (77)
Cooling upper limit output limiter Page 360, Appendix 2 (19)
Cooling control output cycle setting Page 364, Appendix 2 (23)
Overlap/dead band setting Page 404, Appendix 2 (78)
Process value (PV) scaling function enable/disable setting Page 405, Appendix 2 (80)
Process value (PV) scaling lower limit value
Page 406, Appendix 2 (81)
Process value (PV) scaling upper limit value
Derivative action selection Page 407, Appendix 2 (83)

112
 CHAPTER 7 VARIOUS SETTINGS

Operation
Setting item Reference
mode
Simultaneous temperature rise group setting Page 407, Appendix 2 (84)
Simultaneous temperature rise AT mode selection Page 409, Appendix 2 (87)
Setting change rate limiter Unit time setting Page 411, Appendix 2 (89)
Peak current suppression control group setting Page 412, Appendix 2 (90)
Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants Page 378, Appendix 2 (37)
Cold junction temperature compensation selection Page 384, Appendix 2 (49)
Alert 1 mode setting to Alert 4 mode setting Page 386, Appendix 2 (52)
Alert set value 1 to Alert set value 4 Page 358, Appendix 2 (18)
Alert dead band setting Page 379, Appendix 2 (38)
Number of alert delay Page 379, Appendix 2 (39)
Loop disconnection detection judgment time Page 374, Appendix 2 (33)
Loop disconnection detection dead band Page 375, Appendix 2 (34)
Heater disconnection alert setting Page 373, Appendix 2 (32)
Temperature
Heater disconnection/output off-time current error detection delay count Page 380, Appendix 2 (40)
Control Mode
Heater disconnection compensation function selection Page 381, Appendix 2 (44)
AT Bias Page 370, Appendix 2 (29)
Auto tuning mode selection Page 385, Appendix 2 (51)
Temperature rise completion range setting Page 380, Appendix 2 (41) 7
Temperature rise completion soak time setting Page 381, Appendix 2 (42)
Transistor output monitor ON delay time setting Page 382, Appendix 2 (45)
Resolution of the manipulated value for output with another analog
Page 384, Appendix 2 (48)
module
CT monitor method switching Page 382, Appendix 2 (46)
CT† CT input channel assignment setting Page 391, Appendix 2 (59)

7.3 Parameter Setting

CT† CT selection Page 392, Appendix 2 (60)
CT† Reference heater current value Page 393, Appendix 2 (61)
CT† CT ratio setting Page 393, Appendix 2 (62)

4. When using CH2 to CH4, follow the step 3 described earlier.

113
7.4 Auto Refresh

Buffer memory data can be transferred to specified devices using this function.
By using this auto refresh setting, reading or writing is not required on a program.

(1) Setting method

Open the "Auto_Refresh" window.
1. Start "Auto_Refresh" on the Project window.

Project window [Intelligent Function Module] Module name [Auto_Refresh]

2. Click the item to set, and enter the auto refresh target device.

7.5 Auto Tuning

For how to execute auto tuning, refer to the following.

Page 144, Section 8.2.7 (5)

7.6 Sensor Correction

For how to execute sensor correction, refer to the following.

Page 223, Section 8.3.2

114
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

This chapter explains the details of the L60TC4 functions and how to set each function.
For details on I/O signals and the buffer memory, refer to the following:
• Details of I/O signals ( Page 323, Appendix 1)
• Details of the buffer memory ( Page 334, Appendix 2)

For the functions indicated with the icons Standard and Heating-cooling
, or with Common , the following terms are used,
unless otherwise specified.
• Proportional band (P): includes heating proportional band (Ph) and cooling proportional band (Pc)
• Manipulated value (MV): includes manipulated value for heating (MVh) and manipulated value for cooling (MVc)
• Manipulated value (MV) for output with another analog module: includes manipulated value of heating (MVh) for
output with another analog module and manipulated value of cooling (MVc) for output with another analog module
• Transistor output: includes heating transistor output and cooling transistor output
• Upper limit output limiter value: includes heating upper limit output limiter value and cooling upper limit output
limiter value
• Control output cycle: includes heating control output cycle and cooling control output cycle

115
8.1 Temperature Input Mode

The L60TC4 can be used as a temperature input module using this function.

Input from temperature sensor

L60TC4

(1) Setting method

Set the L60TC4 to the temperature input mode on Switch Setting. ( Page 108, Section 7.2)

Project window [Intelligent Function Module] Module name [Switch Setting]

(2) Precaution
When resolution is "1", the temperature process value (PV) of the L60TC4 is rounded off from the actual
temperature.

Ex. When the actual temperature is 1299.5°C, the temperature process value (PV) of the L60TC4 is 1300°C.
To measure temperature by every 0.1°C, set resolution to "0.1". ( Page 345, Appendix 2 (12))
Note that the temperature process value (PV) is not rounded off for the process alarm and rate alarm.
( Page 121, Section 8.1.3 (1) (d), Page 123, Section 8.1.3 (2) (d))

116
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

8.1.1 Conversion enable/disable function

Temperature
Input

Temperature conversion can be enabled or disabled for each channel using this function. By disabling unused
channels, unnecessary disconnection detection or alert output can be prevented.

(1) Setting method

Set "Conversion enable/disable setting " to "0: Enable".

Project window [Intelligent Function Module] Module name [Parameter]

8.1.2 Temperature conversion method

Temperature
Input
8

In the L60TC4, a measured value is stored into CH† Temperature process value (PV) (Un\G9 to Un\G12) in every
sampling cycle. In addition, the use of the primary delay digital filter smoothens the temperature process value (PV),

8.1.1 Conversion enable/disable function

8.1 Temperature Input Mode
and its drastic change can be absorbed.

(1) Sampling cycle

A sampling cycle can be selected from 250ms or 500ms.

(a) How to set the sampling cycle

Select a sampling cycle on "Sampling Cycle Selection".

Project window [Intelligent Function Module] Module name [Switch Setting]

(b) How to check the sampling cycle

The selected sampling cycle can be checked in Sampling cycle monitor (Un\G788).

117
 (2) Primary delay digital filter
The primary delay digital filter smoothens extreme noise before outputting the temperature process value (PV).

Temperature
process value (PV)
When the primary delay
digital filter is not set
Time

Temperature
process value (PV)
When the primary delay
digital filter is set
Time

For the primary delay digital filter, set the time until the temperature process value (PV) changes by 63.3% (time
constant).

Temperature
process value (PV)
When the primary delay
digital filter is not set

Time

Temperature
process value (PV)

When the primary delay

digital filter is set
63.3%
Time

CH Primary delay digital filter setting

(Un\G48, Un\G80, Un\G112, Un\G144)

118
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

(a) How to set the primary digital filter

In "Primary delay digital filter setting", set the time until the temperature process value (PV) changes by 63.3%
(time constant).

Project window [Intelligent Function Module] Module name [Parameter]

Ex. When 3(3s) is set in "Primary delay digital filter setting"

The change shown below will happen if the Temperature process value (PV) changes from 250°C to
260°C under the condition where 3(3s) is set in "Primary delay digital filter setting".

Temperature input value Measured temperature value(PV)

262.0
8
)

260.0
Temperature input value (

258.0

256.0

8.1.2 Temperature conversion method

8.1 Temperature Input Mode
254.0

252.0

250.0
0 3
Elapsed time (s)

The temperature reaches 256.3°C which is 63.3% of the temperature process value (PV) three seconds after
the temperature input value reached 260.0°C.

119
8.1.3 Alert output function
Temperature
Input

An alert can be output when the temperature process value (PV) meets the condition set in advance using this
function. Use this function to activate danger signals of devices or safety devices.
There are two types of alert: process alarm and rate alarm.

(1) Process alarm

An alert occurs when the temperature process value (PV) reaches the process alarm upper upper limit value or
more, or the process alarm lower lower limit value or less.
The alert is cleared when the process value reaches a value less than the process alarm upper lower limit value,
or a value more than the process alarm lower upper limit value. An alert is not cleared even by resetting the error
or switching to the setting mode.

(a) Checking the alert occurrence

When an alert occurs, CH† Alert occurrence flag (XnC to XnF) turns on, and the ALM LED turns on.
In CH† Alert definition (Un\G5 to Un\G8), whether it is an upper limit alert or lower limit alert can be checked.
( Page 336, Appendix 2 (3))

(b) Checking the alert clearance

CH† Process alarm upper limit (b2 of Un\G5 to Un\G8) or CH† Process alarm lower limit (b3 of Un\G5 to
Un\G8) becomes 0 (OFF). Also, CH† Alert occurrence flag (XnC to XnF) turns off, and the ALM LED turns off.

In CH† Alert occurrence flag (XnC to XnF) and on the ALM LED, the alert is not cleared when an alert other than the
process alarm is occurring.

Warning output range section

Temperature Out of warning output range section
Included
Warning
occurrence
Upper upper
limit value
Upper lower
limit value
Temperature Warning clearance
process
value (PV) Warning
Lower upper clearance
limit value

Lower lower
limit value
Warning
occurrence

ON Time

CH Process alarm upper OFF

limit (b2 of Un\G5 to Un\G8)
ON

CH Process alarm lower OFF

limit (b3 of Un\G5 to Un\G8)

ON ON
CH Alert output flag OFF
(XnC to XnF)

Executed by the L60TC4

120
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

(c) How to set process alarm

Set "Process alarm alert output enable/disable setting" to "0: Enable". Then, set the lower lower limit value,
lower upper limit value, upper lower limit value, and upper upper limit value of the process alarm.

Project window [Intelligent Function Module] Module name [Parameter]

(d) Precaution
When resolution is "1", the temperature process value (PV) of the L60TC4 is rounded off from the actual
temperature. For the process alarm also, the temperature process value (PV) rounded off from the actual
temperature determines the alert occurrence.

8.1.3 Alert output function

8.1 Temperature Input Mode

121
 (2) Rate alarm
The temperature process value (PV) is monitored every rate alarm alert detection cycle. An alert occurs when the
change from the previous monitoring is greater than the rate alarm upper limit value, or smaller than the rate
alarm lower limit value. The rate alarm is helpful to monitor the change of the temperature process value (PV) in a
limited range.
PV Present value - PV Previous value ≥ Rate alarm upper limit value
PV Present value - PV Previous value ≤ Rate alarm lower limit value

The alert is cleared when the temperature process value reaches within the range of the formulas above. An alert
is not cleared even by resetting the error or switching to the setting mode.

(a) Checking the alert occurrence

While the rate alarm is occurring, CH† Alert occurrence flag (XnC to XnF) turns on, and the ALM LED turns
on.*1
In CH† Alert definition (Un\G5 to Un\G8), whether it is an upper limit alert or lower limit alert can be checked.
( Page 336, Appendix 2 (3))
*1 The ALM LED prioritizes the detection of other errors for which the ALM LED flashes (such as the detection of loop
disconnection).

(b) Checking the alert clearance

CH† Rate alarm upper limit (b4 of Un\G5 to Un\G8) or CH† Rate alarm lower limit (b5 of Un\G5 to Un\G8)
becomes 0 (OFF). Also, CH† Alert occurrence flag (XnC to XnF) turns off, and the ALM LED turns off.

In CH† Alert occurrence flag (XnC to XnF) and on the ALM LED, the alert is not cleared when an alert other than the rate
alarm is occurring.

122
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

Temperature
Rate alarm process
warning value (PV)
detection
Temperature period
process
value (PV)

Rate alarm
warning Time
Change of detection
temperature period
process value
(PV) ( C)
Rate alarm
upper limit
Change of value
temperature
process
value (PV)
Rate alarm
lower limit
value

Time
ON
CH Rate alarm upper limit OFF
(b4 of Un\G5 to Un\G8)
ON
CH Rate alarm lower limit OFF
(b5 of Un\G5 to Un\G8)

CH Alert output flag

ON ON
8
OFF
(XnC to XnF)
Executed by the L60TC4

(c) How to set rate alarm

8.1.3 Alert output function

8.1 Temperature Input Mode
Set "Rate alarm alert output enable/disable setting" to "0: Enable". Then, set the alert detection cycle, upper
limit value, and lower limit value of the rate alarm.

Project window [Intelligent Function Module] Module name [Parameter]

(d) Precaution
When resolution is "1", the temperature process value (PV) of the L60TC4 is rounded off from the actual
temperature. For the rate alarm also, the temperature process value (PV) rounded off from the actual
temperature determines the alert occurrence.

123
 Ex. A setting example of the rate alarm upper limit value and lower limit value to monitor that the temperature
process value (PV) is rising within the specified range

Change of
temperature
process value
(PV) ( C) Rate alarm upper limit value
20.0 C

10.0 C

Rate alarm lower limit value

0

Time

Ex. A setting example of the rate alarm upper limit value and lower limit value to monitor that the temperature
process value (PV) is falling within the specified range

Change of
temperature
process value
(PV) ( C)

Rate alarm upper limit value

-10.0 C

-20.0 C
Rate alarm lower limit value
Time

Ex. A setting example of the rate alarm upper limit value and lower limit value to monitor that the temperature
process value (PV) is changing within the specified range

Change of
temperature
process value
(PV) ( C)

Rate alarm upper limit value

10.0 C

0
-10.0 C
Rate alarm lower limit value

Time

124
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

8.2 Temperature Control Mode

The L60TC4 can be used as a temperature control module using this function.
• Standard control (heating)

Input from temperature sensor

L60TC4

Control output (heating)

Heater

• Heating-cooling control (heating and cooling)

Input from temperature sensor

8
L60TC4

Cooling
equipment

8.2 Temperature Control Mode

Control output (cooling)

Control output (heating)

Heater

(1) Setting method

Set the L60TC4 to the temperature control mode on Switch Setting. ( Page 108, Section 7.2)

Project window [Intelligent Function Module] Module name [Switch Setting]

125
8.2.1 Control Mode Selection Function
Standard Heating-cooling

A control mode can be selected using this function.

This section explains selectable control modes of the L60TC4.

(1) Standard control and heating-cooling control

There are two types of control modes in the L60TC4: standard control and heating-cooling control.

(a) Standard control

The control method is either one of heating (reverse action) or cooling (forward action). When the control
method is heating, of a heater for example, cooling is controlled by simply turning off the heating. When the
control method is cooling, of cold water for example, heating is controlled by simply turning off the cooling.

(b) Heating-cooling control

The control method is both heating and cooling. To heat up the target subject, its heating mean is turned on,
and its cooling mean is turned off. To cool down the target subject, its heating mean is turned off, and its cooling
mean is turned on.

(2) Selectable control mode

A control mode can be selected from five modes.
Select the control mode on Switch Setting.
For details on the setting method, refer to the following.
Page 108, Section 7.2

Control mode Contents Number of controllable loops

Standard control Performs the standard control of four channels Standard control 4 loops
Heating-cooling control
Performs the heating-cooling control. CH3 and CH4 cannot be used. Heating-cooling control 2 loops
(normal mode)
Heating-cooling control Performs the heating-cooling control. The number of loops is expanded
Heating-cooling control 4 loops
(expanded mode) using an output module and others in the system.
Mix control Performs the standard control and the heating-cooling control. CH2 cannot Standard control 2 loops
(normal mode) be used. Heating-cooling control 1 loop
Mix control Performs the standard control and the heating-cooling control. The number Standard control 2 loops
(expanded mode) of loops is expanded using an output module and others in the system. Heating-cooling control 2 loops

Control for each channel is as follows.

Standard Heating-cooling control Mix control

Channel
control Normal mode Expanded mode Normal mode Expanded mode
Heating-cooling Heating-cooling Heating-cooling
CH1 Standard control Heating-cooling control
control control control
Heating-cooling Heating-cooling
CH2 Standard control ⎯*1 Heating-cooling control*2
control control
Heating-cooling
CH3 Standard control ⎯*1 Standard control Standard control
control*2
Heating-cooling
CH4 Standard control ⎯*1 Standard control Standard control
control*2

*1 Only temperature measurement using a temperature input terminal can be performed. ( Page 212, Section 8.2.23)
*2 Heating-cooling control is performed using an output module in the system. ( Page 127, Section 8.2.1 (3))

126
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

(3) Expanded mode

In the heating-cooling control (expanded mode) or the mix control (expanded mode), the number of loops for
heating-cooling control can be expanded using an output module and others in the system. To use an expanded
mode, construct a system such as the one shown below.

CPU 4 channels
module L60TC4
Buffer memory
Temperature Input from the temperature sensor
CH1 CH1
process CH Temperature Input from the temperature sensor
value (PV) process value (PV) CH2 CH2
(Un\G9, Un\G10, CH3 CH3
Un\G11, Un\G12) Heating Cooling Heating Cooling
Manipulated CH4 Manipulated value CH4 Temperature Temperature
control control control control
value for CH1 for heating (MVh)
L1H
heating CH Manipulated
PID CH2
(MVh) value for heating (MVh) L2H Object to be controlled Heating Object to be controlled
operation
(Un\G13, Un\G14, CH3 Heating transistor output
Un\G15, Un\G16) Manipulated value transistor
Manipulated CH4 output
for cooling (MVc)
value for
CH1 L1C
cooling CH Manipulated
(MVc) value for cooling (MVc) CH2 L2C
(Un\G704, Un\G705, CH3 Cooling transistor output Cooling transistor output
Set value Un\G706, Un\G707)
(SV) CH4
CH1
Initial setting CH Set value
CH2 Output module
(TO instruction) (SV) setting
on the same system
(Un\G34, Un\G66, CH3
Set value as the L60TC4 or
Un\G98, Un\G130)
(SV) CH4 in the same network
as the L60TC4
CH1 Heating
b0 of CH Heating
transistor output flag CH2 transistor output Output signals
(Un\G21, Un\G22, (OUT instruction)
CH3 Y20 Manipulated value TB1(L3H)
Un\G23, Un\G24) for heating (MVh)
CH4 Y21 TB2(L4H)

8
CH1 Cooling Y22 Manipulated value TB3(L3C)
b0 of CH Cooling
transistor output Y23 for cooling (MVc) TB4(L4C)
transistor output flag CH2
(Un\G712, Un\G713, (OUT instruction)
CH3
Un\G714, Un\G715)
CH4 Y2F TB18

8.2.1 Control Mode Selection Function

8.2 Temperature Control Mode
When the heating-cooling control (expanded mode) is selected, heating/cooling transistor output of CH3 and CH4 are
activated. Also, when the mix control (expanded mode) is selected, heating/cooling transistor output of CH2 is activated.
These areas are activated only when an expanded mode is selected. When a normal mode is selected, these areas are
used for the system. If data is written into these areas when it is used by the system, a write data error occurs. (error
code:†††2H)
The following is an example of using an expanded mode.

Ex. A program in which CH3 Heating transistor output flag (b0 of Un\G23) is assigned to Y20 of an output module
(The start I/O number of the L60TC4 is set to 10 in the following program example.)

127
8.2.2 Control output setting at CPU stop error
Standard Heating-cooling

When a stop error occurs on the CPU module or when CPU's status is changed from RUN to STOP, whether to hold or
clear the status of transistor output can be selected using this function.
Configure "Output Setting at CPU Stop Error" on Switch Setting.
For details on the setting method, refer to the following.
Page 108, Section 7.2
Processing for each status is describes in the following table.

Status Processing Reference

Output Setting at CPU Stop Page 108,
CLEAR HOLD
Error Section 7.2
Setting of PID continuation flag Page 381,
Stop Continue Stop Continue
(Un\G169) Appendix 2 (43)
L60TC4 Page 315, Section
Follow the operation of when an error occurs
Write data error 11.6
L60TC4
Depends on the symptom of the hardware ⎯
Hardware error
Error
Stops the
CPU Stops the operation and turns off Follows the stop operation and
*1
⎯
Stop error external output mode setting performs
external output
Stops the Stops the
Follows the stop operation and Follows the stop operation and
CPU RUN → STOP ⎯
mode setting*1 performs mode setting*1 performs
operation
external output external output
Resetting The module is incapable to operate, and not performs external output ⎯

*1 CH† Stop mode setting (Un\G33, Un\G65, Un\G97, Un\G129) ( Page 353, Appendix 2 (13))

Important
• Fully pay attention to the setting of PID continuation flag (Un\G169) which controls external output.
• By the failure of an output element or internal circuit, an abnormal output may occur. Construct a circuit to monitor output signals that
could cause a serious accident.

128
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

8.2.3 Control method

Standard Heating-cooling

The following control methods can be applied by setting the proportional band (P), integral time, and derivative
time(D).
• Two-position control ( Page 129, Section 8.2.3 (1))
• P control ( Page 131, Section 8.2.3 (2))
• PI control ( Page 132, Section 8.2.3 (3))
• PD control ( Page 133, Section 8.2.3 (4))
• PID control ( Page 133, Section 8.2.3 (5))

Remark
For P control and PD control, the manual reset function is activated. ( Page 137, Section 8.2.4)

(1) Two-position control

Two-position control is a control method that uses 0% manipulated value (MV) and 100% manipulated value
(MV). Turning on and off the manipulated value (MV) repeatedly, the temperature process value comes close to
the set value (SV), then is kept constant.

8
By the setting in CH† Adjustment sensitivity (dead band) setting (Un\G46, Un\G78, Un\G110, Un\G142) the chattering of
transistor output under two-position control can be prevented. Set a dead band toward the set value (SV) in CH†
Adjustment sensitivity (dead band) setting (Un\G46, Un\G78, Un\G110, Un\G142). ( Page 363, Appendix 2 (22))

8.2.3 Control method

8.2 Temperature Control Mode
(a) Standard control
The module operates as follows outside the range of CH† Adjustment sensitivity (dead band) setting (Un\G46,
Un\G78, Un\G110, Un\G142).

Condition Transistor output status

The temperature process value (PV) is below the lower limit
ON
of the adjustment sensitivity (dead band).
The temperature process value (PV) is above the upper limit
OFF
of the adjustment sensitivity (dead band).

Temperature
process value (PV)

Set value (SV) Adjustment sensitivity

(dead band)

Time
ON
Transistor
output OFF

129
 (b) Heating-cooling control
The module operates as follows outside the range of CH† Adjustment sensitivity (dead band) setting (Un\G46,
Un\G78, Un\G110, Un\G142).

Heating transistor Cooling transistor

Condition
output status output status
The temperature process value (PV) is below the lower limit of
ON OFF
the adjustment sensitivity (dead band).
The temperature process value (PV) is above the upper limit of
OFF ON
the adjustment sensitivity (dead band).

Temperature
process value (PV)

Set value (SV) Adjustment sensitivity

(dead band)

Time
ON
Heating output
(L1H) OFF
ON
Cooling output
(L1C) OFF

(c) Three-position control

Three-position control can also be performed by setting a dead band.
For more details, refer to the following.
Page 211, Section 8.2.22 (3)

(d) Setting method

Set "Proportional band (P) setting/Heating control proportional band setting (Ph)" to 0.0%.

Project window [Intelligent Function Module] Module name [Parameter]

130
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

(2) P Control
P control is a control method in which the manipulated value (MV) is determined proportional to the deviation (E)
between the temperature process value (PV) and set value (SV).

(a) Standard control

The manipulated value is 50% in the following conditions.
• Temperature process value (PV) = Set value (SV)
• CH† Manual reset amount setting (Un\G724, Un\G740, Un\G756, Un\G772) is set to 0 (0.0%).
( Page 405, Appendix 2 (79))

Manipulated value (MV)*1

100%

50%

Temperature process
0% value (PV)
Set value (SV)*2

Proportional band (P)

*1 The value actually output is within the output limiter range set in CH† Output variation limiter setting (Un\G44, Un\G76,
Un\G108, Un\G140). ( Page 362, Appendix 2 (20)) 8
*2 The set value (SV) is in the center of the proportional band.

(b) Heating-cooling control

The manipulated value for heating (MVh) and the manipulated value for cooling (MVc) are both 0% in the

8.2.3 Control method

8.2 Temperature Control Mode
following conditions.
• Temperature process value (PV) = Set value (SV)
• CH† Manual reset amount setting (Un\G724, Un\G740, Un\G756, Un\G772) is set to 0 (0.0%).
( Page 405, Appendix 2 (79))

Manipulated value Manipulated value

for heating (MVh)*1 for cooling (MVc)*1
100%

Temperature process
0%
value (PV)
Set value (SV)

Heating proportional Cooling proportional

band (Ph) band (Pc)

*1 The value actually output is within the output limiter range set in CH† Output variation limiter setting (Un\G44, Un\G76,
Un\G108, Un\G140). ( Page 362, Appendix 2 (20))

131
 (c) Setting method
Set each item as follows.
• "Proportional band (P) setting/Heating control proportional band setting (Ph)" : any value
• "Integral time (I) setting": 0s
• "Derivative time (D) setting": 0s

Project window [Intelligent Function Module] Module name [Parameter]

(3) PI Control
PI control is a control method in which integral elements are added to P control, and an offset (remaining
deviation) is compensated. By setting the integral time (I) properly, the temperature process value (PV) and the
set value (SV) can be met.
PI control is a control method in which integral elements are added to P control, thereby an offset (remaining
deviation) is compensated. By setting the integral time (I) properly, the temperature process value (PV) matches
with the set value (SV)

(a) Setting method

Set each item as follows.
• "Proportional band (P) setting/Heating control proportional band setting (Ph)" : any value
• "Integral time (I) setting": any value
• "Derivative time (D) setting": 0s

Project window [Intelligent Function Module] Module name [Parameter]

132
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

(4) PD Control
PD control is a control method in which the derivative time (D) is set in addition to PD control. The control
mechanism is the same as P control.

(a) Setting method

Set each item as follows.
• "Proportional band (P) setting/Heating control proportional band setting (Ph)" : any value
• "Integral time (I) setting": 0s
• "Derivative time (D) setting": any value

Project window [Intelligent Function Module] Module name [Parameter]

(5) PID Control

PID control is a control method in which derivative elements are added to PI control, thereby the temperature
shifts to a stable status in a short period of time even when a drastic change has occurred. By setting the
derivative time (D) properly, the control subject shifts to a stable status in a short period of time.
8
(a) Setting method
Set any value to "Proportional band (P) setting/Heating control proportional band setting (Ph)", "Integral time (I)
setting", and "Derivative time (D) setting".

8.2.3 Control method

8.2 Temperature Control Mode
Project window [Intelligent Function Module] Module name [Parameter]

133
 (6) Condition to perform PID control
The condition to be able to perform PID control*1 depends on the settings of the followings.
• Setting/operation mode instruction (Yn1) ( Page 330, Appendix 1.2 (1))
• PID continuation flag (Un\G169)) ( Page 381, Appendix 2 (43))
• CH† PID control forced stop instruction (YnC to YnF) ( Page 333, Appendix 1.2 (7))
• CH† Stop mode setting (Un\G33, Un\G65, Un\G97, Un\G129) ( Page 353, Appendix 2 (13))
The following table shows the relationship between the status of PID control*1 and each of the settings above.
: Performed ×: Not performed
CH† PID control
Setting/operation CH† Stop mode setting
PID continuation forced stop Control status of
mode instruction (Un\G33, Un\G65,
flag (Un\G169) instruction PID control*1
(Yn1)*2 Un\G97, Un\G129)
(YnC to YnF)
Setting mode at
Stop (0)/Continue (1) OFF/ON Stop (0)/Monitor (1)/Alert (2) ×
power-ON

Operation mode OFF Stop (0)/Monitor (1)/Alert (2)

Stop (0)/Continue (1)
(operating) ON Stop (0)/Monitor (1)/Alert (2) ×
Stop (0) OFF/ON Stop (0)/Monitor (1)/Alert (2) ×
Setting mode
OFF Stop (0)/Monitor (1)/Alert (2)
(after operation) Continue (1)
ON Stop (0)/Monitor (1)/Alert (2) ×

*1 Here, this is the generic term for two-position control, P control, PI control, PD control, and PID control.
*2 For the timing of each, refer to Page 324, Appendix 1.1 (2)

Even though the conditions above are met, PID control is not performed when CH† Unused channel setting
(Un\G61, Un\G93, Un\G125, Un\G157) is set to Unused (1). ( Page 376, Appendix 2 (35))

The manipulated value (MV) and manipulated value (MV) for output with another analog module of when CH† PID control
forced stop instruction (YnC to YnF) is turned on from off are as follows.

Buffer memory address

Buffer memory area name Stored value Reference
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH† Manipulated value (MV) Un\G13 Un\G14 Un\G15 Un\G16 -50 (-5.0%) Page 339, Appendix 2 (5)
CH† Manipulated value (MV) for
Un\G177 Un\G178 Un\G179 Un\G180 0 Page 383, Appendix 2 (47)
output with another analog module
CH† Manipulated value for heating
Un\G13 Un\G14 Un\G15 Un\G16 -50 (-5.0%) Page 339, Appendix 2 (5)
(MVh) (Un\G13 to Un\G16)
CH† Manipulated value of heating
(MVh) for output with another Un\G177 Un\G178 Un\G179 Un\G180 0 Page 383, Appendix 2 (47)
analog module
CH† Manipulated value for cooling
Un\G704 Un\G705 Un\G706 Un\G707 -50 (-5.0%) Page 339, Appendix 2 (5)
(MVc)
CH† Manipulated value of cooling
(MVc) for output with another Un\G708 Un\G709 Un\G710 Un\G711 0 Page 383, Appendix 2 (47)
analog module

When CH† PID control forced stop instruction (YnC to YnF) is turned off from on, the forced stop of PID control is released.
PID operation resumes with the manipulated value (MV) which was being output when the PID control was forcibly stopped.

134
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

(7) Buffer memory areas related to control method

The following table shows the buffer memory areas related to control method.
Buffer memory address Setting range
Buffer
Two-
memory area P PD PI PID Reference
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 position
name control control control control
control
Thermocouple: 1 to 4, 11 to 28, 36 to 48, 49 to 52, 100 to
Page 345,
117, 130 to 132, 201 to 205
CH† Input range Un\G32 Un\G64 Un\G96 Un\G128 Appendix 2
Platinum resistance thermometer: 5 to 8, 53, 54, 140 to
(12)
143, 201 to 205
Page 354,
CH† Set value Set a value within the temperature measurement range of
Un\G34 Un\G66 Un\G98 Un\G130 Appendix 2
(SV) setting the set input range
(14)
CH†
Proportional Un\G35 Un\G67 Un\G99 Un\G131
Configure the setting in the range from 0 to
band (P) setting Fix the
10000 (0.0% to 1000.0%) toward the full
CH† Heating setting to 0. Page 355,
scale of the set input range.
proportional Un\G35 Un\G67 Un\G99 Un\G131 Appendix 2
band (Ph) setting (15)
CH† Cooling Configure the setting in the range from 1 to
The setting
proportional Un\G720 Un\G736 Un\G752 Un\G768 *1
10000 (0.1% to 1000.0%) toward the full
is ignored
band (Pc) setting scale of the set input range.

CH† Integral The setting

Fix the Fix the
1 to 1 to
Page 357, 8
Un\G36 Un\G68 Un\G100 Un\G132 *1
setting to setting to Appendix 2
time (I) setting is ignored 3600 (s) 3600 (s)
0. 0. (16)
Fix the Fix the Page 357,
CH† Derivative The setting 1 to 1 to
Un\G37 Un\G69 Un\G101 Un\G133 setting to setting to Appendix 2

8.2.3 Control method

8.2 Temperature Control Mode
time (D) setting is ignored*1 3600 (s) 3600 (s)
0. 0. (17)
CH† Upper limit
Un\G42 Un\G74, Un\G106 Un\G138
output limiter
-50 to 1050 (-5.0% to 105.0%)
CH† Lower limit
Un\G43 Un\G75 Un\G107 Un\G139
output limiter
Page 360,
CH† Heating The setting
Appendix 2
upper limit output Un\G42 Un\G74 Un\G106 Un\G138 is ignored*1
(19)
limiter
0 to 1050 (0.0% to 105.0%)
CH† Cooling
upper limit output Un\G721 Un\G737 Un\G753 Un\G769
limiter
CH† Output Page 362,
The setting
variation limiter Un\G44 Un\G76 Un\G108 Un\G140 1 to 1000 (0.1%/s to 100.0%/s) Appendix 2
is ignored*1
setting (20)
Configure
the setting
in the range
from 1 to
CH† Adjustment Page 363,
100 (0.1%
sensitivity (dead Un\G46 Un\G78 Un\G110 Un\G142 The setting is ignored*1 Appendix 2
to 10.0%)
band) setting (22)
toward the
full scale of
the set
input range.

135
 Buffer memory address Setting range
Buffer
Two-
memory area P PD PI PID Reference
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 position
name control control control control
control
CH† Control
output cycle Un\G47 Un\G79 Un\G111 Un\G143
setting • The control output cycle unit selection
setting on Switch Setting is 1s: 1 to 100
CH† Heating Page 364,
The setting (1s to 100s)
control output Un\G47 Un\G79 Un\G111 Un\G143 *1
Appendix 2
is ignored • The control output cycle unit selection
cycle setting (23)
setting on Switch Setting is 0.1s: 5 to
CH† Cooling 1000 (0.5s to 100.0s)
control output Un\G722 Un\G738 Un\G754 Un\G770
cycle setting
CH† Configure the setting in the range from -100 to 100 (- Page 404,
Overlap/dead Un\G723 Un\G739 Un\G755 Un\G771 10.0% to 10.0%) toward the full scale of the set input Appendix 2
band setting range. (78)
Configure the
setting in the range
CH† Manual from -1000 to 1000 Page 405,
The setting The setting is
reset amount Un\G724 Un\G740 Un\G756 Un\G772 (-100.0 to 100.0%) Appendix 2
is ignored*1 ignored*1
setting toward the full scale (79)
of the set input
range.
*1 When outside the setting range, a write data error (error code: †††4H) occurs.

The L60TC4 automatically sets optimum PID constants if the following functions are used.
• Auto tuning function ( Page 141, Section 8.2.7)
• Self-tuning function ( Page 175, Section 8.2.15)

136
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

8.2.4 Manual Reset Function

Standard Heating-cooling

The position of the stable condition in P control or PD control can be shifted manually using this function.
By shifting the proportional band (P), an offset (remaining deviation) is manually reset.
The offset is reset by determining and setting the amount to shift the value of the manipulated value (MV) in a stable
condition from the reference value.
The reference value is 50% for standard control, and 0% for heating-cooling control.

This function can be active only in P control and PD control. This function is inactive when integral time (I) is other than 0.
CH† Manual reset amount setting (Un\G724, Un\G740, Un\G756, Un\G772) is ignored even if it is set. (Note that a write
data error (error code: †††4H) occurs if it is outside the setting range.)

(1) Standard control

The set value (SV) is set where the manipulated value (MV) is 50%. Due to this, as long as the temperature
process value (PV) and the set value (SV) is not in equilibrium at 50% of manipulated value, an offset (remaining
deviation) generates.
When an offset generates, the proportional band (P) can be manually shifted by the amount of the offset
(remaining deviation).
8
Ex. When using the manual reset function in the following conditions
• Control method: P control
• CH† Manual reset amount setting (Un\G724, Un\G740, Un\G756, Un\G772): 300 (30%)

8.2.4 Manual Reset Function

8.2 Temperature Control Mode
The L60TC4 shifts the manipulated value (MV) by which the temperature is stabilized at the set value
(SV) from 50% to 80%.

Proportional band
(P)
Configure the settings
(Percentage to the full scale) as follows:
Integral time (I): 0
Derivative time (D): 0

Manual reset
100%

80% The manipulated value (MV)

can be moved from 50% to 80%
Manipulated value
to keep the set value (SV) stable.
(MV)
50%

0%

Set value (SV)

Manual reset range: -100.0 to 100.0% (every 0.1%)

(Set -1000 to 1000)

Input range

137
 (2) Heating-cooling control
The set value (SV) is set where the manipulated value for heating (MVh)/manipulated value for cooling (MVc) is
0%. Due to this, as long as the temperature process value (PV) and the set value (SV) is not in equilibrium at 0%
of manipulated value for heating (MVh)/manipulated value for cooling (MVc), an offset (remaining deviation)
generates. When an offset generates, the heating proportional band (Ph)/cooling proportional band (Pc) can be
manually shifted by the amount of the offset (remaining deviation).

Ex. When using the manual reset function in the following conditions
• Control method: P control
CH† Manual reset amount setting (Un\G724, Un\G740, Un\G756, Un\G772): 800 (80%)
The L60TC4 shifts the manipulated value for heating (MVh) by which the temperature is stabilized at the
set value (SV) from 0% to 80%.

Overlap/dead band

Heating proportional Cooling proportional

band (Ph) band (Pc)

(Percentage to the full scale) (Percentage to the full scale)

100%
Heating: 100%
80%
Configure the settings
as follows:
Heating
Integral time (I): 0
Manipulated value Manual reset Derivative time (D): 0
for heating (MVh)
The manipulated
value for heating (MVh)
can be moved from 0%
to 80% to keep
the set value (SV) stable.
Heating: 0%
0%
Cooling: 0%

Set value (SV)

Manipulated value Cooling

for cooling (MVc)

Cooling: 100%
-100%

Manual reset range: -100.0 to 100.0% (every 0.1%)

(Set -1000 to 1000)

Input range

(3) Setting method

Set a value in the following buffer memory area.
• CH† Manual reset amount setting (Un\G724, Un\G740, Un\G756, Un\G772) ( Page 405, Appendix 2
(79))

138
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

8.2.5 Manual Control

Standard Heating-cooling

Manual control is a form of control for which the user sets the manipulated value (MV) manually instead of obtaining it
automatically by PID control.
The manipulated value (MV) is checked every 250ms or 500ms*1, and is reflected to transistor output.
*1 This depends on the setting in "Sampling Cycle Selection". ( Page 109, Section 7.2 (1) (b))

(1) Setting method

Follow the following procedure for setting.
1. Shift to the MAN (manual) mode. (Set MAN (1) in CH† AUTO/MAN mode shift (Un\G50, Un\G82,
Un\G114, Un\G146).) ( Page 367, Appendix 2 (26))
2. Set the manipulated value (MV) in CH† MAN output setting (Un\G51, Un\G83, Un\G115, Un\G147)*1
( Page 368, Appendix 2 (27))
*1 The setting range differs for standard control and heating-cooling control.
Standard control: -50 to 1050 (-5.0% to 105.0%)
Heating-cooling control: -1050 to 1050 (-105.0% to 105.0%)

8.2.5 Manual Control

8.2 Temperature Control Mode

139
8.2.6 Control output cycle unit selection function
Standard Heating-cooling

The unit of the control output cycle can be selected from 1s or 0.1s using this function.
When the control output cycle is set in 0.1s, control can be more attentive.
The control output cycle is the ON/OFF cycle of transistor output for the temperature control function.
The cycle can be set in the following buffer memory areas.

Buffer memory address

Control mode Buffer memory area name Reference
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
Standard control CH† Control output cycle setting Un\G47 Un\G79 Un\G111 Un\G143
CH† Heating control output cycle
Un\G47 Un\G79 Un\G111 Un\G143
setting Page 364, Appendix 2 (23)
Heating-cooling control
CH† Cooling control output cycle
Un\G722 Un\G738 Un\G754 Un\G770
setting

(1) Setting method

Select 1s cycle or 0.1s cycle in "Control Output Cycle Unit Selection Setting".

Project window [Intelligent Function Module] Module name [Switch Setting]

● The setting range and default value of the control output cycle depends on this setting. ( Page 364, Appendix 2
(23))
● A setting value discrepancy error (error code: 002EH) occurs right after changing this setting. To recover from the error
status, turn Set value backup instruction (Yn8) as follows: OFF→ON→OFF. Then, register the setting after the change to
the L60TC4.

140
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

8.2.7 Auto tuning function

Standard Heating-cooling

The auto tuning function is designed for the L60TC4 to set the optimum PID constants automatically. In auto tuning,
the PID constants are calculated according to the hunting cycle and amplitude generated by repeated overshoot and
undershoot of the manipulated value (MV) toward the set value (SV).

(1) Auto tuning operation

The L60TC4 operates as follows.

Operation of the L60TC4

1 Outputs for auto-tuning
Collects data from the point when the temperature process value (PV) reaches the set value (SV) after the first
2
overshoot and undershoot
After data collection, auto tuning ends when PID constants and loop disconnection detection judgment time are
3
set.

Temperature process
The first overshoot and
value (PV) 3 End of auto tuning
undershoot are ignored.

Set value (SV)

(Temperature process value (PV))
8
1 Start of auto tuning

8.2.7 Auto tuning function

8.2 Temperature Control Mode
Time
2 Data collection
Temperature
Auto tuning in execution control

ON
CH Auto tuning instruction
(Yn4 to Yn7) OFF
ON
CH Auto tuning status
(Xn4 to Xn7) OFF

Executed in a program
Executed by the L60TC4

Remark
The time takes for auto tuning depends on the control subject.

141
 (2) Buffer memory areas related to auto tuning
Auto tuning can be executed when the following data are set.
Note that other data must be preset to the values used for actual operation since actual control starts on
completion of auto tuning.
When "0" is set to the proportional band (P)/heating proportional band (Ph), auto tuning is not executed.
( Page 355, Appendix 2 (15))

Buffer memory address

Buffer memory area name Reference
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH† Input range Un\G32 Un\G64 Un\G96 Un\G128 Page 345, Appendix 2 (12)
CH† Set value (SV) setting Un\G34 Un\G66 Un\G98 Un\G130 Page 354, Appendix 2 (14)
CH† Upper limit output limiter Un\G42 Un\G74 Un\G106 Un\G138
CH† Lower limit output limiter Un\G43 Un\G75 Un\G107 Un\G139
Page 360, Appendix 2 (19)
CH† Heating upper limit output limiter Un\G42 Un\G74 Un\G106 Un\G138
CH† Cooling upper limit output limiter Un\G721 Un\G737 Un\G753 Un\G769
CH† Output variation limiter setting Un\G44 Un\G76 Un\G108 Un\G140 Page 362, Appendix 2 (20)
CH† Sensor correction value setting Un\G45 Un\G77 Un\G109 Un\G141 Page 363, Appendix 2 (21)
CH† Control output cycle setting Un\G47 Un\G79 Un\G111 Un\G143
CH† Heating control output cycle setting Un\G47 Un\G79 Un\G111 Un\G143 Page 364, Appendix 2 (23)
CH† Cooling control output cycle setting Un\G722 Un\G738 Un\G754 Un\G770
CH† Primary delay digital filter setting Un\G48 Un\G80 Un\G112 Un\G144 Page 365, Appendix 2 (24)
CH† AUTO/MAN mode shift Un\G50 Un\G82 Un\G114 Un\G146 Page 367, Appendix 2 (26)
CH† AT bias Un\G53 Un\G85 Un\G117 Un\G149 Page 370, Appendix 2 (29)
CH† Forward/reverse action setting Un\G54 Un\G86 Un\G118 Un\G150 Page 371, Appendix 2 (30)
CH† Auto tuning mode selection Un\G184 Un\G185 Un\G186 Un\G187 Page 385, Appendix 2 (51)

(3) Storing the calculated value after auto tuning

After auto tuning is completed, the calculated values are stored into the following buffer memory areas.

Buffer memory address

Buffer memory area name Reference
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH† Proportional band (P) setting Un\G35 Un\G67 Un\G99 Un\G131
CH† Heating proportional band (Ph) setting Un\G35 Un\G67 Un\G99 Un\G131 Page 355, Appendix 2 (15)
CH† Cooling proportional band (Pc) setting Un\G720 Un\G736 Un\G752 Un\G768
CH† Integral time (I) setting Un\G36 Un\G68 Un\G100 Un\G132 Page 357, Appendix 2 (16)
CH† Derivative time (D) setting Un\G37 Un\G69 Un\G101 Un\G133 Page 357, Appendix 2 (17)
CH† Loop disconnection detection
Un\G59 Un\G91 Un\G123 Un\G155 Page 374, Appendix 2 (33)
judgment time*1

*1 A value twice greater than the one in CH† Integral time (I) setting (Un\G36, Un\G68, Un\G100, Un\G132) is
automatically set. However, if this setting is 0(s) when auto tuning is in process, the loop disconnection detection
judgment time is not stored.

142
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

(4) Backup of the calculated value on completion of auto tuning

By setting the following buffer memory area to Enable (1) at the start of auto tuning, the calculated value
( Page 142, Section 8.2.7 (3)) is automatically backed up into a non-volatile memory on completion of auto
tuning.
• CH† Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants (Un\G63, Un\G95, Un\G127, Un\G159)
( Page 378, Appendix 2 (37))
To read the calculated value ( Page 142, Section 8.2.7 (3)) from the non-volatile memory, set the following
buffer memory area to Requested (1).
• CH† Memory of PID constants read instruction (Un\G62, Un\G94, Un\G126, Un\G158) ( Page 377,
Appendix 2 (36))

To use the PID constants stored in the buffer memory also after the power is turned off, follow the methods
below.
• Use the initial setting of GX Works2. ( Page 110, Section 7.3)
• Keep the PID constants in the non-volatile memory, and transfer them when the power is turned on from off or
when the CPU module is released from the reset status. ( Page 235, Section 8.3.4)
• Write the value directly into the buffer memory through a program.

8.2.7 Auto tuning function

8.2 Temperature Control Mode

143
 (5) Procedure of auto tuning

(a) GX Works2
Start from "Auto Tuning...".

[Tool] [Intelligent Function Module Tool] [Temperature Control Module] [Auto Tuning...]
1. Select the module by which auto tuning is executed,

and click .

2. Click the "Auto Tuning Setting" tab.

↓
(To the next page)

144
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

(From the previous page)

↓
3. Configure the auto tuning setting.

4. Click .

8
↓

5. Click .

8.2.7 Auto tuning function

8.2 Temperature Control Mode
↓
(To the next page)

145
 (From the previous page)
↓

6. Click .

7. Click .

8. Click the "Auto Tuning Execution" tab.

↓
(To the next page)

146
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

(From the previous page)

↓

9. Click of the channel where auto

tuning is to be executed.

10. Click .

11. Check that "Status" has changed from "Executing"

to "Tuned", and click . 8

8.2.7 Auto tuning function

8.2 Temperature Control Mode
↓

12. Click .

↓
End

147
 (b) Program
The execution procedure of auto tuning is as follows.

Start

Set buffer memories.

L60TC4 data setting
Page 142, Section 8.2.7 (2)

Operation mode setting Switch the setting/operation mode command (Yn1)

from off to on.
Confirm that the setting/operation mode status (Xn1) is on.

Auto tuning start Switch CH Auto tuning instruction (Yn4 to Yn7) from on to off.

Auto tuning in progress CH Auto tuning status (Xn4 to Xn7) turns on.

Auto tuning completion CH Auto tuning status (Xn4 to Xn7) turns off and
(PID constants set) the calculated values are set to the buffer memory addresses.
Page 142, Section 8.2.7 (3)

Temperature control using PID constants set

End

148
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

(6) Conditions where auto tuning cannot be executed

If one of the following conditions applies, auto tuning cannot be executed.

Conditions to start auto tuning Reference

1 The module is in the setting mode (Setting/operation mode status (Xn1): OFF). Page 324, Appendix 1.1 (2)
In standard control, CH† Proportional band (P) setting (Un\G35, Un\G67, Un\G99, Un\G131) is set
to 0. (operating in two-position control)
2 Page 355, Appendix 2 (15)
In heating-cooling control, CH† Heating proportional band (Ph) setting (Un\G35, Un\G67, Un\G99,
Un\G131) is set to 0. (operating in two-position control)
3 CH† AUTO/MAN mode shift (Un\G50, Un\G82, Un\G114, Un\G146) is set to MAN (1). Page 367, Appendix 2 (26)
Toward the corresponding channel, CH† Unused channel setting (Un\G61, Un\G93, Un\G125,
4 Page 376, Appendix 2 (35)
Un\G157) is set to Unused (1).
5 CH† PID control forced stop instruction (YnC to YnF) is turned on. Page 333, Appendix 1.2 (7)
6 Hardware failure has occurred. (The ERR. LED is on.) Page 310, Section 11.3.2
CH† Temperature process value (PV) (Un\G9 to Un\G12) has exceeded the temperature
7 measurement range (CH† Input range upper limit (b0 of Un\G5 to Un\G8) or CH† Input range Page 336, Appendix 2 (3)
lower limit (b1 of Un\G5 to Un\G8) is 1 (ON)).
CH† Memory of PID constants read instruction (Un\G62, Un\G94, Un\G126, Un\G158) is set to
8 Page 377, Appendix 2 (36)
Requested (1).
9 CH† Write completion flag (b4 to b7 of Un\G31) is on. Page 343, Appendix 2 (11)

(a) When one of the conditions 1 to 5 applies

Auto tuning starts when the condition no longer applies. 8
(b) When the condition 7 applies
CH† Auto tuning status (Xn4 to Xn7) turns on for a moment. Even though the temperature process value (PV)

8.2.7 Auto tuning function

8.2 Temperature Control Mode
goes back within the temperature measurement range, auto tuning does not start until CH† Auto tuning
instruction (Yn4 to Yn7) is turned on from off once again.

(c) When the condition 8 or 9 applies

Even though the internal processing of auto tuning is completed and PID constants are stored, CH† Auto
tuning status (Xn4 to Xn7) does not turn off, therefore the auto tuning is not completed.

149
 (7) Conditions where auto tuning ends in fail
The conditions are described below.

(a) Shift from the operation mode to the setting mode

Shifting from the operation mode to the setting mode (Setting/operation mode instruction (Yn1) is turned off
from on) ends auto tuning in fail. Note that an exception is when PID continuation flag (Un\G169) is set to
Continue (1). ( Page 381, Appendix 2 (43))

(b) Setting change of the buffer memory during the execution of auto tuning
If a setting in the following buffer memory areas is changed during the execution of auto tuning, the processing
ends in fail.

Buffer memory address

Buffer memory area name Reference
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH† Set value (SV) setting Un\G34 Un\G66 Un\G98 Un\G130 Page 354, Appendix 2 (14)
CH† Upper limit output limiter Un\G42 Un\G74 Un\G106 Un\G138
CH† Lower limit output limiter Un\G43 Un\G75 Un\G107 Un\G139 Page 360, Appendix 2 (19)
CH† Cooling upper limit output limiter Un\G721 Un\G737 Un\G753 Un\G769
CH† Sensor correction value setting Un\G45 Un\G77 Un\G109 Un\G141 Page 363, Appendix 2 (21)
CH† Control output cycle setting Un\G47 Un\G79 Un\G111 Un\G143
Page 364, Appendix 2 (23)
CH† Cooling control output cycle setting Un\G722 Un\G738 Un\G754 Un\G770
CH† Primary delay digital filter setting Un\G48 Un\G80 Un\G112 Un\G144 Page 365, Appendix 2 (24)
CH† AUTO/MAN mode shift Un\G50 Un\G82 Un\G114 Un\G146 Page 367, Appendix 2 (26)
CH† AT bias Un\G53 Un\G85 Un\G117 Un\G149 Page 370, Appendix 2 (29)
CH† Forward/reverse action setting Un\G54 Un\G86 Un\G118 Un\G150 Page 371, Appendix 2 (30)
CH† Unused channel setting Un\G61 Un\G93 Un\G125 Un\G157 Page 376, Appendix 2 (35)
Cold junction temperature compensation
Un\G182 Page 384, Appendix 2 (49)
selection

(c) Out of the temperature measurement range

If CH† Temperature process value (PV) (Un\G9 to Un\G12) exceeds the temperature measurement range
(CH† Input range upper limit (b0 of Un\G5 to Un\G8) or CH† Input range lower limit (b1 of Un\G5 to Un\G8)
becomes 1 (ON)), auto tuning ends in fail. ( Page 336, Appendix 2 (3))

(d) Time until the temperature process value (PV) reaches the set value (SV) for the first
time or a half the hunting cycle of the temperature process value (PV)
If the time below exceeds two hours, auto tuning ends in fail.
• Time from the start of auto tuning until CH† Temperature process value (PV) (Un\G9 to Un\G12) reaches
the set value (SV) for the first time
• A half the hunting cycle of CH† Temperature process value (PV) (Un\G9 to Un\G12)

For the time above not to exceed two hours, bring the temperature of the subject close to the set value (SV) in advance, then
execute auto tuning.

150
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

(e) Calculated values of PID constants after auto tuning

If a calculated value of PID constants after auto tuning exceeds one of the following ranges, auto tuning ends in
fail.
• CH† Proportional band (P) setting (Un\G35, Un\G67, Un\G99, Un\G131): 1 to 10000 (0.1% to 1000.0%)
• CH† Integral time (I) setting (Un\G36, Un\G68, Un\G100, Un\G132): 1 to 3600 (1s to 3600s)
• CH† Derivative time (D) setting (Un\G37, Un\G69, Un\G101, Un\G133): 0 to 3600 (0s to 3600s)

If auto tuning ends in fail due to the calculated value of PID constants as described above, the system configuration needs to
be reconsidered (such as selecting proper heater capacity).

(f) Change of the upper limit setting limiter or lower limit setting limiter and the set
value (SV)
If the set value (SV) goes out of the setting range due to the change in one of the following buffer memory
areas, auto tuning ends in fail.
• CH† Upper limit setting limiter (Un\G55, Un\G87, Un\G119, Un\G151)
• CH† Lower limit setting limiter (Un\G56, Un\G88, Un\G120, Un\G152)

(g) Other conditions

In addition to the conditions described up until here, if any of the following conditions applies, auto tuning ends
in fail.
• CH† PID control forced stop instruction (YnC to YnF) has been turned on from off. ( Page 333, 8
Appendix 1.2 (7))
• Hardware failure has occurred.
• In standard control, CH† Proportional band (P) setting (Un\G35, Un\G67, Un\G99, Un\G131) has been

8.2.7 Auto tuning function

8.2 Temperature Control Mode
set to 0. (has been set to two-position control) ( Page 355, Appendix 2 (15))
• In heating-cooling control, CH† Heating proportional band (Ph) setting (Un\G35, Un\G67, Un\G99,
Un\G131) has been set to 0. (has been set to two-position control) ( Page 355, Appendix 2 (15))

(8) Operation on completion of auto tuning

(a) Normal completion

The L60TC4 operates as follows.
• Turns off CH† Auto tuning status (Xn4 to Xn7)
• Stores the PID constants in the buffer memory ( Page 142, Section 8.2.7 (3))
• Stores a value in CH† Loop disconnection detection judgment time (Un\G59, Un\G91, Un\G123,
Un\G155) (If this was set to 0 (s) at the start of auto tuning, the setting remains unchanged.)

(b) Abnormal completion

The L60TC4 operates as follows.
• Turns off CH† Auto tuning status (Xn4 to Xn7).
• Does not store the PID constants in the buffer memory. ( Page 142, Section 8.2.7 (3))

(9) Checking the completion of auto tuning

The completion of auto tuning can be checked by the status change from on to off in CH† Auto tuning status
(Xn4 to Xn7).

151
 (10)Adjustment after auto tuning
To change the control response toward the PID constants calculated by auto tuning, change the setting in the
following buffer memory area.
• CH† Control response parameter (Un\G49, Un\G81, Un\G113, Un\G145) ( Page 366, Appendix 2 (25))

152
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

8.2.8 Simple Two-degree-of-freedom

Standard Heating-cooling

This is the simplified control form of the two-degree-of-freedom PID control. In this form of PID control, the L60TC4
controls the target subject using not only PID constants but also the control response parameter. The response speed
toward the change of the set value (SV) can be selected from three levels.
General PID control is called one-degree-of freedom PID control. In the one-degree-of freedom PID control, when PID
constants to improve "response to the change of the set value (SV)" are set, "response to the disturbance" degrades.
Conversely, when PID constants to improve "response to the disturbance" are set, "response to the change of the set
value (SV)" degrades.
On the other hand, in the two-degree-of-freedom PID control, "response to the change of the set value (SV)" and
"response to the disturbance" can be compatible with each other.
Note that required parameter settings increase and PID constants can hardly be auto-set by the auto tuning function
for complete two-degree-of-freedom PID control. Therefore, the L60TC4 operates in the simple two-degree-of-freedom
PID control for which parameters are simplified.
The level of "response to the change of the set value (SV)" can be selected from the following, maintaining the PID
constants that improve "response to the disturbance".
• Fast
• Normal
• Slow

Temperature process value (PV) Fast

Normal 8

Set value (SV) 2

8.2.8 Simple Two-degree-of-freedom

8.2 Temperature Control Mode
Change
Slow

Set value (SV) 1

Time
Set value (SV) change point

(1) Setting method

Set a value on "Control response parameter".

Project window [Intelligent Function Module] Module name [Parameter]

153
8.2.9 Derivative Action Selection Function
Standard Heating-cooling

An derivative action appropriate for each of fixed value action and ramp action can be selected and the action
characteristic can be improved using this function.

(1) Action
Each type of derivative action operates as shown below.

CH† Derivative action

selection (Un\G729,
Action
Un\G745, Un\G761,
Un\G777)

Fixed value action Ramp action

Set value (SV) This setting effectively

Disturbance prevents the temperature
Measured value derivation from being affected by
(0) disturbance, though the
Temperature performance to follow the
process value set value can be low.
(PV)

Fixed value action Ramp action

Set value (SV)

Disturbance This setting allows the
temperature to follow the
Deviation derivation (1)
set value well, though the
disturbance effect is great.
Temperature
process value
(PV)

(2) Setting method

Set a value on "Derivative action selection".

Project window [Intelligent Function Module] Module name [Parameter]

154
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

8.2.10 Setting Change Rate Limiter Setting Function

Standard Heating-cooling

When the set value (SV) is changed, the change rate in the specified time unit can be set on "Setting Change Rate
Limiter Setting". The user can select whether to set this rate for temperature rise and temperature drop individually or
at once.

(1) Setting method

(a) Batch/individual setting for temperature rise and temperature drop

Select the value on "Setting Change Rate Limiter Setting".

Project window [Intelligent Function Module] Module name [Switch Setting]

(b) Change rate setting

For batch-change, set "Setting change rate limiter or Setting change limiter (Temperature rise)" only.

Project window [Intelligent Function Module] Module name [Parameter]

8

8.2.10 Setting Change Rate Limiter Setting Function

8.2 Temperature Control Mode
For individual setting, set "Setting change rate limiter or Setting change limiter (Temperature rise)" and "Setting
change rate limiter (Temperature drop)".

Project window [Intelligent Function Module] Module name [Parameter]

155
 (c) Time unit setting
Set the time unit of the setting change rate limiter on "Setting change rate limiter Unit time setting".

Project window [Intelligent Function Module] Module name [Parameter]

Ex. Operation of when individual setting is selected on Switch Setting

CH Setting change rate limiter (temperature rise)

Temperature process (Un\G52, Un\G84, Un\G116, Un\G148)
value (PV) CH Setting change rate limiter (temperature drop)
Set value (Un\G564, Un\G596, Un\G628, Un\G660)
(SV) 2

Set value
(SV) 3
Set value 1 minute
(SV) 1
Time
1 minute

Default value of CH Setting change rate limiter unit time setting

(Un\G735, Un\G751, Un\G767, Un\G783)

156
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

8.2.11 Alert Function

Standard Heating-cooling

When the process value (PV) or deviation reaches the value set in advance, the system is set in an alert status. Use
this function to activate danger signals of devices or safety devices.
The alert function is classified into input alerts and deviation alerts depending on the setting of the alert mode.
• Input alert: upper limit input alert, lower limit input alert ( Page 157, Section 8.2.11 (1))
• Deviation alert: upper limit deviation alert, lower limit deviation alert, upper lower limit deviation alert, within-
range alert ( Page 158, Section 8.2.11 (2))

(1) Input alert

With the upper limit input alert, when the process value (PV) is equal to or greater than the alert set value, the
system is put in an alert status.
With the lower limit input alert, when the process value (PV) is equal to or less than the alert set value, the system
is put in an alert status.

Upper limit input alert Lower limit input alert

Temperature process value (PV) Temperature process value (PV)

8
Alert set value Alert set value

Time Time

8.2.11 Alert Function

8.2 Temperature Control Mode
Alert status Alert status
Non-alert status Alert status Non-alert status Alert status

(a) Setting method

Set the alert mode. ( Page 167, Section 8.2.11 (7) (a))
• Upper limit input alert: Set the alert mode to "1: Upper Limit Input Alert".
• Lower limit input alert: Set the alert mode to "2: Lower Limit Input Alert".

157
 (2) Deviation alert
With the deviation alert, when the deviation (E) between the temperature process value (PV) and the set value
(SV) meets a particular condition, the system is put in an alert status.
The set value (SV) to be referred is either "set value (SV) monitor" or "set value (SV) setting" depending on the
alert mode. When a setting change rate limiter is specified, "set value (SV) monitor" follows the set value (SV) by
the specified change rate. (For details on the setting change rate limiter setting, refer to Page 369, Appendix
2 (28).)
The following table describes the use of each set value (SV) of when a setting change rate limiter is specified, and
can be referred to use a deviation alert.

Reference area of the set

Use (when the set value (SV) is changed)
value (SV)
This value is used when the temperature process value (PV) needs to follow the
CH† Set value (SV) monitor changing set value (SV) within a consistent deviation (E). If the temperature process
(Un\G25 to Un\G28) value (PV) does not follow the set value (SV) and strays out of the set deviation range,
an alert occurs.
This value is used for the alert occurrence to be determined only by the deviation (E)
CH† Set value (SV) setting from the set value (SV). In this case, how well the temperature process value (PV) is
(Un\G34, Un\G66, Un\G98, following the changing set value (SV) does not matter. Even if the value in CH† Set
Un\G130) value (SV) monitor (Un\G25 to Un\G28) is changing, an alert can occur depending on the
deviation (E) from the set value (SV).

(a) Set value (SV) and the setting change rate limiter setting
The following figures show the relationships of two types of set value (SV) depending on whether the setting
change rate limiter is specified or not.
• When the setting change rate limiter is not specified: The two types of set value (SV) are the same value.

CH Set value (SV) setting

(Un\G34, Un\G66, Un\G98, Un\G130)
Temperature process value (PV)
and
CH Set value (SV) monitor (Un\G25 to Un\G28)

Set value (SV) 2

Change

Set value (SV) 1

0 Time

158
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

• When the setting change rate limiter is specified: The value in CH† Set value (SV) monitor (Un\G25 to
Un\G28) follows the set value (SV) of after the setting is reflected.

Temperature process value (PV) CH Set value (SV) setting

(Un\G34, Un\G66, UG98, Un\G130)

Set value (SV) 2 CH Set value (SV) monitor

(Un\G25 to Un\G28)
CH Setting change rate limiter or
Change setting change rate limiter (temperature rise)
(Un\G52, Un\G84, Un\G116, Un\G148)

Set value (SV) 1

0 Time

CH Setting change rate limiter unit time setting

(Un\G735, Un\G751, Un\G767, Un\G783)

(b) Upper limit deviation alert

When the deviation (E) is equal to or greater than the alert set value, the system is put in an alert status.

When the alert set value is positive When the alert set value is negative

Temperature process value (PV) Temperature process value (PV)

8
Set value
(SV)*1
Set value
(SV)*1

8.2.11 Alert Function

8.2 Temperature Control Mode
Time Time
Deviation (E) Deviation (E)
(= Temperature process value (PV) - set value (SV)*1) (= Temperature process value (PV) - set value (SV)*1)

Alert set value

0 Time

0 Time
Alert set value

Alert status Alert status

Non-alert status Alert status Non-alert status Alert status

*1 Depending on the alert mode, this value becomes "set value (SV) monitor" or "set value (SV) setting". ( Page 158,
Section 8.2.11 (2) (a))

159
 (c) Lower limit deviation alert
When the deviation (E) is equal to or less than the alert set value, the system is put in an alert status.

When the alert set value is positive When the alert set value is negative

Temperature process value (PV) Temperature process value (PV)

Set value
(SV)*1
Set value
(SV)*1

Time Time
Deviation (E) Deviation (E)
(= Temperature process value (PV) - set value (SV)*1) (= Temperature process value (PV) - set value (SV)*1)

Alert set value

0 Time
0 Time
Alert set value

Alert status Alert status

Non-alert status Alert status Non-alert status Alert status

*1 Depending on the alert mode, this value becomes "set value (SV) monitor" or "set value (SV) setting". ( Page 158,
Section 8.2.11 (2) (a))

(d) Upper lower limit deviation alert

When one of the following conditions is satisfied, the system is put in an alert status.
• Deviation (E) ≥ Alert set value
• Deviation (E) ≤ -(Alert set value)

Temperature process value (PV)

Set value (SV)*1

Time
Deviation (E) (= Temperature process value (PV) - set value (SV)*1)

Alert set value

0 Time

- (Alert set value)

Alert status

Non-alert status Alert status

*1 Depending on the alert mode, this value becomes "set value (SV) monitor" or "set value (SV) setting". ( Page 158,
Section 8.2.11 (2) (a))

160
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

(e) Within-range alert

When the following condition is satisfied, the system is put in an alert status.
• -(Alert set value) ≤ Deviation (E) ≤ Alert set value

Temperature process value (PV)

Set value (SV)*1

Time
Deviation (E) (= Temperature process value (PV) - set value (SV)*1)

Alert set value

0 Time

- (Alert set value)

Alert status

Non-alert status Alert status

*1 Depending on the alert mode, this value becomes "set value (SV) monitor" or "set value (SV) setting". ( Page 158,
8
Section 8.2.11 (2) (a))

8.2.11 Alert Function

8.2 Temperature Control Mode

161
 (f) Setting method (alert mode and the set value (SV) to be referred)
Select one of the two types of set value (SV) described in Page 158, Section 8.2.11 (2) by specifying an
alert mode.
• When the alert judgment requires the value in CH† Set value (SV) monitor (Un\G25 to Un\G28), set one
of the following values.

Alert mode setting ( Page 167, Section 8.2.11 (7) (a))

Setting value Alert mode name
3 Upper Limit Deviation Alert
4 Lower Limit Deviation Alert
5 Upper/Lower Deviation Alert
6 Within-Range Alert
9 Upper Limit Deviation Alert with Wait
10 Lower Limit Deviation Alert with Wait
11 Upper/Lower Limit Deviation Alert with Wait
12 Upper Limit Deviation Alert with Re-Wait
13 Lower Limit Deviation Alert with Re-Wait
14 Upper/Lower Limit Deviation Alert with Re-Wait

• When the alert judgment requires the value in CH† Set value (SV) setting (Un\G34, Un\G66, Un\G98,
Un\G130), set one of the following values.

Alert mode setting ( Page 167, Section 8.2.11 (7) (a))

Setting value Alert mode name
15 Upper Limit Deviation Alert (Use Set Value (SV) Setting Value)
16 Lower Limit Deviation Alert (Use Set Value (SV) Setting Value)
17 Upper lower deviation alert (Use Set Value (SV) Setting Value)
18 Within-range deviation alert (Use Set Value (SV) Setting Value)
19 Upper Limit Deviation Alert with Wait (Use Set Value (SV) Setting Value)
20 Lower Limit Deviation Alert with Wait (Use Set Value (SV) Setting Value)
21 Upper/Lower Limit Deviation Alert with Wait (Use Set Value (SV) Setting Value)
22 Upper Limit Deviation Alert with Re-Wait (Use Set Value (SV) Setting Value)
23 Lower Limit Deviation Alert with Re-Wait (Use Set Value (SV) Setting Value)
24 Upper/Lower Limit Deviation Alert with Re-Wait (Use Set Value (SV) Setting Value)

162
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

(3) Alert with standby

Even if the temperature process value (PV) or deviation (E) is in a condition to be in an alert status when the
module's status is changed from the setting mode to the operation mode (Setting/operation mode instruction
(Yn1): OFF→ON), the alert does not occur. The alert function can be disabled until the temperature process value
(PV) or deviation (E) strays out of the condition to be in an alert status.

Ex. When the alert mode is set to Lower limit deviation alert with standby (10)
The alert function is inactive until the deviation (E) exceeds the alert set value (right figure below).

Lower limit deviation alert ( Page 160, Section

Lower limit deviation alert with standby
8.2.11 (2) (c))

Deviation (E) Deviation (E)

(= Temperature process value (PV) - set value (SV)*1) (= Temperature process value (PV) - set value (SV)*1)

0 Time 0 Time

Alert set value Alert set value

Wait operation
region
Alert status Alert status

8
Non-alert status Alert status Non-alert status Alert status

*1 Depending on the alert mode, this value becomes "set value (SV) monitor" or "set value (SV) setting". ( Page 158,
Section 8.2.11 (2) (a))

8.2.11 Alert Function

8.2 Temperature Control Mode
When the system goes into the non-alert status even once after an alert judgment started following the setting of the alert
mode, the alert with standby will be inactive even if the mode is changed to the one with standby.

(a) Setting method

Select one of the following alert modes.

Alert mode setting ( Page 167, Section 8.2.11 (7) (a))

Setting value Alert mode name
7 Upper Limit Input Alert with Wait
8 Lower Limit Input Alert with Wait
9 Upper Limit Deviation Alert with Wait
10 Lower Limit Deviation Alert with Wait
11 Upper/Lower Limit Deviation Alert with Wait
19 Upper Limit Deviation Alert with Wait (Use Set Value (SV) Setting Value)
20 Lower Limit Deviation Alert with Wait (Use Set Value (SV) Setting Value)
21 Upper/Lower Limit Deviation Alert with Wait (Use Set Value (SV) Setting Value)

163
 (4) Alert with standby (second time)
A function to deactivate the alert function once again when the set value (SV) is changed is added to an alert with
standby. This is called an alert with standby (second time).
When control needs the set value (SV) change, the alert supposed to occur can be avoided when the set value is
changed by selecting an alert with standby (second time).

Ex. When the temperature process value (PV) is on the position as below before the set value (SV) change

Temperature process value (PV)

Before temperature
Alert region
set value (SV) change

Alert set value Set value (SV)

Temperature set value

Temperature process value (PV) (SV) change
After temperature
Alert region
set value (SV) change

Alert set value Set value (SV)*1

*1 Depending on the alert mode, this value becomes "set value (SV) monitor" or "set value (SV) setting". ( Page 158,
Section 8.2.11 (2) (a))

For a deviation alert, when the set value (SV) is changed, the temperature process value (PV) goes into the
alert area; therefore, the system goes into an alert status.
To prevent the case above, the alert output is put on standby.

(a) Setting method

Select one of the following alert modes.

Alert mode setting ( Page 167, Section 8.2.11 (7) (a))

Setting value Alert mode name
12 Upper Limit Deviation Alert with Re-Wait
13 Lower Limit Deviation Alert with Re-Wait
14 Upper/Lower Limit Deviation Alert with Re-Wait
22 Upper Limit Deviation Alert with Re-Wait (Use Set Value (SV) Setting Value)
23 Lower Limit Deviation Alert with Re-Wait (Use Set Value (SV) Setting Value)
24 Upper/Lower Limit Deviation Alert with Re-Wait (Use Set Value (SV) Setting Value)

164
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

Remark
If a setting change rate limiter is specified, an alert with standby (second time) is not active even though one of the following
alert modes is selected.

Alert mode setting ( Page 167, Section 8.2.11 (7) (a))

Setting value Alert mode name
12 Upper Limit Deviation Alert with Re-Wait
13 Lower Limit Deviation Alert with Re-Wait
14 Upper/Lower Limit Deviation Alert with Re-Wait

The standby (second time) is used to prevent alert occurrence when the set value (SV) is changed.
If a setting change rate limiter is specified, the value in CH† Set value (SV) monitor (Un\G25 to Un\G28) gradually changes
following the set value (SV) when the set value (SV) is changed. Suppose that the standby (second time) function is
activated under such occasion. The alert standby would be always active; therefore an alert would not be output even when
the temperature process value (PV) is not following the value in CH† Set value (SV) monitor (Un\G25 to Un\G28). To
prevent such cases, the standby (second time) function is deactivated if a setting change rate limiter is used.

8.2.11 Alert Function

8.2 Temperature Control Mode

165
 (5) Condition for alert judgment
Whether alert occurrence is judged or not depends on the settings of the followings:
• Setting/operation mode instruction (Yn1) ( Page 330, Appendix 1.2 (1))
• PID continuation flag (Un\G169) ( Page 381, Appendix 2 (43))
• CH† PID control forced stop instruction (YnC to YnF) ( Page 333, Appendix 1.2 (7))
• CH† Stop mode setting (Un\G33, Un\G65, Un\G97, Un\G129) ( Page 353, Appendix 2 (13))
The following table shows the relationship between each setting above and the execution of alert judgment.
: Judged ×: Not judged
Setting/operation PID CH† PID control CH† Stop mode setting
Alert
mode instruction continuation forced stop instruction (Un\G33, Un\G65, Un\G97,
judgment
(Yn1)*1 flag (Un\G169) (YnC to YnF) Un\G129)
Stop (0) ×
Power ON, Stop (0)/Continue
OFF/ON Monitor (1) ×
Setting mode (1)
Alert (2)

OFF Stop (0)/Monitor (1)/Alert (2)

Operation mode Stop (0)/Continue Stop (0) ×

(operating) (1) ON Monitor (1) ×
Alert (2)
Stop (0) ×
Stop (0) OFF/ON Monitor (1) ×
Alert (2)
Setting mode
OFF Stop (0)/Monitor (1)/Alert (2)
(after operation)
Stop (0) ×
Continue (1)
ON Monitor (1) ×
Alert (2)

*1 For details, refer to Page 324, Appendix 1.1 (2).

Even if the conditions above are satisfied, when CH† Unused channel setting (Un\G61, Un\G93, Un\G125,
Un\G157) is set to Unused (1), alert judgment is not executed. ( Page 376, Appendix 2 (35))

(6) Condition where CH† Alert occurrence flag (XnC to XnF) turns off
The condition where CH† Alert occurrence flag turns off differs depending on the setting of the following buffer
memory area.
• CH† Stop mode setting (Un\G33, Un\G65, Un\G97, Un\G129) ( Page 353, Appendix 2 (13))

CH† Stop mode setting (Un\G33,

Condition where CH† Alert occurrence flag (XnC to XnF) turns off
Un\G65, Un\G97, Un\G129)
Stop (0) When the cause of the alert is resolved, or when the system is shifted from the
operation mode to the setting mode (when Setting/operation mode instruction
Monitor (1)
(Yn1) is turned off from on).
Alert (2) When the cause of the alert is resolved,

166
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

(7) Setting alert modes and alert set values

Settings of the alert mode and alert set value are described below.

(a) Alert mode

Set the alert mode. Up to four modes can be set for each channel. Set modes in "Alert 1 mode setting" to "Alert
4 mode setting".

Project window [Intelligent Function Module] Module name [Parameter]

Each alert mode for alert 1 to 4 corresponds to alert set value 1 to 4. 8

(b) Alert set value
Set the value where CH† Alert 1 (b8 of Un\G5 to Un\G8) to CH† Alert 4 (b11 of Un\G5 to Un\G8) turns on

8.2.11 Alert Function

8.2 Temperature Control Mode
according to the set alert mode. Up to four values can be set for each channel.
Set values in "Alert set value 1" to "Alert set value 4".

Project window [Intelligent Function Module] Module name [Parameter]

Alert set value 1 to 4 corresponds to each alert mode for alert 1 to 4.

167
 (8) Setting the alert dead band
When the temperature process value (PV) or deviation (E) is close to the alert set value, alert status and non-alert
status may alternates repeatedly due to inconsistent input.
Such case can be prevented by setting an alert dead band.

(a) Setting method

Set a value on "Alert dead band setting".

Project window [Intelligent Function Module] Module name [Parameter]

Ex. When the alert mode is set to Upper limit input alert (1) ( Page 157, Section 8.2.11 (1))
When a value other than 0 (0.0%) is set in Alert dead band setting (Un\G164), the system is put in the
alert status when upper limit input becomes equal to or greater than the alert set value. The system is put
in the non-alert status when the upper limit falls below the alert dead band (figure on the right).

When 0 (0.0%) is set in Alert dead band setting When a value other than 0 (0.0%) is set in Alert dead
(Un\G164) band setting (Un\G164)

Temperature process value (PV) Temperature process value (PV)

Alert set value Alert set value

Dead band

Time Time
Alert status Alert status

Non-alert status Alert status Non-alert status Alert status

168
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

(9) Setting the number of alert delay

Set the number of sampling to judge alert occurrence. The system is set in the alert status when the process
value (PV) that has reached the alert set value remains in the alert range until the number of sampling becomes
equal to or greater than the preset number of alert delays.

(a) Setting method

Set a value on "Number of alert delay".

Project window [Intelligent Function Module] Module name [Parameter]

Ex. When the alert mode is set to Upper limit input alert (1) ( Page 157, Section 8.2.11 (1))
When 5 is set as the number of alert delay, the system is not put in the alert status if the number of
sampling is 4 or less.

Temperature process value (PV)

Alert set value

Set value (SV)

8
Time
Sampling count

8.2.11 Alert Function

8.2 Temperature Control Mode
3 times 5 times
Alert status

Non-alert status Alert status

169
 (10)Alert mode and settings
The following table shows the alert modes and validity/availability of related settings.
(Active/Yes: , Inactive/No: ⎯)

Alert dead band Number of alert Alert with Alert with

setting delay standby standby (second
Alert ( Page 168, ( Page 169, ( Page 163, time) ( Page
Section 8.2.11 Section 8.2.11 Section 8.2.11 164, Section
(8)) (9)) (3)) 8.2.11 (4))
Upper limit input alert ( Page
⎯
Input 157, Section 8.2.11 (1))
alert Lower limit input alert ( Page
⎯
157, Section 8.2.11 (1))
Upper limit deviation alert
( Page 159, Section 8.2.11 (2)
(b))
Upper limit deviation alert (using the
set value (SV)) ( Page 159,
Section 8.2.11 (2) (b))
Lower limit deviation alert
( Page 160, Section 8.2.11 (2)
(c))
Lower limit deviation alert (using the
set value (SV)) ( Page 160,
Deviation Section 8.2.11 (2) (c))
alert Upper lower limit deviation alert
( Page 160, Section 8.2.11 (2)
(d))
Upper lower limit deviation alert
(using the set value (SV))
( Page 160, Section 8.2.11 (2)
(d))

Within-range alert ( Page 161,

⎯ ⎯
Section 8.2.11 (2) (e))
Within-range alert (using the set
value (SV)) ( Page 161, ⎯ ⎯
Section 8.2.11 (2) (e))

170
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

8.2.12 RFB Limiter Function

Standard Heating-cooling

The RFB (reset feed back) function operates when deviation (E) continues for a long period of time. In such occasion,
this function limits the PID operation result (manipulated value (MV)) from an integral action so that it does not exceed
the valid range of the manipulated value (MV).
This function operates automatically on execution of PID control; therefore, a setting by the user is unnecessary.

Remark
When the PID operation result exceeds the upper limit output limiter value, the L60TC4 operates as follows:
• The RFB function levels the manipulated value (MV) to the upper limit output limiter value by feeding back the
exceeded value to the integral value.
When the PID operation result is below the lower limit output limiter value, the L60TC4 operates as follows:
• The RFB function levels the manipulated value (MV) to the lower limit output limiter value by feeding back the
lacking value to the integral value.

8.2.12 RFB Limiter Function

8.2 Temperature Control Mode

171
8.2.13 Input/output (with another analog module) function
Standard Heating-cooling

Input and output can be processed using other analog modules (such as an A/D converter module or D/A converter
module) in the system.

(1) Input
In general, a temperature control module uses the temperature measured through thermocouples or platinum
resistance thermometers connected to the module as a temperature process value (PV).
In the L60TC4, the digital input value of current or voltage converted by other analog modules (such as an A/D
converter module) in the system can also be used as a temperature process value (PV).

(a) Setting method

Follow the procedure below.
1. Select "Input range" from one of "201:Input with Another Analog Module Measured Temperature
Range (0 to 4000)" to "205:Input with Another Analog Module Measured Temperature Range (0 to
32000)".

Project window [Intelligent Function Module] Module name [Parameter]

2. Store the value of another analog module (such as an A/D converter module) into CH†
Temperature process value (PV) for input with another analog module (Un\G689 to Un\G692).
Store the value of another analog module (such as an A/D converter module) into CH†
Temperature process value (PV) for input with another analog module. (Un\G689 to Un\G692)
( Page 402, Appendix 2 (74))

● If the second procedure above is executed ahead of the first procedure, a write data error (error code: †††4H) occurs.

● When this function is used, the value in the following buffer memory area is used for the temperature process value (PV)
scaling function.
• CH† Temperature process value (PV) for input with another analog module (Un\G689 to Un\G692)
For details on the temperature process value (PV) scaling function, refer to the following.
Page 221, Section 8.3.1

172
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

(2) Output
Instead of the transistor output from the temperature control module, analog output values from other analog
modules (such as a D/A converter module) can be used as the manipulated value (MV).

(a) Setting method

Follow the procedure below (for the standard control).
1. Select the value on "Resolution of the manipulated value for output with another analog module".

Project window [Intelligent Function Module] Module name [Parameter]

2. Store the value in CH† Manipulated value (MV) for output with another analog module (Un\G177 to
Un\G180) into the buffer memory in other analog module (such as a D/A converter module).
( Page 383, Appendix 2 (47))

● When the manipulated value (MV) is -5.0% to 0.0%, 0 is stored in Manipulated value (MV) for output with another analog
module. When the manipulated value (MV) is 100.0% to 105.0%, 4000/12000/16000/20000 is stored in Manipulated
value (MV) for output with another analog module.
● The manipulated value (MV) in a percentage value is stored into Manipulated value (MV) for output with another analog 8
module (digital output value) in real time.

8.2.13 Input/output (with another analog module) function

8.2 Temperature Control Mode

173
8.2.14 ON delay output function
Standard Heating-cooling

This function allows the user to set the delay (response/scan time delay) of transistor output. By setting a delay, and
monitoring the ON delay output flag and external output on the program, disconnection of external output can be
judged. The following figure is an example using the ON delay flag.

(Scan time delay)

Disconnection is determined
based on the ON/OFF status
of the contact of the input module
CPU module L60TC4 Input module and ON delay output flag.

Sensor ON/OFF status

(Response delay)

Transistor output

External
current
sensor

Heater

(1) Setting method

Set a value on "Transistor output monitor ON delay time setting".

Project window [Intelligent Function Module] Module name [Parameter]

174
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

8.2.15 Self-tuning function

Standard

The L60TC4 constantly monitors the control state. When the control system is oscillatory, this function allows PID
constants to be automatically changed under the following situations such as:
• After the control has been just started
• When the set value (SV) is changed
• When the characteristics of a controlled object fluctuates
Unlike the auto tuning function, a normal control response waveform is monitored and PID constants are automatically
calculated and set. This allows an object to be controlled with the most suitable PID constants all the time without
disturbance.

(1) Differences between auto tuning and self-tuning

The following table lists the differences between auto tuning and self-tuning.

Item Auto tuning Self-tuning

The manipulated value (MV) is turned on/off and PID PID constants are calculated based on an oscillation
PID constants constants are calculated based on the hunting cycle occurred under situations such as after the control has
calculation and amplitude of the temperature process value (PV) been just started, the set value (SV) has been
for the set value (SV). changed, and when a control response is oscillatory.
Turning off and on CH† Auto tuning instruction (Yn4 to The L60TC4 constantly monitors the control response.
Execution method Yn7) starts auto tuning and changes PID constants
upon completion.
PID constants are calculated and changed when the
control response is slow.
8
PID constants are calculated based on the control PID constants are calculated based on the control
Control response response of when the manipulated value (MV) is turned response during temperature control; therefore, the
on/off; therefore, the control may become unstable. control is stable.

8.2.15 Self-tuning function

8.2 Temperature Control Mode
The optimum PID constants are calculated by one
The optimum PID constants may not be obtained by
tuning.
one tuning. CH† Loop disconnection detection
Calculation result In the standard control, CH† Loop disconnection
judgment time (Un\G59, Un\G91, Un\G123, Un\G155)
detection judgment time (Un\G59, Un\G91, Un\G123,
is not calculated.
Un\G155) is also calculated.
PID constants setting
when the
Users perform auto tuning again to change PID
characteristics of a The L60TC4 automatically changes PID constants.
constants.
controlled object
fluctuate
Available control mode The standard control and heating-cooling control The standard control only

175
 (2) Starting ST and vibration ST
Two types of self-tuning are available depending on the state of the control system: starting ST (self-tuning) and
vibration ST.
• Starting ST: Self-tuning is performed immediately after the control is started or when the set value (SV) is
changed.
• Vibration ST: Self-tuning is performed when the control system in a stable state has become oscillatory due
to reasons such as disturbance.

Temperature process value (PV)

Starting ST Vibration ST

Time

(a) How to set starting ST

Select one of the following four setting values for "Self-tuning setting".
• 1: Starting ST (PID Constant Only)
• 2: Starting ST (Simultaneous Temperature Rise Parameter Only)
• 3: Starting ST (PID Constant and Simultaneous Temperature Rise Parameter)
• 4: Starting ST plus Vibration ST (PID Constant Only)

Project window [Intelligent Function Module] Module name [Parameter]

(b) How to set vibration ST

Set the following for "Self-tuning setting".
• 4: Starting ST plus Vibration ST (PID Constant Only)

Project window [Intelligent Function Module] Module name [Parameter]

176
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

(3) Procedure for the self-tuning control

The following is the flow chart for the control.

Self-tuning start

Did the
temperature adjustment control start? NO
Or did the set value (SV)
change?
YES
CH Auto tuning status (Xn4 to Xn7) turns on. Is the
(Starting ST) temperature process value (PV) NO
changed out of the set
value (SV)?
CH PID auto-correction status YES
(b0 of Un\G575, Un\G607, Un\G639, Un\G671)
turns OFF.
NO
Is the response erratic?

The module is controlled based on the set

PID constants. YES
CH Auto tuning status (Xn4 to Xn7) turns on.
(Vibration ST)
PID constants are calculated by self-tuning.

CH PID auto-correction status

(b0 of Un\G575, Un\G607, Un\G639, Un\G671)
NO turns OFF.
Response failed?

8
YES PID constants are calculated and changed by
self-tuning.
The setting is changed to PID constants calculated by
self-tuning.

CH PID auto-correction status

8.2.15 Self-tuning function

8.2 Temperature Control Mode
(b0 of Un\G575, Un\G607, Un\G639, Un\G671)
CH PID auto-correction status
turns ON.
(b0 of Un\G575, Un\G607, Un\G639, Un\G671)
turns ON.

CH Auto tuning status (Xn4 to Xn7) turns off.

Temperature is controlled by the set PID constants.

Self-tuning completion

177
 (4) Operation with starting ST
This section explains the operation of when the temperature control is started or the set value (SV) is changed
(starting ST).
With starting ST, the module monitors the response waveform of the temperature process value (PV) of when the
temperature control is started or when the set value (SV) is changed. Then PID constants are automatically
corrected. The following table lists the operations of the module with starting ST.

Operation with starting ST

CH† PID auto-correction status (b0 of Un\G575, Un\G607, Un\G639, Un\G671) is turned 0 (OFF). In addition,
1
CH† Auto tuning status (Xn4 to Xn7) is turned on.
2 Temperature is controlled using the PID constants set.
When a control response is poor, PID constants are calculated based on the response waveform and are set in
the buffer memory. In addition, CH† PID auto-correction status (b0 of Un\G575, Un\G607, Un\G639, Un\G671) is
3
turned 1 (ON). When a control response is good, CH† PID auto-correction status (b0 of Un\G575, Un\G607,
Un\G639, Un\G671) remains 0 (OFF) and PID constants are not changed.
4 CH† Auto tuning status (Xn4 to Xn7) is turned off.

Temperature process value (PV)

Set value (SV)

Control start

Time
Response measurement/evaluation

Self-tuning in execution

ON
CH Auto tuning status
OFF
(Xn4 to Xn7)
ON
CH PID auto-correction status
(b0 of Un\G575, Un\G607, OFF (Only when PID constants were changed)
Un\G639, Un\G671)

PID constants Before change (Only for poor response) After change

Executed by the L60TC4

(a) Conditions for self-tuning (starting ST)

Self-tuning is executed under the following conditions:
• When the setting mode is shifted to the operation mode (Setting/operation mode instruction (Yn1) is
turned off and on) the first time after the power is turned off and on or after the CPU module is reset and
the reset is cancelled
• When the setting mode is shifted to the operation mode the second time or later after the power is turned
off and on or after the CPU module is reset and the reset is cancelled (only when the temperature process
value (PV) has been stable for two minutes or longer before the mode is shifted)
• When the set value (SV) is changed (only when the set value (SV) after the change is greater than that
before the change and when the temperature process value (PV) before the change has been stable for
two minutes or longer

178
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

If the starting ST is started when the temperature process value (PV) is not stable, incorrect PID constants may be
determined. Execute the starting ST after the temperature process value (PV) has been stable for two minutes or longer.

8.2.15 Self-tuning function

8.2 Temperature Control Mode

179
 (5) Operation with vibration ST
This section explains the operation of when a control response is oscillatory (vibration ST).
With vibration ST, PID constants are automatically corrected to settle a vibration when a control response
becomes oscillatory due to reasons such as the change in the characteristic of a controlled object and conditions
for operation.
The following table lists the operations of the module with vibration ST. (The listed operations are those under the
state where temperature is being controlled with the PID constants set.)

Operation with vibration ST

CH† PID auto-correction status (b0 of Un\G575, Un\G607, Un\G639, Un\G671) is turned 0 (OFF). In addition,
1
CH† Auto tuning status (Xn4 to Xn7) is turned on.
2 PID constants are calculated based on a response waveform.
PID constants are set in the buffer memory and CH† PID auto-correction status (b0 of Un\G575, Un\G607,
3
Un\G639, Un\G671) is turned 1 (ON).
4 CH† Auto tuning status (Xn4 to Xn7) is turned off.

Temperature process value (PV)

Set value (SV)

Oscillation detected PID constants calculated

Time
Response measured

Self-tuning in execution

ON
CH Auto tuning status
(Xn4 to Xn7) OFF

ON
CH PID auto-correction status
Depends on previous
(b0 of Un\G575, Un\G607, execution result OFF
Un\G639, Un\G671)

PID constants Before change After change

Executed by the L60TC4

(a) Conditions for self-tuning (vibration ST)

Self-tuning is executed when the temperature process value (PV) goes outside the range that is judged as
unstable.

(b) Precautions
If self-tuning (vibration ST) is executed on the following objects, incorrect PID constants may be determined:
• Controlled objects where a disturbance periodically occurs
• Controlled objects with strong mutual interference

180
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

(6) Conditions where self-tuning is not executed

This section explains the conditions where self-tuning is not executed.

(a) The control method is not the PID control method

When the control method is one of the methods other than the PID control method (two-position control, P
control, PI control, PD control), the following is operated.
• CH† Self-tuning disable status (b8 of Un\G575, Un\G607, Un\G639, Un\G671) turns 1 (ON).
When all PID constants of target channels turn to a value other than 0, self-tuning is enabled.

Temperature process value (PV)

Set value (SV)

Oscillation detected

Time
Self-tuning disabled Self-tuning in execution

CH Proportional band (P) setting Setting 0

Setting = 0
(Un\G35, Un\G67, Un\G99, Un\G131)
8
CH Integral time (I) setting Setting 0
Setting = 0
(Un\G36, Un\G68, Un\G100, Un\G132)

CH Derivative time (D) setting Setting = 0 Setting 0

8.2.15 Self-tuning function

8.2 Temperature Control Mode
(Un\G37, Un\G69, Un\G101, Un\G133)

ON
CH Self-tuning disable status
OFF
(b8 of Un\G575, Un\G607, Un\G639, Un\G671)
ON
CH PID auto-correction status
(Depends on previous execution result) OFF
(b0 of Un\G575, Un\G607, Un\G639, Un\G671)

(b) Auto tuning is being executed

At the time of when auto tuning is completed, self-tuning is enabled. An error does not occur.

(c) The lower limit output limiter value is lower than the manipulated value (MV) and the
manipulated value (MV) is lower than the upper limit output limiter value when the
temperature control is started and the set value (SV) is changed
The starting ST does not start. However, self-tuning is enabled at the time of when a control response becomes
oscillatory under the following setting.
• CH† Self-tuning setting (Un\G574, Un\G606, Un\G638, Un\G670) is set to Starting ST and vibration ST
(4).

181
 (d) The manipulated value (MV) is not changed from the lower limit output limiter value
or upper limit output limiter value when the temperature control is started and the
set value (SV) is changed
The starting ST does not start. However, self-tuning is enabled at the time of when a control response becomes
oscillatory under the following setting.
• CH† Self-tuning setting (Un\G574, Un\G606, Un\G638, Un\G670) is set to Starting ST plus Vibration ST
(4).

(e) The temperature process value (PV) is not within the temperature measurement
range
CH† Self-tuning disable status (b8 of Un\G575, Un\G607, Un\G639, Un\G671) turns 1 (ON).

(f) The value set in CH† Output variation limiter setting (Un\G44, Un\G76, Un\G108,
Un\G140) is not 0 ( Page 362, Appendix 2 (20))
CH† Self-tuning disable status (b8 of Un\G575, Un\G607, Un\G639, Un\G671) turns 1 (ON).

(g) CH† AUTO/MAN mode shift (Un\G50, Un\G82, Un\G114, Un\G146) is set to MAN (1)
( Page 367, Appendix 2 (26))
CH† Self-tuning disable status (b8 of Un\G575, Un\G607, Un\G639, Un\G671) turns 1 (ON).

(h) Other conditions

In addition to those described above, self-tuning is not executed under the following conditions.
• The heating-cooling control has been selected for the control mode. ( Page 108, Section 7.2)
• The following buffer memory areas have been set to values other than 0 (0.0%).

Buffer memory address

Buffer memory area name Reference
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH† Setting change rate limiter/Setting
Un\G52 Un\G84 Un\G116 Un\G148
change rate limiter (temperature rise)
Page 369, Appendix 2 (28)
CH† Setting change rate limiter
Un\G564 Un\G596 Un\G628 Un\G660
(temperature drop)

(7) Discontinuation of self-tuning

The following operation during self-tuning discontinues the self-tuning operation.
• The setting in CH† Self-tuning setting (Un\G574, Un\G606, Un\G638, Un\G670) has been changed to Do
Not Run the ST (0).
The self-tuning operation in process is discontinued and self-tuning is not performed anymore after that. (An error
does not occur.)
Whether self-tuning is being executed can be checked in CH† Auto tuning status (Xn4 to Xn7). ( Page 326,
Appendix 1.1 (5))

182
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

(8) Conditions where self-tuning does not complete due to errors

The following are the conditions where an error occurs in self-tuning.
• The setting for the buffer memory areas in the following table was changed during self-tuning.

Buffer memory address

Buffer memory area name Reference
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH† Proportional band (P) setting Un\G35 Un\G67 Un\G99 Un\G131 Page 355, Appendix 2 (15)
CH† Integral time (I) setting Un\G36 Un\G68 Un\G100 Un\G132 Page 357, Appendix 2 (16)
CH† Derivative time (D) setting Un\G37 Un\G69 Un\G101 Un\G133 Page 357, Appendix 2 (17)
CH† Upper limit output limiter Un\G42 Un\G74 Un\G106 Un\G138
Page 360, Appendix 2 (19)
CH† Lower limit output limiter Un\G43 Un\G75 Un\G107 Un\G139
CH† Sensor correction value setting Un\G45 Un\G77 Un\G109 Un\G141 Page 363, Appendix 2 (21)
CH† Control output cycle setting Un\G47 Un\G79 Un\G111 Un\G143 Page 364, Appendix 2 (23)
CH† Primary delay digital filter setting Un\G48 Un\G80 Un\G112 Un\G144 Page 365, Appendix 2 (24)
CH† AUTO/MAN mode shift Un\G50 Un\G82 Un\G114 Un\G146 Page 367, Appendix 2 (26)
CH† Setting change rate limiter/Setting
Un\G52 Un\G84 Un\G116 Un\G148 Page 369, Appendix 2 (28)
change rate limiter (temperature rise)
CH† Forward/reverse operation setting Un\G54 Un\G86 Un\G118 Un\G150 Page 371, Appendix 2 (30)
CH† Unused channel setting Un\G61 Un\G93 Un\G125 Un\G157 Page 376, Appendix 2 (35)
CH† Setting change rate limiter
Un\G564 Un\G596 Un\G628 Un\G660 Page 369, Appendix 2 (28)
(temperature drop)

• CH† Temperature process value (PV) (Un\G9 to Un\G12) is outside the temperature measurement range. 8
( Page 336, Appendix 2 (3))
• The manipulated value (MV) does not reach the upper limit output limiter value or lower limit output limiter
value before the measurement is completed and necessary measurement data is not obtained.

8.2.15 Self-tuning function

8.2 Temperature Control Mode
• After self-tuning is started with the starting ST, the temperature process value (PV) that is supposed to rise
drops by 1°C ( ) or more.
• After self-tuning is started with the starting ST, the temperature process value (PV) that is supposed to drop
rises by 1°C ( ) or more.
When an error occurs in self-tuning, CH Self-tuning error (b10 of Un\G575, Un\G607, Un\G639, Un\G671) turns 1
(ON).

183
 (9) Precautions
• Before starting the temperature control using the L60TC4, power on a controlled object such as a heater. If
the temperature control is started with a heater powered off, PID constants are calculated based on a
response that differs from the original characteristics using self-tuning.

Temperature process value (PV)

Set value (SV)

Original response
Response of when a heater is powered on
after the L60TC4 starts temperature control
Control start

Time
Heater powered ON

• Do not use the self-tuning function for controlled objects where a great disturbance (uncontrollable
disturbance) occurs periodically. Doing so may cause improper PID constants to be determined by self-
tuning. If the function is used for such objects, improper PID constants are set and the response for the set
value (SV) change or disturbance becomes slow.

Ex. Temperature control for an injection mold, temperature control for a hot plate for a semiconductor
manufacturing equipment

(10)To forcibly start up self-tuning

Self-tuning is started up when an error occurs with the control operation; therefore, the forced start-up is not
required. To forcibly start up self-tuning, operate the following:
• Set CH† Control response parameter (Un\G49, Un\G81, Un\G113, Un\G145) to Fast (2). ( Page 366,
Appendix 2 (25))
• Set CH† Integral time (I) setting (Un\G36, Un\G68, Un\G100, Un\G132) to a small value. ( Page 357,
Appendix 2 (16))
• Set CH† Derivative time (D) setting (Un\G37, Un\G69, Un\G101, Un\G133) to a small value. ( Page
357, Appendix 2 (17))

184
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

8.2.16 Peak current suppression function

Standard

The upper limit output limiter value for each channel is changed automatically and the peak current is suppressed by
dividing timing for transistor outputs using this function.

When the peak current suppression When the peak current suppression
control function is not used control function is used
20s 20s
5s 5s 5s 5s

CH1 CH1
Transistor Transistor
output output

CH2 CH2
Transistor Transistor
output output

CH3 CH3
Transistor Transistor
output output

CH4 CH4
Transistor Transistor
output output

Since all the transistor outputs used Setting the transistor outputs to
8
turn on at the same time, the peak different ON timings can reduce
current becomes high. the peak current to that of one
transistor output.

8.2.16 Peak current suppression function

8.2 Temperature Control Mode
Peak current Peak current

Timing can be divided into two to four timing.

185
 (1) The number of timing divided and upper limit output limiter
Set the number of timing to be divided (setting in Peak current suppression control group setting (Un\G784) in the
setting mode (Setting/operation mode status (Xn1): off). The setting is enabled by turning off, on, and off Setting
change instruction (YnB). At the time when the setting is enabled, the following buffer memory area is
automatically set according to the number of timing divided.
• CH† Upper limit output limiter (Un\G42, Un\G74, Un\G106, Un\G138) ( Page 360, Appendix 2 (19))
The following table lists the setting details.

The no. of timing divided CH† Upper limit output limiter (Un\G42, Un\G74, Un\G106, Un\G138)
2 500 (50.0%)
3 333 (33.3%)
4 250 (25.0%)

The following buffer memory area is set to 0.

• CH† Lower limit output limiter (Un\G43, Un\G75, Un\G107, Un\G139) ( Page 360, Appendix 2 (19))

When using this function, set the control output cycles for target channels to the same value. Even if the following buffer
memory area setting is different by each channel, an error does not occur.
• CH† Control output cycle setting (Un\G47, Un\G79, Un\G111, Un\G143) ( Page 364, Appendix 2 (23))
The module operates according to the value (%) of CH† Upper limit output limiter (Un\G42, Un\G74, Un\G106, Un\G138)
automatically set when this function is used.

Ex. Timing chart of when timing is divided into four timing

ON
Setting/operation mode instruction (Yn1) OFF
ON
Setting/operation mode status (Xn1) OFF

Peak current suppression control 0000H 4321H

group setting (Un\G784)
ON
Setting change instruction (YnB) OFF

CH Upper output limiter 250 (25.0%) (Change the automatically-

0 (Automatic
calculated result if needed.)
(Un\G42, Un\G74, Un\G106, Un\G138) storing)

ON
Setting change completion flag (XnB) OFF

Executed in a program
Executed by the L60TC4

186
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

(2) Examples of dividing timing

(a) Four timing

The following table shows two examples.

Example Channel Group

CH1 Group 1
CH2 Group 2
Example 1
CH3 Group 3
CH4 Group 4
CH1 Group 1
CH2 Group 2
Example 2
CH3 Not divided
CH4 Group 4

The following shows the relationship between groups and the values (%) of CH† Upper limit output limiter
(Un\G42, Un\G74, Un\G106, Un\G138).

Peak current suppression control group setting (Un\G784)

Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4
Divided into
Example 1 4 3 2 1 H
4 groups
0100 0011 0010 0001 25% 25% 25% 25%

8
CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4

Example 2 4 0 2 1 H Divided into
4 groups
0100 0000 0010 0001
25% 25% 25% 25%

8.2.16 Peak current suppression function

8.2 Temperature Control Mode
CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1
CH1 CH2 CH4

100% (In case of default value applied)

Whether the transistor output is executed or not
CH3
can be selected by CH3 Unused channel setting (Un\G125).
Page 376, Appendix 2 (35)

In Example 2, the maximum number of groups is four; therefore, timing is divided into four timing. Because no
channel is set for Group 3, no channel starts transistor output at the timing for Group 3.

187
 (b) Three timing
The following table shows two examples.

Example Channel Group

CH1 Group 1
CH2 Group 2
Example 1
CH3 Group 2
CH4 Group 3
CH1 Group 1
CH2 Group 2
Example 2
CH3 Group 3
CH4 Not divided

The following shows the relationship between groups and the values (%) of CH† Upper limit output limiter
(Un\G42, Un\G74, Un\G106, Un\G138).

Peak current suppression control group setting (Un\G784)

Group 1 Group 2 Group 3
Divided into
Example 1 3 2 2 1 H
3 groups
0011 0010 0010 0001 33.3% 33.3% 33.3%
CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 CH1 CH2, CH3 CH4

Group 1 Group 2 Group 3

Example 2 0 3 2 1 H Divided into
3 groups
0000 0011 0010 0001
33.3% 33.3% 33.3%
CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1
CH1 CH2 CH3

100% (In case of default value applied)

Whether the transistor output is executed or not
CH4
can be selected by CH4 Unused channel setting (Un\G157).
Page 376, Appendix 2 (35)

188
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

(c) Two timing

The following table shows two examples.

Example Channel Group

CH1 Group 1
CH2 Group 1
Example 1
CH3 Group 2
CH4 Group 2
CH1 Group 1
CH2 Group 2
Example 2
CH3 Not divided
CH4 Not divided

The following shows the relationship between groups and the values (%) of CH† Upper limit output limiter
(Un\G42, Un\G74, Un\G106, Un\G138).

Peak current suppression control group setting (Un\G784)

Group 1 Group 2
Divided into
Example 1 2 2 1 1 H
2 groups
0010 0010 0001 0001 50% 50%
CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 CH1, CH2 CH3, CH4

Group 1 Group 2
8
Example 2 0 0 2 1 H Divided into
2 groups
0000 0000 0010 0001
50% 50%
CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1
CH1 CH2

100% (In case of default value applied)

8.2.16 Peak current suppression function

8.2 Temperature Control Mode
Whether the transistor output is executed or CH3
not can be selected by CH3 Unused channel
setting (Un\G125) or CH4 Unused channel 100% (In case of default value applied)
setting (Un\G157). CH4
Page 376, Appendix 2 (35)

(3) Setting method

Set the timing under "Peak current suppression control group setting".

Project window [Intelligent Function Module] Module name [Parameter]

189
8.2.17 Simultaneous temperature rise function
Standard

This function allows several loops to reach the set value (SV) at the same time. Simultaneous temperature rise can be
performed on up to two groups separately by setting a group for the channels to rise at the same time. This function is
effective for controlled objects where the temperature rise should complete at the same time. Aligning the time for
temperature rise completion can perform even temperature control without partial burning or partial heat expansion. In
addition, the channel reaching the set value (SV) first does not need to be kept warm at the set value (SV) until the last
channel reaches, leading to energy saving.

Ex. The simultaneous temperature rise function used and not used in CH1

Temperature
process value (PV) Useless energy

CH1 Set value (SV)

CH2 Set value (SV)

CH3 Set value (SV)

CH4 Set value (SV)

Arrival point Arrival point

Time
(No simultaneous (Simultaneous
temperature rise) temperature rise)

No simultaneous temperature rise

Simultaneous temperature rise

190
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

(1) Operation of the simultaneous temperature rise function

The channel with the temperature rise reaching the set value (SV) last among channels satisfying the condition
for start-up in the same group is used as a standard when the simultaneous temperature rise function is started
up. The temperature of other channels rises following the temperature of the standard channel. The standard
channel is determined based on the simultaneous temperature rise parameter and the deviation (E).

Ex. When all channels are selected for Group 1

Temperature process value (PV)

Matches temperature rise
completion time
CH1 Set value (SV)

CH2 Set value (SV)

CH3 Set value (SV)

CH4 Set value (SV)

Temperature rise start Arrival point Time

8
ON
The setting/operation OFF
mode command (Yn1)

8.2.17 Simultaneous temperature rise function

8.2 Temperature Control Mode
CH Simultaneous
temperature rise status
(Un\G734, Un\G750, 0 1 0
Un\G766, Un\G782)*1
Executed by the L60TC4

*1 This becomes Simultaneous temperature rise in process (1) when the temperature rise starts; however, it becomes
Simultaneous temperature rise not in process (0) before the temperature rise starts.

191
 Ex. When channels are divided as following:
• CH1 and CH2: Group 1
• CH3 and CH4: Group 2

Temperature process value (PV)

Matches temperature rise
completion time in each group
CH1 Set value (SV)

CH2 Set value (SV)

CH3 Set value (SV)

CH4 Set value (SV)

Temperature rise start Group 1 Group 2 Time

arrival point arrival point
ON
The setting/operation OFF
mode command (Yn1)
CH1 Simultaneous temperature
rise status (Un\G734)*1 and
0 1 0
CH2 Simultaneous temperature
rise status (Un\G750)*1
CH3 Simultaneous temperature
rise status (Un\G766)*1 and 0 1 0
CH4 Simultaneous temperature
rise status (Un\G782)*1
Executed by the L60TC4

*1 They become Simultaneous temperature rise in process (1) when the temperature rise starts; however, they become
Simultaneous temperature rise not in process (0) before the temperature rise starts.

Remark
● When the operation mode is changed to the setting mode (Setting/operation mode instruction (Yn1) is turned on and off)
during simultaneous temperature rise, the control is stopped. In addition, CH† Simultaneous temperature rise status
(Un\G734, Un\G750, Un\G766, Un\G782) changes from Simultaneous temperature rise in process (1) to Simultaneous
temperature rise not in process (0). (An error does not occur.)
● When the simultaneous temperature rise function is executed, the setting change rate limiter cannot be used.
( Page 369, Appendix 2 (28))

192
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

(2) Conditions for the simultaneous temperature rise function

The simultaneous temperature rise function is executed when all the following conditions are satisfied:
• When the control is started or the set value (SV) is changed
• When the set value (SV) is larger than the temperature process value (PV)
• When the standard control is selected on Switch Setting (not executed in the heating-cooling control)
( Page 108, Section 7.2)
• When the simultaneous temperature rise parameter has been determined (or has been set) and is not 0 (the
default value)
When the following buffer memory area setting is less than 100%, reaching time may vary.
• CH† Upper limit output limiter (Un\G42, Un\G74, Un\G106, Un\G138) ( Page 360, Appendix 2 (19))

(3) Setting method (dividing channels into groups)

Set the groups under "Simultaneous temperature rise group setting".

Project window [Intelligent Function Module] Module name [Parameter]

(4) Simultaneous temperature rise parameter 8

The simultaneous temperature rise parameter is classified into the following two buffer memory values.

Buffer memory address

8.2.17 Simultaneous temperature rise function

8.2 Temperature Control Mode
Buffer memory area name Reference
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH† Simultaneous temperature rise
Un\G731 Un\G747 Un\G763 Un\G779 Page 408, Appendix 2 (85)
gradient data
CH† Simultaneous temperature rise dead
Un\G732 Un\G748 Un\G764 Un\G780 Page 408, Appendix 2 (86)
time

Before executing the simultaneous temperature rise function, the simultaneous temperature rise parameter needs
to be automatically calculated (or arbitrarily set).

(a) Automatic calculation

The simultaneous temperature rise parameter can be automatically calculated using the following two
methods:
• Simultaneous temperature rise AT ( Page 194, Section 8.2.17 (5))
• Simultaneous temperature rise parameter setting using self-tuning ( Page 197, Section 8.2.17 (6))

If the setting in Peak current suppression control group setting (Un\G784) is changed after the simultaneous temperature
rise parameter is calculated, the intended control may not be performed. If so, calculate the simultaneous temperature rise
parameter again.
For details on the peak current suppression function, refer to the following.
Page 185, Section 8.2.16

193
 (5) Simultaneous temperature rise AT
PID constants and the simultaneous temperature rise parameter are calculated. The waveform upon execution is
the same as that for the auto tuning function.
For details on the auto tuning function, refer to the following.
Page 141, Section 8.2.7

(a) How to execute the simultaneous temperature rise AT function

Follow the instructions below.
1. Set "1:AT for Simultaneous Temperature Rise" under "Simultaneous temperature rise AT mode
selection".

Project window [Intelligent Function Module] Module name [Parameter]

2. Turn off and on CH† Auto tuning instruction (Yn4 to Yn7).

3. Set the module to the operation mode (turn off and on Setting/operation mode instruction (Yn1).

(b) Operation with the simultaneous temperature rise AT function

After the procedure described on Page 194, Section 8.2.17 (5) (a) is executed, the L60TC4 operates as
following.

Operation of the L60TC4

CH† Auto tuning status (Xn4 to Xn7) is turned on. Then normal auto tuning is performed and the simultaneous
1
temperature rise parameter is calculated.
The calculated value is stored in the buffer memory when the simultaneous temperature rise parameter is
normally calculated. In addition, CH† AT simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation completion (b0 of
2
Un\G573, Un\G605, Un\G637, Un\G669) is turned 1 (ON). After auto-tuning is completed, CH† Auto tuning status
(Xn4 to Xn7) is turned off and the module is shifted to the PID control.

ON
CH Auto tuning instruction
(Yn4 to Yn7) OFF

ON
CH Auto tuning status
(Xn4 to Xn7) OFF

Control status PID control Auto tuning PID control

CH Simultaneous temperature rise gradient data
(Un\G731, Un\G747, Un\G763, Un\G779) and
CH Simultaneous temperature rise dead time Calculated
0 value
(Un\G732, Un\G748, Un\G764, Un\G780)

ON
CH AT simultaneous temperature rise parameter
OFF
calculation completion
(b0 of Un\G573, Un\G605, Un\G637, Un\G669)

Executed in a program
Executed by the L60TC4

194
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

(c) Condition for the simultaneous temperature rise AT

The simultaneous temperature rise parameter is calculated when all the following conditions are satisfied after
the procedure described on Page 194, Section 8.2.17 (5) (a) is executed:
• When the module is in the PID control (all of the proportional band (P), integral time (I), and derivative time
(D) are not 0)
• When the temperature process value (PV) is within the temperature measurement range before the
simultaneous temperature rise AT is executed. If the temperature process value (PV) goes outside the range
after the simultaneous temperature rise AT is executed, an error occurs with the auto tuning function. For the
operation of the L60TC4 in that situation, refer to Page 151, Section 8.2.7 (8) (b).
• When CH† Output variation limiter setting (Un\G44, Un\G76, Un\G108, Un\G140) is set to 0. ( Page
362, Appendix 2 (20))
If all the conditions described above are not satisfied, the simultaneous temperature rise parameter is not
calculated. Only PID constants are calculated.
The following shows how the L60TC4 operates when the simultaneous temperature rise AT has not been
executed.

ON
CH Auto tuning instruction
(Yn4 to Yn7) OFF

ON
CH Auto tuning status
(Xn4 to Xn7) OFF

8
Control status PID control Auto tuning PID control

CH Simultaneous temperature rise ON

AT disable status

8.2.17 Simultaneous temperature rise function

8.2 Temperature Control Mode
(b2 of Un\G573, Un\G605, Un\G637, Un\G669) OFF

Executed in a program
Executed by the L60TC4

The L60TC4 turns CH† Simultaneous temperature rise AT disable status (b2 of Un\G573, Un\G605, Un\G637,
Un\G669) to 1 (ON). With CH† Auto tuning status (Xn4 to Xn7) on, the module performs the same processing
as normal auto tuning.

195
 (d) When the simultaneous temperature rise parameter cannot be calculated
The simultaneous temperature rise parameter cannot be calculated under the following conditions:
• When the maximum gradient is not determined
• When the saturation time for output is short
The L60TC4 turns CH† AT simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation error status (b1 of Un\G573,
Un\G605, Un\G637, Un\G669) to 1 (ON).

ON
CH Auto tuning instruction
(Yn4 to Yn7) OFF

ON
CH Auto tuning status
(Xn4 to Xn7) OFF

Control status PID control Auto tuning PID control

CH Simultaneous temperature rise gradient data
(Un\G731, Un\G747, Un\G763, Un\G779) and
CH Simultaneous temperature rise dead time
0
(Un\G732, Un\G748, Un\G764, Un\G780)

ON
CH AT simultaneous temperature rise parameter
OFF
calculation error status
(b1 of Un\G573, Un\G605, Un\G637, Un\G669)

Executed in a program
Executed by the L60TC4

196
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

(6) The simultaneous temperature rise parameter setting using self-tuning

The control response at the time of temperature rise is constantly monitored during self-tuning and the
simultaneous temperature rise parameter is calculated based on the characteristics of a controlled object.
For details on the self-tuning function, refer to the following.
Page 175, Section 8.2.15

(a) Operation with the simultaneous temperature rise parameter setting using self-
tuning
The L60TC4 operates as following.

Operation of the L60TC4

When self-tuning is normally started up, CH† Auto tuning status (Xn4 to Xn7) is turned on and the simultaneous
1
temperature rise parameter is calculated.
The calculated value is stored in the buffer memory when the simultaneous temperature rise parameter is
normally calculated. Then CH† Simultaneous temperature rise parameter correction status (b1 of Un\G575,
2
Un\G607, Un\G639, Un\G671) is turned 1 (ON), CH† Auto tuning status (Xn4 to Xn7) is turned off, and the
module is shifted to the PID control.

ON
CH Auto tuning status
(Xn4 to Xn7) OFF

Control status PID control Self-tuning PID control

8
CH Simultaneous temperature rise gradient data
(Un\G731, Un\G747, Un\G763, Un\G779) and
Calculated
CH Simultaneous temperature rise dead time 0 value

8.2.17 Simultaneous temperature rise function

8.2 Temperature Control Mode
(Un\G732, Un\G748, Un\G764, Un\G780)
ON
CH Simultaneous temperature rise parameter
correction status OFF
(b1 of Un\G575, Un\G607, Un\G639, Un\G671)
Temperature control start,
set value (SV) change or
oscillation detected
Executed by the L60TC4

(b) Condition for the simultaneous temperature rise parameter setting using self-tuning
The condition is the same as that for the starting ST. ( Page 178, Section 8.2.15 (4) (a))
When the self-tuning cannot be started up, the L60TC4 operates as following with the PID control continued:
• CH† Self-tuning disable status (b8 of Un\G575, Un\G607, Un\G639, Un\G671) is turned 1 (ON).
The following shows how the L60TC4 operates when self-tuning is not executed.

CH Auto tuning status

(Xn4 to Xn7) OFF

Control status PID control

ON
CH Self-tuning disable status
(b8 of Un\G575, Un\G607, Un\G639, Un\G671) OFF
Temperature control start,
set value (SV) change or
oscillation detected

197
 (c) When the simultaneous temperature rise parameter cannot be calculated
The simultaneous temperature rise parameter cannot be calculated under the following conditions:
• When the maximum gradient is not determined
• When the saturation time for output is short
The L60TC4 turns CH† Simultaneous temperature rise parameter error status (b9 of Un\G575, Un\G607,
Un\G639, Un\G671) to 1 (ON).

ON
CH Auto tuning status
(Xn4 to Xn7) OFF

Control status PID control Self-tuning PID control

CH Simultaneous temperature rise gradient data

(Un\G731, Un\G747, Un\G763, Un\G779) and
CH Simultaneous temperature rise dead time 0
(Un\G732, Un\G748, Un\G764, Un\G780)
ON
CH Simultaneous temperature rise parameter
error status OFF
(b9 of Un\G575, Un\G607, Un\G639, Un\G671)
Temperature control start,
set value (SV) change or
oscillation detected
Executed by the L60TC4

To restore CH† Simultaneous temperature rise parameter error status (b9 of Un\G575, Un\G607, Un\G639, Un\G671) to 0
(OFF), set the following:
• Set CH† Self-tuning setting (Un\G574, Un\G606, Un\G638, Un\G670) to Not performing ST (0).
To calculate the simultaneous temperature rise parameter, execute self-tuning again after the temperature has dropped.

(d) Stopping of calculation for the simultaneous temperature rise parameter

The optimum simultaneous temperature rise parameter may not be able to be calculated depending on the
characteristics of a controlled object. In addition, the L60TC4 stops calculating the simultaneous temperature
rise parameter during self-tuning under the following conditions:
• When the set value (SV) is changed
• When 6000s (1 hour and 40 minutes) or longer has passed after the self-tuning operation is started
• When the change rate of the temperature process value (PV) during self-tuning is less than 1.125
(°C/minute)
• When the setting for CH† Output variation limiter setting (Un\G44, Un\G76, Un\G108, Un\G140) is
changed ( Page 362, Appendix 2 (20))

(e) How to set the simultaneous temperature rise parameter using self-tuning
Select one of the following setting values under "Self-tuning setting".
• 2: Starting ST (Simultaneous Temperature Rise Parameter Only)
• 3: Starting ST (PID Constant and Simultaneous Temperature Rise Parameter)

Project window [Intelligent Function Module] Module name [Parameter]

198
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

(7) Operation when the simultaneous temperature rise parameter is calculated

with self-tuning and auto tuning

(a) When the simultaneous temperature rise AT is started before the simultaneous
temperature rise parameter is calculated with self-tuning
The simultaneous temperature rise parameter is not calculated neither with self-tuning nor auto tuning. PID
constants are changed.

Temperature Auto tuning waveform

process value
Maximum gradient
(PV)

Simultaneous temperature rise

parameter calculation timing
by self-tuning

Dead time Time

Simultaneous 8
Self-tuning start temperature rise AT start
ON
Setting/operation mode status
(Xn1) OFF

8.2.17 Simultaneous temperature rise function

8.2 Temperature Control Mode
ON
CH Auto tuning status
(Xn4 to Xn7) OFF

ON
CH Auto tuning instruction
(Yn4 to Yn7) OFF

CH PID auto-correction status

(b0 of Un\G575, Un\G607,
Un\G639, Un\G671) OFF

CH Simultaneous temperature
rise parameter correction status
(b1 of Un\G575, Un\G607, CH Self-tuning flag
Un\G639, Un\G671) OFF (Un\G575, Un\G607,
Un\G639, Un\G671)
CH Simultaneous temperature
rise parameter error status
(b9 of Un\G575, Un\G607,
Un\G639, Un\G671) OFF

CH Self-tuning error
(b10 of Un\G575, Un\G607,
Un\G639, Un\G671) OFF

CH AT simultaneous temperature
rise parameter calculation completion
(b0 of Un\G573, Un\G605,
CH AT simultaneous
Un\G637, Un\G669) OFF temperature rise parameter
calculation flag
CH AT simultaneous temperature ON (Un\G573, Un\G605,
rise parameter calculation error status Un\G637, Un\G669)
(b1 of Un\G573, Un\G605,
Un\G637, Un\G669) OFF

199
 (b) When the simultaneous temperature rise AT is started after the simultaneous
temperature rise parameter is calculated with self-tuning
The simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculated with self-tuning is effective. Then PID constants are
changed with auto tuning.

Temperature Auto tuning waveform

process value
Maximum gradient
(PV)

Simultaneous temperature rise

parameter calculation timing
by self-tuning

Dead time Time

Simultaneous
Self-tuning start temperature rise AT start
ON
Setting/operation mode status
(Xn1) OFF

ON
CH Auto tuning status
(Xn4 to Xn7) OFF

ON
CH Auto tuning instruction
(Yn4 to Yn7) OFF

CH PID auto-correction status

(b0 of Un\G575, Un\G607,
Un\G639, Un\G671) OFF

CH Simultaneous temperature
rise parameter correction status ON
(b1 of Un\G575, Un\G607, CH Self-tuning flag
Un\G639, Un\G671) OFF (Un\G575, Un\G607,
Un\G639, Un\G671)
CH Simultaneous temperature
rise parameter error status
(b9 of Un\G575, Un\G607,
Un\G639, Un\G671) OFF

CH Self-tuning error
(b10 of Un\G575, Un\G607,
Un\G639, Un\G671) OFF

CH AT simultaneous temperature
rise parameter calculation completion
(b0 of Un\G573, Un\G605, CH AT simultaneous
Un\G637, Un\G669) OFF temperature rise parameter
calculation flag
(Un\G573, Un\G605,
CH AT simultaneous temperature Un\G637, Un\G669)
rise parameter calculation error status
ON
(b1 of Un\G573, Un\G605,
Un\G637, Un\G669) OFF

200
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

(c) When CH† Auto tuning instruction (Yn4 to Yn7) is turned off and on in the setting
mode and the module is shifted to the operation mode
After the module is shifted to the operation mode (Setting/operation mode instruction (Yn1) is turned off and
on), the simultaneous temperature rise parameter and PID constants are changed with auto tuning.

Temperature Auto tuning waveform

process value
Maximum gradient
(PV)

Dead time Time

Simultaneous
temperature rise AT start
ON
Setting/operation mode status
OFF
8
(Xn1)

ON
CH Auto tuning status
(Xn4 to Xn7) OFF

ON

8.2.17 Simultaneous temperature rise function

8.2 Temperature Control Mode
CH Auto tuning instruction
(Yn4 to Yn7) OFF

CH PID auto-correction status

(b0 of Un\G575, Un\G607,
Un\G639, Un\G671) OFF

CH Simultaneous temperature
rise parameter correction status
(b1 of Un\G575, Un\G607,
Un\G639, Un\G671) OFF CH Self-tuning flag
(Un\G575, Un\G607,
Un\G639, Un\G671)
CH Simultaneous temperature
rise parameter error status
(b9 of Un\G575, Un\G607,
Un\G639, Un\G671) OFF

CH Self-tuning error
(b10 of Un\G575, Un\G607,
Un\G639, Un\G671) OFF

CH AT simultaneous temperature
rise parameter calculation completion ON
(b0 of Un\G573, Un\G605, CH AT simultaneous
Un\G637, Un\G669) OFF temperature rise parameter
calculation flag
(Un\G573, Un\G605,
CH AT simultaneous temperature Un\G637, Un\G669)
rise parameter calculation error status
(b1 of Un\G573, Un\G605,
Un\G637, Un\G669) OFF

201
 (d) When auto tuning is started with the temperature process value (PV) within the
stable judgment width (1°C ( )) after the setting mode is changed to the operation
mode
Until the temperature process value (PV) goes outside the stable judgment width (1°C ( )), the data measured
after the module is shifted to the operation mode (Setting/operation mode instruction (Yn1) is turned off and on)
can be used. Therefore, the simultaneous temperature rise parameter can be calculated with auto tuning.

Temperature Auto tuning waveform

process value
Maximum gradient
(PV)

Dead time Time

Simultaneous
Self-tuning start temperature rise
AT start
ON
Setting/operation mode status
(Xn1) OFF

ON
CH Auto tuning status
(Xn4 to Xn7) OFF

ON
CH Auto tuning instruction
(Yn4 to Yn7) OFF

CH PID auto-correction status

(b0 of Un\G575, Un\G607,
Un\G639, Un\G671) OFF

CH Simultaneous temperature
rise parameter correction status
(b1 of Un\G575, Un\G607, CH Self-tuning flag
Un\G639, Un\G671) OFF (Un\G575, Un\G607,
Un\G639, Un\G671)
CH Simultaneous temperature
rise parameter error status
(b9 of Un\G575, Un\G607,
Un\G639, Un\G671) OFF

CH Self-tuning error
(b10 of Un\G575, Un\G607,
Un\G639, Un\G671) OFF

CH AT simultaneous temperature
rise parameter calculation completion ON
(b0 of Un\G573, Un\G605, CH AT simultaneous
Un\G637, Un\G669) OFF temperature rise parameter
calculation flag
(Un\G573, Un\G605,
CH AT simultaneous temperature Un\G637, Un\G669)
rise parameter calculation error status
(b1 of Un\G573, Un\G605,
Un\G637, Un\G669) OFF

202
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

8.2.18 Forward/reverse action selection function

Standard

Whether PID operation is performed with forward action or reverse action can be selected using this function.
This function can be used in all the control methods (two-position control, P control, PI control, PD control, and PID
control). ( Page 129, Section 8.2.3)
For details on the operation, refer to the following.
Page 24, Section 1.4.2

(1) Setting method

Set the function under "Forward/reverse action setting".

Project window [Intelligent Function Module] Module name [Parameter]

8.2.18 Forward/reverse action selection function

8.2 Temperature Control Mode

203
8.2.19 Loop disconnection detection function
Standard

Using this function detects an error occurring within a control system (control loop) due to reasons such as a load
(heater) disconnection, an externally-operable device (such as a magnetic relay) failure, and input disconnection.

(1) How an error is detected

Since the time a PID operation value becomes 100% or 0%, the amount of changes in the temperature process
value (PV) is monitored every unit time and disconnection of a heater and input is detected.

(2) Examples of the errors detected

The following are the examples of the errors detected.

(a) When control output is being performed

The L60TC4 detects an error because the temperature does not rise even when control output is being
performed under the following conditions:
• When a heater is disconnected
• When input is disconnected or short-circuited
• When the contact point of an externally-operable device does not turn on
After control output is output 100%, an alert is output if the temperature does not rise by 2°C ( ) or more within
the loop disconnection detection judgment time set (forward action is changed to reverse action). ( Page
203, Section 8.2.18) )

(b) When control output is not being performed

The L60TC4 detects an error because the temperature rises even when control output is not being performed
under the following conditions:
• When input is disconnected
• When the contact point of an externally-operable device was bonded
After control output drops to 0%, an alert is output if the temperature does not drop by 2°C ( ) or more within
the loop disconnection detection judgment time set (forward action is changed to reverse action). ( Page
203, Section 8.2.18))

(3) Setting method

Two settings are available for the loop disconnection detection function.

(a) Setting for the unit time to monitor the amount of changes in the temperature
process value (PV)
Set the unit time under "Loop disconnection detection judgement time".

Project window [Intelligent Function Module] Module name [Parameter]

When not using this function, set CH† Loop disconnection detection judgment time (Un\G59, Un\G91, Un\G123, Un\G155)
to 0.

204
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

(b) Setting for the dead band

Set the dead band under "Loop disconnection detection dead band".

Project window [Intelligent Function Module] Module name [Parameter]

When the loop disconnection detection dead band is set, loop disconnection does not occur even if the temperature does
not change by 2°C ( ) or more with the set value (SV) 100% or 0% of control output.

8.2.19 Loop disconnection detection function

8.2 Temperature Control Mode

205
8.2.20 Proportional band setting function
Heating-cooling

Proportional band (P) values can be set for heating and cooling separately using this function. Different gradients can
be set by using different proportional band (P) values in a heating and cooling area.

Manipulated value Heating proportional Cooling proportional

for heating (MVh) band (Ph) band (Pc)

100% Manipulated value

for heating (MVh) 100%

Heating Only cooling

proportional band (Pc)
can be narrowed.

Manipulated value
0% for heating (MVh) 0%
Manipulated value
Set value (SV) for cooling (MVc) 0%

Cooling

Manipulated value
for cooling (MVc) 100%
-100%
Manipulated value
for cooling (MVc)

(1) Setting method

(a) For heating

Set the value under "Proportional band (P) setting/Heating control proportional band setting (Ph)".

Project window [Intelligent Function Module] Module name [Parameter]

(b) For cooling

Set the value under "Cooling proportional band (Pc) setting".

Project window [Intelligent Function Module] Module name [Parameter]

206
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

8.2.21 Cooling method setting function

Heating-cooling

An auto tuning calculation formula is automatically selected according to the selected cooling method during auto
tuning and the operation is started using this function.
Select one of the following characteristics:
• Air Cooled: The cooling characteristic is nonlinear and cooling ability is low.
• Water Cooled: The cooling characteristic is nonlinear and cooling ability is high.
• Linear: The cooling characteristic is close to the linear shape.

Cooling characteristics (rate

of when the manipulated value Cooling system and cooling characteristics
for cooling (MVc) 100% is 1)
1
Water-cooling
Devices such as
cooling water piping
0.8

Air-cooling
0.6
Devices such as
cooling fans

0.4 Linear
8
Devices such as
electron coolers

0.2

8.2.21 Cooling method setting function

8.2 Temperature Control Mode
Complete linear
characteristics

0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Manipulated value for cooling (MVc) (%)

PID constants are calculated and executed based on this setting during auto tuning; therefore, more appropriate PID
constants can be found by setting more applicable cooling characteristic of a device.
For details on the auto tuning function, refer to the following.
Page 141, Section 8.2.7

207
 (1) Setting method
Set the characteristic under "Cooling method setting".

Project window [Intelligent Function Module] Module name [Parameter]

● An auto tuning calculation formula to find PID constants is determined based on this setting; therefore, configure this
setting before executing auto tuning.
● "Air Cooled" and "Water Cooled" roughly indicate the level of the cooling ability. When a device is too cooled even if it is
set to Air Cooled, set the module to Water Cooled (1H). When a device is not very cooled even if it is set to Water Cooled,
set the module to Air Cooled (0H).
● In general, the ability of water cooling is higher than that of air cooling and cooling may be too strong if the same PID
constants as air cooling are used. Some time is required until the control becomes stable upon the initial start-up,
disturbance, or setting change. Therefore, in auto tuning, PID constants for when the module is set to Water Cooled (1H)
become larger than those for when the module is set to Air Cooled (0H).

208
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

8.2.22 Overlap/dead band function

Heating-cooling

In heating-cooling control, the temperature process value (PV) significantly changes due to slight heating or cooling
control output when the heat produced by a controlled object and natural cooling are being balanced. Consequently,
excessive output may be performed.
The temperature where the cooling control output starts can be shifted using this function; therefore, whether control
stability is prioritized or energy saving is prioritized can be selected.

(1) Overlap
Overlap refers to the temperature area where both of heating control and cooling control are performed. In the
temperature area where both heating and cooling output overlap, both of the output negate each other, thus the
control gain becomes moderate. Consequently, the change amount in the temperature process value (PV) for the
output becomes small, improving control stability.

Ex. When buffer memory values are set as following:

• CH† Input range (Un\G32, Un\G64, Un\G96, Un\G128): 38 (temperature measurement range: -200.0°C to
400.0°C)
• CH† Set value (SV) setting (Un\G34, Un\G66, Un\G98, Un\G130): 2000 (200.0°C)
• CH† Overlapping/dead band setting (Un\G723, Un\G739, Un\G755, Un\G771): -25 (-2.5%)
185.0°C to 200.0°C is the overlapping area.
(Full scale) × (Overlap setting) = (400.0°C - (-200.0°C)) × -0.025 = -15.0°C
8
The temperature where cooling operation starts = (Set value (SV)) - 15.0°C = 185.0°C
As shown below, shifting the temperature where cooling operation starts to the lower temperature side of
the set value (SV) produces an overlapping area. (The following is an example of when the module is in P

8.2.22 Overlap/dead band function

8.2 Temperature Control Mode
control.)

Heating only Cooling only

(manipulated value for cooling (MVc): 0%) Heating/Cooling (manipulated value for heating (MVh): 0%)

100%

Heating

Temperature
0% process value (PV)

Set value (SV) is 200.0 .

Cooling starts at 185.0 . Cooling

-100%

209
 (2) Dead band
Dead band refers to the temperature area where neither heating control output nor cooling control output is
performed. When the temperature process value (PV) is stable within this area, output is not performed for the
slight change in the temperature, resulting in energy saving.

Ex. When buffer memory values are set as following:

• CH† Input range (Un\G32, Un\G64, Un\G96, Un\G128): 38 (temperature measurement range: -200.0°C
to 400.0°C)
• CH† Set value (SV) setting (Un\G34, Un\G66, Un\G98, Un\G130): 2000 (200.0°C)
• CH† Overlapping/dead band setting (Un\G723, Un\G739, Un\G755, Un\G771): 25 (2.5%)
200.0°C to 215.0°C is the area for dead band.
(Full scale) × (Overlap setting) = (400.0°C - (-200.0°C)) × 0.025 = 15.0°C
The temperature where cooling operation starts = (Set value (SV)) + 15.0°C = 215.0°C
As shown below, shifting the temperature where cooling operation starts to the higher temperature side of
the set value (SV) produces a dead band area. (The following is an example of when the module is in P
control.)

Manipulated value
for heating (MVh): 0%
Heating only Manipulated value Cooling only
(manipulated value for cooling (MVc): 0%) for cooling (MVc): 0% (manipulated value for heating (MVh): 0%)

100%

Cooling starts at 215.0 .

Heating

Temperature
0% process value (PV)

Set value (SV) is 200.0 .

Cooling

-100%

210
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

(3) Dead band setting in two-position control (three-position control)

Set the dead band in two-position control.
Three-position control can be achieved by setting a dead band area in addition to areas for the manipulated value
for heating (MVh) 100% and the manipulated value for cooling (MVc) 100%.

Manipulated value
for heating (MVh): 0%
Heating only Manipulated value Cooling only
(manipulated value for cooling (MVc): 0%) for cooling (MVc): 0% (manipulated value for heating (MVh): 0%)

Heating proportional band (Ph): 0

Cooling proportional band (Pc):
100%
No setting required
Heating Integral time (I):
Temperature when No setting required
cooling starts Derivative time (D):
No setting required

Temperature
0% process value (PV)

Set value (SV)

Cooling
-100%

Input range
8
(4) Setting method
Set the function under "Overlap/dead band setting".

8.2.22 Overlap/dead band function

8.2 Temperature Control Mode
Project window [Intelligent Function Module] Module name [Parameter]

211
8.2.23 Temperature conversion function (using unused
channels)
Heating-cooling

In heating-cooling control (normal mode) and mix control (normal mode), only temperature measurement can be
performed by using unused temperature input terminals. When this function is used, temperature control and alert
judgment are not performed.

(1) Temperature input terminals that can be used

Temperature input terminals that can be used for this function differ depending on the control mode.
Use the terminals indicating MT2† (Monitor CH2), MT3† (Monitor CH3), and MT4† (Monitor CH4) in the
following table.

Terminal symbol
L60TCTT4/L60TCTT4BW*1 L60TCRT4/L60TCRT4BW*1
Terminal No. Heating-cooling Heating-cooling
Mix control Mix control
control control
(normal mode) (normal mode)
(normal mode) (normal mode)
1 L1H L1H L1H L1H
2 L1C L1C L1C L1C
3 L2H L3 L2H L3
4 L2C L4 L2C L4
5 COM- COM- COM- COM-
6 Unused Unused Unused Unused
7 CH1+ CH1+ CH1 A CH1 A
8 CH2+ MT2+ CH2 A MT2 A
9 CH1- CH1- CH1 B CH1 B
10 CH2- MT2- CH2 B MT2 B
11 Unused Unused CH1 b CH1 b
12 CJ CJ CH2 b MT2 b
13 Unused Unused MT3A CH3 A
14 CJ CJ MT4A CH4 A
15 MT3+ CH3+ MT3B CH3 B
16 MT4+ CH4+ MT4B CH4 B
17 MT3- CH3- MT3b CH3 b
18 MT4- CH4- MT4b CH4 b

*1 For the L60TCTT4BW and L60TCRT4BW, the terminals in the table above are those on a terminal block for I/O.

(2) Current consumption of when this function is used

Current consumption differs depending on whether the temperature conversion function is used or not.

212
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

(3) Buffer memory areas that can be used with this function
The following table lists the buffer memory areas that can be used with this function (the terminals used
correspond to the buffer memory areas in the table).

Buffer memory
Buffer memory area name Reference
MT2 (Monitor CH2) MT3 (Monitor CH3) MT4 (Monitor CH4)
Error code Un\G0 Page 334, Appendix 2 (1)
CH† Decimal point position Un\G2 Un\G3 Un\G4 Page 334, Appendix 2 (2)
CH† Alert definition Un\G6 Un\G7 Un\G8 Page 336, Appendix 2 (3)
CH† Temperature process value
Un\G10 Un\G11 Un\G12 Page 338, Appendix 2 (4)
(PV)
Cold junction temperature
Un\G29 Page 342, Appendix 2 (9)
process value
CH† Input range Un\G64 Un\G96 Un\G128 Page 345, Appendix 2 (12)
CH† Sensor correction value
Un\G77 Un\G109 Un\G141 Page 363, Appendix 2 (21)
setting
CH† Primary delay digital filter
Un\G80 Un\G112 Un\G144 Page 365, Appendix 2 (24)
setting
Cold junction temperature
Un\G182 Page 384, Appendix 2 (49)
compensation selection
Control switching monitor Un\G183 Page 385, Appendix 2 (50)
CH† 2-point sensor
compensation offset value Un\G576 Un\G608 Un\G640 Page 394, Appendix 2 (63)
8
(measured value)
CH† 2-point sensor
compensation offset value Un\G577 Un\G609 Un\G641 Page 394, Appendix 2 (64)

8.2.23 Temperature conversion function (using unused channels)

8.2 Temperature Control Mode
(compensation value)
CH† 2-point sensor
compensation gain value Un\G578 Un\G610 Un\G642 Page 395, Appendix 2 (65)
(measured value)
CH† 2-point sensor
compensation gain value Un\G579 Un\G611 Un\G643 Page 395, Appendix 2 (66)
(compensation value)
CH† 2-point sensor
Un\G580 Un\G612 Un\G644 Page 396, Appendix 2 (67)
compensation offset latch request
CH† 2-point sensor
compensation offset latch Un\G581 Un\G613 Un\G645 Page 396, Appendix 2 (68)
completion
CH† 2-point sensor
Un\G582 Un\G614 Un\G646 Page 397, Appendix 2 (69)
compensation gain latch request
CH† 2-point sensor
compensation gain latch Un\G583 Un\G615 Un\G647 Page 397, Appendix 2 (70)
completion
Sensor compensation function
Un\G785 Page 413, Appendix 2 (91)
selection
Temperature conversion
Un\G786 Page 413, Appendix 2 (92)
completion flag
CH† Temperature conversion
Un\G695 Un\G696 Un\G697 Page 403, Appendix 2 (76)
setting

213
 (4) Setting method
Set whether using this function under "Temperature conversion setting".

Project window [Intelligent Function Module] Module name [Parameter]

When heating-cooling control (expanded mode) or mix control (expanded mode) is selected, the setting in CH†
Temperature conversion setting (Un\G695 to Un\G697) is ignored.

214
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

8.2.24 Heater disconnection detection function

Standard Heating-cooling

When transistor output is on, whether a heater is disconnected or not can be checked based on a reference heater
current value (load current value detected by a current sensor (CT)) using this function. A reference heater current
value and heater disconnection alert current value are compared. When the reference heater current value becomes
lower than the heater disconnection alert current value, the heater is regarded as disconnected.
Heater disconnection is detected every 500ms. When transistor output is on for 500ms or less, heater disconnection is
not detected. (CH† Heater disconnection detection (b12 of Un\G5 to Un\G8) remains 0 (OFF).) ( Page 336,
Appendix 2 (3))
The following is the timing output as an alert.
• 500ms × Setting value in Heater disconnection/output off-time current error detection delay count (Un\G166)
If a heater is disconnected longer than the time described above, Alarm code: 04†AH is stored in Error code (Un\G0).
( Page 318, Section 11.7)

(1) Modules where this function can be used

• L60TCTT4BW
• L60TCRT4BW

(2) Setting method

Set the function on "Parameter". Follow the instructions below. 8
Project window [Intelligent Function Module] Module name [Parameter]

1. Set the current sensor (CT) to be used under "CT†

8.2.24 Heater disconnection detection function

8.2 Temperature Control Mode
CT selection".

2. When using a current sensor (CT) other than CTL-

12-S36-8 and CTL-6-P(-H) manufactured by
U.R.D.Co., LTD., set "CT† CT Ratio setting".

3. Set the CT input assigned to each channel under

"CT† CT input channel assignment setting".

↓
(To the next page)

215
 (From the previous page)
↓
4. Monitor CT† Heater current process value (Un\G256
to Un\G263) and check the current value of when the
heater is on. ( Page 390, Appendix 2 (58))

5. Set the value monitored in CT† Heater current

process value (Un\G256 to Un\G263) under "CT†
Reference heater current value".

6. Set the judgment value to perform the heater

disconnection detection and output off-time current
error detection*1 at the rate of the reference heater
current value (%) under "Heater disconnection alert
setting".
↓

7. To monitor only the current value of when the heater

is on, set "1: ON Current" under "CT monitor
method switching". To monitor the current values of
when the heater is on and off, set "0: ON/OFF
Current".
↓

8. Set how many times heater disconnection is

detected successively to regard the heater as
disconnected under "Heater disconnection/output
off-time current error detection delay count".
↓
End
*1 For details on the output off-time current error detection function, refer to Page 220, Section 8.2.25.

● The standard setting value for CH† Heater disconnection alert setting (Un\G58, Un\G90, Un\G122, Un\G154) is 80%.
However, the current value may significantly change depending on the characteristics of a heater or how the heater is
used. Check that there is no problem in the actual system.
● A write data error (error code: †††4H) occurs if the current value to be used as a judgment value to detect heater
disconnection (reference heater current value × CH† Heater disconnection alert setting (%)) is within 0.1A under one of
the following situations:
• CT† CT selection (Un\G272 to Un\G279) is set to When CTL-12-S36-8 (0.0A to 100.0A) is used (0).
• CT† CT selection (Un\G272 to Un\G279) is set to When CT ratio setting is used (0.0A to 100.0A) (2).
In addition, when CTL-6-P(-H) used (0.00A to 20.00A) (1) has been set and the current value to be used as a judgment
value to detect heater disconnection (reference heater current value × CH† Heater disconnection alert setting (%)) is
within 0.01A, Write data error (error code:†††4H) occurs.

216
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

(3) Heater disconnection correction function

When heater voltage is dropped, heater current is reduced. The L60TCTT4BW and L60TCRT4BW detect heater
disconnection by measuring heater current; therefore, an accidental alert may occur due to a voltage change
caused by a reduced heater voltage.
The heater disconnection correction function offsets the amount of heater current reduced (heater disconnection
correction), preventing disconnection from being detected.

(a) Calculation formula for heater disconnection correction

Calculate (CH† Heater current) - (reference heater current value). The largest positive value is the correction
value. When there is no positive value, the value with the smallest gap is the correction value. The heater
current for each channel is corrected using a correction value. When the corrected value is larger than the
heater disconnection alert setting value, heater disconnection is found.

Ex. When CH† Heater disconnection alert setting (Un\G58, Un\G90, Un\G122, Un\G154) is 80% and the
differences between CH† Heater current and the reference heater current value are the following values:
• CH1: -2%
• CH2: 5%
• CH3: -1%
• CH4: -17%
The following table lists the result.

CH† Heater Difference between Difference between 8

disconnection alert CH† Heater current Correction CH† Heater current and Disconnection
Channel
setting (Un\G58, Un\G90, and reference heater value reference heater current detected
Un\G122, Un\G154) current value value after correction

8.2.24 Heater disconnection detection function

8.2 Temperature Control Mode
CH1 -2% -7% (= -2% - 5%) Not detected
CH2 5% 0% (= 5% - 5%) Not detected
80 (%) 5%
CH3 -1% -6% (= -1% - 5%) Not detected
CH4 -17% -22% (= -17% - 5%) Detected

In the table above, the correction value is 5%. Heater disconnection is detected based on the differences
of -7% for CH1, 0% for CH2, -6% for CH3, and -22% for CH4. When Heater disconnection alert setting is
set to 80%, disconnection is detected only for CH4.

217
 Ex. When CH† Heater disconnection alert setting (Un\G58, Un\G90, Un\G122, Un\G154) is 80% and the
differences between CH† Heater current and the reference heater current value are the following values:
• CH1: -16%
• CH2: -17%
• CH3: -22%
• CH4: -19%
The following table lists the result.

CH† Heater Difference between Difference between

disconnection alert CH† Heater current Correction CH† Heater current and Disconnection
Channel
setting (Un\G58, Un\G90, and reference heater value reference heater current detected
Un\G122, Un\G154) current value value after correction
CH1 -16% 0% (= -16% - (-16%)) Not detected
CH2 -17% -1% (= -17% - (-16%)) Not detected
80 (%) -16%
CH3 -22% -6% (= -22% - (-16%)) Not detected
CH4 -19% -3% (= -19% - (-16%)) Not detected

In the table above, the correction value is -16%. Heater disconnection is detected based on the
differences of 0% for CH1, -1% for CH2, -6% for CH3, and -3% for CH4. When Heater disconnection alert
setting is set to 80%, none of the channels are regarded as disconnected.

(b) Restrictions
• When only one channel is used, the heater disconnection correction function does not work. To use this
function, two channels or more need to be used.
• When several channels are used with a heater on for one channel and heaters off for other channels, the
heater disconnection correction function does not function. Therefore, disconnection may be detected
even if there is no disconnection.
• The heater disconnection alert correction value is 20% at maximum. When Heater disconnection alert
setting is set to 80% as shown in the two examples on Page 217, Section 8.2.24 (3) (a), the
conditions for disconnection detection are satisfied even if correction is performed by 20% with a voltage
drop by 40% or more. Consequently, disconnection is detected.

(c) Setting method

Set "Heater disconnection compensation function selection" to "1: ON".

Project window [Intelligent Function Module] Module name [Parameter]

218
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

(4) To clear the disconnection detection status

Disconnection detection is disabled by restoring the disconnection status and turning CH† Heater disconnection
detection (b12 of Un\G5 to Un\G8) from 1 (ON) to 0 (OFF). ( Page 336, Appendix 2 (3))
Under the following setting, however, CH† Heater disconnection detection (b12 of Un\G5 to Un\G8) does not
change from 1 (ON) to 0 (OFF) unless a heater turns on.
• CT monitor method switching (Un\G176) is set to ON Current (1).
The timing when a heater turns on differs depending on the setting for the following buffer memory areas.

Buffer memory address

Buffer memory area name Reference
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH† Control output cycle setting Un\G47 Un\G79 Un\G111 Un\G143
CH† Heating control output cycle setting Un\G47 Un\G79 Un\G111 Un\G143 Page 364, Appendix 2 (23)
CH† Cooling control output cycle setting Un\G722 Un\G738 Un\G754 Un\G770

8.2.24 Heater disconnection detection function

8.2 Temperature Control Mode

219
8.2.25 Output off-time current error detection function
Standard Heating-cooling

Transistor output errors can be detected using this function. The current sensor (CT) for heater disconnection
detection is used to check for errors of when transistor output is off.
A heater current measurement value and heater disconnection alert current value are compared. If the heater current
measurement value is larger than the heater disconnection alert current value, an output off-time current error occurs.
Output off-time current errors are detected every 500ms. When transistor output is off for 500ms or less, output off-
time current errors are not detected. (CH† Output off-time current error (b14 of Un\G5 to Un\G8) stays 0 (OFF).)
( Page 336, Appendix 2 (3))
The following is the timing output as an alert.
• 500ms × Setting value for Heater disconnection/output off-time current error detection delay count
(Un\G166)
If an output off-time current error status lasts longer than the time described above, Alarm code (05†AH) is stored in
Error code (Un\G0). ( Page 318, Section 11.7)

(1) Modules where this function can be used

• L60TCTT4BW
• L60TCRT4BW

(2) Setting method

The setting method is the same as that for the heater disconnection detection function. ( Page 215, Section
8.2.24)

220
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

8.3 Common Functions

This section explains the common functions between the temperature input mode and temperature control mode.

8.3.1 Temperature process value (PV) scaling function

Common

The temperature process value (PV) is scaled up or down to the value in a set range, and can be stored into the buffer
memory using this function. For example, the range of -100°C to 100°C can be scaled into the value range of 0 to
4000.

(1) Monitoring the scaling value

The temperature process value (PV) after scaling processing is stored into the following buffer memory area.
• CH† Process value (PV) scaling value (Un\G728, Un\G744, Un\G760, Un\G776) ( Page 406,
Appendix 2 (82))
The calculation method of a scaling value is as follows:

CH Process value (PV) scaling value (SH - SL) (PX - PMin)

= + SL
(Un\G728, Un\G744, Un\G760, Un\G776) PMax - PMin

8
PX : CH Temperature process value (PV) (Un\G9, Un\G10, Un\G11, Un\G12)
PMax : A maximum value of CH Input range (Un\G32, Un\G64, Un\G96, Un\G128)
PMin : A minimum value of CH Input range (Un\G32, Un\G64, Un\G96, Un\G128)

8.3.1 Temperature process value (PV) scaling function

8.3 Common Functions
SH : CH A maximum scaling value of process value (PV) (Un\G727, Un\G743, Un\G759, Un\G775)
SL : CH A minimum scaling value of process value (PV) (Un\G726, Un\G742, Un\G758, Un\G774)

(a) Calculation example

A calculation example to scale the temperature process value (PV) into percentage is shown below.
Set the following buffer memory areas as below.
• CH† Input range (Un\G32, Un\G64, Un\G96, Un\G128): 38 (Temperature measurement range: -200.0°C
to 400.0°C)
• CH† Process value (PV) scaling lower limit value (Un\G726, Un\G742, Un\G758, Un\G774): 0
• CH† Process value (PV) scaling upper limit value (Un\G727, Un\G743, Un\G759, Un\G775): 100
Suppose that 3600 (360.0°C) is stored in CH† Temperature process value (PV) (Un\G9 to Un\G12).
The scaling value can be calculated as follows:

CH Process value (PV) scaling value (100 - 0) (3600 - (-2000))

(Un\G728, Un\G744, Un\G760, Un\G776) = + 0
4000 - (-2000)

= 93.333

= 93 (All decimal places are rounded off to an integer.)

221
 (2) Setting method
Set the function on "Parameter". Follow the instructions below.

Project window [Intelligent Function Module] Module name [Parameter]

1. Enable or disable the temperature process value

(PV) scaling function under "Process value (PV)
scaling function enable/disable setting".

2. Set a scaling upper limit value and lower limit value

under "Process value (PV) scaling lower limit value"
and "Process value (PV) scaling upper limit value".

↓
End

● An error does not occur even though the areas above are set as follows: Lower limit value ≥ Upper limit value. The
scaling is processed according to the calculation method described on Page 221, Section 8.3.1 (1).
● If a value outside the temperature measurement range is measured, the value set as a upper limit or lower limit is stored
into the following buffer memory area.
• CH† Process value (PV) scaling value (Un\G728, Un\G744, Un\G760, Un\G776) ( Page 406, Appendix 2
(82))
● Values on other analog modules in the system (such as an A/D converter module) can be scaled to a set range. For that
processing, set a 200s value in CH† Input range (Un\G32, Un\G64, Un\G96, Un\G128). ( Page 345, Appendix 2
(12))
To input a value from other analog modules (such as an A/D converter module), store the input value into the following
buffer memory area.
• CH† Temperature process value (PV) for input with another analog module (Un\G689 to Un\G692) ( Page
402, Appendix 2 (74))
To scale an input value from other analog modules (such as an A/D converter module), apply the buffer memory area
above to the description in this section.

222
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

8.3.2 Sensor compensation function

Common

When a difference occurs between the temperature process value (PV) and the actual temperature due to reasons
such as a measuring condition, the difference can be corrected using this function. The following two types are
available.
• 1-point sensor compensation (standard) function ( Page 223, Section 8.3.2 (1))
• 2-point sensor compensation function ( Page 227, Section 8.3.2 (2))

(1) 1-point sensor compensation (standard)

The set input range in proportion to the full scale is corrected as a difference correction value using this function.

Ex. When buffer memory values are set as following:

• CH† Input range (Un\G32, Un\G64, Un\G96, Un\G128): 21 (temperature measurement range: -200.0°C to
200.0°C)
• CH† Sensor correction value setting (Un\G45, Un\G77, Un\G109, Un\G141): 50 (0.500%)
The difference between the temperature process value (PV) and the actual temperature is 2°C that can
be corrected.

Full scale Sensor correction value setting

Temperature process value (PV) - actual temperature =
100
8
400 0.500
= =2( )
100

8.3.2 Sensor compensation function

8.3 Common Functions
Temperature process value (PV)
After correction

Before correction

Input temperature

223
 (a) How to execute 1-point sensor compensation (standard) (when using GX Works2)
Set the setting on the "Sensor Compensation Function" window.

[Tool] [Intelligent Function Module Tool] [Temperature Control Module] [Sensor

Compensation Function]

1. Select the module where sensor correction is

executed and click .

2. Click .

3. Click .

4. Select the channel where sensor correction is

executed under "Target Channel".

↓
(To the next page)

224
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

(From the previous page)

↓
5. Select "1-point Sensor Compensation (Standard)"
under "Sensor Compensation Function Selection".

6. Set "Sensor Compensation Value" and click

7. Click .

8. Click . 8

8.3.2 Sensor compensation function

8.3 Common Functions
↓

9. To back up the correction value in the non-volatile

memory, click .

10. Click .

↓
(To the next page)

225
 (From the previous page)
↓

11. Click .

12. Click .

13. Click .

14. Click .

↓
End

Remark
By executing 1-point sensor compensation in "Sensor Compensation", the action after the correction can be checked
temporarily. To use the compensation value set in "Sensor Compensation" thereafter, set it on "Sensor correction value
setting" in "Parameter". Doing so holds the compensation value as a parameter.
For the setting in "Parameter", refer to the following.
Page 110, Section 7.3

(b) How to execute 1-point sensor compensation (standard) (when using the program)
Follow the instructions below.
1. Set 1-point sensor compensation (standard) (0H) in Sensor compensation function selection
(Un\G785). ( Page 413, Appendix 2 (91))
2. Set the correction value in CH† Sensor correction value setting (Un\G45, Un\G77, Un\G109,
Un\G141). ( Page 363, Appendix 2 (21))

226
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

(2) 2-point sensor compensation function

With this function, the difference between the temperature process value (PV) and the actual temperature
between the two points selected in advance (a corrected offset value and a corrected gain value) is stored. Based
on this gradient, the difference between a sensor and the actual temperature is corrected.
2-point sensor compensation is performed in the setting mode (Setting/operation mode status (Xn1): off). In
addition, set CH† Stop mode setting (Un\G33, Un\G65, Un\G97, Un\G129) to Monitor (1).

CH 2-point sensor compensation gain value

Temperature
(compensation value)
process value (PV) (Un\G547, Un\G579, Un\G611, Un\G643)

After
correction
CH 2-point sensor compensation offset value
(compensation value) CH 2-point sensor compensation gain value
(Un\G545, Un\G577, Un\G609, Un\G641) (measured value)
Before (Un\G546, Un\G578, Un\G610, Un\G642)
correction

Input temperature

CH 2-point sensor compensation offset value

(measured value)
(Un\G544, Un\G576, Un\G608, Un\G640)

8.3.2 Sensor compensation function

8.3 Common Functions

227
 (a) How to execute 2-point sensor compensation (when using GX Works2)
Set this function on the "Sensor Compensation Function" window.

[Tool] [Intelligent Function Module & Tool] [Temperature Control Module] [Sensor
Compensation Function]

1. Select the module where sensor correction is

executed and click .

2. Click .

3. Click .

4. Select the channel where sensor correction is

executed under "Target Channel".

↓
(To the next page)

228
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

(From the previous page)

↓
5. Select "2-point Sensor Compensation" under
"Sensor Compensation Function Selection".

6. Monitor "Temperature process value (PV)" and

enter the corrected offset value.*1

7. Set the Temperature process value (PV) to be input

under "Compensation Offset Value". Then click
.
↓

8. Click .

8
↓

9. Click .

8.3.2 Sensor compensation function

8.3 Common Functions
↓

10. Monitor "Temperature process value (PV)" and

enter the corrected gain value.*1

11. Set the temperature process value (PV) to be input

under "Compensation Gain Value". Then click

.
↓
(To the next page)

229
 (From the previous page)
↓

12. Click .

13. Click .

14. Click .

15. Click .

16. Click .

17. To back up the correction value in the non-volatile

memory, click .

↓
(To the next page)

230
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

(From the previous page)

↓

18. Click .

19. Click .

20. Click .

21. Click . 8

8.3.2 Sensor compensation function

8.3 Common Functions
↓

22. To shift from the setting mode to the operation

mode, click .

↓
End
*1 Enter the value using devices such as a thermocouple, platinum resistance thermometer, and standard DC voltage
generator, or based on a general resistance value.

231
 (b) How to execute 2-point sensor compensation (when using the program)
Follow the instructions below.

Setting start
Set the temperature process value (PV)
equivalent to be input for CH 2-point sensor
Switch the module to the setting mode (turn on and
compensation gain value (compensation value)
then off the setting/operation mode instruction (Yn1)).
Page 330, Appendix 1.2 (1) (Un\G547, Un\G579, Un\G611, Un\G643).
Page 395, Appendix 2 (66)

Set CH Stop mode setting (Un\G33, Un\G65,

Un\G97, Un\G129) to Monitor (1). Set CH 2-point sensor compensation gain
latch request (Un\G550, Un\G582, Un\G614,
Page 353, Appendix 2 (13)
Un\G646) to Latch request (1).
Page 397, Appendix 2 (69)
Set Sensor compensation function selection
(Un\G785) to 2-point sensor compensation
function (1H). Check that CH 2-point sensor compensation
Page 413, Appendix 2 (91) gain latch completion (Un\G551, Un\G583,
1 Un\G615, Un\G647) is Latch completed (1).*3
Page 397, Appendix 2 (70)
Enter a correcion offset value.*1

Set CH 2-point sensor compensation gain

Set the temperature process value (PV) latch request (Un\G550, Un\G582, Un\G614,
equivalent to be input for CH 2-point sensor Un\G646) to No request (0).
compensation offset value (compensation value) Page 397, Appendix 2 (69)
(Un\G545, Un\G577, Un\G609, Un\G641).
Page 394, Appendix 2 (64)
Switch the setting change instruction (YnB) from
OFF to ON.
Set CH 2-point sensor compensation offset Page 332, Appendix 1.2 (6)
latch request (Un\G548, Un\G580, Un\G612,
Un\G644)to Latch request (1).
Page 396, Appendix 2 (67) Check that the setting change completion flag
(XnB) is ON.
Page 328, Appendix 1.1 (9)
Check that CH 2-point sensor compensation
offset latch completion (Un\G549, Un\G581, Switch the setting change instruction (YnB) from
Un\G613, Un\G645) is Latch completed (1).*2 ON to OFF.
Page 396, Appendix 2 (68) Page 332, Appendix 1.2 (6)

Switch the module to the operation mode (turn

Set CH 2-point sensor compensation offset off, and on the setting/operation mode instruction
latch request (Un\G548, Un\G580, Un\G612, (Yn1)).
Un\G644) to No request (0). Page 330, Appendix 1.2 (1)
Page 396, Appendix 2 (67)
2
NO
Is the ERR.LED off? Go back to 1 or 2.
Enter a compensation gain value.*1

YES
End

*1 Enter the value using devices such as a thermocouple, platinum resistance thermometer, and standard DC voltage
generator, or based on a general resistance value.
*2 When the latch is completed, the temperature process value (PV) is stored in CH† 2-point sensor compensation offset
value (measured value) (Un\G544, Un\G576, Un\G608, Un\G640). ( Page 394, Appendix 2 (63))
*3 When the latch is completed, the temperature process value (PV) is stored in CH† 2-point sensor compensation gain
value (measured value) (Un\G546, Un\G578, Un\G610, Un\G642). ( Page 395, Appendix 2 (65))

232
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

● If a write data error (error code: †††7H) occurs during 2-point sensor compensation, correctly configure the setting for
2-point sensor compensation again. (The value set for 2-point sensor compensation of when an error occurred is not
written in the L60TC4.)
● To use the value set for 2-point sensor compensation even after the power is turned off and on or the CPU module is
reset and the reset is cancelled, back up the value with the following method.
• Turn off and on Setting value backup instruction (Yn8). ( Page 332, Appendix 1.2 (3))

8.3.2 Sensor compensation function

8.3 Common Functions

233
8.3.3 Auto configuration at input range change function
Common

When an input range is changed, using this function automatically changes related buffer memory data to prevent an
error outside the setting range. Set the function on the "Switch Setting" window.
For details on the setting method, refer to the following.
Page 108, Section 7.2
The following is the setting timing.

Reflects an output signal and buffer After buffer memory values set automatically at the end
memory values when the processing of the processing by 250ms or 500ms*1 are changed,
starts by 250ms or 500ms*1 turn on and then off the setting change instruction (YnB).

CH Input range
(Un\G32, Un\G64, Un\G96, Un\G128) Before change After change
ON
Setting change instruction (YnB)
OFF

Buffer memory set automatically Value changed

User setting automatically

ON
Setting change completion flag (XnB)
OFF

Sampling cycle
250ms or 500ms 250ms or 500ms 250ms or 500ms
Reflect Reflect
Executed in a program
Executed by the L60TC4

*1 This value differs depending on the setting under "Sampling Cycle Selection". ( Page 109, Section 7.2 (1) (b))

(1) Buffer memory automatically set

Refer to Page 351, Appendix 2 (12) (d).

234
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

8.3.4 Buffer memory data backup function

Common

This function allows buffer memory data to be stored in the non-volatile memory and backed up.
The backed-up data is transferred from the non-volatile memory to the buffer memory when the power is turned off and
on or the CPU module is reset and the reset is cancelled. Therefore, temperature can be controlled without writing data
when the power is turned off and on or the CPU module is reset and the reset is cancelled.

(1) Applicable buffer memory areas

Refer to the buffer memory assignment list.
Page 44, Section 3.5

(2) Data write to non-volatile memory

This function can be used to back up data directly written in the buffer memory using the PID constants set with
the auto tuning function and the programming tool. When data is written to non-volatile memory and the power is
turned off and on or the CPU module is reset and the reset is cancelled, the buffer memory setting value is not
required to be set again.

For the function that allows PID constants to be automatically backed up after auto tuning, refer to Page 143, Section
8.2.7 (4). 8
To write data to non-volatile memory, turn off and on Setting value backup instruction (Yn8).
When data write to the non-volatile memory is completed, Backup of the set value completion flag (Xn8) turns on.

8.3.4 Buffer memory data backup function

8.3 Common Functions
L60TC4
CPU module 1. Setting value backup
instruction (Yn8): ON
(Write instruction)
OS

3. Setting value backup Non-volatile memory

completion flag (Xn8):
ON (completed) 2. Write

Buffer memory
data
Read
When the power is
switched from off to
on or at reset

If data write to non-volatile memory does not complete, Backup of the set value fail flag (XnA) turns on.

(a) Setting change

Change the settings for buffer memory areas when Backup of the set value completion flag (Xn8) is off.

235
 (3) Data read from non-volatile memory
Follow the instructions below.
• Turn off and on the power or reset the CPU module and cancel the reset.
• Set CH† Memory of PID constants read instruction (Un\G62, Un\G94, Un\G126, Un\G158) to Requested
(1). ( Page 377, Appendix 2 (36)) Data to be read are the PID constants and loop disconnection
detection judgment time for the corresponding channel only. ( Page 374, Appendix 2 (33))

236
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

8.3.5 Error history function

Common

The error or alert occurred with the L60TC4 is stored in the buffer memory areas (Un\G1280 to Un\G1404) as history.
Up to 16 error history data can be stored.

(1) Processing of the error history function

An error code and error occurrence time are stored starting from Error history No.1 (the start address is
Un\G1280).

(2) How to check error history

The start address of the error history where the latest error is stored can be checked in Latest address of error
history (Un\G1279).

Ex. If the third error occurred:

The third error is stored in Error history No.3 and 1296 (the start address of Error history No.3) is stored in
Latest address of error history (Un\G1279).

Latest error code address The start address of the error history
(Un\G1279) where the latest error is stored is stored.
Details of error history
8
An error history consists of the following
Address data.
1280 Error history No.1 Error code
First two digits Last two digits

8.3.5 Error history function

8.3 Common Functions
1st error of the year of the year Error
Month Day occurrence
Hour Minute time
1288 Error history No.2 Second Day of the week
2nd error

New
1296 Error history No.3
3rd error
(Empty)

1400
Error history No.16

(Empty)

237
 Ex. If the 17th error occurred:
The 17th error is stored in Error history No.1 and 1280 (the start address of Error history No.1) is
overwritten in Latest address of error history (Un\G1279).

Latest error code address

(Un\G1279)

Address New
1280 Error history No.1
1st error 17th error

1288 Error history No.2 The 17th error is stored in Error history
No.1 and the 1st error history will be erased.
2nd error

1296 Error history No.3

3rd error

1400
Error history No.16
16th error

● The same processing is performed for an alarm.

● When the storage area for error histories is full, data is overwritten starting from Error history No.1 (Un\G1280 to
Un\G1284) and error history recording is continued. (The history before data overwritten is deleted.)
● Recorded error histories are cleared to 0 by turning off and on the power supply or by resetting the CPU module and
canceling the reset.

238
 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS

8.3.6 Module error history collection function

Common

The errors and alarms occurred with the L60TC4 are collected into the CPU module.
The CPU module keeps the error information collected from the L60TC4 as a module error history in the memory
where data is maintained even at the time of the power failure. Therefore, the information of the errors occurred with
the L60TC4 can be kept even if the power is turned off and on or the CPU module is reset and the reset is cancelled.

(1) Example of the operation of the module error history collection function

Error history (CPU module including built-in I/O and built-in

CC-Link) and error log (intelligent function module) are
displayed on one screen.

Errors that occurred in the entire system can be

monitored in reverse chronological order.
Module A Module B
CPU 19:29 Error A1 occurred! 19:34 Error B1 occurred!
19:33 Error C1 occurred! 19:36 Error A2 occurred!

Programming tool
Error history display
Time Module in error Error code
19:29
19:33
Module A
CPU
Error A1
Error C1
Error history
(CPU module) Module error log 8
19:34 Module B Error B1 Time Module in error Error code
19:36 Module A Error A2 19:33 Error C1 19:29 Module A Error A1
19:34 Module B Error B1
19:36 Module A Error A2

8.3.6 Module error history collection function

8.3 Common Functions
[Example of screen display]

For details on the module error history collection function, refer to the following.
MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)

239
8.3.7 Error clear function
Common

When an error occurs, the error can be cleared on the system monitor.

Clicking the button on the system monitor clears the error code stored in Error code (Un\G0) and turns
off the ERR.LED. The operation is the same as when an error is cleared using Error reset instruction (Yn2).
However, the error history is not cleared.
For how to clear an error using Error reset instruction (Yn2), refer to the following.
• Error reset instruction (Yn2) ( Page 331, Appendix 1.2 (2))

[Diagnostics] [System Monitor...] The module where an error occurred

240
 CHAPTER 9 DISPLAY UNIT

CHAPTER 9 DISPLAY UNIT 9

This chapter describes the functions of the display unit that can be used with the L60TC4.
For details on how to operate the display unit, the functions, and menu structure, refer to the following manual.
MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)

9.1 Display Unit

The display unit is an LCD display to be attached to the CPU module. By attaching it to the CPU module, the following
operations can be performed without using any software package.
• Checking the system status
• Changing system set values (only for use as a temperature input module)
When a problem occurs, the cause of the problem can be identified by the displayed error information.
For details on how to check and clear errors from the display unit, refer to the following.
• Checking and clearing errors ( Page 248, Section 9.4)

Remark
To change system setting values in temperature control mode, use GX Works2. ( Page 107, CHAPTER 7)

9.2 Menu Transition

9.1 Display Unit

(1) Structure list
The following is the menu structure of "MOD MON/TEST" menu and "MOD SETTINGS" menu.

CPU MON/TEST
CPU SETTINGS
MOD MON/TEST SPECIFY I/O No. BUF MEM MON/TES

MODULE LIST
MOD SETTINGS SPECIFY I/O No. INIT CHANGE CH1 CONVERSION
CH2 PRMRY DLY FLTR
MODULE LIST CH3 PROCESS ALARM
USER MESSAGE CH4 PRALARM UPR/UPR
PRALARM UPR/LWR
OPTIONS PRALARM LWR/UPR
PRALARM LWR/LWR
RTALARM
RTALM DTCT PRD
RTALARM UP LMT
RTALARM LOW LMT
SCALING
SCALE UP LMT
SCALE LOW LMT
COMMON CJ SELECTION

241
 (2) Screen transition to the initial setting change screen
The following figure shows the screen transition to the initial setting change screen.

Conversion enable and

disable setting screen

Standby screen

Rate alarm setting screen

Primary delay filter screen

Rate alarm detection

cycle screen
Function selection screen

Process alarm setting screen

Rate alarm upper limit screen

Module setting_module Module setting_start I/O No.

specification screen specification screen Process alarm
upper upper limit screen
Initial setting change screen

Rate alarm lower limit screen

Process alarm
upper lower limit screen
Module setting_module
selection screen

Scaling setting screen

Process alarm
lower upper limit screen

Change item selection menu screen

Initial setting change screen
Scaling upper limit screen

Process alarm
lower lower limit screen

Parameter-valid drive Scaling lower limit screen

confirmation screen

Common setting item selection

Channel selection screen Cold junction compensation
menu screen
selection screen

242
 CHAPTER 9 DISPLAY UNIT

9.3 Setting Value Change Screen List 9

The following table shows the setting value change screen list.

(1) Displayed in English

Name Input limits

Screen
Upper limit Lower limit
Setting item Screen display format
value value
Conversion enable/disable setting CONVERSION Selection ⎯ ⎯
Primary delay digital filter setting PRMRY DLY FLTR Numeric 100 0
Process alarm alert output enable/disable setting PROCESS ALARM Selection ⎯ ⎯
Process alarm upper upper limit value PRALARM UPR/UPR Numeric 32767 -32768
Process alarm upper lower limit value PRALARM UPR/LWR Numeric 32767 -32768
Process alarm lower upper limit value PRALARM LWR/UPR Numeric 32767 -32768
Process alarm lower lower limit value PRALARM LWR/LWR Numeric 32767 -32768
Rate alarm alert output enable/disable setting RTALARM Selection ⎯ ⎯
Rate alarm alert detection period RTALM DTCT PRD Numeric 6000 1
Rate alarm upper limit value RTALARM UP LMT Numeric 32767 -32768
Rate alarm lower limit value RTALARM LOW LMT Numeric 32767 -32768
Process value (PV) scaling function enable/disable
SCALING Selection ⎯ ⎯
setting
Process value (PV) scaling upper limit value SCALE UP LMT Numeric 32000 -32000
Process value (PV) scaling lower limit value SCALE LOW LMT Numeric 32000 -32000
Cold junction temperature compensation selection CJ SELECTION Selection ⎯ ⎯

9.3 Setting Value Change Screen List

243
 (2) Conversion enable/disable setting
Select "DISABLE or "ENABLE" in the "Conversion enable and disable setting" screen.

"Conversion enable and disable setting" screen 1. Use the and buttons to select "DISABLE" or
"ENABLE", then make a confirmation with the OK

button.

(3) Primary delay digital filter setting

Set the time constant for the primary delay digital filter in the "Primary delay filter" screen.

"Primary delay filter" screen 1. Move the cursor using the and buttons, then
increment or decrement the value at the cursor,
using the and buttons, respectively. Make a
confirmation with the OK button.

Table of input items

Input range
Input item
Input upper limit Input lower limit
Primary delay filter 100 0

244
 CHAPTER 9 DISPLAY UNIT

(4) Process alarm setting 9

Select "DISABLE or "ENABLE" in the "Process alarm setting" screen.

"Process alarm setting" screen 1. Use the and buttons to select "DISABLE" or
"ENABLE", then make a confirmation with the OK

button. (If "ENABLE" is selected, proceed to step 2.)

↓
"Process alarm upper upper limit" screen 2. Move the cursor using the and buttons, then
increment or decrement the value at the cursor,
using the and buttons, respectively. Make a
confirmation with the OK button.

↓
"Process alarm upper lower limit" screen 3. Move the cursor using the and buttons, then
increment or decrement the value at the cursor,
using the and buttons, respectively. Make a
confirmation with the OK button.

9.3 Setting Value Change Screen List

"Process alarm lower upper limit" screen 4. Move the cursor using the and buttons, then
increment or decrement the value at the cursor,
using the and buttons, respectively. Make a
confirmation with the OK button.

↓
"Process alarm lower lower limit" screen 5. Move the cursor using the and buttons, then
increment or decrement the value at the cursor,
using the and buttons, respectively. Make a
confirmation with the OK button.

Table of input items

Input range
Input item
Input upper limit Input lower limit
Process alarm upper upper limit
Process alarm upper lower limit
32767 -32768
Process alarm lower upper limit
Process alarm lower lower limit

245
 (5) Rate alarm setting
Select "DISABLE" or "ENABLE" in the "Rate alarm setting" screen.

"Rate alarm setting" screen 1. Use the and buttons to select "DISABLE" or
"ENABLE", then make a confirmation with the OK

button. (If "ENABLE" is selected, proceed to step 2.)

↓
"Rate alarm detection period" screen 2. Move the cursor using the and buttons, then
increment or decrement the value at the cursor,
using the and buttons, respectively. Make a
confirmation with the OK button.

↓
"Rate alarm upper limit" screen 3. Move the cursor using the and buttons, then
increment or decrement the value at the cursor,
using the and buttons, respectively. Make a
confirmation with the OK button.

↓
"Rate alarm lower limit" screen 4. Move the cursor using the and buttons, then
increment or decrement the value at the cursor,
using the and buttons, respectively. Make a
confirmation with the OK button.

Table of input items

Input range
Input item
Input upper limit Input lower limit
Rate alarm detection period 6000 1
Rate alarm upper limit
32767 -32768
Rate alarm lower limit

246
 CHAPTER 9 DISPLAY UNIT

(6) Scaling setting 9

Select "DISABLE" or "ENABLE" in the "Scaling setting" screen.

"Scaling setting" screen 1. Use the and buttons to select "DISABLE" or

"ENABLE", then make a confirmation with the OK

button. (If "ENABLE" is selected, proceed to step 2.)

↓
"Scaling upper limit" screen 2. Move the cursor using the and buttons, then
increment or decrement the value at the cursor,
using the and buttons, respectively. Make a
confirmation with the OK button.

↓
"Scaling lower limit" screen 3. Move the cursor using the and buttons, then
increment or decrement the value at the cursor,
using the and buttons, respectively. Make a
confirmation with the OK button.

Table of input items

9.3 Setting Value Change Screen List

Input range
Input item
Input upper limit Input lower limit
Scaling upper limit
32000 -32000
Scaling lower limit

(7) Cold junction compensation selection

Select "STANDARD TB" or "WITHOUT RTD" in the "Cold junction compensation selection" screen.

"Cold junction compensation selection" screen 1. Use the and buttons to select "STANDARD
TB" or "WITHOUT RTD", then make a confirmation
with the OK button. ("TB CONV MODULE" cannot
be used.)

247
9.4 Checking and Clearing Errors

By operation from the display unit, the error that occurred in the L60TC4 can be checked. The error that is occurring
can also be cleared.

(1) Checking the error

The error that occurred in the L60TC4 can be checked by specifying the error code (Un\G0) from "Buffer memory
monitor/test".

Ex. When an error occurred in the L60TC4 with the start I/O number 1

"Buffer memory monitor/test" screen 1. Press the OK button.

↓
"Buffer memory address input format selection" screen 2. Use the and buttons to select "DEC" for the
input format of the buffer memory address, then
make a confirmation with the OK button.

↓
"Buffer memory address setting" screen 3. Move the cursor using the and buttons, then
increment or decrement the value at the cursor,
using the and buttons, and set the value to 0.
Make a confirmation with the OK button.

↓
"Buffer memory monitor" screen 4. The error that occurred can be checked in the
"Buffer memory monitor" screen.

248
 CHAPTER 9 DISPLAY UNIT

(2) Clearing the error 9

To clear the error, remove the error cause and turn Error clear request (Yn2) off, on, and off from "Device
monitor/test".

Ex. When an error occurred in the L60TC4 with the start I/O number 1

"CPU monitor/test" screen 1. Use the and buttons to select "DEV

MON/TEST", then make a confirmation with the OK

button.

↓
"Device monitor" screen 2. Set the device to Y and press the OK button.

↓
"Device test check" screen 3. Use the and buttons to set the device to Y12,
then make a confirmation with the OK button.

9.4 Checking and Clearing Errors

↓
"Device test" screen 4. Use the and buttons to switch ON/OFF. Press
the OK button to set the value set in the device test.

249
CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING
This chapter describes the programs of the L60TC4.
When applying any of the program examples introduced in this chapter to the actual system, verify that the control of
the target system has no problem thoroughly.

10.1 Programming Procedure

(1) Temperature input mode

Create a program that performs temperature conversion in the L60TC4 using the following procedure.

Start

Configure NO
the initial setting using
GX Works2?

YES

Configure initial data (such as input range Create a program to configure initial data
and conversion enable/disable setting) (such as input range and conversion
using GX Works2. enable/disable setting).

Operation

250
 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING

(2) Temperature control mode

Create a program that performs temperature control in the L60TC4 using the following procedure.

Start 10

Configure NO
the initial setting using
GX Works2?

YES
Create a program to configure initial
Configure initial data (such as input range data (such as input range and set value
and set value (SV)) using GX Works2. (SV)).

NO NO
Use specific PID constants? Use specific PID constants?

YES YES

Configure the PID constants using Create a program to configure

GX Works2. the PID constants.

Execute the auto tuning*1. Execute the auto tuning*1.

Back up the PID constants in the Back up the PID constants in the

10.1 Programming Procedure

non-volatile memory. non-volatile memory.

Use CH Memory's PID constant read

instruction to create a program to read
the PID constants from the non-volatile
memory.

Operation

*1 In the standard control, the self-tuning can be selected if necessary.

251
10.2 When Using the Module in a Standard System
Configuration

This section describes the following program examples.

Mode Overview of the program example Reference

This is a program example where the L60TC4 is used as a temperature input Page 252,
Temperature input mode
module. Section 10.2.1
This is a program example for operations such as the auto tuning, self-tuning, and Page 263,
Standard error code read. Section 10.2.2
control This is a program example where the peak current suppression function and the Page 274,
Temperature
simultaneous temperature rise function are used for the control. Section 10.2.3
control mode
Heating-
Page 288,
cooling This is a program example for the heating-cooling control.
Section 10.2.4
control

10.2.1 When using the L60TC4 as a temperature input module

This section describes the program example of when the L60TC4 is used as a temperature input module.

(1) System configuration

The following figure shows the system configuration of when the L60TC4 is used as a temperature input module.

Power supply module (L61P)

CPU module (L02CPU)
Temperature control module (L60TCTT4)
Input module (LX42C4)
Output module (LY42NT1P)
END cover (L6EC)
X/Y00 X/Y10 X20 Y60
to to to to
X/Y0F X/Y1F X5F Y9F

CH1

Type-K thermocouple
-200 to 1300

CH3

Type-K thermocouple
-200 to 1300

252
 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING

● When using the L26CPU-BT, set the I/O assignment of the built-in CC-Link of the L26CPU-BT to X/YFE0 to X/YFFF so
that the I/O assignment be the same as that of the system configuration above.
● When the L60TCTT4BW or the L60TCRT4BW is used, the I/O assignment is the same as that of the system 10
configuration shown above.
• Slot 0: 16 intelligent points
• Slot 1: 64 input points
• Slot 2: 64 output points

(2) Programming condition

This program is designed to read the temperatures measured by the thermocouple (K type, -200.0 to 1300.0°C)
connected to CH1 to CH3.
An error code can be read and reset.
The following table lists other programming conditions.

Description
Item
CH1 CH2 CH3
Sampling cycle 250ms
Temperature
Sampling processing Sampling processing Primary delay digital filter (time constant 1s)
conversion method
• Process alarm lower lower limit value:
2000 (200.0°C)
• Process alarm lower upper limit value: • Rate alarm alert detection cycle: Four
2050 (205.0°C) times (1s)
Alert output function ⎯
• Process alarm upper lower limit value: • Rate alarm upper limit value: 50 (+5.0°C)
2950 (295.0°C) • Rate alarm lower limit value: -50 (-5.0°C)

10.2.1 When using the L60TC4 as a temperature input module

10.2 When Using the Module in a Standard System Configuration
• Process alarm upper upper limit value:
3000 (300.0°C)

(3) Wiring example

The following figure shows a wiring example.

OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
COM
CH1 + NC
CH2 + IN1 +
CH1 Input CH1 - IN2 +
CH2 - IN1 -
CH2 Input
IN2 -
Cold junction CJ NC
temperature CJ
compensation CJ NC
resistor CH3 + CJ

CH3 Input IN3 +

CH3 - IN4 +
IN3 -
IN4 -

253
 (4) Switch Setting
Configure settings such as the input mode selection and the auto-setting at the input range change as follows.

Project window [Intelligent Function Module] [L60TCTT4] [Switch Setting]

Item Setting value

Input Mode Selection Temperature Input Mode
Auto-setting at Input Range Change 0: Disable
Sampling Cycle Selection 1: 250ms

(5) Contents of the initial setting

Description
Item
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
49: Thermocouple K 49: Thermocouple K 49: Thermocouple K 2: ThermocoupleK
Measured Measured Measured Measured
Input range
Temperature Range Temperature Range Temperature Range Temperature Range
(-200.0 to 1300.0°C) (-200.0 to 1300.0°C) (-200.0 to 1300.0°C) (0 to 1300.0°C)
Conversion enable/disable
0: Enable 0: Enable 0: Enable 1: Disable
setting
Primary delay digital filter
0s 0s 1s 0s
setting
Process alarm alert output
1: Disable 0: Enable 1: Disable 1: Disable
enable/disable setting
Process alarm lower lower
-200.0°C 200.0°C -200.0°C -200°C
limit value
Process alarm lower upper
-200.0°C 205.0°C -200.0°C -200°C
limit value

254
 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING

Description
Item
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
Process alarm upper lower
1300.0°C 295°C 1300.0°C 1300°C
limit value
Process alarm upper upper
limit value
1300.0°C 300°C 1300.0°C 1300°C 10
Rate alarm alert output
1: Disable 1: Disable 0: Enable 1: Disable
enable/disable setting
Rate alarm alert detection
1 Times 1 Times 4 Times 1 Times
cycle
Rate alarm upper limit value 0.0°C 0.0°C 5.0°C 0°C
Rate alarm lower limit value 0.0°C 0.0°C -5.0°C 0°C

(6) When using the parameter of an intelligent function module

(a) Devices used by a user

Device Description
X10 Module READY flag
L60TCTT4 (X10 to X1F)
X12 Error occurrence flag
X22 Error code reset instruction
X23 Operation mode setting instruction LX42C4 (X20 to X5F)
X25 Temperature process value read instruction
Y11 Setting/operation mode instruction
Y12 Error reset instruction L60TCTT4 (Y10 to Y1F)
Y1B Setting change instruction
Y60 to Y6F Error code output LY42NT1P (Y60 to Y9F)

10.2.1 When using the L60TC4 as a temperature input module

10.2 When Using the Module in a Standard System Configuration
D11 CH1 Temperature process value (PV)
D12 CH2 Temperature process value (PV)
D13 CH3 Temperature process value (PV)
D50 Error code
D51 CH1 Temperature process value (PV)
D52 CH2 Temperature process value (PV)
Devices where data is written
D53 CH3 Temperature process value (PV)
by auto refresh
D55 CH2 Alert definition
D56 CH3 Alert definition
D60 Temperature conversion completion flag

255
 (b) Parameter setting
Set the contents of initial settings in the parameter.
1. Open the "Parameter" window.

Project window [Intelligent Function Module] [L60TCTT4] [Switch Setting]

2. Click to set items unnecessary for the mode set on Switch Setting to 0.
3. Set the parameter.

Setting value
Item Description
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
49: Thermocouple 49: Thermocouple 49: Thermocouple
2: ThermocoupleK
Set the temperature sensor K Measured K Measured K Measured
Measured
Input range used for the L60TC4 and the Temperature Temperature Temperature
Temperature Range
measurement range. Range (-200.0 to Range (-200.0 to Range (-200.0 to
(0 to 1300°C)
1300.0°C) 1300.0°C) 1300.0°C)
Conversion Set whether to enable or disable
enable/disable temperature conversion for 0: Enable 0: Enable 0: Enable 1: Disable
setting each channel.
Set the primary delay digital
Primary delay filter that smoothes the
0s 0s 1s 0s
digital filter setting temperature process value
(PV).
Process alarm
Set whether to enable or disable
alert output
the process alarm alert output 1: Disable 0: Enable 1: Disable 1: Disable
enable/disable
for each channel.
setting
Process alarm
Set the process alarm lower
lower lower limit 0.0°C 200.0°C 0.0°C 0°C
lower limit value.
value
Process alarm
Set the process alarm lower
lower upper limit 0.0°C 205.0°C 0.0°C 0°C
upper limit value.
value

256
 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING

Setting value
Item Description
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
Process alarm
Set the process alarm upper
upper lower limit 1300.0°C 295.0°C 1300.0°C 1300°C
lower limit value.
value
Process alarm
10
Set the process alarm upper
upper upper limit 1300.0°C 300.0°C 1300.0°C 1300°C
upper limit value.
value
Rate alarm alert
Set whether to enable or disable
output
the rate alarm alert output for 1: Disable 1: Disable 0: Enable 1: Disable
enable/disable
each channel.
setting
Set the cycle for checking the
Rate alarm alert
temperature process value (PV) 1 Times 1 Times 4 Times 1 Times
detection cycle
for the rate alarm.
Rate alarm upper Set the rate alarm upper limit
0.0°C 0.0°C 5.0°C 0°C
limit value value.
Rate alarm lower Set the rate alarm lower limit
0.0°C 0.0°C -5.0°C 0°C
limit value value.

10.2.1 When using the L60TC4 as a temperature input module

10.2 When Using the Module in a Standard System Configuration

257
 (c) Auto refresh setting
Set the device to be automatically refreshed.

Project window [Intelligent Function Module] [L60TCTT4] [Auto_Refresh]

Setting value
Item Description
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
An error code or alarm code is
Error code D50
stored.
The detected temperature
Temperature
value where sensor correction D51 D52 D53 ⎯
process value (PV)
was performed is stored.
Bits corresponding to alerts
Alert definition detected in each channel ⎯ D55 D56 ⎯
become 1.
This flag checks whether the
Temperature
temperature conversion has
conversion D60
started properly for each
completion flag
channel.

258
 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING

(d) Writing parameter of an intelligent function module

Write the set parameter to the CPU module. Then reset the CPU module or turn off and on the power supply of
the programmable controller.

[Online] [Write to PLC...] 10

or Power OFF ON

(e) Program example

• Program that changes the setting/operation mode

Change to the setting mode or

the operation mode.

• Program that reads the temperature process value (PV) and takes action when a process alarm or a rate
alarm occurs

Transfer CH1 Temperature process

value (PV) to D11.
Transfer CH2 Temperature process
value (PV) to D12.
Transfer CH3 Temperature process
value (PV) to D13.
Processing of
when CH2 Process alarm occurs

Processing of

10.2.1 When using the L60TC4 as a temperature input module

10.2 When Using the Module in a Standard System Configuration
when CH3 Rate alarm occurs

• Program that reads an error code

Output an error code to Y60 to Y6F.

Error reset instruction: ON

Error reset instruction: OFF

259
 (7) Program example of when not using the parameter of an intelligent function
module

(a) Devices used by a user

Device Description
X10 Module READY flag
X12 Error occurrence flag
L60TCTT4 (X10 to X1F)
X13 Hardware error flag
X1B Setting change completion flag
X20 Set value write instruction
X22 Error code reset instruction
LX42C4 (X20 to X5F)
X23 Operation mode setting instruction
X25 Temperature process value read instruction
Y11 Setting/operation mode status
Y12 Error reset instruction L60TCTT4 (Y10 to Y1F)
Y1B Setting change instruction
Y60 to Y6F Error code output LY42NT1P (Y60 to Y9F)
D11 CH1 Temperature process value (PV)
D12 CH2 Temperature process value (PV)
D13 CH3 Temperature process value (PV)
D50 Error code
D55 CH2 Alert definition
D56 CH3 Alert definition
D60 Temperature conversion completion flag
M0 For writing set value 0
M1 For writing set value 1
M2 For writing set value 2

260
 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING

(b) Program example

• Program that changes the setting/operation mode
The program is the same as that of when the parameter of the intelligent function module is used.
( Page 259, Section 10.2.1 (6) (e))
10
• Initial setting program

Flag 0 for setting value write: ON

Flag 1 for setting value write: ON

CH1 Input range: 49

CH2 Input range: 49

CH3 Input range: 49

Conversion enable/disable setting
CH1: Enabled, CH2: Enabled
CH3: Enabled, CH4: Disabled
CH1 Process alarm alert output
enable/disable setting: Disabled
CH2 Process alarm alert output
enable/disable setting: Enabled
CH2 Process alarm lower lower limit
value: 200.0
CH2 Process alarm lower upper limit
value: 205.0
CH2 Process alarm upper lower limit
value: 295.0
CH2 Process alarm upper upper limit
value: 300.0
CH3 Process alarm alert output
enable/disable setting: Disabled
CH1 Rate alarm alert output

10.2.1 When using the L60TC4 as a temperature input module

10.2 When Using the Module in a Standard System Configuration
enable/disable setting: Disabled
CH2 Rate alarm alert output
enable/disable setting: Disabled
CH3 Rate alarm alert output
enable/disable setting: Enabled
CH3 Rate alarm alert detection
cycle: 4 times
CH3 Rate alarm upper limit value
: 5.0
CH3 Rate alarm lower limit value
: - 5.0

Setting change instruction: ON

Setting change instruction: OFF

Flag 2 for setting value write: ON

CH1 Primary delay digital filter setting

:0
CH2 Primary delay digital filter setting
:0
CH3 Primary delay digital filter setting
:1
Flag 1 for setting value write: OFF

Flag 2 for setting value write: OFF

261
 • Program that reads the temperature process value (PV) and takes action when a process alarm or a rate
alarm occurs

Read Conversion completion flag

to D60.
Read CH1 Temperature process
value (PV) to D11.
Read CH2 Temperature process
value (PV) to D12.
Read CH3 Temperature process
value (PV) to D13.
Read CH2 Alert definition to D55.
Processing of
when CH2 Process alarm occurs

Read CH3 Alert definition to D56.

Processing of
when CH3 Rate alarm occurs

• Program that reads an error code

Read an error code to D50.

Output data read from an error code

to Y60 to Y6F.

Error reset instruction: ON

Error reset instruction: OFF

262
 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING

10.2.2 Standard control (such as auto tuning, self-tuning, and error

code read)

This section describes the program example for operations such as the auto tuning, self-tuning, and error code read. 10
(1) System configuration
The following figure shows the system configuration for operations such as the auto tuning, self-tuning, and error
code read.

Power supply module (L61P)

CPU module (L02CPU)
Temperature control module (L60TCTT4)
Input module (LX42C4)
Output module (LY42NT1P)
END cover (L6EC)
X/Y00 X/Y10 X20 Y60
to to to to
X/Y0F X/Y1F X5F Y9F

Heater

10.2.2 Standard control (such as auto tuning, self-tuning, and error code read)
10.2 When Using the Module in a Standard System Configuration
Object to be controlled
Type-K thermocouple
0 to 1300

● When using the L26CPU-BT, set the I/O assignment of the built-in CC-Link of the L26CPU-BT to X/YFE0 to X/YFFF so
that the I/O assignment be the same as that of the system configuration above.
● When the L60TCTT4BW or the L60TCRT4BW is used, the I/O assignment is the same as that of the system
configuration shown above.
• Slot 0: 16 intelligent points
• Slot 1: 64 input points
• Slot 2: 64 output points

263
 (2) Programming condition
This program is designed to read the temperatures measured by the thermocouple (K type, 0°C to 1300°C)
connected to CH1 for the control.
An error code can be read and reset.
The self-tuning function automatically sets the PID constants optimal to CH1.

(3) Wiring example

The following figure shows a wiring example.

- L1
Heater operation
OUT1
input
+ OUT2
OUT3
COM- OUT4
24VDC COM
CH1 + NC
CH1 - IN1 +
IN2 +
CH1 Input IN1 -
IN2 -
Cold junction CJ NC
temperature CJ
compensation CJ NC
resistor CJ
IN3 +
IN4 +
IN3 -
IN4 -

264
 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING

(4) Switch Setting

Configure settings such as the input mode selection and the auto-setting at the input range change as follows.

Project window [Intelligent Function Module] [L60TCTT4] [Switch Setting] 10

Set value

10.2.2 Standard control (such as auto tuning, self-tuning, and error code read)
10.2 When Using the Module in a Standard System Configuration
Item
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
Input Mode Selection Temperature Control Mode
Output Setting at CPU Stop
0: CLEAR 0: CLEAR 0: CLEAR 0: CLEAR
Error
Control Mode Selection 0: Standard Control
Temperature Control
Setting Change Rate Limiter
Mode Setting 0: Temperature Rise/Temperature Drop Batch Setting
Setting
Control Output Cycle Unit
0: 1s Cycle
Selection Setting
Auto-setting at Input Range Change 0: Disable
Sampling Cycle Selection 0: 500ms

265
 (5) Contents of the initial setting

Description
Item
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
2: Thermocouple K 2: Thermocouple K 2: Thermocouple K 2: Thermocouple K
Measured Measured Measured Measured
Input range
Temperature Range Temperature Range Temperature Range Temperature Range
(0 to 1300°C) (0 to 1300°C) (0 to 1300°C) (0 to 1300°C)
Set value (SV) setting 200°C 0°C 0°C 0°C
Unused channel setting 0: Used 1: Unused 1: Unused 1: Unused
Control output cycle setting 30 s 30 s 30 s 30 s
Upper limit setting limiter 400°C 1300°C 1300°C 1300°C
Lower limit setting limiter 0°C 0°C 0°C 0°C
1: Starting ST (PID 0: Do Not Run the 0: Do Not Run the 0: Do Not Run the
Self-tuning setting*1
Constant Only) ST ST ST
1: Upper Limit Input
Alert 1 mode setting 0: Not Warning 0: Not Warning 0: Not Warning
Alert
Alert set value 1 500°C 0°C 0°C 0°C

*1 This setting is necessary only when the self-tuning function is used.

(6) When using the parameter of an intelligent function module

(a) Devices used by a user

Device Description
X10 Module READY flag
L60TCTT4 (X10 to X1F)
X12 Error occurrence flag
X22 Error code reset instruction
X23 Operation mode setting instruction
LX42C4 (X20 to X5F)
X24 Memory of PID constants read instruction
X30 CH1 Set value (SV) change instruction
Y11 Setting/operation mode instruction
Y12 Error reset instruction
L60TCTT4 (Y10 to Y1F)
Y18 Set value backup instruction
Y1B Setting change instruction
Y60 to Y6F Error code output LY42NT1P (Y60 to Y9F)
D50 Error code Devices where data is written
D51 CH1 Temperature process value (PV) by auto refresh
M20 to M23 CH† Read completion flag
M24 to M27 CH† Write completion flag

266
 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING

(b) Parameter setting

Set the contents of initial settings in the parameter.
1. Open the "Parameter" window.

Project window [Intelligent Function Module] [L60TCTT4] [Parameter] 10

2. Click to set items unnecessary for the mode set on Switch Setting to 0.

3. Set the parameter.

10.2.2 Standard control (such as auto tuning, self-tuning, and error code read)
10.2 When Using the Module in a Standard System Configuration
Setting value
Item Description
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
Set the temperature 2: ThermocoupleK 2: ThermocoupleK 2: ThermocoupleK 2: ThermocoupleK
sensor used for the Measured Measured Measured Measured
Input range
L60TC4 and the Temperature Range Temperature Range Temperature Range Temperature Range
measurement range. (0 to 1300°C) (0 to 1300°C) (0 to 1300°C) (0 to 1300°C)
Set the target
Set value (SV)
temperature value of PID 200°C 0°C 0°C 0°C
setting
control.
Configure this setting
when the channels where
the temperature control is
Unused channel
not performed and the 0: Used 1: Unused 1: Unused 1: Unused
setting
temperature sensor is not
connected are set to be
unused.
Control output cycle
Set the pulse cycle
setting/Heating
(ON/OFF cycle) of the 30 s 30 s 30 s 30 s
control output cycle
transistor output.
setting
Upper limit setting Set the upper limit of the
400°C 1300°C 1300°C 1300°C
limiter set value (SV).

267
 Setting value
Item Description
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
Lower limit setting Set the lower limit of the
0°C 0°C 0°C 0°C
limiter set value (SV).
Set the operation of the 1: Starting ST (PID 0: Do Not Run the 0: Do Not Run the 0: Do Not Run the
Self-tuning setting*1
self-tuning. Constant Only) ST ST ST
1: Upper Limit Input
Alert 1 mode setting Set the alert mode. 0: Not Warning 0: Not Warning 0: Not Warning
Alert
Set the temperature
where CH† Alert 1 (b8 of
Alert set value 1 Un\G5 to Un\G8) turns on 500°C ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
depending on the
selected alert mode.
*1 This setting is necessary only when the self-tuning function is used.

(c) Auto refresh setting

Set the device to be automatically refreshed.

Project window [Intelligent Function Module] [L60TCTT4] [Auto_Refresh]

Set value
Item Description
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
An error code or alarm code is
Error code D50
stored.
The detected temperature
Temperature
value where sensor correction D51 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
process value (PV)
was performed is stored.

268
 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING

(d) Writing parameter of an intelligent function module

Write the set parameter to the CPU module. Then reset the CPU module or turn off and on the power supply of
the programmable controller.

[Online] [Write to PLC...] 10

or Power OFF ON

(e) Performing auto tuning

Set the "Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants" to "ON" and perform the auto tuning.

[Tool] [Intelligent Function Module Tool] [Temperature Control Module]

[Auto Tuning...] [L60TCTT4]

10.2.2 Standard control (such as auto tuning, self-tuning, and error code read)
10.2 When Using the Module in a Standard System Configuration

269
 (f) Program example
• Program that changes the setting/operation mode
This program is the same as that of when it is used as a temperature input module. ( Page 259,
Section 10.2.1 (6) (e))

• Program that reads the PID constants from the non-volatile memory

CH1 Memory's PID constant read

instruction: With instruction
Read bit data from b7 to b0 of the
memory's PID constant read/write
completion flag to M20 to M27.
CH1 Memory's PID constant read
instruction: Without instruction

• Program that reads an error code

Output an error code to Y60 to Y6F.

Error reset instruction: ON

Error reset instruction: OFF

• Program that changes the set value (SV)

Change CH1 Set value (SV) setting

to 250 .
Return CH1 Set value (SV) setting
to 200 .

270
 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING

(7) Program example of when not using the parameter of an intelligent function
module

(a) Devices used by a user 10

Device Description
X10 Module READY flag
X11 Setting/operation mode status
X12 Error occurrence flag
X13 Hardware error flag L60TCTT4 (X10 to X1F)
X14 CH1 Auto tuning status
X18 Back-up of the set value completion flag
X1B Setting change completion flag
X20 Set value write instruction
X21 Auto tuning execute instruction
X22 Error code reset instruction
LX42C4 (X20 to X5F)
X23 Operation mode setting instruction
X24 Memory of PID constants read instruction
X30 CH1 Set value (SV) change instruction
Y11 Setting/operation mode instruction
Y12 Error reset instruction
Y14 CH1 Auto tuning instruction L60TCTT4 (Y10 to Y1F)
Y18 Set value backup instruction
Y1B Setting change instruction
Y60 to Y6F Error code output LY42NT1P (Y60 to Y9F)

10.2.2 Standard control (such as auto tuning, self-tuning, and error code read)
10.2 When Using the Module in a Standard System Configuration
D50 Error code
D51 CH1 Temperature process value (PV)
M0 For writing set value 0
M1 For writing set value 1
M2 For writing set value 2
M10 CH1 Auto tuning completion flag
M20 to M23 CH† Read completion flag
M24 to M27 CH† Write completion flag

271
 (b) Program example
• Program that changes the setting/operation mode
This program is the same as that of when it is used as a temperature input module. ( Page 259,
Section 10.2.1 (6) (e))

• Initial setting program

Flag 0 for setting value write: ON

Flag 1 for setting value write: ON

CH1 Unused channel setting: Used

CH2 Unused channel setting: Unused

CH3 Unused channel setting: Unused

CH4 Unused channel setting: Unused

CH1 Input range: 2

CH1 Alert 1 mode setting: Upper
input alert
CH1 Control output cycle
setting: 30s
*1
CH1 Self-tuning setting: Starting
ST (calculates only PID constants)

Setting change instruction: ON

Setting change instruction: OFF

Flag 2 for setting value write: ON

CH1 Alert set value 1: 500

CH1 Set value (SV) setting: 200

CH1 Upper limit setting limiter: 400

CH1 Lower limit setting limiter: 0

Flag 1 for setting value write: OFF

Flag 2 for setting value write: OFF

*1 Configure this setting only when the self-tuning function is used.

272
 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING

• Program that executes the auto tuning and backs up the PID constants in the non-volatile memory

CH1 Auto tuning instruction: ON

10
CH1 Auto tuning instruction: OFF

CH1 Auto tuning completion flag: ON

Setting value backup instruction: ON

Setting value backup instruction: OFF

CH1 Auto tuning completion flag: OFF

• Program that reads the PID constants from the non-volatile memory
This program is the same as that of when the parameter of the intelligent function module is used.
( Page 270, Section 10.2.2 (6) (f))

• Program that reads an error code and the temperature process value (PV)

Read an error code to D50.

Output data read from an error code

to Y60 to Y6F.

Error reset instruction: ON

Error reset instruction: OFF

Read CH1 Temperature process

value (PV) to D51.

• Program that changes the set value (SV)

10.2.2 Standard control (such as auto tuning, self-tuning, and error code read)
10.2 When Using the Module in a Standard System Configuration
This program is the same as that of when the parameter of the intelligent function module is used.
( Page 270, Section 10.2.2 (6) (f))

273
10.2.3 Standard control (peak current suppression function,
simultaneous temperature rise function)

This section describes the program example where the peak current suppression function and the simultaneous
temperature rise function are used for the control.

(1) System configuration

The following figure shows the system configuration example of when the peak current suppression function and
the simultaneous temperature rise function are used for the control.

Power supply module (L61P)

CPU module (L02CPU)
Temperature control module (L60TCTT4)
Input module (LX42C4)
Output module (LY42NT1P)
END cover (L6EC)
X/Y00 X/Y10 X20 Y60
to to to to
X/Y0F X/Y1F X5F Y9F

Heater

CH1
Object to be controlled
Type-K thermocouple
0 to 1300

Heater

CH4
Object to be controlled
Type-K thermocouple
0 to 1300

● When using the L26CPU-BT, set the I/O assignment of the built-in CC-Link of the L26CPU-BT to X/YFE0 to X/YFFF so
that the I/O assignment be the same as that of the system configuration above.
● When the L60TCTT4BW or the L60TCRT4BW is used, the I/O assignment is the same as that of the system
configuration shown above.
• Slot 0: 16 intelligent points
• Slot 1: 64 input points
• Slot 2: 64 output points

274
 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING

(2) Programming condition

• Program example where the peak current suppression function is used
This program is designed to suppress the peak current by automatically changing the values of the upper
limit output limiter of CH1 to CH4 and dividing the timing of the transistor output into four timing. 10
When the peak current suppression When the peak current suppression
control function is not used control function is used
20s 20s
5s 5s 5s 5s

CH1 CH1
Transistor Transistor
output output

CH2 CH2
Transistor Transistor
output output

CH3 CH3
Transistor Transistor
output output

CH4 CH4
Transistor Transistor
output output

Since all the transistor outputs used Setting the transistor outputs to
turn on at the same time, the peak different ON timings can reduce
current becomes high. the peak current to that of one
transistor output.

Peak current Peak current

10.2.3 Standard control (peak current suppression function, simultaneous temperature rise function)
10.2 When Using the Module in a Standard System Configuration

275
 • Program example where the simultaneous temperature rise function is used
This program is designed to classify the CH1 and CH2 into group 1 and CH3 and CH4 into group 2 so that
the channels in each group reach the set values (SV) simultaneously.

Temperature process value (PV)

Matches temperature rise
completion time in each group
CH4 Set value (SV)

CH3 Set value (SV)

CH2 Set value (SV)

CH1 Set value (SV)

Temperature rise start Group 2 Group 1 Time

arrival point arrival point

(3) Wiring example

The following figure shows a wiring example.

-
Heater CH1
Operation input
+

Heater CH2 -
Operation input
+
-
Heater CH3 L1
Operation input L2 OUT1
+
L3 OUT2
- L4 OUT3
Heater CH4
COM- OUT4
Operation input + 24VDC COM
CH1 + NC
CH2 + IN1 +
CH1 Input CH1 - IN2 +
CH2 - IN1 -
CH2 Input
IN2 -
Cold junction CJ NC
temperature CJ
compensation CJ NC
resistor CH3 + CJ
CH4 + IN3 +
CH3 Input
CH3 - IN4 +

CH4 Input CH4 - IN3 -

IN4 -

276
 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING

(4) Switch Setting

Configure settings such as the input mode selection and the auto-setting at the input range change as follows.

Project window [Intelligent Function Module] [L60TCTT4] [Switch Setting] 10

10.2.3 Standard control (peak current suppression function, simultaneous temperature rise function)
10.2 When Using the Module in a Standard System Configuration
Set value
Item
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
Input Mode Selection Temperature Control Mode
Output Setting at CPU Stop
0: CLEAR 0: CLEAR 0: CLEAR 0: CLEAR
Error
Control Mode Selection 0: Standard Control
Temperature Control
Setting Change Rate Limiter
Mode Setting 0: Temperature Rise/Temperature Drop Batch Setting
Setting
Control Output Cycle Unit
0: 1s Cycle
Selection Setting
Auto-setting at Input Range Change 0: Disable
Sampling Cycle Selection 0: 500ms

277
 (5) Contents of the initial setting

Description
Item
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
2: ThermocoupleK 2: ThermocoupleK 2: ThermocoupleK 2: ThermocoupleK
Measured Measured Measured Measured
Input range
Temperature Range Temperature Range Temperature Range Temperature Range
(0 to 1300°C) (0 to 1300°C) (0 to 1300°C) (0 to 1300°C)
Set value (SV) setting 200°C 250°C 300°C 350°C
Unused channel setting 0: Used 0: Used 0: Used 0: Used
Control output cycle setting 20 s 20 s 20 s 20 s
Simultaneous temperature
1: Group 1 1: Group 1 2: Group 2 2: Group 2
rise group setting*1
Peak current suppression
1: Group 1 2: Group 2 3: Group 3 4: Group 4
control group setting*2
1: AT for 1: AT for 1: AT for 1: AT for
Simultaneous temperature
Simultaneous Simultaneous Simultaneous Simultaneous
rise AT mode selection*1
Temperature Rise Temperature Rise Temperature Rise Temperature Rise

*1 Configure this setting only when the simultaneous temperature rise function is used.
*2 Configure this setting only when the peak current suppression function is used.

(6) When using the parameter of an intelligent function module

(a) Devices used by a user

Device Description
X10 Module READY flag
L60TCTT4 (X10 to X1F)
X12 Error occurrence flag
X22 Error code reset instruction
X23 Operation mode setting instruction LX42C4 (X20 to X5F)
X24 Memory of PID constants read instruction
Y11 Setting/operation mode instruction
Y12 Error reset instruction
L60TCTT4 (Y10 to Y1F)
Y18 Set value backup instruction
Y1B Setting change instruction
Y60 to Y6F Error code output LY42NT1P (Y60 to Y9F)
D50 Error code Devices where data is written
D51 to D54 CH† Temperature process value (PV) by auto refresh
M20 to M23 CH† Read completion flag
M24 to M27 CH† Write completion flag

278
 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING

(b) Parameter setting

Set the contents of initial settings in the parameter.
1. Open the "Parameter" window.

Project window [Intelligent Function Module] [L60TCTT4] [Parameter] 10

2. Click to set items unnecessary for the mode set on Switch Setting to 0.

3. Set the parameter.

10.2.3 Standard control (peak current suppression function, simultaneous temperature rise function)
10.2 When Using the Module in a Standard System Configuration
Setting value
Item Description
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
2: ThermocoupleK 2: ThermocoupleK 2: ThermocoupleK 2: ThermocoupleK
Set the temperature sensor
Measured Measured Measured Measured
Input range used for the L60TC4 and
Temperature Range Temperature Range Temperature Range Temperature Range
the measurement range.
(0 to 1300°C) (0 to 1300°C) (0 to 1300°C) (0 to 1300°C)
Set value (SV) Set the target temperature
200°C 250°C 300°C 350°C
setting value of PID control.
Configure this setting when
the channels where the
temperature control is not
Unused channel
performed and the 0: Used 0: Used 0: Used 0: Used
setting
temperature sensor is not
connected are set to be
unused.
Control output
cycle Set the pulse cycle
setting/Heating (ON/OFF cycle) of the 20 s 20 s 20 s 20 s
control output transistor output.
cycle setting
Set the group to perform
Simultaneous
the simultaneous
temperature rise 1: Group 1 1: Group 1 2: Group 2 2: Group 2
*1
temperature rise function
group setting
for each channel.

279
 Setting value
Item Description
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
Set the target channels for
Peak current
the peak current
suppression
suppression function and 1: Group 1 2: Group 2 3: Group 3 4: Group 4
control group
the gap of the control output
setting*2
cycles between channels.
Simultaneous
1: AT for 1: AT for 1: AT for 1: AT for
temperature rise Set the mode of the auto
Simultaneous Simultaneous Simultaneous Simultaneous
AT mode tuning.
Temperature Rise Temperature Rise Temperature Rise Temperature Rise
selection*1
*1 Configure this setting only when the simultaneous temperature rise function is used.
*2 Configure this setting only when the peak current suppression function is used.

280
 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING

(c) Auto refresh setting

Set the device to be automatically refreshed.

Project window [Intelligent Function Module] [L60TCTT4] [Auto_Refresh]

10

Setting value
Item Description
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

10.2.3 Standard control (peak current suppression function, simultaneous temperature rise function)
10.2 When Using the Module in a Standard System Configuration
An error code or alarm code is
Error code D50
stored.
The detected temperature
Temperature
value where sensor correction D51 D52 D53 D54
process value (PV)
was performed is stored.

(d) Writing parameter of an intelligent function module

Write the set parameter to the CPU module. Then reset the CPU module or turn off and on the power supply of
the programmable controller.

[Online] [Write to PLC...]

or Power OFF ON

281
 (e) Performing auto tuning
Set the "Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants" to "ON" and perform the auto tuning.

[Tool] [Intelligent Function Module Tool] [Temperature Control Module]

[Auto Tuning...] [L60TCTT4]

(f) Program example where the peak current suppression function or the simultaneous
temperature rise function is used
• Program that changes the setting/operation mode
This program is the same as that of when it is used as a temperature input module. ( Page 259,
Section 10.2.1 (6) (e))

• Program that reads the PID constants from the non-volatile memory

CH1 Memory's PID constant read

instruction: With instruction

CH2 Memory's PID constant read

instruction: With instruction

CH3 Memory's PID constant read

instruction: With instruction
CH4 Memory's PID constant read
instruction: With instruction
Read bit data from b7 to b0 of Memory's
PID constant read/write completion flag
to M20 to M27.
CH1 Memory's PID constant read
instruction: Without instruction

CH2 Memory's PID constant read

instruction: Without instruction

CH3 Memory's PID constant read

instruction: Without instruction

CH4 Memory's PID constant read

instruction: Without instruction

• Program that reads an error code

This program is the same as that of when it is used as a temperature input module. ( Page 259,
Section 10.2.1 (6) (e))

282
 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING

(7) Program example of when not using the parameter of an intelligent function
module

(a) Devices used by a user 10

Device Description
X10 Module READY flag
X11 Setting/operation mode status
X12 Error occurrence flag
X13 Hardware error flag L60TCTT4 (X10 to X1F)
X14 to X17 CH† Auto tuning status
X18 Back-up of the set value completion flag
X1B Setting change completion flag
X20 Set value write instruction
X21 Auto tuning execute instruction
X22 Error code reset instruction LX42C4 (X20 to X5F)
X23 Operation mode setting instruction
X24 Memory of PID constants read instruction
Y11 Setting/operation mode instruction
Y12 Error reset instruction
Y14 to Y17 CH† Auto tuning instruction L60TCTT4 (Y10 to Y1F)
Y18 Set value backup instruction
Y1B Setting change instruction
Y60 to Y6F Error code output LY42NT1P (Y60 to Y9F)
D50 Error code

10.2.3 Standard control (peak current suppression function, simultaneous temperature rise function)
10.2 When Using the Module in a Standard System Configuration
D51 to D54 CH† Temperature process value (PV)
M0 For writing set value 0
M1 For writing set value 1
M2 For writing set value 2
M10 to M13 CH† Auto tuning completion flag
M20 to M23 CH† Read completion flag
M24 to M27 CH† Write completion flag

283
 (b) Program example where the peak current suppression function is used
• Program that changes the setting/operation mode
This is the same as that of when it is used as a temperature input module. ( Page 259, Section 10.2.1
(6) (e))

• Initial setting program

Flag 0 for setting value write: ON

Flag 1 for setting value write: ON

CH1 Unused channel setting: Used

CH2 Unused channel setting: Used

CH3 Unused channel setting: Used

CH4 Unused channel setting: Used

CH1 Input range: 2

CH2 Input range: 2

CH3 Input range: 2

CH4 Input range: 2

CH1 Control output cycle setting: 20s

CH2 Control output cycle setting: 20s

CH3 Control output cycle setting: 20s

CH4 Control output cycle setting: 20s

Peak current suppression control
group setting:
CH1: Group 1, CH2: Group 2
CH3: Group 3, CH4: Group 4
Setting change instruction: ON

Setting change instruction: OFF

Flag 2 for setting value write: ON

CH1 Set value (SV) setting: 200

CH2 Set value (SV) setting: 250

CH3 Set value (SV) setting: 300

CH4 Set value (SV) setting: 350

Flag 1 for setting value write: OFF

Flag 2 for setting value write: OFF

284
 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING

• Program that executes the auto tuning and backs up the PID constants in the non-volatile memory

CH1 Auto tuning instruction: ON

CH2 Auto tuning instruction: ON

10
CH3 Auto tuning instruction: ON

CH4 Auto tuning instruction: ON

CH1 Auto tuning instruction: OFF

CH1 Auto tuning completion flag: ON

CH2 Auto tuning instruction: OFF

CH2 Auto tuning completion flag: ON

CH3 Auto tuning instruction: OFF

CH3 Auto tuning completion flag: ON

CH4 Auto tuning instruction: OFF

CH4 Auto tuning completion flag: ON

Setting value backup instruction: ON

Setting value backup instruction: OFF

CH Auto tuning completion flag: OFF

• Program that reads the PID constants from the non-volatile memory
This program is the same as that of when the parameter of the intelligent function module is used.
( Page 282, Section 10.2.3 (6) (f))

10.2.3 Standard control (peak current suppression function, simultaneous temperature rise function)
10.2 When Using the Module in a Standard System Configuration
• Program that reads an error code and the temperature process value (PV)

Read an error code to D50.

Output data read from an error code

to Y60 to Y6F.

Error reset instruction: ON

Error reset instruction: OFF

Read CH Temperature process value

(PV) to D51 to D54.

285
 (c) Program example where the simultaneous temperature rise function is used
• Program that changes the setting/operation mode
This program is the same as that of when it is used as a temperature input module. ( Page 259,
Section 10.2.1 (6) (e))

• Initial setting program

Flag 0 for setting value write: ON

Flag 1 for setting value write: ON

CH1 Unused channel setting: Used

CH2 Unused channel setting: Used

CH3 Unused channel setting: Used

CH4 Unused channel setting: Used

CH1 Input range: 2

CH2 Input range: 2

CH3 Input range: 2

CH4 Input range: 2

CH1 Control output cycle setting: 20s

CH2 Control output cycle setting: 20s

CH3 Control output cycle setting: 20s

CH4 Control output cycle setting: 20s

CH1 Simultaneous temperature rise group

setting: Group 1

CH2 Simultaneous temperature rise group

setting: Group 1

CH3 Simultaneous temperature rise group

setting: Group 2

CH4 Simultaneous temperature rise group

setting: Group 2
CH1 Simultaneous temperature rise AT
mode selection: Simultaneous temperature
rise AT
CH2 Simultaneous temperature rise AT
mode selection: Simultaneous temperature
rise AT
CH3 Simultaneous temperature rise AT
mode selection: Simultaneous temperature
rise AT
CH4 Simultaneous temperature rise AT
mode selection: Simultaneous temperature
rise AT

Setting change instruction: ON

Setting change instruction: OFF

Flag 2 for setting value write: ON

CH1 Set value (SV) setting: 200

CH2 Set value (SV) setting: 250

CH3 Set value (SV) setting: 300

CH4 Set value (SV) setting: 350

Flag 1 for setting value write: OFF

Flag 2 for setting value write: OFF

286
 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING

• Program that executes the auto tuning and backs up the PID constants in the non-volatile memory
This program is the same as that of when the peak current suppression function is used. ( Page 284,
Section 10.2.3 (7) (b))

• Program that reads the PID constants from the non-volatile memory 10
This program is the same as that of when the parameter of the intelligent function module is used.
( Page 282, Section 10.2.3 (6) (f))

• Program that reads an error code

This program is the same as that of when the peak current suppression function is used. ( Page 284,
Section 10.2.3 (7) (b))

10.2.3 Standard control (peak current suppression function, simultaneous temperature rise function)
10.2 When Using the Module in a Standard System Configuration

287
10.2.4 When performing the heating-cooling control

This section describes the program example to perform the heating-cooling control.

(1) System configuration

The following figure shows the system configuration example to perform the heating-cooling control.

Power supply module (L61P)

CPU module (L02CPU)
Temperature control module (L60TCTT4)
Input module (LX42C4)
Output module (LY42NT1P)
END cover (L6EC)
X/Y00 X/Y10 X20 Y60
to to to to
X/Y0F X/Y1F X5F Y9F

Cooling
equipment

Heater

Object to be controlled
Type-K thermocouple
0 to 1300

● When using the L26CPU-BT, set the I/O assignment of the built-in CC-Link of the L26CPU-BT to X/YFE0 to X/YFFF so
that the I/O assignment be the same as that of the system configuration above.
● When the L60TCTT4BW or the L60TCRT4BW is used, the I/O assignment is the same as that of the system
configuration shown above.
• Slot 0: 16 intelligent points
• Slot 1: 64 input points
• Slot 2: 64 output points

288
 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING

(2) Program conditions

This program is designed to perform the heating-cooling control by using the temperature input of CH1.

(3) Wiring example 10

The following figure shows a wiring example.

-
Heater operation
input L1H
+
L1C OUT1
- OUT2
Cooling equipment
OUT3
operation input COM- OUT4
+
24VDC COM
NC
IN1 +
IN2 +
CH1 Input IN1 -
IN2 -
Cold junction CJ NC
temperature CJ
compensation CJ NC
resistor CJ
IN3 +
IN4 +
IN3 -
IN4 -

10.2.4 When performing the heating-cooling control

10.2 When Using the Module in a Standard System Configuration

289
 (4) Switch Setting
Configure settings such as the input mode selection and the auto-setting at input range change as follows.

Project window [Intelligent Function Module] [L60TCTT4] [Switch Setting]

Setting value
Item
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
Input Mode Selection Temperature Control Mode
Output Setting at CPU Stop
0: CLEAR 0: CLEAR 0: CLEAR 0: CLEAR
Error
Control Mode Selection 3: Mix Control (Normal Mode)
Temperature Control
Setting Change Rate Limiter
Mode Setting 0: Temperature Rise/Temperature Drop Batch Setting
Setting
Control Output Cycle Unit
0: 1s Cycle
Selection Setting
Auto-setting at Input Range Change 0: Disable
Sampling Cycle Selection 0: 500ms

290
 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING

(5) Contents of the initial setting

Description
Item
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 10
2: ThermocoupleK 2: ThermocoupleK 2: ThermocoupleK 2: ThermocoupleK
Measured Measured Measured Measured
Input range
Temperature Range Temperature Range Temperature Range Temperature Range
(0 to 1300°C) (0 to 1300°C) (0 to 1300°C) (0 to 1300°C)
Set value (SV) setting 200°C 0°C 0°C 0°C
Unused channel setting 0: Used 0: Used 1: Unused 1: Unused
Heating control output cycle
30 s 0s 30 s 30 s
setting
Cooling method setting 0: Air Cooled 0: Air Cooled 0: Air Cooled 0: Air Cooled
Cooling control output cycle
30 s 0s 30 s 30 s
setting
Overlap/Dead band setting -0.3 % 0.0 % 0.0 % 0.0 %

(6) When using the parameter of an intelligent function module

(a) Devices used by a user

Device Description
X10 Module READY flag
L60TCTT4 (X10 to X1F)
X12 Error occurrence flag
X22 Error code reset instruction
X23 Operation mode setting instruction LX42C4 (X20 to X5F)

10.2.4 When performing the heating-cooling control

10.2 When Using the Module in a Standard System Configuration
X24 Memory of PID constants read instruction
Y11 Setting/operation mode instruction
Y12 Error reset instruction
L60TCTT4 (Y10 to Y1F)
Y18 Set value backup instruction
Y1B Setting change instruction
Y60 to Y6F Error code output LY42NT1P (Y60 to Y9F)
D50 Error code Devices where data is written
D51 CH1 Temperature process value (PV) by auto refresh
M20 to M23 CH† Read completion flag
M24 to M27 CH† Write completion flag

291
 (b) Parameter setting
Set the contents of initial settings in the parameter.
1. Open the "Parameter" window.

Project window [Intelligent Function Module] [L60TCTT4] [Parameter]

2. Click to set items unnecessary for the mode set on Switch Setting to 0.
3. Set the parameter.

Setting value
Item Description
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
Set the temperature 2: ThermocoupleK 2: ThermocoupleK 2: ThermocoupleK 2: ThermocoupleK
sensor used for the Measured Measured Measured Measured
Input range
L60TC4 and the Temperature Range Temperature Range Temperature Range Temperature Range
measurement range. (0 to 1300°C) (0 to 1300°C) (0 to 1300°C) (0 to 1300°C)
Set the target
Set value (SV) setting temperature value of 200°C 0°C 0°C 0°C
PID control.
Configure this setting
when the channels
where the temperature
Unused channel
control is not performed 0: Used 0: Used 1: Unused 1: Unused
setting
and the temperature
sensor is not connected
are set to be unused.
Control output cycle
Set the pulse cycle
setting/Heating
(ON/OFF cycle) of the 30 s 0s 30 s 30 s
control output cycle
transistor output.
setting
Set the method for the
Cooling method
cooling control in the 0: Air Cooled 0: Air Cooled 0: Air Cooled 0: Air Cooled
setting
heating-cooling control.

292
 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING

Setting value
Item Description
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
Set the pulse cycle
Cooling control
(ON/OFF cycle) of the 30 s 0s 30 s 30 s
output cycle setting
transistor output.
Configure the
10
Overlap/dead band
overlap/dead band -0.3 % 0.0 % 0.0 % 0.0 %
setting
setting.

10.2.4 When performing the heating-cooling control

10.2 When Using the Module in a Standard System Configuration

293
 (c) Auto refresh setting
Set the device to be automatically refreshed.

Project window [Intelligent Function Module] [L60TCTT4] [Auto_Refresh]

Setting value
Item Description
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
An error code or alarm code is
Error code D50
stored.
The detected temperature
Temperature
value where sensor correction D51 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
process value (PV)
is performed is stored.

(d) Writing parameter of an intelligent function module

Write the set parameter to the CPU module. Then reset the CPU module or turn off and on the power supply of
the programmable controller.

[Online] [Write to PLC...]

or Power OFF ON

294
 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING

(e) Performing auto tuning

Set the "Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants" to "ON" and perform the auto tuning.

[Tool] [Intelligent Function Module Tool] [Temperature Control Module]

[Auto Tuning...] "L60TCTT4" 10

(f) Program example

• Program that changes the setting/operation mode
This program is the same as that of when it is used as a temperature input module. ( Page 259,

10.2.4 When performing the heating-cooling control

10.2 When Using the Module in a Standard System Configuration
Section 10.2.1 (6) (e))

• Program that reads the PID constants from the non-volatile memory
This program is used when the module is in the standard control (such as auto tuning, self-tuning, and
error code read). ( Page 270, Section 10.2.2 (6) (f))

• Program that reads an error code

This program is the same as that of when it is used as a temperature input module. ( Page 259,
Section 10.2.1 (6) (e))

295
 (7) Program example of when not using the parameter of an intelligent function
module

(a) Devices used by a user

Device Description
X10 Module READY flag
X11 Setting/operation mode status
X12 Error occurrence flag
X13 Hardware error flag L60TCTT4 (X10 to X1F)
X14 CH1 Auto tuning status
X18 Back-up of the set value completion flag
X1B Setting change completion flag
X20 Set value write instruction
X21 Auto tuning execute instruction
X22 Error code reset instruction LX42C4 (X20 to X5F)
X23 Operation mode setting instruction
X24 Memory of PID constants read instruction
Y11 Setting/operation mode instruction
Y12 Error reset instruction
Y14 CH1 Auto tuning instruction L60TCTT4 (Y10 to Y1F)
Y18 Set value backup instruction
Y1B Setting change instruction
Y60 to Y6F Error code output LY42NT1P (Y60 to Y9F)
D50 Error code
D51 CH1 Temperature process value (PV)
M0 For writing set value 0
M1 For writing set value 1
M2 For writing set value 2
M10 CH1 Auto tuning completion flag
M20 to M23 CH† Read completion flag
M24 to M27 CH† Write completion flag

296
 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING

(b) Program example

• Program that changes the setting/operation mode
This program is the same as that of when it is used as a temperature input module. ( Page 259,
Section 10.2.1 (6) (e))
10
• Initial setting program

Flag 0 for setting value write: ON

Flag 1 for setting value write: ON

CH1 Unused channel setting: Used

CH3 Unused channel setting: Unused

CH4 Unused channel setting: Unused

CH1 Input range: 2

CH1 Heating control output cycle
setting: 30s
CH1 Cooling control output cycle
setting: 30s
CH1 Overlap/dead band setting
: -0.3%
Cooling method setting: Air cooling
(cooling capacity: low)

Setting change instruction: ON

Setting change instruction: OFF

Flag 2 for setting value write: ON

CH1 Set value (SV) setting: 200

10.2.4 When performing the heating-cooling control

10.2 When Using the Module in a Standard System Configuration
Flag 1 for setting value write: OFF

Flag 2 for setting value write: OFF

• Program that executes the auto tuning and backs up the PID constants in the non-volatile memory
This program is used when the module is in the standard control (such as auto tuning, self-tuning, and
error code read). ( Page 272, Section 10.2.2 (7) (b))

• Program that reads the PID constants from the non-volatile memory
This program is used when the module is in the standard control (such as auto tuning, self-tuning, and
error code read). ( Page 270, Section 10.2.2 (6) (f))

• Program that reads an error code

Read an error code to D50.

Output data read from an error code

to Y60 to Y6F.

Error reset instruction: ON

Error reset instruction: OFF

Read CH1 Temperature process

value (PV) to D51.

297
10.3 When the Module is Connected to the Head Module

This section describes the program example of when the module is connected to the head module.

(1) System configuration

The following figure shows the system configuration example of when the module is connected to the head
module.

Power supply module (Q62P) Power supply module (L61P)

CPU module (Q10UDHCPU) Head module (LJ72GF15-T2)
Master/local module (QJ71GF11-T2) Temperature control module (L60TCTT4)
Input module (QX42) END cover (L6EC)
Output module (QY42P)

X/Y0 X/Y20 X/Y60 X/Y1000

to to to to
X/Y1F X/Y5F X/Y9F X/Y100F

Master station (Station No.0)

Ethernet cable (1000BASE-T) Heater
Network No.1

Intelligent device station (Station No.1) Object to be controlled

Type-K thermocouple
0 to 1300

When the L60TCTT4BW or the L60TCRT4BW is used, the I/O assignment is the same as that of the system configuration
shown above.
• Slot 0: 16 intelligent points
• Slot 1: 64 input points
• Slot 2: 64 output points

(2) Programming condition

This program is designed to read the temperatures measured by the thermocouple (K type, 0 to 1300°C)
connected to CH1.
An error code can be read and reset.

298
 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING

(3) Wiring example

The wiring is the same as the that of when the module is in the standard control (such as auto tuning, self-tuning,
and error code read). ( Page 264, Section 10.2.2 (3))
10
(4) Switch Setting
Configure settings on the intelligent device station. ( Page 302, Section 10.3 (7))

(5) Contents of the initial setting

Description
Item
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
2: ThermocoupleK 2: ThermocoupleK 2: ThermocoupleK 2: ThermocoupleK
Measured Measured Measured Measured
Input range
Temperature Range Temperature Range Temperature Range Temperature Range
(0 to 1300°C) (0 to 1300°C) (0 to 1300°C) (0 to 1300°C)
Set value (SV) setting 200°C 0°C 0°C 0°C
Unused channel setting 0: Used 1: Unused 1: Unused 1: Unused
Upper limit setting limiter 400°C 1300°C 1300°C 1300°C
Lower limit setting limiter 0°C 0°C 0°C 0°C
1: Upper Limit Input
Alert 1 mode setting 0: Not Warning 0: Not Warning 0: Not Warning
Alert
Alert set value 1 500°C 0°C 0°C 0°C

(6) Setting on the master station

10.3 When the Module is Connected to the Head Module

1. Create a project on GX Works2.
Select "QCPU (Q mode)" for "PLC Series:" and select the CPU module to be used for "PLC Type:".

[Project] [New...]

299
 2. Display the network parameter setting window and configure the setting as follows.

Project window [Parameter] [Network Parameter]

[Ethernet/CC IE/MELSECNET]

3. Display the network range assignment setting window and configure the setting as follows.

Project window [Parameter] [Network Parameter]

[Ethernet/CC IE/MELSECNET]

300
 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING

4. Display the refresh parameter setting window and configure the setting as follows.

Project window [Parameter] [Network Parameter]

[Ethernet/CC IE/MELSECNET]
10

5. Write the set parameter to the CPU module on the master station. Then reset the CPU module or
turn off and on the power supply of the programmable controller.

[Online] [Write to PLC...]

or Power OFF ON

10.3 When the Module is Connected to the Head Module

301
 (7) Setting on the intelligent device station
1. Create a project on GX Works2.
Select "LCPU" for "PLC Series:" and select "LJ72GF15-T2" for "PLC Type:".

[Project] [New...]

2. Display the PLC parameter setting window and configure the setting as follows.

Project window [Parameter] [PLC Parameter] "Communication Head Setting"

3. Add the L60TCTT4 to the project on GX Works2.

Project window [Intelligent Function Module] Right-click [New Module...]

302
 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING

4. Display the L60TCTT4 Switch Setting window and configure the setting as follows.

Project window [Intelligent Function Module] [L60TCTT4] [Switch Setting]

10

Setting value
Item
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

10.3 When the Module is Connected to the Head Module

Input Mode Selection Temperature Control Mode
Output Setting at CPU Stop
0: CLEAR 0: CLEAR 0: CLEAR 0: CLEAR
Error
Control Mode Selection 0: Standard Control
Temperature Control
Setting Change Rate Limiter
Mode Setting 0: Temperature Rise/Temperature Drop Batch Setting
Setting
Control Output Cycle Unit
0: 1s Cycle
Selection Setting
Auto-setting at Input Range Change 0: Disable
Sampling Cycle Selection 0: 500ms

303
 5. Display the L60TCTT4 initial setting window, click , and configure the setting
as follows.

Project window [Intelligent Function Module] [L60TCTT4] [Parameter]

Setting value
Item Description
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
2: ThermocoupleK 2: ThermocoupleK 2: ThermocoupleK 2: ThermocoupleK
Set the temperature sensor Measured Measured Measured Measured
Input range used for the L60TC4 and the Temperature Temperature Temperature Temperature
measurement range. Range Range Range Range
(0 to 1300°C) (0 to 1300°C) (0 to 1300°C) (0 to 1300°C)
Set value (SV) Set the target temperature
200°C 0°C 0°C 0°C
setting value of PID control.
Configure this setting when the
channels where the
Unused channel temperature control is not
0: Used 1: Unused 1: Unused 1: Unused
setting performed and the temperature
sensor is not connected are set
to be unused.
Upper limit setting Set the upper limit of the set
400°C 1300°C 1300°C 1300°C
limiter value (SV).
Lower limit setting Set the lower limit of the set
0°C 0°C 0°C 0°C
limiter value (SV).
1: Upper Limit
Alert 1 mode setting Set the alert mode. 0: Not Warning 0: Not Warning 0: Not Warning
Input Alert
Set the temperature where
CH† Alert 1 (b8 of Un\G5 to
Alert set value 1 500°C ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
Un\G8) turns on depending on
the selected alert mode.

304
 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING

6. Display the L60TCTT4 auto refresh setting window and configure the setting as follows.

Project window [Intelligent Function Module] [L60TCTT4] Right-click [Auto_Refresh]

10

Setting value
Item Description
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
An error code or alarm code is

10.3 When the Module is Connected to the Head Module

Error code W1050
stored.
The detected temperature
Temperature
value where sensor correction W1051 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
process value (PV)
is performed is stored.

7. Write the set parameter to the head module. Then reset the head module or turn off and on the
power supply.

[Online] [Write to PLC...]

or Power OFF ON

305
 8. Perform auto tuning.
Set the "Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants" to "ON" and perform the auto tuning.

[Tool] [Intelligent Function Module Tool] [Temperature Control Module]

[Auto Tuning...] "L60TCTT4"

(a) Devices used by a user

Device Description
X22 Error code reset instruction
X23 Operation mode setting instruction LX42C4 (X20 to X5F)
X24 Memory of PID constants read instruction
X1000 Module READY flag
L60TCTT4 (X1000 to X100F)
X1002 Error occurrence flag
Y60 to Y6F Error code output LY42NT1P (Y60 to Y9F)
Y1001 Setting/operation mode instruction
Y1002 Error reset instruction
L60TCTT4 (Y1000 to Y100F)
Y1008 Set value backup instruction
Y100B Setting change instruction
D9 Write data storage device using Z(P).REMTO instruction (for non-volatile memory read of PID constants)
D10 Read data storage device using Z(P).REMFR instruction (for non-volatile memory read of PID constants)
D11 Write data storage device using Z(P).REMTO instruction (for non-volatile memory read of PID constants)
M0 Master module status check device (for MC and MCR instructions)
M300 to M305 CH1 Memory of PID constants read flag
M310, M311 Z(P).REMTO instruction completion/result device
M312, M313 Z(P).REMFR instruction completion/result device
M314, M315 Z(P).REMTO instruction completion/result device
W1050 Error code Devices where data is written
W1051 CH1 Temperature process value (PV) by auto refresh
SB49 Data link status (own station)
SWB0.0 Data link status (each station) (station number 1)

306
 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING

(b) Program example

Write the program to the CPU module on the master station.

• Program that checks the data link status of the head module
10
Check the data link status
of the head module*1.

*1 Add the following MCR instruction to the end of the program.

• Program that changes the setting/operation mode

Change to the setting mode or

the operation mode.

• Program that reads the PID constants from the non-volatile memory

CH1 Memory's PID constant read

instruction: With instruction

10.3 When the Module is Connected to the Head Module

Read Memory's PID constant read/write
completion flag to D10.

CH1 Memory's PID constant read

instruction: Without instruction

• Program that reads an error code

Output an error code to Y60 to Y6F.

Error reset instruction: ON

Error reset instruction: OFF

307
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
This chapter describes the causes and corrective actions to take when a problem occurs in the L60TC4.

11.1 Before Troubleshooting

Check whether any of the following LEDs are on.

• The POWER LED on the power supply module
• The MODE LED on the CPU module or head module
If both are off, proceed with CPU module or head module troubleshooting.
MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)
MELSEC-L CC-Link IE Field Network Head Module User's Manual

11.2 Troubleshooting Procedure

This section describes how to find problem causes and take corrective action.
Use GX Works2 to find problem causes and take corrective action.

(1) Procedure

1. Connect GX Works2 to the CPU module to display

the "System Monitor" window.

[Diagnostics] [System Monitor...]

↓
2. After confirming that an error is displayed on the

L60TC4, select the L60TC4 and click .

If an error LED is ON on a module other than the

L60TC4, refer to the user's manual for the module
and take corrective action.

↓
(To the next page)

308
 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

(From the previous page)

↓

3. Click to open the "Module's Detailed

Information" window.
Check the error description and the corrective
action to take under "Error and Solution".
4. When the error description cannot be confirmed
after doing the operation above, proceed with the
11
following troubleshooting.
• Checks using LEDs ( Page 310, Section 11.3)
• Checks using input signals ( Page 312, Section
11.4)

11.2 Troubleshooting Procedure

309
11.3 Checks Using LEDs

This section describes troubleshooting using LEDs.

11.3.1 When the RUN LED flashes or turns off

Check Item Action

Check that the supply voltage of the power supply module is within the
Is the power supplied?
rated range.
Calculate the current consumption of the installed CPU module, I/O
Is the capacity of power supply module enough? module, and intelligent function module to check whether power supply
capacity is sufficient.
• Reset the CPU module or turn on the power supply again.
Has a watchdog timer error occurred?
• Replace the L60TC4.
Is the intelligent function module switch setting value outside Set the switch setting value of the intelligent function module to the value
the setting range? within the setting range.

11.3.2 When the ERR. LED turns on or flashes

(1) When turning on

Check Item Action

Is the intelligent function module switch setting outside the Set the switch setting value of the intelligent function module to the value
setting range? within the setting range.
Is the cold junction temperature compensation resistor
disconnected or loose? (The L60TCTT4 and L60TCTT4BW Properly connect the cold junction temperature compensation resistor.
only)
A hardware failure occurred in the L60TC4.
Others Please consult your local Mitsubishi system service, service center, or
representative, explaining a detailed description of the problem.

(2) When flashing

Check Item Action

Check the error code list ( Page 315, Section 11.6) and take actions
Has an error occurred?
described.

310
 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

11.3.3 When the ALM LED turns on or flashes

(1) When turning on

Check Item Action

Check CH† Alert definition (Un\G5 to Un\G8) and take the appropriate
Is CH† Alert occurrence flag (XnC to XnF) on?
corrective action. ( Page 336, Appendix 2 (3)) 11
(2) When flashing

Check Item Action

Change the setting of CH† Input range (Un\G32, Un\G64, Un\G96,
Has the temperature process value (PV) exceeded the
Un\G128) to a setting in the temperature measurement range to be used.
temperature measurement range set as the input range?
( Page 345, Appendix 2 (12))
Set the channel where no temperature sensor is connected to unused in
Is there a channel where no temperature sensor is
CH† Unused channel setting (Un\G61, Un\G93, Un\G125, Un\G157).
connected?
( Page 376, Appendix 2 (35))
Check for a load disconnection, externally-operable device failure, and
Has a loop disconnection been detected?
sensor disconnection.

11.3.3 When the ALM LED turns on or flashes

11.3 Checks Using LEDs

311
11.4 Checks Using Input Signals

This section describes troubleshooting using input signals.

11.4.1 When Module READY flag (Xn0) does not turn on

Check Item Action

• Reset the CPU module or turn on the power supply again.
Has a watchdog timer error occurred?
• Replace the L60TC4.
Refer to the user's manual of the used CPU module and take corrective
Has an error occurred in the programmable controller?
action.

11.4.2 When Error occurrence flag (Xn2) is on

Check Item Action

Check the error code list ( Page 315, Section 11.6) and take actions
Has an error occurred?
described.

11.4.3 When Hardware error flag (Xn3) is on

Check Item Action

Is the cold junction temperature compensation resistor
disconnected or loose? (The L60TCTT4 and L60TCTT4BW Properly connect the cold junction temperature compensation resistor.
only)
A hardware failure occurred in the L60TC4.
Others Please consult your local Mitsubishi system service, service center, or
representative, explaining a detailed description of the problem.

11.4.4 When the auto tuning does not start (CH† Auto tuning status
(Xn4 to Xn7) does not turn on)

Check Item Action

Refer to the "Auto tuning function" section ( Page 141, Section 8.2.7)
Have the auto tuning start conditions been met?
and confirm that all conditions have been met.
Check the conditions that signify an abnormal end for auto tuning
( Page 150, Section 8.2.7 (7)) to see whether it has ended
Has auto tuning ended abnormally?
abnormally. If it has ended abnormally, remove the cause. Then execute
auto tuning again.

312
 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

11.4.5 When the auto tuning does not complete (CH† Auto tuning
status (Xn4 to Xn7) stays on and does not turn off)

Check Item Action

Set CH† Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants
Are b4 to b7 of Memory of PID constants read/write (Un\G63, Un\G95, Un\G127, Un\G159) to Disable (0). ( Page 378,
completion flag (Un\G31) set to 1 (ON)? Appendix 2 (37)) 11
To back up the setting, turn off and on Set value backup instruction (Yn8).
Set CH† Memory of PID constants read instruction (Un\G62, Un\G94,
Is CH† Memory of PID constants read instruction (Un\G62,
Un\G126, Un\G158) to Not requested (0). ( Page 377, Appendix 2
Un\G94, Un\G126, Un\G158) set to Requested (1)?
(36))
Has the set value (SV) been set correctly? (Is the
manipulated value (MV) still 0% because the set value (SV) Set the set value (SV) to the desired value.
is small?)

11.4.6 When the self-tuning does not start (CH† Auto tuning status
(Xn4 to Xn7) does not turn on)

Check Item Action

Refer to the "Self-tuning function" section ( Page 175, Section 8.2.15)
Have the self-tuning start conditions been met?
and confirm that all conditions have been met.
Check the conditions that signify an abnormal end for self-tuning
( Page 183, Section 8.2.15 (8)) to see whether it has ended
Has self-tuning ended abnormally? abnormally. If it has ended abnormally, remove the cause. If the buffer
memory setting was changed during self-tuning, restore the value to the

11.4.5 When the auto tuning does not complete (CH† Auto tuning status (Xn4 to Xn7) stays on and
11.4 Checks Using Input Signals
one prior to change.

does not turn off)

11.4.7 When Back-up of the set value fail flag (XnA) is on

Check Item Action

Turn off and on Set value backup instruction (Yn8) and write the setting to
the non-volatile memory.
Has a backup to non-volatile memory failed? When writing fails again, a hardware is in failure. Please consult your local
Mitsubishi system service, service center, or representative, explaining a
detailed description of the problem.

11.4.8 When CH† Alert occurrence flag (XnC to XnF) is on

Check Item Action

• Check CH† Alert definition (Un\G5 to Un\G8) and take the appropriate
Has the temperature process value (PV) exceeded the alert
corrective action. ( Page 336, Appendix 2 (3))
set value range?
• Correct the alert set value. ( Page 358, Appendix 2 (18))
• Check CH† Alert definition (Un\G5 to Un\G8) and take the appropriate
Has a disconnection been detected?
corrective action. ( Page 336, Appendix 2 (3))

313
11.5 Troubleshooting by Symptom

This section describes troubleshooting using the wiring resistance values of thermocouples.

11.5.1 When the temperature process value (PV) is abnormal

Check Item Action

• Check the thermocouple wiring resistance value and check whether a
difference in the temperatures was caused by the wiring resistance.
( Page 36, Section 3.2.2 (1))
Is the thermocouple wiring resistance value too high?
• Use the sensor compensation function to correct the difference in the
temperatures caused by the wiring resistance. ( Page 223, Section
8.3.2 (2))

314
 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

11.6 Error Code List

When the L60TC4 error occurs during data write to the CPU module or during data read from the CPU module, one of
the following error codes is stored in Error code (Un\G0).
In addition, the error occurred is notified to the CPU module.

Error code
Cause Operation at error occurrence Action
11
(hexadecimal)
• Check that the terminal block or
the cold junction temperature
compensation resistor is not
disconnected or loose.
The operation varies depending on the • Replace the L60TC4.
0001H Hardware error
symptom. • Please consult your local
Mitsubishi system service, service
center, or representative,
explaining a detailed description of
the problem.
• The data written is retained. • Return the value to 0 and turn off,
• When data is written to multiple system on, and off Error reset instruction
Data (other than 0) is being
†††2H*1 areas, the address with the smallest number (Yn2).
written to the system area*2. of the buffer memory area where an error • Delete the program that is writing
was detected is stored.*5 data to the system area.
• Follow the instructions below for
error reset.
1. Change the mode to the setting
mode.
2. Set the correct value and turn

11.6 Error Code List

• The data written is retained. off, on, and off Setting change
Data is being written in the
• When data is written to multiple system instruction (YnB).
operation mode*4 to the area
†††3H*1 areas, the address with the smallest number 3. Turn off, on, and off Error reset
where data can be written only
of the buffer memory area where an error instruction (Yn2).
in the setting mode*3.
was detected is stored.*5 • If switching from the operation
mode to the setting mode, check
that PID continuation flag
(Un\G169) is set to Stop (0), and
turn on and off Setting/operation
mode instruction (Yn1).
• The data written is retained.
• If temperature, time, or percentage settings
exceed upper limit value/lower limit value,
Data outside the settable change the data within those values.
†††4H*1 Set data within the range.
range is being written. • When data is written to multiple system
areas, the address with the smallest number
of the buffer memory area where an error
was detected is stored.*5
• The data written is retained.
• Change the setting to an allowable value for
The setting of the upper/lower
the upper/lower limit value. Set the value where the upper limit
limit value output limiter or the
†††5H*1 • When data is written to multiple system value is greater than the lower limit
upper/lower limit setting limiter
areas, the address with the smallest number value.
is invalid.
of the buffer memory area where an error
was detected is stored.*5

315
 Error code
Cause Operation at error occurrence Action
(hexadecimal)
• The data written is ignored.
The setting value is being
• The setting cannot be changed until an error After turning off, on, and off Error
changed while Default setting
†††6H*1 reset is performed. reset instruction (Yn2), change the
registration instruction (Yn9)
• The content of Error code (Un\G0) does not setting value.
was on.
change even if another write error occurs.
• Enter the temperature within the
• The data written is retained.
input range.
• Use the data of before the setting.
• Set the values so that the sensor
• When data is written to multiple system
two-point correction offset value
areas, the address with the smallest number
(measured value) is smaller than
of the buffer memory area where an error
The sensor two-point the sensor two-point correction
†††7H*1 was detected is stored.*5
correction setting is invalid. gain value (measured value) and
• When both the offset value and gain value
the sensor two-point correction
are within the input range and the offset
offset value (corrected value) is
value is greater than or equal to the gain
smaller than the sensor two-point
value, the gain value address is stored as
correction gain value (corrected
the address where the error occurred.
value).
The setting is described by
one of the following.
Set the values that meet the following
• The process alarm upper • The data written is retained.
conditions.
upper limit value is smaller • the address with the smallest number of the
• Process alarm upper upper limit
than the upper lower limit buffer memory area where an error was
value
value. detected is used as the address where the
≥ Upper lower limit value
• The process alarm upper error occurred.
†††8H*1 • Process alarm upper lower limit
lower limit value is smaller • Use the data of before the setting.
value
than the lower upper limit • When data is written to multiple system
≥ Lower upper limit value
value. areas, the address with the smallest number
• Process alarm lower upper limit
• The process alarm lower of the buffer memory area where an error
value
upper limit value is smaller was detected is stored.*5
≥ Lower lower limit value
than the lower lower limit
value.
An alarm has occurred.
†††AH
Refer to the alarm code list ( Page 318, Section 11.7).
• The set value cannot be changed until the
control mode is determined.
• When the setting under "Control Mode
A set value discrepancy error
Selection" was changed:
occurred.
All parameters are overwritten with
The current set value is
defaults.
different from the set value
• When the setting under "Control Output
backed up in non-volatile
Cycle Unit Selection Setting" was changed:
memory because one of the Turn off, on, and off Set value backup
0††EH*6 Settings are overwritten with defaults for
following settings on Switch instruction (Yn8).
"Control Output Cycle Setting", "Heating
Setting has been changed.
Control Output Cycle Setting", and "Cooling
• Control Mode Selection
Control Output Cycle Setting"; other settings
• Control Output Cycle Unit
are overwritten with backed up values.
Selection Setting
• When the setting under "Sampling Cycle
• Sampling Cycle Selection
Selection" was changed:
All parameters are overwritten with
defaults.
Values set in the intelligent
Set the correct values on the
function module switch setting The RUN LED turns off, the ERR. LED turns
000FH intelligent function module switch
are those outside the setting on, and the module does not operate.
setting.
range.

316
 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

*1 The address where the error occurred is stored in †††H.

Buffer memory addresses are written in decimal (Intelligent function module device (Un\G†)) in this manual. Read the
stored value in decimal and refer to the buffer memory list ( Page 44, Section 3.5).
*2 The buffer memory areas checked are Un\G0 to Un\G287. No error occurs for writes in the system area in or after
Un\G288.
*3 For the writable area in setting mode, refer to the buffer memory list ( Page 44, Section 3.5).
*4 "In the operation mode" refers to one of the following states.
• When Setting/operation mode instruction (Yn1) or Setting/operation mode status (Xn1) is on.
• When Setting/operation mode instruction (Yn1) turns on and off and PID continuation flag (Un\G169) is set to Continue
(1). 11
*5 Ex. When an error occurs in CH1 Alert 1 mode setting (Un\G192) and CH1 Alert 2 mode setting (Un\G193), 0C0 (hex)
H
in the buffer memory address with the smallest number "Un\G192" is stored in Error code (Un\G0).
*6 The error code for a set value discrepancy error indicates the match/no match status with the set value on Switch Setting
backed up to non-volatile memory as follows.

0 E H

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0

Fixed to 0 Fixed to 0 Fixed to 0 Fixed to EH

(error code)
Sampling cycle selection
0: Match
1: Mismatch
Control output cycle unit Control mode selection
switching setting 0: Match
0: Match 1: Mismatch
1: Mismatch

Remark

11.6 Error Code List

● When a value outside the setting range is written in the following buffer memory areas while in setting mode, the error
code 4H is stored. Switching to operation mode without error reset changes the error code to 3H. If this happens, take the
corrective action for error code 3H.

Buffer memory area Buffer memory address

Reference
name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
Input range Un\G32 Un\G64 Un\G96 Un\G128 Page 345, Appendix 2 (12)
Alert 1 mode setting Un\G192 Un\G208 Un\G224 Un\G240
Alert 2 mode setting Un\G193 Un\G209 Un\G225 Un\G241
Page 386, Appendix 2 (52)
Alert 3 mode setting Un\G194 Un\G210 Un\G226 Un\G242
Alert 4 mode setting Un\G195 Un\G211 Un\G227 Un\G243

● Error code priorities are as described below.

Priority

1 F E 6 3 7 5,8 2,4 When error codes are in the same priority level,
Higher Lower the lower error addresses are prioritized.

When a high-priority error occurs during a low-priority error, the error code of the high-priority error is written over the
error occurrence address.
● Only one error code, as dictated by error priority, is stored in Error code (Un\G0). For that reason, when multiple errors
occur at the same time, the next error code is stored, even when the error of the stored error code is corrected. Check for
errors other than the stored error code in the parameters of other channels.

317
11.7 Alarm Code List

The following table lists alarm codes.

The alarm code is stored in all bits of Error code (Un\G0).

b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0

A H

Alarm types Alarm occurrence An error code is

channels (1 to 4H) stored to AH when
an alarm occurs

If the lower four bits are "0001" (1H) to "1001" (9H) or "1011" (BH) to "1111" (FH), an error occurs. When an error occurs,
refer to the error code list ( Page 315, Section 11.6).

Alarm code
Operation at alarm
(hexadecimal) Cause Action
occurrence
*1
The temperature process • The ALM LED flashes. When Error reset instruction (Yn2) is turned
value (PV) has exceeded the • CH† Alert occurrence flag (XnC OFF → ON → OFF after the temperature
01†AH temperature measurement to XnF) turns on. process value (PV) has returned to the value
range that was set as the • CH† Input range upper limit (b0 within the temperature measurement range,
input range. of Un\G5 to Un\G8) turns on. Error code (Un\G0) is cleared to 0.
The following flags and buffer memory bits that
turn on when an alarm occurs turn off
The temperature process • The ALM LED flashes. automatically when the temperature process
value (PV) is below the • CH† Alert occurrence flag (XnC value (PV) has returned to the value within the
02†AH temperature measurement to XnF) turns on. temperature measurement range.
range that was set as the • CH† Input range lower limit (b1 • CH† Alert occurrence flag (XnC to XnF)
input range. of Un\G5 to Un\G8) turns on. • The applicable bit ( Page 336, Appendix
2 (3)) of CH† Alert definition (Un\G5 to
Un\G8)
• The ALM LED flashes.
• CH† Alert occurrence flag (XnC
A loop disconnection has to XnF) turns on.
03†AH When Error reset instruction (Yn2) is turned
been detected. • CH† Loop disconnection
OFF → ON → OFF after a current error due to a
detection (b13 of Un\G5 to
disconnection or output-off is restored, Error
Un\G8) turns on.
code (Un\G0) is cleared to 0.
• The HBA LED turns on.
The following flags and buffer memory bits that
• CH† Alert occurrence flag (XnC
turn on when an alarm occurs turn off
A heater disconnection has to XnF) turns on.
04†AH automatically when the current error due to
been detected. • CH† Heater disconnection
disconnection or output-off is restored.
detection (b12 of Un\G5 to
• CH† Alert occurrence flag (XnC to XnF)
Un\G8) turns on.
• The applicable bit ( Page 336, Appendix
• The HBA LED turns on.
2 (3)) of CH† Alert definition (Un\G5 to
• CH† Alert occurrence flag (XnC
A current error at an output Un\G8)
05†AH to XnF) turns on.
off-time has been detected.
• CH† Output off-time current error
(b14 of Un\G5 to Un\G8) turns on.

318
 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

Alarm code
Operation at alarm
(hexadecimal) Cause Action
occurrence
*1
• The ALM LED turns on.
• CH† Alert occurrence flag (XnC
06†AH Alert 1 has occurred. to XnF) turns on.
• CH† Alert 1 (b8 of Un\G5 to
Un\G8) turns on. When Error reset instruction (Yn2) is turned
• The ALM LED turns on. OFF → ON → OFF after the temperature 11
• CH† Alert occurrence flag (XnC process value (PV) is restored from alert status,
07†AH Alert 2 has occurred. to XnF) turns on. Error code (Un\G0) is cleared to 0.
• CH† Alert 2 (b9 of Un\G5 to The following flags and buffer memory bits that
Un\G8) turns on. turn on when an alarm occurs turn off
• The ALM LED turns on. automatically when the temperature process
• CH† Alert occurrence flag (XnC value (PV) is restored from alert status.
08†AH Alert 3 has occurred. to XnF) turns on. • CH† Alert occurrence flag (XnC to XnF)
• CH† Alert 3 (b10 of Un\G5 to • The applicable bit ( Page 336, Appendix
Un\G8) turns on. 2 (3)) of CH† Alert definition (Un\G5 to
• The ALM LED turns on. Un\G8)
• CH† Alert occurrence flag (XnC
09†AH Alert 4 has occurred. to XnF) turns on.
• CH† Alert 4 (b11 of Un\G5 to
Un\G8) turns on.
• The ALM LED turns on.
• CH† Alert occurrence flag (XnC
A process alarm upper limit to XnF) turns on.
0A†AH
alert has occurred. • CH† Process alarm upper limit
alert (b2 of Un\G5 to Un\G8) turns
on.
When Error reset instruction (Yn2) is turned
• The ALM LED turns on.

11.7 Alarm Code List

OFF → ON → OFF after the temperature
• CH† Alert occurrence flag (XnC
process value (PV) is restored from alert status,
A process alarm lower limit to XnF) turns on.
0B†AH Error code (Un\G0) is cleared to 0.
alert has occurred. • CH† Process alarm upper limit
The following flags and buffer memory bits that
alert (b3 of Un\G5 to Un\G8) turns
turn on when an alarm occurs turn off
on.
automatically when the temperature process
• The ALM LED turns on. value (PV) is restored from alert status.
• CH† Alert occurrence flag (XnC • CH† Alert occurrence flag (XnC to XnF)
A rate alarm upper limit alert
0C†AH to XnF) turns on.
has occurred. • The applicable bit ( Page 336, Appendix
• CH† Rate alarm upper limit alert
2 (3)) of CH† Alert definition (Un\G5 to
(b4 of Un\G5 to Un\G8) turns on.
Un\G8)
• The ALM LED turns on.
• CH† Alert occurrence flag (XnC
A rate alarm lower limit alert to XnF) turns on.
0D†AH
has been occurred. • CH† Process alarm upper limit
alert (b5 of Un\G5 to Un\G8) turns
on.
*1 † represents the number of the channel (1H to 4H) where the alarm occurred.

319
 Remark
• The error code is always given priority over the alarm code for being stored in Error code (Un\G0).
For that reason, when an alarm occurs during an error, the alarm code is not stored in Error code (Un\G0).
Further, when an error occurs during an alarm, the error code is written over the alarm code in Error code
(Un\G0).
• Alarm priorities are as follows.
Priority
High 01†AH, 02†AH, 03†AH, 04†AH, 05†AH
↑
06†AH, 07†AH, 08†AH, 09†AH,
↑
Low 0A†AH, 0B†AH, 0C†AH, 0D†AH
When an alarm occurs, if its priority is the same as or higher than that of alarms already occurred, the new alarm
code is written over Error code (Un\G0).

320
 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

11.8 Check the L60TC4 Status

The error code and hardware status can be checked by selecting "Module's Detailed Information" of the L60TC4 in the
system monitor of the programming tool.

(1) Operating the programming tool

11
From [Diagnostics] [System Monitor...] "Main Block", select L60TC4 .

(2) Module's Detailed Information

(a) Checking the function version and product information

The Product Information field shows the L60TC4 function version and product information.

(b) Checking the error code

The Latest Error Code field shows the error code stored in Error code (Un\G0) in the L60TC4.

(Press to display the content shown under Latest Error Code as No.1.)

Function version

Product information

11.8 Check the L60TC4 Status

321
 (3) Hardware information
On the "Module's Detailed Information" window, click .

(a) H/W LED information

The following information is displayed.

Item Value Condition for 0001H

RUN Operating normally (same as the RUN LED)
DATA ERR A write data error has occurred
CH† RUN PID control is being run
CH† ALM1 Alert 1 is on
CH† ALM2 Alert 2 is on
• 0000H: off
CH† ALM3 Alert 3 is on
• 0001H: on
CH† ALM4 Alert 4 is on
CH† LBA A loop disconnection has been detected
A heater disconnection has been detected (the
CH† HBA
L60TCTT4BW and L60TCRT4BW only)
H/W ERR A hardware error has occurred

(b) H/W switch information

The setting status of the intelligent function module switch setting is displayed.

Item Intelligent function module switch setting Value

HOLD/CLR Switch 1: Output Setting at CPU Stop Error
CTRL MODE Switch 2: Control Mode Selection
Switch 3:
• Setting Change Rate Limiter Setting
Refer to Page 108, Section 7.2
• Control Output Cycle Unit Selection Setting
SW3
• Output Setting at CPU Stop Error
• Auto-setting at Input Range Change
• Sampling Cycle Selection

322
 APPENDICES

APPENDICES

Appendix 1 Details of I/O Signals

The following section describes the details of the L60TC4 I/O signals toward the CPU module. The I/O numbers (X/Y)
described in Appendix 1 is for the case when the start I/O number of the L60TC4 is set to 0.

A
Appendix 1.1 Input signal

(1) Module READY flag (Xn0)

This flag turns on to indicate that the preparation for the L60TC4 is completed when the module is turned on from
off or when the CPU module's reset is released.
Make sure that this flag is on when reading/writing data from/in the buffer memory of the L60TC4 from the CPU
module. The following shows an example of a program. (In the following example, the start I/O number of the
L60TC4 is set to 10.)

Write
instruction

Used as buffer memory read/write interlock.

If the watchdog timer error is detected, this flag turns off. The L60TC4 stops controlling the temperature and the
transistor output turns off. (The RUN LED turns off and ERR. LED turns on.)

Appendix 1.1 Input signal

Appendix 1 Details of I/O Signals

323
 (2) Setting/operation mode status (Xn1)
This signal turns on at the operation mode, off at the setting mode.

ON
Setting/operation mode OFF
instruction (Yn1)
ON
Setting/operation mode OFF
status (Xn1)

Setting mode at Operation mode Setting mode

power-ON (during operation) (after operation)
Mode transition

During mode shift processing 1 During mode shift processing 2

Executed by the L60TC4

(a) Precautions during the mode shifting

The mode shifting means the following timings.
• From Setting/operation mode instruction (Yn1) OFF → ON to Setting/operation mode status (Xn1) ON
(above figure 1 )
• From Setting/operation mode instruction (Yn1) ON → OFF to Setting/operation mode status (Xn1) OFF
(above figure 2 )
During the mode shifting, do not change the set values. If the set values are changed during the mode shifting,
the module operation cannot be guaranteed. Use Setting/operation mode status (Xn1) as an interlock condition
for Setting/operation mode instruction (Yn1) when changing the setting.

The conditions whether to perform the temperature judgment, PID control, and alert judgment by the L60TC4 differ among
the following timings.
• Setting mode at power-ON
• Operation mode (in operation)
• Setting mode (after operation)
For each detail on the temperature judgment, PID control, and alert judgment, refer to the following.
• Temperature judgment: Page 336, Appendix 2 (3)
• PID control: Page 134, Section 8.2.3 (6)
• Alert judgment: Page 166, Section 8.2.11 (5)

324
 APPENDICES

(3) Error occurrence flag (Xn2)

This flag turns on when errors other than a hardware error occur.
After an error occurs and the error code is stored in Error code (Un\G0), this flag turns on.
Errors occur under the following conditions.
• When data is set in the buffer memory of the system area
• When the setting of the area which can be written only during the setting mode (Setting/operation mode
status (Xn1): OFF) is changed during the operation mode (Setting/operation mode status (Xn1): ON)
( Page 324, Appendix 1.1 (2))
• When the data which cannot be set is set
• When the setting of the buffer memory is changed during the default setting registration ( Page 332, A
Appendix 1.2 (5))
• When the current set value and the set value backed up in the non-volatile memory are different due to the
change on Switch Setting.

ON

OFF
Error flag (Xn2)

Error code 0H Error code 0H

(Un\G0)
ON
Error reset instruction (Yn2) OFF

Executed by the L60TC4

(4) Hardware error flag (Xn3)

Appendix 1.1 Input signal

Appendix 1 Details of I/O Signals
This flag turns on when hardware error occurs in the L60TC4.

325
 (5) CH† Auto tuning status (Xn4 to Xn7)
This signal turns on when auto tuning of each channel is set by the user or when the L60TC4 performs self-
tuning.

Auto tuning status

Heating-
Channel Standard ON/OFF status
cooling Mix control
control
control
CH1 Xn4 Xn4 Xn4
ON: The auto tuning/self-tuning is being
CH2 Xn5 Xn5 Xn5*2 performed.
CH3 Xn6 Xn6*1 Xn6 OFF: The auto tuning/self-tuning is not being
performed or is completed.
CH4 Xn7 Xn7*1 Xn7

*1 Available only under the heating-cooling control (expanded mode). For details on the expanded mode, refer to
Page 127, Section 8.2.1 (3).
*2 Available only under the mix control (expanded mode). For details on the expanded mode, refer to Page 127,
Section 8.2.1 (3).

(a) Performing auto tuning

To perform auto tuning, turn CH† Auto turning instruction (Yn4 to Yn7) on from off.
While auto tuning is in process, this signal is on, and turns off at the completion of the auto tuning.

ON

CH Auto tuning instruction OFF

(Yn4 to Yn7)
ON

CH Auto tuning status During auto tuning

OFF
(Xn4 to Xn7)

Executed in a program
Executed by the L60TC4

For details on the auto tuning function, refer to the following.

Page 141, Section 8.2.7

(b) Self-tuning
This signal turns on when self-tuning starts. This signal automatically turns off at the completion of the self-
tuning.
Set a self-tuning option in CH† Self-tuning setting (Un\G574, Un\G606, Un\G638, Un\G670). ( Page 399,
Appendix 2 (72)) Self-tuning can be executed only in the standard control.
For details on the self-tuning function, refer to the following.
Page 175, Section 8.2.15

326
 APPENDICES

(6) Back-up of the set value completion flag (Xn8)

Turning Set value backup instruction (Yn8) on from off starts the writing of the buffer memory data to the non-
volatile memory. After the data writing is completed, this flag turns on. Turning Set value backup instruction (Yn8)
off from on also turns off this flag.

ON
Setting value backup instruction OFF
(Yn8)
Execution status of Before write to During write to Completion of write to
Non-volatile memory memory memory
memory write ON A
Setting value backup OFF
completion flag (Xn8)

Executed in a program
Executed by the L60TC4

For details on the data writing to the non-volatile memory, refer to the following.
Page 235, Section 8.3.4

(7) Default value write completion flag (Xn9)

Turning Default setting registration instruction (Yn9) on from off starts the writing of the default value of the
L60TC4 to the buffer memory. After the data writing is completed, this flag turns on. Turning Default setting
registration instruction (Yn9) off from on also turns off this flag.

ON
Default setting registration instruction
(Yn9) OFF

Appendix 1.1 Input signal

Appendix 1 Details of I/O Signals
User setting Default value
Buffer memory value
ON

Default value write completion flag OFF

(Xn9) During default setting
registration

Executed in a program
Executed by the L60TC4

(a) Unused channel

For unused channels (which temperature sensors are not connected to), CH† Unused channel setting
(Un\G61, Un\G93, Un\G125, Un\G157) must be set to Unused (1) after the completion of the writing of the
default value.
If not, ALM LED blinks.
For details on the unused channel setting, refer to the following.
Page 106, Section 6.6

327
 (8) Back-up of the set value fail flag (XnA)
Turning Set value backup instruction (Yn8) on from off starts the writing of the buffer memory data to the non-
volatile memory. This flag turns on when the writing failed.

ON

Setting value backup instruction OFF

(Yn8) During write ON
Setting value backup to memory
completion flag OFF
ON
(Xn8)
Setting value backup OFF
failure flag During write
(XnA) to memory Error detection of write to memory

Executed in a program
Executed by the L60TC4

After the data writing is completed properly, this flag turns off.
For details on the data writing to the non-volatile memory, refer to the following.
Page 235, Section 8.3.4

After Set value backup instruction (Yn8) is turned on from off, make sure that this flag is off. Then turn Set value backup
instruction (Yn8) off from on . If Set value backup instruction (Yn8) is turned off from on while this flag is on, the L60TC4
operates with the default value since the data in the buffer memory is undefined. Likewise, if the power supply is turned on
from off or the CPU module is released from the reset status while this flag is on, the L60TC4 operates with the default value
since the data in the buffer memory is undefined.

(9) Setting change completion flag (XnB)

Turning Setting change instruction (YnB) on from off during the setting mode (Setting/operation mode status
(Xn1): OFF) reflects the set contents of each buffer memory to the control. After the data is reflected, this flag
turns on. Turning Setting change instruction (YnB) off from on also turns off this flag.

ON
Setting change instruction OFF
(YnB)
ON
Setting change
OFF
completion flag
(XnB)
Executed in a program
Executed by the L60TC4

This flag can be used as an interlock condition for Setting/operation mode instruction (Yn1).

328
 APPENDICES

(10)CH† Alert occurrence flag (XnC to XnF)

When an alert occurs, the alert definition is stored in CH† Alert definition (Un\G5 to Un\G8), and this flag turns
on.
For conditions where this flag turns off, refer to the following.
Page 166, Section 8.2.11 (6)
The following table lists the partucular flag and buffer memory addresses of alert definitions for each channel.

Alert occurrence CH† Alert definition (buffer memory

Channel ON/OFF status
flag address)( Page 336, Appendix 2 (3))
CH1 XnC Un\G5 A
OFF: Alert does not
CH2 XnD Un\G6
occur.
CH3 XnE Un\G7
ON: Alert occurs.
CH4 XnF Un\G8

Ex. Time chart for CH1

ON

OFF
CH1 Alert occurrence flag
(XnC)
CH1 Alert definition
0 Detected alert data
(Un\G5)

Executed by the L60TC4

Appendix 1.1 Input signal

Appendix 1 Details of I/O Signals

329
Appendix 1.2 Output signal

(1) Setting/operation mode instruction (Yn1)

Use this signal to select the setting mode or the operation mode.
• OFF: Setting mode
• ON: Operation mode
Some buffer memory areas can be set only in the setting mode.

(a) Buffer memory areas that can be set only in the setting mode
The following settings can be changed only when Setting/operation mode instruction (Yn1) is off. If the settings
are changed in the operation mode, a write data error (error code: ††† 3H) occurs.

Buffer memory address

Buffer memory area name Reference
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH† Input range Un\G32 Un\G64 Un\G96 Un\G128 Page 345, Appendix 2 (12)
Resolution of the manipulated value for
Un\G181 Page 384, Appendix 2 (48)
output with another analog module
CH† Alert 1 mode setting Un\G192 Un\G208 Un\G224 Un\G240
CH† Alert 2 mode setting Un\G193 Un\G209 Un\G225 Un\G241
Page 386, Appendix 2 (52)
CH† Alert 3 mode setting Un\G194 Un\G210 Un\G226 Un\G242
CH† Alert 4 mode setting Un\G195 Un\G211 Un\G227 Un\G243
CH† Process alarm alert output
Un\G196 Un\G212 Un\G228 Un\G244 Page 387, Appendix 2 (53)
enable/disable setting
CH† Process alarm lower lower limit value Un\G197 Un\G213 Un\G229 Un\G245
CH† Process alarm lower upper limit value Un\G198 Un\G214 Un\G230 Un\G246
Page 388, Appendix 2 (54)
CH† Process alarm upper lower limit value Un\G199 Un\G215 Un\G231 Un\G247
CH† Process alarm upper upper limit value Un\G200 Un\G216 Un\G232 Un\G248
CH† Rate alarm alert output enable/disable
Un\G201 Un\G217 Un\G233 Un\G249 Page 389, Appendix 2 (55)
setting
CH† Rate alarm alert detection cycle Un\G202 Un\G218 Un\G234 Un\G250 Page 389, Appendix 2 (56)
CH† Rate alarm upper limit value Un\G203 Un\G219 Un\G235 Un\G251
Page 390, Appendix 2 (57)
CH† Rate alarm lower limit value Un\G204 Un\G220 Un\G236 Un\G252
CT† CT selection Un\G272 to Un\G279 (set for each current sensor (CT)) Page 392, Appendix 2 (60)
CH† 2-point sensor compensation offset
Un\G544 Un\G576 Un\G608 Un\G640 Page 394, Appendix 2 (63)
value (measured value)
CH† 2-point sensor compensation offset
Un\G545 Un\G577 Un\G609 Un\G641 Page 394, Appendix 2 (64)
value (compensation value)
CH† 2-point sensor compensation gain
Un\G546 Un\G578 Un\G610 Un\G642 Page 395, Appendix 2 (65)
value (measured value)
CH† 2-point sensor compensation gain
Un\G547 Un\G579 Un\G611 Un\G643 Page 395, Appendix 2 (66)
value (compensation value)
CH† 2-point sensor compensation offset
Un\G548 Un\G580 Un\G612 Un\G644 Page 396, Appendix 2 (67)
latch request
CH† 2-point sensor compensation gain
Un\G550 Un\G582 Un\G614 Un\G646 Page 397, Appendix 2 (69)
latch request
Conversion enable/disable setting Un\G693 Page 402, Appendix 2 (75)
Cooling method setting Un\G719 Page 404, Appendix 2 (77)
CH† Process value (PV) scaling function
Un\G725 Un\G741 Un\G757 Un\G773 Page 405, Appendix 2 (80)
enable/disable setting

330
 APPENDICES

Buffer memory address

Buffer memory area name Reference
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH† Process value (PV) scaling lower limit
Un\G726 Un\G742 Un\G758 Un\G774
value
Page 406, Appendix 2 (81)
CH† Process value (PV) scaling upper limit
Un\G727 Un\G743 Un\G759 Un\G775
value
CH† Derivative action selection Un\G729 Un\G745 Un\G761 Un\G777 Page 407, Appendix 2 (83)
CH† Simultaneous temperature rise group
Un\G730 Un\G746 Un\G762 Un\G778 Page 407, Appendix 2 (84)
setting
CH† Setting change rate limiter unit time
Un\G735 Un\G751 Un\G767 Un\G783 Page 411, Appendix 2 (89)
setting
Peak current suppression control group A
Un\G784 Page 412, Appendix 2 (90)
setting
Sensor compensation function selection Un\G785 Page 413, Appendix 2 (91)

(2) Error reset instruction (Yn2)

Use this signal to turn off Error occurrence flag (Xn2) and to reset Error code (Un\G0). For the method to reset an
error, refer to Error occurrence flag (Xn2). ( Page 325, Appendix 1.1 (3))

(3) CH† Auto tuning instruction (Yn4 to Yn7)

Use this signal to start auto tuning. Turning this signal on from off starts auto tuning and turns on CH† Auto
tuning status (Xn4 to Xn7). After auto tuning is completed, CH† Auto tuning status (Xn4 to Xn7) turns off.
Keep this instruction ON during auto tuning and turn it off from on at the completion of the auto tuning. If this
instruction is turned off from on during auto tuning, the auto tuning stops. If the auto tuning stops, PID constants in
the buffer memory do not change.

Appendix 1.2 Output signal

Appendix 1 Details of I/O Signals
● If proportional band (P)/heating proportional band (Ph) is set to 0, auto tuning cannot be performed. ( Page 355,
Appendix 2 (15))
● If Setting/operation mode instruction (Yn1) is turned off from on and the operation status shifts to the setting mode during
auto tuning, the auto tuning stops. After that, even if Setting/operation mode instruction (Yn1) is turned on from off and
the the operation status shifts back to the operation mode, the auto tuning does not resume. To resume the auto tuning,
turn Auto tuning instruction (Yn4 to Yn7) off from on, and turn it on from off again.

For details on the auto tuning function, refer to the following.

Page 141, Section 8.2.7

331
 (4) Set value backup instruction (Yn8)
Use this signal to write the buffer memory data to the non-volatile memory. Turning this instruction on from off
starts the data writing to the non-volatile memory.
For the buffer memory areas whose data is to be backed up, refer to the following.
Page 44, Section 3.5

(a) When data writing to the non-volatile memory has completed normally
Back-up of the set value completion flag (Xn8) turns on.

(b) When data writing to the non-volatile memory has not completed normally
Back-up of the set value fail flag (XnA) turns on. When Back-up of the set value fail flag (XnA) turns on, turn Set
value backup instruction (Yn8) on from off to write the data to the non-volatile memory again.

(c) Timings when this instruction cannot be received

In the following timings, this instruction cannot be received.
• 1: While PID constants are written after auto tuning
• 2: While PID constants are read from the non-volatile memory
• 3: While a setting error is occurring
• 4: While a setting is being changed by Setting change instruction (YnB)
For 1 to 3 above, turn this instruction on from off after each condition is resolved. For 4, the data writing to the
non-volatile memory automatically starts after the condition is resolved.
For details on the data writing to the non-volatile memory, refer to the following.
Page 235, Section 8.3.4

(5) Default setting registration instruction (Yn9)

Use this signal to set data in the buffer memory or the non-volatile memory back to the default value.
Turning this instruction on from off starts the writing of the default value of the L60TC4 to the buffer memory.
After the data writing is completed, Default value write completion flag (Xn9) turns on.

(a) When Setting/operation mode status (Xn1) is on (in operation mode)

Turning this instruction on from off does not set data back to the default value. Turn on this instruction when
Setting/operation mode status (Xn1) is off (in the setting mode).

(6) Setting change instruction (YnB)

Use this instruction to confirm the set value of the buffer memory (the buffer memory areas that can be set only in
the setting mode (Setting/operation mode status (Xn1): OFF). ( Page 330, Appendix 1.2 (1))

(a) Reflection of set value

Even though the set values are written into the buffer memory, they cannot be reflected to the L60TC4's
operation immediately. To confirm the set values, turn this instruction OFF → ON → OFF after the set values
are written into the buffer memory. Doing so lets the L60TC4 operate according to the setting in each buffer
memory area.

332
 APPENDICES

(7) CH† PID control forced stop instruction (YnC to YnF)

Use this signal to temporarily stop PID control forcibly.

(a) Mode when PID control stops

The mode depends on the setting of CH† Stop mode setting (Un\G33, Un\G65, Un\G97, Un\G129).
For details on CH† Stop mode setting (Un\G33, Un\G65, Un\G97, Un\G129), refer to the following.
Page 353, Appendix 2 (13)

Appendix 1.2 Output signal

Appendix 1 Details of I/O Signals

333
Appendix 2 Details of the Buffer Memory

This chapter describes details on the buffer memory of the L60TC4.

For buffer memory areas indicated with the icons Standard and Heating-cooling , or with Common , the following terms are used,
unless otherwise specified.
• Proportional band (P): includes heating proportional band (Ph) and cooling proportional band (Pc)
• Manipulated value (MV): includes manipulated value for heating (MVh) and manipulated value for cooling (MVc).
• Transistor output: includes heating transistor output and cooling transistor output
• Control output cycle: includes heating control output cycle and cooling control output cycle

(1) Error code (Un\G0) Common

An error code or alarm code is stored in this buffer memory area.
For error codes and alarm codes, refer to the following.
Page 315, Section 11.6, Page 318, Section 11.7

(2) CH† Decimal point position (Un\G1 to Un\G4) Common

According to the setting of CH† Input range (Un\G32, Un\G64, Un\G96, Un\G128), the decimal point position
applicable in the following buffer memory areas is stored in this buffer memory area.

Buffer memory address

Buffer memory area name Reference
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
Page 338, Appendix 2
CH† Temperature process value (PV) Un\G9 Un\G10 Un\G11 Un\G12
(4)
Page 354, Appendix 2
CH† Set value (SV) setting Un\G34 Un\G66 Un\G98 Un\G130
(14)
CH† Alert set value 1 Un\G38 Un\G70 Un\G102 Un\G134
CH† Alert set value 2 Un\G39 Un\G71 Un\G103 Un\G135 Page 358, Appendix 2
CH† Alert set value 3 Un\G40 Un\G72 Un\G104 Un\G136 (18)
CH† Alert set value 4 Un\G41 Un\G73 Un\G105 Un\G137
Page 370, Appendix 2
CH† AT bias setting Un\G53 Un\G85 Un\G117 Un\G149
(29)
CH† Upper limit setting limiter Un\G55 Un\G87 Un\G119 Un\G151 Page 372, Appendix 2
CH† Lower limit setting limiter Un\G56 Un\G88 Un\G120 Un\G152 (31)
Page 375, Appendix 2
CH† Loop disconnection detection dead band Un\G60 Un\G92 Un\G124 Un\G156
(34)
CH† Process alarm lower lower limit value Un\G197 Un\G213 Un\G229 Un\G245
CH† Process alarm lower upper limit value Un\G198 Un\G214 Un\G230 Un\G246 Page 388, Appendix 2
CH† Process alarm upper lower limit value Un\G199 Un\G215 Un\G231 Un\G247 (54)
CH† Process alarm upper upper limit value Un\G200 Un\G216 Un\G232 Un\G248
CH† Rate alarm upper limit value Un\G203 Un\G219 Un\G235 Un\G251 Page 390, Appendix 2
CH† Rate alarm lower limit value Un\G204 Un\G220 Un\G236 Un\G252 (57)
CH† 2-point sensor compensation offset Page 394, Appendix 2
Un\G544 Un\G576 Un\G608 Un\G640
value (measured value) (63)
CH† 2-point sensor compensation offset Page 394, Appendix 2
Un\G545 Un\G577 Un\G609 Un\G641
value (compensation value) (64)

334
 APPENDICES

Buffer memory address

Buffer memory area name Reference
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH† 2-point sensor compensation gain value Page 395, Appendix 2
Un\G546 Un\G578 Un\G610 Un\G642
(measured value) (65)
CH† 2-point sensor compensation gain value Page 395, Appendix 2
Un\G547 Un\G579 Un\G611 Un\G643
(compensation value) (66)
CH† Simultaneous temperature rise gradient Page 408, Appendix 2
Un\G731 Un\G747 Un\G763 Un\G779
data (85)

Stored values differ depending on the setting in CH† Input range (Un\G32, Un\G64, Un\G96, Un\G128).

Setting of CH† Input range (Un\G32, Un\G64, Un\G96, Un\G128) A

Stored value Setting contents
( Page 345, Appendix 2 (12))
Resolution is 1. 0 Nothing after decimal point
Resolution is 0.1. 1 First decimal place

Appendix 2 Details of the Buffer Memory

335
 (3) CH† Alert definition (Un\G5 to Un\G8) Common
Bits corresponding to alerts detected in each channel become 1.

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

0 0 0

Bit data b15 are Bit data from b7 to

fixed to 0. b2 are fixed to 0.

Target bit number Flag name Alert definition

Temperature process value (PV) has exceeded the temperature
b0 CH† Input range upper limit
measurement range*1 of the set input range.
Temperature process value (PV) has fallen below the temperature
b1 CH† Input range lower limit
measurement range*1 of the set input range.
Temperature process value (PV) has reached the process alarm upper
b2 CH† Process alarm upper limit
upper limit value or more.
Temperature process value (PV) has reached the process alarm lower
b3 CH† Process alarm lower limit
lower limit value or lower.
The variation of temperature process value (PV) has reached the rate
b4 CH† Rate alarm upper limit
alarm upper limit value or more.
The variation of temperature process value (PV) has reached the rate
b5 CH† Rate alarm lower limit
alarm lower limit value or lower.
b6 to b7 ⎯ (fixed to 0) ⎯ (Unused)
b8 CH† Alert 1 Alert 1 has occurred. ( Page 157, Section 8.2.11)
b9 CH† Alert 2 Alert 2 has occurred. ( Page 157, Section 8.2.11)
b10 CH† Alert 3 Alert 3 has occurred. ( Page 157, Section 8.2.11)
b11 CH† Alert 4 Alert 4 has occurred. ( Page 157, Section 8.2.11)
b12 CH† Heater disconnection detection Heater disconnection has been detected. ( Page 215, Section 8.2.24)
b13 CH† Loop disconnection detection Loop disconnection has been detected. ( Page 204, Section 8.2.19)

Output off-time current error has been detected. ( Page 220, Section
b14 CH† Output off-time current error
8.2.25)
b15 ⎯ (fixed to 0) ⎯ (Unused)

*1 For the temperature measurement range, refer to Page 337, Appendix 2 (3) (a).

336
 APPENDICES

(a) Temperature measurement range

The temperature measurement range is as follows.
• Input range lower limit - 5% of full scale to Input range upper limit + 5% of full scale
Ex. A calculation example when CH† Input range (Un\G32, Un\G64, Un\G96, Un\G128): 38
(temperature measurement range: -200.0 to 400.0°C)

• Input range lower limit - 5% of full scale = -200 - ((400.0 - (-200.0)) × 0.05) = -230.0
• Input range upper limit + 5% of full scale = 400 + ((400.0 - (-200.0)) × 0.05) = 430.0
Therefore, the temperature measurement range is -230.0 to 430.0°C.
The L60TC4 checks whether the input temperature is in temperature measurement range of the input range.
When the input temperature is out of the temperature measurement range, CH† Input range upper limit (b0 of A
Un\G5 to Un\G8), or CH† Input range lower limit (b1 of Un\G5 to Un\G8) becomes 1 (ON). The conditions
which the L60TC4 uses to judge whether the measured temperature is within the temperature measurement
range differ depending on the following settings.
• Setting/operation mode instruction (Yn1) ( Page 330, Appendix 1.2 (1))
• PID continuation flag (Un\G169) ( Page 381, Appendix 2 (43))
• CH† PID control forced stop instruction (YnC to YnF) ( Page 333, Appendix 1.2 (7))
• CH† Stop mode setting (Un\G33, Un\G65, Un\G97, Un\G129) ( Page 353, Appendix 2 (13))

The following table lists the conditions whether to perform the temperature judgment.
: Executed ×: Not executed

Setting/operation PID CH† PID control CH† Stop mode setting

Temperature
mode instruction continuation forced stop instruction (Un\G33, Un\G65,
judgment
(Yn1)*1 flag (Un\G169) (YnC to YnF) Un\G97, Un\G129)

Appendix 2 Details of the Buffer Memory

Stop (0) ×
Setting mode at Stop (0)/Continue
OFF/ON Monitor (1)
power-ON (1)
Alert (2)

OFF Stop (0)/Monitor (1)/Alert (2)

Operation mode Stop (0)/Continue Stop (0) ×

(in operation) (1) ON Monitor (1)

Alert (2)
Stop (0) ×

Stop (0) OFF/ON Monitor (1)

Alert (2)
Setting mode
OFF Stop (0)/Monitor (1)/Alert (2)
(after operation)
Stop (0) ×
Continue (1)
ON Monitor (1)

Alert (2)

*1 Refer to Page 324, Appendix 1.1 (2) for each timing.

If CH† Unused channel setting (Un\G61, Un\G93, Un\G125, Un\G157) is set to Disable (1), temperature judgment is not
executed even though the condition above is satisfied. ( Page 376, Appendix 2 (35))

337
 (4) CH† Temperature process value (PV) (Un\G9 to Un\G12) Common
The detected temperature value where sensor correction is performed is stored in this buffer memory area.
The value to be stored differs depending on the stored value in CH† Decimal point position (Un\G1 to Un\G4).
( Page 334, Appendix 2 (2))
• No decimal place (0): Stored as it is.
• One decimal place (1): Stored after a multiplication by 10.

When value measured by a temperature sensor exceeds the temperature measurement range, the following value is stored.
• When measured value exceeds temperature measurement range: Input range upper limit + 5% of full scale
• When measured value falls below temperature measurement range: Input range lower limit - 5% of full scale

338
 APPENDICES

(5) CH† Manipulated value (MV) (Un\G13 to Un\G16) Standard

CH† Manipulated value for heating (MVh) (Un\G13 to Un\G16) Heating-cooling

CH† Manipulated value for cooling (MVc) (Un\G704 to Un\G707) Heating-cooling

The result of PID operation based on temperature process value (PV) is stored in these buffer memory areas.
The area Un\G13 to Un\G16 are used for heating in the case of the heating-cooling control. The following table
lists the range of values to be stored.

Store description Store range in control Stored value when control stops A
Manipulated value (MV) -50 to 1050 (-5% to 105.0%) -50 (-5.0%)
Manipulated value for heating (MVh)
0 to 1050 (0.0% to 105.0%) -50 (-5.0%)
Manipulated value for cooling (MVc)

However, values are output in the range of 0% to 100%. For 0% or less and 100% or more, refer to the following.
• For 0% or less: 0%
• For 100% or more: 100%

(a) Manipulated value (MV) and control output cycle

• Manipulated value (MV) indicates ON time of CH† Control output cycle setting (Un\G47, Un\G79,
Un\G111, Un\G143) in percentage. ( Page 364, Appendix 2 (23))
• Manipulated value for heating (MVh) indicates ON time of CH† Heating control output cycle setting
(Un\G47, Un\G79, Un\G111, Un\G143) in percentage. ( Page 364, Appendix 2 (23))
• Manipulated value for cooling (MVc) indicates ON time of CH† Cooling control output cycle setting
(Un\G722, Un\G738, Un\G754, Un\G770) in percentage. ( Page 364, Appendix 2 (23))
Ex. When 600 (60.0%) is stored in CH† Manipulated value (MV) (Un\G13 to Un\G16) and the value of

Appendix 2 Details of the Buffer Memory

the buffer memory is set as shown in the following.

• CH† Control output cycle setting (Un\G47, Un\G79, Un\G111, Un\G143): 30s
ON time of transistor output = Control output cycle setting (s) × Manipulated value (MV) (%) = 30 × 0.6 =
18 (s)
ON time of transistor output is 18s.
Transistor output is pulse of ON for 18s, OFF for 12s.

18s (60%) 12s (40%)

ON

OFF
Transistor output
30s

339
 (6) CH† Temperature rise judgment flag (Un\G17 to Un\G20) Standard Heating-cooling

This flag is for checking whether the temperature process value (PV) is in the temperature rise completion range
or not.
The following values are stored in this buffer memory area.
• 0: Out of temperature rise completion range
• 1: Within temperature rise completion range
When the temperature process value (PV) stays in the temperature rise completion range during the set
temperature rise completion soak time, 1 is stored in this buffer memory area, which is within temperature rise
completion range (1).

Temperature
process value (PV) CH Temperature rise judgment flag
(Un\G17 to Un\G20) turns to Within
temperature rise completion range (1)
Temperature rise at this point.
completion range

Set value
(SV)

Time

Temperature rise completion soak time setting

(Un\G168)

Set the temperature rise completion range and temperature rise completion soak time in the following buffer
memory areas.
• Temperature rise completion range setting (Un\G167) ( Page 380, Appendix 2 (41))
• Temperature rise completion soak time setting (Un\G168) ( Page 381, Appendix 2 (42))

340
 APPENDICES

(7) CH† Transistor output flag (Un\G21 to Un\G24) Standard

CH† Heating transistor output flag (Un\G21 to Un\G24) Heating-cooling

CH† Cooling transistor output flag (Un\G712 to Un\G715) Heating-cooling

ON/OFF status of transistor output and ON delay output are stored in these flags. In the heating-cooling control,
ON/OFF status of transistor output/ON delay output for heating are stored in Un\G21 to Un\G24.
• OFF: 0
• ON: 1
A
b15 to b9 b8 b7 to b1 b0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Bit data from b15 to Bit data from b7 to

b9 are fixed to 0. b1 are fixed to 0. Transistor output flag
ON delay output flag

(a) Relationship with ON delay output flag

Relationship between Transistor output flag and ON delay output flag is shown in the following.

ON

Transistor
output flag
OFF
Transistor output monitor ON
ON delay time setting
(Un\G175)
ON delay

Appendix 2 Details of the Buffer Memory

output flag
OFF

Transistor output monitor ON delay time setting (Un\G175) enables setting considering delay time
(response/scan time delay) of actual transistor output. ( Page 382, Appendix 2 (45)) By monitoring the ON
delay output flag and external output on the program, disconnection of external output can be judged.
For details on the ON delay output function, refer to the following.
Page 174, Section 8.2.14

341
 (8) CH† Set value (SV) monitor (Un\G25 to Un\G28) Standard Heating-cooling

Set value (SV) of each time unit set in CH† Setting change rate limiter time unit setting (Un\G735, Un\G751,
Un\G767, Un\G783) is stored in this buffer memory area. ( Page 411, Appendix 2 (89))
The set value (SV) can be monitored in real time.

(9) Cold junction temperature process value (Un\G29) Common

The measured temperature of cold junction temperature compensation resistor is stored in this buffer memory
area.
Values to be stored are within 0 to 55°C.

(a) Usable modules

• L60TCTT4
• L60TCTT4BW

(10)MAN mode shift completion flag (Un\G30) Standard Heating-cooling

This flag is for checking completion of the mode shift when shifting AUTO (auto) mode to MAN (manual) mode.
The following values are stored in this buffer memory area.
• 0: MAN mode shift uncompleted
• 1: MAN mode shift completed

The following figure shows bits of the buffer memory area that correspond to each channel.

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1

Bit data from b15 to b4 are fixed to 0.

When shift to MAN mode is completed, bits corresponding to appropriate channel become MAN mode shift
completed (1).

(a) How to shift the mode

Shift the mode in the following buffer memory area.
• CH† AUTO/MAN mode shift (Un\G50, Un\G82, Un\G114, Un\G146) ( Page 367, Appendix 2 (26))

(b) Setting manipulated value (MV) in MAN mode

Set the manipulated value (MV) in the following buffer memory area.
• CH† MAN output setting (Un\G51, Un\G83, Un\G115, Un\G147) ( Page 368, Appendix 2 (27))
Set the manipulated value (MV) after confirming MAN mode shift completion flag (Un\G30) has become MAN
mode shift completed (1).

342
 APPENDICES

(11)Memory of PID constants read/write completion flag (Un\G31) Standard Heating-cooling

This flag is for showing whether the settings of the following buffer memory areas are completed or not.
• CH† Memory of PID constants read instruction (Un\G62, Un\G94, Un\G126, Un\G158)( Page 377,
Appendix 2 (36))
• CH† Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants (Un\G63, Un\G95, Un\G127,
Un\G159)( Page 378, Appendix 2 (37))

(a) Correspondence between each bit and flag

The following table lists flags correspond to bits of this buffer memory area.
A
Bit number Flag description Bit number Flag description
b0 CH1 Read completion flag b8 CH1 Read failure flag
b1 CH2 Read completion flag b9 CH2 Read failure flag
b2 CH3 Read completion flag b10 CH3 Read failure flag
b3 CH4 Read completion flag b11 CH4 Read failure flag
b4 CH1 Write completion flag b12 CH1 Write failure flag
b5 CH2 Write completion flag b13 CH2 Write failure flag
b6 CH3 Write completion flag b14 CH3 Write failure flag
b7 CH4 Write completion flag b15 CH4 Write failure flag

(b) ON/OFF timing for CH† Memory of PID constants read instruction (Un\G62, Un\G94,
Un\G126, Un\G158) ( Page 377, Appendix 2 (36))
The following figure shows the ON/OFF timing of this flag for CH† Memory of PID constants read instruction
(Un\G62, Un\G94, Un\G126, Un\G158). (For CH1)

Appendix 2 Details of the Buffer Memory

CH1 Memory's PID constant
0 1 0 1 0 1 0
read instruction
(Un\G62) ON ON
CH1 Read completion flag OFF
(b0 of Un\G31)
ON
CH1 Read failure flag OFF
(b8 of Un\G31)
Read completion Read failure Read completion
Executed by the L60TC4

When the data reading from the non-volatile memory is completed normally, CH† Read completion flag (b0 to
b3 of Un\G31) of the corresponding channel turns on.
CH† Read completion flag (b0 to b3 of Un\G31) turns off when CH† Memory of PID constants read instruction
(Un\G62, Un\G94, Un\G126, Un\G158) is turned off from on.

When the data reading from the non-volatile memory fails, CH† Read failure flag (b8 to b11 of Un\G31) of the
corresponding channel turns on and the L60TC4 operates with PID constants before the data reading. (The
LED status remains.)
CH† Read failure flag (b8 to b11 of Un\G31) turns off when the data reading of the corresponding channel is
completed normally.
When the data reading fails, try again by turning CH† Memory of PID constants read instruction (Un\G62,
Un\G94, Un\G126, Un\G158) ON → OFF → ON.

343
 (c) ON/OFF timing for CH† Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants
(Un\G63, Un\G95, Un\G127, Un\G159) ( Page 378, Appendix 2 (37))
The following figure shows ON/OFF timing of this flag for CH† Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of
PID constants (Un\G63, Un\G95, Un\G127, Un\G159). (For CH1)

ON
CH1 Auto tuning status (Xn4) OFF
CH1 Automatic backup setting after
auto tuning of PID constants 0 1 0 1 0
(Un\G63) ON
CH1 Write completion flag OFF
(b4 of Un\G31) ON
CH1 Write failure flag OFF
(b12 of Un\G31) Auto tuning completion Auto tuning completion
(Write failure) (Write failure)
Executed in a program
Executed by the L60TC4

When the data writing to the non-volatile memory is completed normally, CH† Write completion flag (b4 to b7
of Un\G31) turns on.
CH† Write completion flag (b4 to b7 of Un\G31) turns off when CH† Automatic backup setting after auto
tuning of PID constants (Un\G63, Un\G95, Un\G127, Un\G159) is set to Disable (0) from Enable (1).

When the data writing to the non-volatile memory fails, CH† Write failure flag (b12 to b15 of Un\G31) of the
corresponding channel turns on and the L60TC4 operates with PID constants calculated in the previous auto
tuning. (The LED status remains.)
CH† Write failure flag (b12 to b15 of Un\G31) turns off when the data writing of the corresponding channel is
completed normally.
When the data writing fails, perform auto tuning again by turning CH† Auto tuning instruction (Yn4 to Yn7) ON
→ OFF → ON. If the data writing fails even after executing auto tuning again, a hardware error can be the
reason. Consult a local representative or branch about the problem.

● By referring to this flag at the completion of auto tuning, whether the automatic data backup is completed normally or not
can be checked.
● After confirming that the following flags are on, set CH† Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants
(Un\G63, Un\G95, Un\G127, Un\G159) to Disable (0).
• CH† Write completion flag (b4 to b7 of Un\G31) (when automatic data backup is completed normally)
• CH† Write failure flag (b12 to b15 of Un\G31) (when automatic data backup fails)
If auto tuning is executed under Enable (1), although PID constants are stored after auto tuning is complete, CH† Auto
tuning status (Xn4 to Xn7) does not turn off.

For details on the auto tuning function, refer to the following.

Page 141, Section 8.2.7

344
 APPENDICES

(12)CH† Input range (Un\G32, Un\G64, Un\G96, Un\G128) Common

Select the set value according to temperature sensor, temperature measurement range*1, output temperature unit
(Celsius (°C)/Fahrenheit ( )/digit) and resolution (1/0.1) which are used with the L60TC4.
*1 In the case of input from other analog modules (such as an A/D converter module) also, set these values.

Ex. When the L60TCTT4 or L60TCTT4BW is used and the following thermocouple is selected
• Thermocouple type: R
• Temperature measurement range: 0 to 1700°C
• Resolution: 1 A
Set 1 in CH† Input range (Un\G32, Un\G64, Un\G96, Un\G128).

When using the L60TCTT4 or L60TCTT4BW, refer to Page 346, Appendix 2 (12) (a).
When using the L60TCRT4 or L60TCRT4BW, refer to Page 350, Appendix 2 (12) (b).

Appendix 2 Details of the Buffer Memory

345
 (a) Setting range of the L60TCTT4, L60TCTT4BW
The following table lists setting values of CH† Input range (Un\G32, Un\G64, Un\G96, Un\G128) and the
corresponding thermocouple types.
The relationship between temperature unit and setting values is as follows.

Setting of CH† Input range (Un\G32,

Item
Un\G64, Un\G96, Un\G128)
1 to 99 Thermocouple is used. (No input from Output temperature unit is Celsius (°C).
other analog modules (such as an A/D
100 to 199 Output temperature unit is Fahrenheit ( ).
converter module)) (1 to 199)
Other analog modules (such as an A/D
200 to 299 Unit is digit.
converter module) are used. (200 to 299)

Automatic setting when changing

the input range*1
CH† Upper limit CH† Lower limit
Celsius CH† Input range setting limiter, setting limiter,
Temperature
Thermocouple (°C)/ (Un\G32, CH† Process CH† Process
measurement Resolution
type Fahrenheit Un\G64, Un\G96, alarm upper alarm lower
range
( )/digit Un\G128) lower limit value, lower limit value,
CH† Process CH† Process
alarm upper alarm lower
upper limit value upper limit value
0 to 1700 °C 1 1 1700 0
R
0 to 3000 1 105 3000 0
-200.0 to 400.0 °C 0.1 38 4000 -2000
0.0 to 400.0 °C 0.1 36 4000 0
2
0 to 1300 °C 1 1300 0
(Default value)
0 to 500 °C 1 11 500 0
0.0 to 500.0 °C 0.1 40 5000 0
K 0 to 800 °C 1 12 800 0
0.0 to 800.0 °C 0.1 41 8000 0
-200.0 to 1300.0 °C 0.1 49 13000 -2000
0 to 1000 1 100 1000 0

0.0 to 1000.0 0.1 130 10000 0

0 to 2400 1 101 2400 0

346
 APPENDICES

Automatic setting when changing

the input range*1
CH† Upper limit CH† Lower limit
Celsius CH† Input range setting limiter, setting limiter,
Temperature
Thermocouple (°C)/ (Un\G32, CH† Process CH† Process
measurement Resolution
type Fahrenheit Un\G64, Un\G96, alarm upper alarm lower
range
( )/digit Un\G128) lower limit value, lower limit value,
CH† Process CH† Process
alarm upper alarm lower
upper limit value upper limit value
0.0 to 400.0 °C 0.1 37 4000 0 A
0 to 500 °C 1 13 500 0
0.0 to 500.0 °C 0.1 42 5000 0
0 to 800 °C 1 14 800 0
0.0 to 800.0 °C 0.1 43 8000 0
-200.0 to 1000.0 °C 0.1 50 10000 -2000
J
0 to 1200 °C 1 3 1200 0
0 to 1000 1 102 1000 0

0.0 to 1000.0 0.1 131 10000 0

0 to 1600 1 103 1600 0

0 to 2100 1 104 2100 0

-200 to 400 °C 1 4 400 -200
-200 to 200 °C 1 21 200 -200
-200.0 to 400.0 °C 0.1 39 4000 -2000
0 to 200 °C 1 19 200 0

Appendix 2 Details of the Buffer Memory

0 to 400 °C 1 20 400 0
T
0.0 to 400.0 °C 0.1 45 4000 0
-300 to 400 1 110 400 -300

0 to 700 1 109 700 0

0.0 to 700.0 0.1 132 7000 0

0 to 1700 °C 1 15 1700 0
S
0 to 3000 1 106 3000 0
0 to 1800 °C 1 16 1800 0
B
0 to 3000 1 107 3000 0

0 to 400 °C 1 17 400 0
0.0 to 700.0 °C 0.1 44 7000 0
E 0 to 1000 °C 1 18 1000 0
-200.0 to 1000.0 °C 0.1 51 10000 -2000
0 to 1800 1 108 1800 0
0 to 1300 °C 1 22 1300 0
N 0.0 to 1000.0 °C 0.1 52 10000 0
0 to 2300 1 111 2300 0

347
 Automatic setting when changing
the input range*1
CH† Upper limit CH† Lower limit
Celsius CH† Input range setting limiter, setting limiter,
Temperature
Thermocouple (°C)/ (Un\G32, CH† Process CH† Process
measurement Resolution
type Fahrenheit Un\G64, Un\G96, alarm upper alarm lower
range
( )/digit Un\G128) lower limit value, lower limit value,
CH† Process CH† Process
alarm upper alarm lower
upper limit value upper limit value
-200 to 200 °C 1 26 200 -200
0 to 400 °C 1 25 400 0

U 0.0 to 600.0 °C 0.1 46 6000 0

-300 to 400 1 115 400 -300

0 to 700 1 114 700 0

0 to 400 °C 1 27 400 0
0.0 to 400.0 °C 0.1 47 4000 0
0 to 900 °C 1 28 900 0
L
0.0 to 900.0 °C 0.1 48 9000 0
0 to 800 1 116 800 0

0 to 1600 1 117 1600 0

0 to 1200 °C 1 23 1200 0
PLII
0 to 2300 1 112 2300 0
0 to 2300 °C 1 24 2300 0
W5Re/W26Re
0 to 3000 1 113 3000 0
Input from other
analog modules 0 to 4000 digit 1 201 4000 0
*2
(0 to 4000)
Input from other
analog modules 0 to 12000 digit 1 202 12000 0
(0 to 12000)*2
Input from other
analog modules 0 to 16000 digit 1 203 16000 0
(0 to 16000)*2
Input from other
analog modules 0 to 20000 digit 1 204 20000 0
(0 to 20000)*2
Input from other
analog modules 0 to 32000 digit 1 205 32000 0
(0 to 32000)*2
*1 When the input range is changed, the set values in some buffer memory areas are initialized automatically and return to
the default value (0).
( Page 351, Appendix 2 (12) (d))
*2 Same as the L60TCRT4, L60TCRT4BW

348
 APPENDICES

Remark
For the following mode and channel, CH† Input range (Un\G32, Un\G64, Un\G96, Un\G128) cannot be set to 201 to 205. If
these values are set, a write data error (error code: †††4H) occurs.

Mode Corresponding channel

Temperature input mode CH1 to CH4
Heating-cooling control (normal mode) CH3, CH4
Temperature control mode
Mix control (normal mode) CH2

Appendix 2 Details of the Buffer Memory

349
 (b) Setting range of the L60TCRT4, L60TCRT4BW
The following table lists setting values of CH† Input range (Un\G32, Un\G64, Un\G96, Un\G128) and the
corresponding platinum resistance thermometer types.

Automatic setting when changing

the input range*1
CH† Upper limit CH† Lower limit
Platinum Celsius CH† Input range setting limiter, setting limiter,
Temperature
resistance (°C)/ (Un\G32, CH† Process CH† Process
measurement Resolution
thermometer Fahrenheit Un\G64, Un\G96, alarm upper alarm lower
range
type ( )/digit Un\G128) lower limit value, lower limit value,
CH† Process CH† Process
alarm upper alarm lower
upper limit value upper limit value
7
-200.0 to 600.0 °C 0.1 6000 -2000
(Default value)
-200.0 to 200.0 °C 0.1 8 2000 -2000
Pt100 -200.0 to 850.0 °C 0.1 54 8500 -2000
-300 to 1100 1 141 1100 -300

-300.0 to 300.0 0.1 143 3000 -3000

-200.0 to 500.0 °C 0.1 5 5000 -2000
-200.0 to 200.0 °C 0.1 6 2000 -2000

JPt100 -200.0 to 640.0 °C 0.1 53 6400 -2000

-300 to 900 1 140 900 -300

-300.0 to 300.0 0.1 142 3000 -3000

Input from other
analog modules 0 to 4000 digit 1 201 4000 0
(0 to 4000)*2
Input from other
analog modules 0 to 12000 digit 1 202 12000 0
(0 to 12000)*2
Input from other
analog modules 0 to 16000 digit 1 203 16000 0
(0 to 16000)*2
Input from other
analog modules 0 to 20000 digit 1 204 20000 0
(0 to 20000)*2
Input from other
analog modules 0 to 32000 digit 1 205 32000 0
*2
(0 to 32000)

*1 When the input range is changed, the set values in some buffer memory areas are initialized automatically and return to
the default value (0).
( Page 351, Appendix 2 (12) (d))
*2 Same as the L60TCTT4, L60TCTT4BW

350
 APPENDICES

Remark
For the following mode and channel, CH† Input range (Un\G32, Un\G64, Un\G96, Un\G128) cannot be set to 201 to 205. If
these values are set, a write data error (error code: †††4H) occurs.

Mode Corresponding channel

Temperature input mode CH1 to CH4
Heating-cooling control (normal mode) CH3, CH4
Temperature control mode
Mix control (normal mode) CH2

A
(c) Resolution
The resolution is applied to the stored values and the set values of particular buffer memory areas as described
in the following table.

Resolution Stored value Set value

1 Value in 1°C ( or digit) unit is stored. Set a value in 1°C ( or digit) unit.

0.1 Value in 0.1°C ( ) unit (tenfold value) is stored. Set a value in 0.1°C ( ) unit (tenfold value).

For applicable buffer memory areas, refer to the following.

Page 334, Appendix 2 (2)

(d) When "Auto-setting at Input Range Change" is set to "1: Enable" on Switch Setting
( Page 108, Section 7.2)
When the input range is changed, the following buffer memory areas are set automatically according to
selected temperature sensor. Set the buffer memory areas again if necessary.

Appendix 2 Details of the Buffer Memory

Buffer memory address
Buffer memory area name Reference
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH† Upper limit setting limiter Un\G55 Un\G87 Un\G119 Un\G151
Page 372, Appendix 2 (31)
CH† Lower limit setting limiter Un\G56 Un\G88 Un\G120 Un\G152
CH† Process alarm lower lower limit value Un\G197 Un\G213 Un\G229 Un\G245
CH† Process alarm lower upper limit value Un\G198 Un\G214 Un\G230 Un\G246
Page 388, Appendix 2 (54)
CH† Process alarm upper lower limit value Un\G199 Un\G215 Un\G231 Un\G247
CH† Process alarm upper upper limit value Un\G200 Un\G216 Un\G232 Un\G248

At the same time, the following buffer memory areas related to the input range is initialized to the default value
(0) automatically. Set the buffer memory areas again if necessary.

Buffer memory address

Buffer memory area name Reference
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH† Set value (SV) setting Un\G34 Un\G66 Un\G98 Un\G130 Page 354, Appendix 2 (14)
CH† Alert set value 1 Un\G38 Un\G70 Un\G102 Un\G134
CH† Alert set value 2 Un\G39 Un\G71 Un\G103 Un\G135
Page 358, Appendix 2 (18)
CH† Alert set value 3 Un\G40 Un\G72 Un\G104 Un\G136
CH† Alert set value 4 Un\G41 Un\G73 Un\G105 Un\G137
CH† AT bias setting Un\G53 Un\G85 Un\G117 Un\G149 Page 370, Appendix 2 (29)
CH† Loop disconnection detection dead band Un\G60 Un\G92 Un\G124 Un\G156 Page 375, Appendix 2 (34)
CH† 2-point sensor compensation offset value
Un\G544 Un\G576 Un\G608 Un\G640 Page 394, Appendix 2 (63)
(measured value)

351
 Buffer memory address
Buffer memory area name Reference
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH† 2-point sensor compensation offset value
Un\G545 Un\G577 Un\G609 Un\G641 Page 394, Appendix 2 (64)
(compensation value)
CH† 2-point sensor compensation gain value
Un\G546 Un\G578 Un\G610 Un\G642 Page 395, Appendix 2 (65)
(measured value)
CH† 2-point sensor compensation gain value
Un\G547 Un\G579 Un\G611 Un\G643 Page 395, Appendix 2 (66)
(compensation value)
CH† Simultaneous temperature rise gradient
Un\G731 Un\G747 Un\G763 Un\G779 Page 408, Appendix 2 (85)
data
CH† Simultaneous temperature rise dead time Un\G732 Un\G748 Un\G764 Un\G780 Page 408, Appendix 2 (86)
These 19 buffer memory areas are set automatically when the input range is changed and Setting change
instruction (YnB) is turned OFF → ON → OFF during setting mode (Setting/operation mode status (Xn1):
OFF).

(e) When "Auto-setting at Input Range Change" is set to "0: Disable" on Switch Setting
( Page 108, Section 7.2)
Set values in the buffer memory ( Page 351, Appendix 2 (12) (d)) can be out of the setting range. (When
the setting range changes according to the change of the input range, the set value before the change can turn
out of the range.) In this case, a write data error (error code: †††4H) occurs in the buffer memory area where
the value turns out of the setting range. Change the input range after setting each buffer memory area with
values within the setting range after the input range change.

(f) Enablement of set contents

Enable the set contents by turning Setting change instruction (YnB) OFF → ON → OFF during the setting
mode (Setting/operation mode status (Xn1): OFF).

(g) Precautions
Soon after the input range is changed, input temperature may be unstable. Do not start the control until
Temperature conversion completion flag (Un\G786) becomes First temperature conversion completed (1H).

352
 APPENDICES

(13)CH† Stop mode setting (Un\G33, Un\G65, Un\G97, Un\G129) Standard Heating-cooling

Set the mode activated at PID control stop.

(a) Setting range and action of L60TC4

The following table lists the relationship.
: Executed ×: Not executed
Action
Mode which can be Set value of CH† Stop mode setting
Temperature Alert
set (Un\G33, Un\G65, Un\G97, Un\G129) PID control
judgment*1 judgment
A
Stop 0 × × ×
Monitor 1 × ×

Alert 2 ×

*1 Means that the L60TC4 checks whether the input temperature is in the temperature measurement range set in the input
range.

However, action of the L60TC4 differs depending on the following settings.

• CH† Unused channel setting (Un\G61, Un\G93, Un\G125, Un\G157) ( Page 376, Appendix 2 (35))
• Setting/operation mode instruction (Yn1) ( Page 330, Appendix 1.2 (1))
• PID continuation flag (Un\G169) ( Page 381, Appendix 2 (43))
• CH† PID control forced stop instruction (YnC to YnF) ( Page 333, Appendix 1.2 (7))
• "Output Setting at CPU Stop Error" (Switch Setting) ( Page 108, Section 7.2)
For details, refer to the following.
• PID control: Page 150, Section 8.2.7 (7)
• Temperature judgment: Page 336, Appendix 2 (3)

Appendix 2 Details of the Buffer Memory

• Alert judgment: Page 166, Section 8.2.11 (5)

(b) Default value

The default values are set to Monitor (1) in all channels.

Default values are set to Monitor (1).

Therefore, channels which temperature sensors are not connected to detect sensor input disconnection and the ALM LED
blinks.
When CH† Unused channel setting (Un\G61, Un\G93, Un\G125, Un\G157) is set to Unused (1), control of the
corresponding channel is not performed. For channels which temperature sensors are not connected to, CH† Unused
channel setting (Un\G61, Un\G93, Un\G125, Un\G157) must be set to Unused (1).

353
 (14)CH† Set value (SV) setting (Un\G34, Un\G66, Un\G98, Un\G130) Standard Heating-cooling

Set the target temperature value of PID control.

(a) Setting range

The setting range is identical to the temperature measurement range of the set input range. ( Page 345,
Appendix 2 (12))
When a value which is out of the setting range is set, a write data error (error code: †††4H) and the following
situations occur.
• Error occurrence flag (Xn2) turns on.
• The error code is stored in Error code (Un\G0).

(b) Setting unit

The value to be set differs depending on the stored value in CH† Decimal point position (Un\G1 to Un\G4).
( Page 334, Appendix 2 (2))

• No decimal place (0): Set a value in 1°C ( or digit) unit.

• One decimal place (1): Set a value in 0.1°C ( ) unit (tenfold value).

(c) Default value

The default values are set to 0 in all channels.

354
 APPENDICES

(15)CH† Proportional band (P) setting (Un\G35, Un\G67, Un\G99, Un\G131) Standard
CH† Heating proportional band (Ph) setting (Un\G35, Un\G67, Un\G99,

Un\G131) Heating-cooling
CH† Cooling proportional band (Pc) setting (Un\G720, Un\G736, Un\G752,

Un\G768) Heating-cooling
Set proportional band (P)/heating proportional band (Ph)/cooling proportional band (Pc) to perform PID control.
(In the heating-cooling control, set heating proportional band (Ph) to Un\G35, Un\G67, Un\G99, Un\G131.) A
(a) Setting range
Set the value within the following ranges for the full scale of the set input range. ( Page 345, Appendix 2
(12))
• Proportional band (P) setting: 0 to 10000 (0.0% to 1000.0%)
• Heating proportional band (Ph) setting: 0 to 10000 (0.0% to 1000.0%)
• Cooling proportional band (Pc) setting: 1 to 10000 (0.1% to 1000.0%)

Ex. When the value of the buffer memory is set as follows

• CH† Input range (Un\G32, Un\G64, Un\G96, Un\G128): 38 (temperature measurement range: -200.0 to
400.0°C)
• CH† Proportional band (P) setting (Un\G35, Un\G67, Un\G99, Un\G131): 100 (10.0%)

(Full scale) × (Proportional band (P) setting) = (400.0°C - (-200.0)) × 0.1 = 60°C
Set the proportional band (P) to 60°C.

Appendix 2 Details of the Buffer Memory

(b) Two-position control
Set the proportional band (P)/heating proportional band (Ph) to 0. (The auto tuning cannot be performed.)
For details on Two-position control, refer to the following.
Page 129, Section 8.2.3

(c) Default value

The default values are set to 30 (3.0%) in all channels.

355
 If the proportional band (P)/heating proportional band (Ph) is set to 0 (0.0%), the auto tuning cannot be performed. To
perform the auto tuning, set proportional band (P)/heating proportional band (Ph) to other than 0.
For details on the auto tuning function, refer to the following.
Page 141, Section 8.2.7

Remark
The proportional band (P) is the variation width of deviation (E) necessary for manipulated value (MV) to vary 0% to 100%.
The following formula shows the relationship between deviation (E) and manipulated value (MV) in proportional action.

MV=Kp E
Kp is proportional gain. The following formula shows proportional band (P) in this case.
1
P= 100
Kp
When the value of the proportional band (P) is increased, the proportional gain (Kp) decreases. Therefore, the manipulated
value (MV) for variation of the deviation (E) becomes small.
When the value of proportional band (P) is decreased, the proportional gain (Kp) increases. Therefore, the manipulated
value (MV) for variation of the deviation (E) becomes large. The following figure shows the proportional band (P) in reverse
action.
Manipulated value
(MV) Deviation
(E)

100%

Manipulated
value (MV) to
deviation (E)

Temperature
0% process value
(PV)
Current temperature Set value
process value (PV) (SV)

MV=Kp E Proportional band (P)

356
 APPENDICES

(16)CH† Integral time (I) setting (Un\G36, Un\G68, Un\G100, Un\G132) Common
Set integral time (I) to perform PID control.

(a) Setting range

The setting range is 0 to 3600 (0 to 3600s).

(b) In the P control or PD control

Set this setting to 0.
For details on control methods, refer to the following.
Page 129, Section 8.2.3 A
(c) Default value
The default values are set to 240 (240s) in all channels.

(17)CH† Derivative time (D) setting (Un\G37, Un\G69, Un\G101, Un\G133) Common
Set derivative time (D) to perform PID control.

(a) Setting range

The setting range is 0 to 3600 (0 to 3600s).

(b) In the P control or PI control

Set this setting to 0.
For details on control methods, refer to the following.
Page 129, Section 8.2.3

(c) Default value

Appendix 2 Details of the Buffer Memory

The default values are set to 60 (60s) in all channels.

357
 (18)CH† Alert set value 1 (Un\G38, Un\G70, Un\G102, Un\G134) Standard Heating-cooling

CH† Alert set value 2 (Un\G39, Un\G71, Un\G103, Un\G135) Standard Heating-cooling

CH† Alert set value 3 (Un\G40, Un\G72, Un\G104, Un\G136) Standard Heating-cooling

CH† Alert set value 4 (Un\G41, Un\G73, Un\G105, Un\G137) Standard Heating-cooling

Set temperature values where CH† Alert 1 (Un\G5 to Un\G8 of b8) to CH† Alert 4 (Un\G5 to Un\G8 of b11) turn
on according to selected alert mode of alert 1 to 4.
For CH† Alert definition (Un\G5 to Un\G8), refer to the following.
Page 336, Appendix 2 (3)
For details on the alert function, refer to the following.
Page 157, Section 8.2.11

(a) Alert mode

Set the alert mode of alert 1 to 4 in the following buffer memory areas. Alert mode of alert 1 to 4 respectively
correspond to alert set value 1 to 4.

(b) Setting range

Buffer memory area Buffer memory address

Reference
name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH† Alert 1 mode setting Un\G192 Un\G208 Un\G224 Un\G240
CH† Alert 2 mode setting Un\G193 Un\G209 Un\G225 Un\G241
Page 386, Appendix 2 (52)
CH† Alert 3 mode setting Un\G194 Un\G210 Un\G226 Un\G242
CH† Alert 4 mode setting Un\G195 Un\G211 Un\G227 Un\G243

The setting range differs depending on the setting of the following buffer memory area. (each full scale differs)
• CH† Input range (Un\G32, Un\G64, Un\G96, Un\G128) ( Page 345, Appendix 2 (12))
Also, the setting range differs depending on alert mode to be set. ( Page 358, Appendix 2 (18) (a))

Alert mode Setting range of alert set value Remarks

No alert ⎯ ⎯
Temperature measurement range of
Upper limit input alert, lower limit input alert Same as with standby
the input range
Upper limit deviation alert, lower limit deviation alert, upper
-(full scale) Same as with standby and
limit deviation alert (using the set value (SV)), lower limit
to +(full scale) standby (second time)
deviation alert (using the set value (SV))
Upper lower limit deviation alert, within-range alert, upper
Same as with standby and
lower limit deviation alert (using the set value (SV)), within- 0 to +(full scale)
standby (second time)
range alert (using the set value (SV))

When a value which is out of the setting range is set, a write data error (error code: †††4H) and the following
situations occur.
• Error occurrence flag (Xn2) turns on.
• The error code is stored in Error code (Un\G0).

358
 APPENDICES

(c) Setting unit

The value to be set differs depending on the stored value in CH† Decimal point position (Un\G1 to Un\G4).
( Page 334, Appendix 2 (2))

• No decimal place (0): Set a value in 1°C ( or digit) unit.

• One decimal place (1): Set a value in 0.1°C ( ) unit (tenfold value).

(d) Write data error

In the following case, a write data error (error code: †††4H) occurs as well as when the setting is out of the
setting value. Error occurrence flag (Xn2) turns on and the error code is stored in Error code (Un\G0).
• When the set value is other than 0 when No alert (0) is set in the alert mode A
(e) Default value
The default values are set to 0 in all channels.

Appendix 2 Details of the Buffer Memory

359
 (19)CH† Upper limit output limiter (Un\G42, Un\G74, Un\G106, Un\G138) Standard

CH† Lower limit output limiter (Un\G43, Un\G75, Un\G107, Un\G139) Standard
CH† Heating upper limit output limiter (Un\G42, Un\G74, Un\G106,

Un\G138) Heating-cooling
CH† Cooling upper limit output limiter (Un\G721, Un\G737, Un\G753, Un\G769)
Heating-cooling

In the standard control, set upper limit value/lower limit value for actual output of manipulated value (MV)
calculated by the PID operation to an external device. In the heating-cooling control, set upper limit value of
heating/cooling for actual output of manipulated value for heating (MVh)/manipulated value for cooling (MVc)
calculated by the PID operation to an external device. Additionally, Un\G42, Un\G74, Un\G106, Un\G138 are
used for heating in the heating-cooling control. During the auto tuning, setting of Heating upper limit output limiter
and Cooling upper limit output limiter are disabled.

(a) Setting range

The following table lists setting range of each buffer memory.

Buffer memory Setting range Remarks

CH† Upper limit output limiter (Un\G42, Set the values to lower limit output limiter value <
Un\G74, Un\G106, Un\G138) upper limit output limiter value.
When lower limit output limiter value ≥ upper limit
output limiter value, write data error (error code:
†††5H) occurs. In addition, if the setting is out of
-50 to 1050 (-5.0% to 105.0%)
CH† Lower limit output limiter (Un\G43, the setting value, a write data error (error code:
Un\G75, Un\G107, Un\G139) †††4H) occurs. When the error occurs, the
following situations occur.
• Error occurrence flag (Xn2) turns on.
• The error code is stored in Error code (Un\G0).
CH† Heating upper limit output limiter If the setting is out of the setting value, a write data
(Un\G42, Un\G74, Un\G106, Un\G138) error (error code: †††4H) occurs. When the error
0 to 1050 (0.0% to 105.0%) occurs, the following situations occur.
CH† Cooling upper limit output limiter
• Error occurrence flag (Xn2) turns on.
(Un\G721, Un\G737, Un\G753, Un\G769)
• The error code is stored in Error code (Un\G0).

● In the standard control, CH† Cooling upper limit output limiter (Un\G721, Un\G737, Un\G753, Un\G769) is invalid even it
is set.
● In the heating-cooling control, lower limit value is not used. When CH† Lower limit output limiter (Un\G43, Un\G75,
Un\G107, Un\G139) is set to other than 0, a write data error (error code: †††2H) occurs.

360
 APPENDICES

(b) Two-position control ( Page 129, Section 8.2.3 (1))

The following table lists Enable/Disable of the setting.

Enable/Disable of the setting in the two-

Buffer memory
position control
CH† Upper limit output limiter (Un\G42, Un\G74, Un\G106, Un\G138)
Disable
CH† Lower limit output limiter (Un\G43, Un\G75, Un\G107, Un\G139)
CH† Heating upper limit output limiter (Un\G42, Un\G74, Un\G106, Un\G138)
Enable
CH† Cooling upper limit output limiter (Un\G721, Un\G737, Un\G753, Un\G769)

(c) Manual control ( Page 139, Section 8.2.5) A

The following table lists Enable/Disable of the setting.

Enable/Disable of the
Buffer memory setting in the manual Remarks
control
CH† Upper limit output limiter When an output exceeds the upper limit output limiter value, the
(Un\G42, Un\G74, Un\G106, manipulated value (MV) of the manual control is fixed (clipped)
Un\G138) to the upper limit output limiter value that is set. When an output
Enable
CH† Lower limit output limiter falls below the lower limit output limiter value, the manipulated
(Un\G43, Un\G75, Un\G107, value (MV) of the manual control is fixed (clipped) to the lower
Un\G139) limit output limiter value that is set.
CH† Heating upper limit output
limiter (Un\G42, Un\G74, Un\G106,
Un\G138)
Disable ⎯
CH† Cooling upper limit output
limiter (Un\G721, Un\G737,

Appendix 2 Details of the Buffer Memory

Un\G753, Un\G769)

(d) Default value

The following table lists the default value of each buffer memory area.

Buffer memory Default value

CH† Upper limit output limiter (Un\G42, Un\G74, Un\G106, Un\G138) 1000 (100.0%)
CH† Lower limit output limiter (Un\G43, Un\G75, Un\G107, Un\G139) 0 (0.0%)
CH† Heating upper limit output limiter (Un\G42, Un\G74, Un\G106, Un\G138)
1000 (100.0%)
CH† Cooling upper limit output limiter (Un\G721, Un\G737, Un\G753, Un\G769)

361
 (20)CH† Output variation limiter setting (Un\G44, Un\G76, Un\G108, Un\G140)
Standard Heating-cooling

Set the limit of an output variation per 1s to regulate a rapid change of the manipulated value (MV).

(a) Setting range

The setting range is 0 or 1 to 1000 (0.1%/s to 100.0%/s). When 0 is set, an output variation is not regulated.

Ex. When the value of the buffer memory is set as follows

• CH† Output variation limiter setting (Un\G44, Un\G76, Un\G108, Un\G140): 10(1.0%/s)
If the manipulated value (MV) rapidly changes by 50%, the variation is regulated to 1%/s. Therefore, it
takes 50s until the output actually changes by 50%.

When setting CH Output variation limiter setting

(Un\G44, Un\G76, Un\G108, Un\G140)
to 10 (1.0%/s)
Manipulated
100%
value (MV)
increased 50%
80% by 50%
Manipulated value
(MV)
50%
1%

1s

0%

Set value (SV)

(b) Two-position control ( Page 129, Section 8.2.3 (1))

The setting is invalid.

(c) Manual control ( Page 139, Section 8.2.5)

The setting is enabled.

(d) Default value

The default values are set to 0 in all channels.

362
 APPENDICES

(21)CH† Sensor correction value setting (Un\G45, Un\G77, Un\G109, Un\G141)

Common

Set the correction value when measured temperature and actual temperature are different.
For details on the sensor compensation function, refer to the following.
Page 223, Section 8.3.2

(a) Setting range

Set the value within the range -5000 to 5000 (-50.00% to 50.00%) of the full scale of the set input range.
( Page 345, Appendix 2 (12)) A
(b) Enablement of setting contents
When 1-point sensor compensation (standard) (0H) is set in Sensor compensation function selection
(Un\G785), the setting contents is enabled. ( Page 413, Appendix 2 (91))

(c) Default value

The default values are set to 0 (0.00%) in all channels.

(22)CH† Adjustment sensitivity (dead band) setting (Un\G46, Un\G78, Un\G110,

Un\G142) Standard Heating-cooling

To prevent a chattering in the two-position control, set the adjustment sensitivity (dead band) for the set value
(SV).

Temperature
process value (PV)

Appendix 2 Details of the Buffer Memory

Adjustment
Set value (SV) sensitivity
(dead band)

Time
ON
Transistor output OFF

For details on the two-position control, refer to the following.

Page 129, Section 8.2.3

(a) Setting range

Set the value within the range 1 to 100 (0.1% to 10.0%) of the full scale of the set input range. ( Page 345,
Appendix 2 (12))

Ex. When the value of the buffer memory is set as follows

• CH† Input range (Un\G32, Un\G64, Un\G96, Un\G128): 38 (temperature measurement range: -200.0 to
400.0°C)
• CH† Adjustment sensitivity (dead band) setting (Un\G46, Un\G78, Un\G110, Un\G142): 10 (1.0%)
(Full scale) × (Adjustment sensitivity (dead band) setting) = (400.0°C - (-200.0)) × 0.01 = 6.0°C
The dead band is the set value (SV) ±6.0°C.

(b) Default value

The default values are set to 5 (0.5%) in all channels.

363
 (23)CH† Control output cycle setting (Un\G47, Un\G79, Un\G111, Un\G143) Standard
CH† Heating control output cycle setting (Un\G47, Un\G79, Un\G111, Un\G143)
Heating-cooling

CH† Cooling control output cycle setting (Un\G722, Un\G738, Un\G754,

Un\G770) Heating-cooling

Set the pulse cycle (ON/OFF cycle) of the transistor output. In the heating-cooling control, the output cycle of the
heating control and cooling control can be set individually. Additionally, Un\G47, Un\G79, Un\G111, Un\G143 are
used for heating in the heating-cooling control.

Manipulated value
(MV) (%)
ON

OFF
Transistor output
Control output cycle

The ON time of the control output cycle is determined by multiplying the control output cycle by the manipulated
value (MV)*1 (%) calculated by PID operation. If the manipulated value (MV)*1 is constant, a pulse of the same
cycle is output repeatedly.
*1 For the heating control output cycle, the manipulated value for heating (MVh) is used. For the cooling control output
cycle, manipulated value for cooling (MVc) is used.

Ex. When 700 (70%) is stored in CH† Manipulated value (MV) (Un\G13 to Un\G16) and the value of the
buffer memory is set as follows
• CH† Control output cycle setting (Un\G47, Un\G79, Un\G111, Un\G143): 100 (100s)
100s × 0.7 (70%) = 70s
The ON time is 70s.
The transistor output turns on for 70s and off for 30s per 100s.

Control output cycle Control output cycle Control output cycle

100s 100s 100s

ON

Manipulated value Manipulated value Manipulated value

(MV)(70%) (MV)(70%) (MV)(70%)
70s 70s 70s

Transistor OFF
output

(a) Setting range

• When the control output cycle unit selection setting on Switch Setting is set to the cycle of 1s: 1 to 100 (1s
to 100s)
• When the control output cycle unit selection setting on Switch Setting is set to the cycle of 0.1s: 5 to 1000
(0.5s to 100.0s)
For details on the control output cycle unit selection setting function, refer to the following.
Page 140, Section 8.2.6

364
 APPENDICES

(b) Default value

• When the control output cycle unit selection setting on Switch Setting is set to the cycle of 1s: 30 (30s)
• When the control output cycle unit selection setting on Switch Setting is set to the cycle of 0.1s: 300
(30.0s)

(24)CH† Primary delay digital filter setting (Un\G48, Un\G80, Un\G112, Un\G144)
Common

The temperature process values (PV) are smoothed and sudden changes are absorbed by using the primary
delay digital filter.
A
Temperature
process value (PV)
When the primary delay
digital filter is not set
Time

Temperature
process value (PV)
When the primary delay
digital filter is set
Time

The time for the temperature process value (PV) to change by 63.3% can be set by the primary delay digital filter
setting (filter setting time).

Temperature
process value (PV)
When the primary delay

Appendix 2 Details of the Buffer Memory

digital filter is not set

Time

Temperature
process value (PV)

When the primary delay

digital filter is set
63.3%
Time

CH Primary delay digital filter setting

(Un\G48, Un\G80, Un\G112, Un\G144)

(a) Setting range

The setting range is 0 or 1 to 100 (1s to 100s). When 0 is set, the primary delay digital filter processing is not
performed.

(b) Default value

The default values are set to 0 in all channels.

365
 (25)CH† Control response parameter (Un\G49, Un\G81, Un\G113, Un\G145)
Standard Heating-cooling

In the simple two-degree-of-freedom PID control, select the response speed to the change of the set value (SV)
from the following three levels: Slow, Normal, and Fast.
For details on the simple two-degree-of-freedom, refer to the following.
Page 153, Section 8.2.8

(a) Setting range

Setting
Set value Description
contents
Set Slow when reducing an overshoot and undershoot to the change of the set value (SV).
0 Slow
However, the settling time is the longest of the three settings.
1 Normal Normal has features between Slow and Fast.
Set Fast when speeding up the response to the change of the set value (SV). However, an
2 Fast
overshoot and undershoot is the largest of the three settings.

Temperature process value (PV) Fast

Normal

Set value (SV) 2

Change
Slow

Set value (SV) 1

Time
Set value (SV) change point

(b) Default value

The default values are set to Slow (0) in all channels.

366
 APPENDICES

(26)CH† AUTO/MAN mode shift (Un\G50, Un\G82, Un\G114, Un\G146) Standard Heating-cooling

Select whether to calculate the manipulated value (MV) by PID operation or to set it manually by the user.

(a) Setting range

Setting
Set value Description
contents
Activates the AUTO mode. The manipulated value (MV) calculated by PID operation is
0 AUTO
used to calculate the ON time of the control cycle.
Activates the MAN mode. The manipulated value (MV) written in CH† MAN output setting A
1 MAN (Un\G51, Un\G83, Un\G115, Un\G147) is used to calculate the ON time of the control
output cycle.

(b) When AUTO mode is shifted to MAN mode

The following operation is performed.
• The manipulated value (MV) calculated by PID operation is transferred to CH† MAN output setting
(Un\G51, Un\G83, Un\G115, Un\G147). (For preventing a rapid change of the manipulated value (MV))
• When the shift to the MAN mode is completed, bits of the corresponding channel of MAN mode shift
completion flag (Un\G30) are set to MAN mode shift completed (1).

AUTO/MAN mode AUTO mode MAN mode

CH AUTO/MAN mode switching
(Un\G50, Un\G82, Un\G114, Un\G146) AUTO (0) MAN (1) AUTO (0)

Man mode shift completion flag MAN mode shift MAN mode shift MAN mode shift
uncompleted (0) completed (1) uncompleted (0)
(Un\G30)

Appendix 2 Details of the Buffer Memory

Executed by the L60TC4

Set the manipulated value (MV) in MAN mode after confirming completion of the mode shift.

(c) When performing auto tuning

Set to AUTO (0). If MAN (1) is set, the auto tuning is not performed.

(d) Default value

The default values are set to AUTO (0) in all channels.

367
 (27)CH† MAN output setting (Un\G51, Un\G83, Un\G115, Un\G147) Standard Heating-cooling

This buffer memory area is used for setting the manipulated value (MV) in the MAN mode.

(a) How to shift the mode

Shift the mode by the following buffer memory area.
• CH† AUTO/MAN mode shift (Un\G50, Un\G82, Un\G114, Un\G146) ( Page 367, Appendix 2 (26))

(b) Setting range

The setting range is different between the standard control and the heating-cooling control. ( Page 126,
Section 8.2.1)
• In standard control: -50 to 1050 (-5.0 to 105.0%)
• In heating-cooling control: -1050 to 1050 (-105.0 to 105.0%)

(c) Enablement of setting contents

Make sure the corresponding bits of MAN mode shift completion flag (Un\G30) has been set to 1 (ON) and
write a value in the MAN output setting.
A value that is written when MAN mode shift completion flag is OFF will be replaced with the manipulated value
(MV) calculated by PID operation by the system.

(d) Default value

The default values are set to 0 (0.0%) in all channels.

368
 APPENDICES

(28)CH† Setting change rate limiter (Un\G52, Un\G84, Un\G116, Un\G148)

Standard Heating-cooling

CH† Setting change rate limiter (temperature rise) (Un\G52, Un\G84, Un\G116,
Un\G148) Standard Heating-cooling
CH† Setting change rate limiter (temperature drop) (Un\G564, Un\G596,
Un\G628, Un\G660) Standard Heating-cooling

Set the change rate of the set value (SV) per a set time unit when the set value (SV) is changed. This setting can
A
regulate a rapid change of the manipulated value (MV). Set a time unit in CH† Setting change rate limiter time
unit setting (Un\G735, Un\G751, Un\G767, Un\G783). ( Page 411, Appendix 2 (89))

Temperature process value (PV)

Set value (SV) 2

Setting change rate limiter

(full scale percentage: 0 to 100%)

Set value (SV) 1

Time

CH Setting change rate limit unit time setting

(Un\G735, Un\G751, Un\G767, Un\G783)

(a) Batch/individual setting of temperature rise and temperature drop

Appendix 2 Details of the Buffer Memory

Setting change rate limiter for the temperature rise and the temperature drop can be set in a batch or
individually. Select it on Switch Setting.
For details on the setting method, refer to the following.
Page 108, Section 7.2
When setting change rate limiter is set individually, Un\G52, Un\G84, Un\G116, Un\G148 is for the temperature
rise. The following table lists the buffer memory areas to be referred to.

Buffer memory address

Batch/Individual Buffer memory area name
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
Batch CH† Setting change rate limiter Un\G52 Un\G84 Un\G116 Un\G148
CH† Setting change rate limiter (temperature rise) Un\G52 Un\G84 Un\G116 Un\G148
Individual CH† Setting change rate limiter (temperature
Un\G564 Un\G596 Un\G628 Un\G660
drop)

For details on the function, refer to the following.

Page 155, Section 8.2.10

(b) Setting range

Set 0 or the value within the range of 1 to 1000 (0.1% to 100.0%) toward the full scale of the set input range.
When 0 is set, the setting is disabled.

(c) Default value

The default values are set to 0 in all channels.

369
 (29)CH† AT bias setting (Un\G53, Un\G85, Un\G117, Un\G149) Standard Heating-cooling

The point set as the set value (SV) in the auto tuning can be rearranged by using this buffer memory area.
The auto tuning function determines each PID constant by performing the two-position control toward the set
value (SV) and making a temperature process value (PV) hunting.
Set CH† AT bias setting (Un\G53, Un\G85, Un\G117, Un\G149) when an overshoot caused by the hunting is
improper.
The auto tuning is performed with having the AT point (the point rearranged by the setting) as its center. When the
auto tuning is completed, the L60TC4 performs a control toward the set value (SV) to which the value set in the
AT bias is added, not the set value (SV) itself.
For details on the auto tuning function, refer to the following.
Page 141, Section 8.2.7

Ex. When AT bias is set to minus value (reverse action)

Temperature process value (PV)

Set value (SV) CH AT bias setting

(Un\G53, Un\G85, Un\G117, Un\G149)
AT point

Time

(a) Setting range

The setting range is from -(full scale) to +(full scale). The setting range depends on the input range setting.
( Page 345, Appendix 2 (12))

Ex. When the value of the buffer memory is set as follows

• CH† Input range (Un\G32, Un\G64, Un\G96, Un\G128): 38 (temperature measurement range -200.0 to
400.0°C, resolution: 0.1)
The setting range is -6000 to 6000.

(b) Setting unit

The value to be set differs depending on the stored value in CH† Decimal point position (Un\G1 to Un\G4).
( Page 334, Appendix 2 (2))

• No decimal place (0): Set a value in 1°C ( or digit) unit.

• One decimal place (1): Set a value in 0.1°C ( ) unit (tenfold value).

(c) Default value

The default values are set to 0 in all channels.

(d) Precautions
For CH† AT bias setting (Un\G53, Un\G85, Un\G117, Un\G149), set the range where PID operation fluctuates
slightly and the control result get no effect.
Depending on the controlled object, accurate PID constants may not be obtained.

370
 APPENDICES

(30)CH† Forward/reverse action setting (Un\G54, Un\G86, Un\G118, Un\G150)

Standard

Select whether to use channels in the forward action or reverse action.

Select the forward action for the cooling control. Select the reverse action for the heating control.
For details on the forward action/reverse action selection function, refer to the following.
Page 203, Section 8.2.18

(a) Setting range

• 0: Forward action A
• 1: Reverse action

(b) Default value

The default values are set to Reverse action (1) in all channels.

Appendix 2 Details of the Buffer Memory

371
 (31)CH† Upper limit setting limiter (Un\G55, Un\G87, Un\G119, Un\G151)
Standard Heating-cooling

CH† Lower limit setting limiter (Un\G56, Un\G88, Un\G120, Un\G152)

Standard Heating-cooling

Upper/lower limit value of the set value (SV) can be set.

(a) Setting range

The setting range is identical to the temperature measurement range of the set input range. ( Page 345,
Appendix 2 (12))
The setting should meet the following conditions.
• CH† Lower limit setting limiter (Un\G56, Un\G88, Un\G120, Un\G152)
< CH† Upper limit setting limiter (Un\G55, Un\G87, Un\G119, Un\G151)

If the above conditions are not met, a write data error (error code: †††5H) occurs.

CH Lower limit setting limiter CH Upper limit setting limiter

(Un\G56, Un\G88, Un\G120, Un\G152) (Un\G55, Un\G87, Un\G119, Un\G151)

Input lower limit Input upper limit

Set value (SV) setting range

(b) Setting unit

The value to be set differs depending on the stored value in CH† Decimal point position (Un\G1 to Un\G4).
( Page 334, Appendix 2 (2))

• No decimal place (0): Set a value in 1°C ( or digit) unit.

• One decimal place (1): Set a value in 0.1°C ( ) unit (tenfold value).

(c) Default value

A default value differs depending on modules to be used.

Default value
Buffer memory
L60TCTT4/L60TCTT4BW L60TCRT4/L60TCRT4BW
CH† Upper limit setting limiter (Un\G55, Un\G87,
1300 6000
Un\G119, Un\G151)
CH† Lower limit setting limiter (Un\G56, Un\G88,
0 -2000
Un\G120, Un\G152)

372
 APPENDICES

(32)CH† Heater disconnection alert setting (Un\G58, Un\G90, Un\G122, Un\G154)

Standard Heating-cooling

Set the set value in heater disconnection detection and off-time current error detection in percentage of the
reference heater current value.
For details on the heater disconnection detection function, refer to the following.
Page 215, Section 8.2.24
For details on the output off-time current error detection function, refer to the following.
Page 220, Section 8.2.25
A
(a) Supported modules
• L60TCTT4BW
• L60TCRT4BW

(b) Setting range

The setting range is 0 to 100 (%).

Ex. To generate Heater disconnection alert with the following conditions

• CT† Reference heater current value (Un\G280 to Un\G287): 100 (10.0A)
• When CT† Heater current process value (Un\G256 to Un\G263) is 80 (8.0A) or less,
set CH† Heater disconnection alert setting (Un\G58, Un\G90, Un\G122, Un\G154) to 80 (%).

Reference heater Heater current

Heater -
current value measurement value 100 - 80
disconnection = 100 - 100 = 100 - 100 = 80(%)
alert setting Reference heater current value 100

Appendix 2 Details of the Buffer Memory

When 0 is set, heater disconnection detection and off-time current error detection are not performed.

(c) Default value

The default values are set to 0 (%) in all channels.

373
 (33)CH† Loop disconnection detection judgment time (Un\G59, Un\G91, Un\G123,

Un\G155) Standard
Errors such as disconnection of resistors, malfunction of an external controller, and errors of the control system
due to troubles such as disconnection of the sensor can be detected by the loop disconnection detection function.
If temperature does not change by 2°C ( ) or more in the Loop disconnection detection judgment time, a loop
disconnection is detected.
For details on the loop disconnection detection function, refer to the following.
Page 204, Section 8.2.19

(a) Setting range

The setting range is 0 to 7200 (s).
Set a value that exceeds the time in which temperature changes by 2°C ( ).

(b) When performing auto tuning

For this setting, the twice value of that of CH† Integral time (I) setting (Un\G36, Un\G68, Un\G100, Un\G132)
is automatically set. ( Page 357, Appendix 2 (16)) However, when this setting is set to 0 (s) at the start of
the auto tuning, Loop disconnection detection judgment time is not stored.

(c) Default value

The default values are set to 480 (s) in all channels.

374
 APPENDICES

(34)CH† Loop disconnection detection dead band (Un\G60, Un\G92, Un\G124,

Un\G156) Standard
To prevent an error alarm of Loop disconnection detection, set a non-alert band (temperature band in which the
loop disconnection is not detected) where the set value (SV) is at the center.

Temperature process value (PV)

CH Loop disconnection detection

dead band A
(Un\G60, Un\G92, Un\G124, Un\G156)
Set value (Set one above the other with
Non-alert area
(SV) the set value (SV) in the center)

Time

For details on the loop disconnection detection function, refer to the following.
Page 204, Section 8.2.19

(a) Setting range

The setting range is identical to the temperature measurement range of the set input range. ( Page 345,
Appendix 2 (12))

Ex. When the value of the buffer memory is set as follows

• CH† Input range (Un\G32, Un\G64, Un\G96, Un\G128): 38 (resolution: 0.1)

Appendix 2 Details of the Buffer Memory

• CH† Loop disconnection detection dead band (Un\G60, Un\G92, Un\G124, Un\G156): 50
(Loop disconnection detection dead band set value) × (resolution) = 50 × 0.1 = 5.0°C
Within the range of the set value (SV) ±5.0°C, Loop disconnection is not detected.

(b) Setting unit

The value to be set differs depending on the stored value in CH† Decimal point position (Un\G1 to Un\G4).
( Page 334, Appendix 2 (2))

• No decimal place (0): Set a value in 1°C ( or digit) unit.

• One decimal place (1): Set a value in 0.1°C ( ) unit (tenfold value).

(c) Default value

The default values are set to 0 in all channels.

375
 (35)CH† Unused channel setting (Un\G61, Un\G93, Un\G125, Un\G157) Standard Heating-cooling

Set this buffer memory area when treating channels that do not control temperature or are not connected with
temperature sensors as "Unused". Setting them as unused channels stops detection of an alert.
For details on the unused channel setting, refer to the following.
Page 106, Section 6.6

(a) Setting range

• 0: Use
• 1: Unused

(b) Default value

The default values are set to Use (0) in all channels.

(c) ON of Default setting registration instruction (Yn9) ( Page 332, Appendix 1.2 (5))
When Default setting registration instruction (Yn9) is turn on from off, CH† Unused channel setting (Un\G61,
Un\G93, Un\G125, Un\G157) is reset to Use (0).
Channels that do not control temperature or are not connected to temperature sensors needs to be set as
unused channels again after settings of other buffer memory areas and non-volatile memories return to the
default values. Set CH† Unused channel setting (Un\G61, Un\G93, Un\G125, Un\G157) to Unused (1) again.

376
 APPENDICES

(36)CH† Memory of PID constants read instruction (Un\G62, Un\G94, Un\G126,

Un\G158) Standard Heating-cooling

PID constants are read from a non-volatile memory and stored in the buffer memory by using this instruction.
Setting this buffer memory area to Requested (1) stores the value backed up in the non-volatile memory in the
buffer memory.

(a) buffer memory areas to store set value of non-volatile memory

The following table lists the buffer memory areas whose set value is read.

Buffer memory address

A
Buffer memory area name Reference
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH† Proportional band (P) setting Un\G35 Un\G67 Un\G99 Un\G131
CH† Heating proportional band (Ph) setting Un\G35 Un\G67 Un\G99 Un\G131 Page 355, Appendix 2 (15)
CH† Cooling proportional band (Pc) setting Un\G720 Un\G736 Un\G752 Un\G768
CH† Integral time (I) setting Un\G36 Un\G68 Un\G100 Un\G132 Page 357, Appendix 2 (16)
CH† Derivative time (D) setting Un\G37 Un\G69 Un\G101 Un\G133 Page 357, Appendix 2 (17)
CH† Loop disconnection detection
Un\G59 Un\G91 Un\G123 Un\G155 Page 374, Appendix 2 (33)
judgment time

(b) Setting range

• 0: Not requested
• 1: Requested

(c) Default value

The default values are set to Not requested (0) in all channels.

Appendix 2 Details of the Buffer Memory

(d) Precautions
When Requested (1) is set, do not perform the following operations. An incorrect value may be stored in the
non-volatile memory.
• Change of the set value of the buffer memory read from the non-volatile memory by this instruction
( Page 378, Appendix 2 (37) (a))
• Memory back up ( Page 235, Section 8.3.4)
• Default setting registration ( Page 332, Appendix 1.2 (5))
• Auto tuning ( Page 141, Section 8.2.7)

● When the initial setting by a programming tool is already configured, PID constants should be backed up to a non-volatile
memory after the auto tuning. Turning on this instruction at the next start-up can omits the auto tuning.

● This instruction is enabled in the setting mode or operation mode. ( Page 324, Appendix 1.1 (2))
However, it is disabled when CH† Auto tuning instruction (Yn4 to Yn7) is ON. ( Page 141, Section 8.2.7)

377
 (37)CH† Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants (Un\G63,
Un\G95, Un\G127, Un\G159) Standard Heating-cooling

The set value to be stored in the buffer memory is automatically backed up to a non-volatile memory by using this
function. By reading the set value that is backed up, when the power is turned on from off or the CPU module is
released from the reset status, another auto tuning can be omitted.
For details on the auto tuning function, refer to the following.
Page 141, Section 8.2.7

(a) buffer memory areas whose set value is backed up to a non-volatile memory
The following table lists the buffer memory areas whose setting is backed up.

Buffer memory address

Buffer memory area name Reference
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH† Proportional band (P) setting Un\G35 Un\G67 Un\G99 Un\G131
CH† Heating proportional band (Ph) setting Un\G35 Un\G67 Un\G99 Un\G131 Page 355, Appendix 2 (15)
CH† Cooling proportional band (Pc) setting Un\G720 Un\G736 Un\G752 Un\G768
CH† Integral time (I) setting Un\G36 Un\G68 Un\G100 Un\G132 Page 357, Appendix 2 (16)
CH† Derivative time (D) setting Un\G37 Un\G69 Un\G101 Un\G133 Page 357, Appendix 2 (17)
CH† Loop disconnection detection
Un\G59 Un\G91 Un\G123 Un\G155 Page 374, Appendix 2 (33)
judgment time

(b) Setting range

• 0: Disable
• 1: Enable

(c) Default value

The default values are set to Disable (0) in all channels.

(d) Precautions
When Enable (1) is set, do not perform the following operations. An incorrect value may be stored in the non-
volatile memory.
• Changing the set value of the buffer memory
• Memory back up ( Page 235, Section 8.3.4)
• Default setting registration ( Page 332, Appendix 1.2 (5))
• Change to Disable (0) during the auto tuning

378
 APPENDICES

(38)Alert dead band setting (Un\G164) Standard Heating-cooling

This setting is for using the alarm function.

For details on the alert function, refer to the following.
Page 157, Section 8.2.11

(a) Setting range

Set the value within the range 0 to 100 (0.0% to 10.0%) of the full scale of the set input range. ( Page 345,
Appendix 2 (12))

A
Ex. When the value of the buffer memory is set as follows
• CH† Input range (Un\G32, Un\G64, Un\G96, Un\G128): 2 (temperature measurement range 0 to 1300°C)
• Alert dead band setting (Un\G164): 5 (0.5%)
(Full scale) × (Alert dead band) = (1300°C - 0°C) × 0.005 = 6.5°C
The dead band is the alert set value (SV) ±6.5°C.

(b) Default value

The default value is set to 5 (0.5%).

(39)Number of alert delay (Un\G165) Standard Heating-cooling

Set the number of sampling for an alert judgment.

By setting number of sampling, when the temperature process value (PV) stays within the alert area until the
number of sampling exceeds the number of alert delay, the alert status will be active.
For details on the alert function, refer to the following.
Page 157, Section 8.2.11

Appendix 2 Details of the Buffer Memory

(a) Setting range
The setting range is 0 to 255 (times).

(b) Default value

The default value is set to 0 (times).

379
 (40)Heater disconnection/output off-time current error detection delay count
(Un\G166) Standard Heating-cooling

Set the limit value for consecutive heater disconnection detections and output off-time current error detections so
that the errors exceeding the limit value triggers an alert judgment.
For details on the heater disconnection detection function, refer to the following.
Page 215, Section 8.2.24
For details on the output off-time current error detection function, refer to the following.
Page 220, Section 8.2.25

(a) Supported modules

• L60TCTT4BW
• L60TCRT4BW

(b) Setting range

The setting range is 3 to 255 (times).

(c) Default value

The default value is set to 3 (times).

(41)Temperature rise completion range setting (Un\G167) Standard Heating-cooling

Set the vertical range of the temperature rise completion range.

When the temperature process value (PV) meets the following conditions, the temperature rise is completed.
• Set value (SV) - Temperature rise completion range ≤ Temperature process value (PV) ≤ Set value (SV) +
Temperature rise completion range

Temperature rise
completion range (+)
Setting value
Temperature rise
Set value (SV)
judgment range
Temperature rise
completion range (-)

When CH† Temperature process value (PV) (Un\G9 to Un\G12) enters the temperature rise judgment range,
CH† Temperature rise judgment flag (Un\G17 to Un\G20) is set to Within temperature rise completion range (1).
(Set the time from the temperature rise completion to Within temperature rise completion range (1) in
Temperature rise completion soak time setting (Un\G168).)

(a) Setting range

• When the temperature unit of the input range is °C: 1 to 10 (°C)
• When the temperature unit of the Input range is : 1 to 10 ( )
• Other than above: 1 to 10 (%) of the full scale

(b) Default value

The default value is set to 1.

380
 APPENDICES

(42)Temperature rise completion soak time setting (Un\G168) Standard Heating-cooling

Set the delay time for CH† Temperature rise judgment flag (Un\G17 to Un\G20) ( Page 340, Appendix 2 (6))
to be set to Within temperature rise completion range (1).

(a) Setting range

The setting range is 0 to 3600 (min).

(b) Default value

The default value is set to 0 (min).
A
(43)PID continuation flag (Un\G169) Standard Heating-cooling

Set the operation status at the time when the mode has shifted from the operation mode to the setting mode
(Setting/operation mode instruction (Yn1) ON → OFF).
For details on the relationship between this flag and the control status, refer to the following.
• PID control: Page 134, Section 8.2.3 (6)
• Temperature judgment: Page 336, Appendix 2 (3)
• Alert judgment: Page 166, Section 8.2.11 (5)

(a) Setting range

• 0: Stop
• 1: Continue

(b) Default value

The default value is set to Stop (0).

Appendix 2 Details of the Buffer Memory

(44)Heater disconnection correction function selection (Un\G170) Standard Heating-cooling

Set whether to use the heater disconnection correction function or not.

For details on the heater disconnection correction function, refer to the following.
Page 217, Section 8.2.24 (3)

(a) Supported modules

• L60TCTT4BW
• L60TCRT4BW

(b) Setting range

• 0: Not use the heater disconnection correction function
• 1: Use the heater disconnection correction function

(c) Default value

The default value is set to Not use the heater disconnection correction function (0).

381
 (45)Transistor output monitor ON delay time setting (Un\G175) Standard Heating-cooling

Set the delay time of the ON delay output flag.

Set this buffer memory area to perform the heater disconnection detection with an input module.
For ON delay output flag, refer to the following.
Page 341, Appendix 2 (7)
For details on the ON delay output function, refer to the following.
Page 174, Section 8.2.14

(a) Setting range

The setting range is 0 or 1 to 50 (10 to 500ms).
When 0 is set, ON delay output flag is not set to 1 (ON).

(b) Default value

The default value is set to 0.

(46)CT monitor method switching (Un\G176) Standard Heating-cooling

Set the method for performing the heater current measurement.

(a) Supported modules

• L60TCTT4BW
• L60TCRT4BW

(b) Setting range

• 0: ON current/OFF current
• 1: ON current

When ON current/OFF current (0) is set, the present current value of the current sensor (CT) is measured.
Selecting ON current (1) fixes the current value of the heater being OFF as the current value of the heater
previously being ON.

(c) Default value

The default value is set to ON current/OFF current (0).

382
 APPENDICES

(47)CH† Manipulated value (MV) for output with another analog module (Un\G177

to Un\G180) Standard
CH† Manipulated value of heating (MVh) for output with another analog

module (Un\G177 to Un\G180) Heating-cooling

CH† Manipulated value of cooling (MVc) for output with another analog

module (Un\G708 to Un\G711) Heating-cooling

The values stored in the following buffer memory areas are converted for other analog modules such as a D/A A
converter module and stored in these buffer memory areas.

Buffer memory address

Buffer memory area name Reference
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH† Manipulated value (MV) Un\G13 Un\G14 Un\G15 Un\G16
CH† Manipulated value for heating (MVh) Un\G13 Un\G14 Un\G15 Un\G16 Page 339, Appendix 2 (5)
CH† Manipulated value for cooling (MVc) Un\G704 Un\G705 Un\G706 Un\G707

Un\G177 to Un\G180 are used for heating in the heating-cooling control.

The store range differs depending on the resolution set in the following buffer memory area. (0 to 4000/0 to
12000/0 to 16000/0 to 20000)
• Resolution of the manipulated value for output with another analog module (Un\G181) ( Page 384,
Appendix 2 (48))
For details, refer to the following.
Page 173, Section 8.2.13 (2)

Appendix 2 Details of the Buffer Memory

When the device which performs heating or cooling can receive only the analog input, use other analog modules (such as
D/A converter module) to convert the digital output to the analog input.

383
 (48)Resolution of the manipulated value for output with another analog module
(Un\G181) Standard Heating-cooling

Set the resolution of the following buffer memory areas. ( Page 339, Appendix 2 (5))
• CH† Manipulated value (MV) (Un\G13 to Un\G16)
• CH† Manipulated value for heating (MVh) (Un\G13 to Un\G16)
• CH† Manipulated value for cooling (MVc) (Un\G704 to Un\G707)
For details, refer to the following.
Page 173, Section 8.2.13 (2)

(a) Setting range

• 0: 0 to 4000
• 1: 0 to 12000
• 2: 0 to 16000
• 3: 0 to 20000
The manipulated value (MV) reflecting the resolution is stored in the following buffer memory areas.
( Page 383, Appendix 2 (47))
• CH† Manipulated value (MV) for output with another analog module (Un\G177 to Un\G180)
• CH† Manipulated value of heating (MVh) for output with another analog module (Un\G177 to Un\G180)
• CH† Manipulated value of cooling (MVc) for output with another analog module (Un\G708 to Un\G711)

(b) Enablement of setting contents

Enable the setting contents by turning Setting change instruction (YnB) OFF → ON → OFF during the setting
mode (Setting/operation mode status (Xn1): OFF).

(c) Default value

The default value is set to 0 to 4000 (0).

(49)Cold junction temperature compensation selection (Un\G182) Common

Select whether to perform the cold junction temperature compensation using a standard terminal block or not to
perform the cold junction temperature compensation.

(a) Supported modules

• L60TCTT4
• L60TCTT4BW

(b) Setting range

• 0:Use Standard Terminal Block
• 1: This setting cannot be used.
• 2: Not use cold junction temperature compensation

(c) Default value

The default value is set to Use Standard Terminal Block (0).

384
 APPENDICES

(50)Control switching monitor (Un\G183) Common

The setting contents of the mode selection set on Switch Setting are stored in this buffer memory area. The mode
in operation can be confirmed.
The following table lists the stored value and the contents.

Mode
Stored value
Control mode
0H Standard control
1H Heating-cooling control (normal mode)
A
2H Temperature control mode Heating-cooling control (expanded mode)
3H Mix control (normal mode)
4H Mix control (expanded mode)
100H Temperature input mode

Select the mode on Switch Setting.

For details on the setting method, refer to the following.
Page 108, Section 7.2
For details on the modes, refer to the following.
Page 116, Section 8.1, Page 126, Section 8.2.1

(51)CH† Auto tuning mode selection (Un\G184 to Un\G187) Standard Heating-cooling

Select the auto tuning mode from the following two modes according to the controlled object to be used.

Auto tuning mode Description

Appendix 2 Details of the Buffer Memory

The standard mode is appropriate for most controlled objects. This mode is especially suitable
for controlled objects that have an extremely slow response speed or can be affected by noise
or disturbance.
Standard mode However, PID constants of slow response (low gain) may be calculated from controlled objects
whose ON time or OFF time in the auto tuning is only around 10s.
In this case, PID constants of fast response can be calculated by selecting the high response
mode and performing the auto tuning.
This mode is suitable for controlled objects whose ON time or OFF time in the auto tuning is
only around 10s. PID constants of fast response (high gain) can be calculated.
High response mode However, the temperature process value (PV) may oscillates near the set value (SV) because
of the too high gain of the PID constants calculated. In this case, select the normal mode and
perform the auto tuning.

For details on the auto tuning function, refer to the following.

Page 141, Section 8.2.7

(a) Setting range

• 0: Standard mode
• 1: High response mode

(b) Default value

The default values are set to Standard mode (0) in all channels.

385
 (52)CH† Alert 1 mode setting (Un\G192, Un\G208, Un\G224, Un\G240) Standard Heating-cooling

CH† Alert 2 mode setting (Un\G193, Un\G209, Un\G225 Un\G241) Standard Heating-cooling

CH† Alert 3 mode setting (Un\G194, Un\G210, Un\G226, Un\G242) Standard Heating-cooling

CH† Alert 4 mode setting (Un\G195, Un\G211, Un\G227, Un\G243) Standard Heating-cooling

Set the alert mode of alert 1 to 4.

For details on the alert function, refer to the following.
Page 157, Section 8.2.11

(a) Alert mode and alert set value

Any alert set value can be set in each alert mode of alert 1 to 4 selected in this setting. Set the alert set value 1
to 4 in the following buffer memory areas. Alert set values 1 to 4 respectively correspond to alert modes of alert
1 to 4.

Buffer memory address

Buffer memory area name Reference
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH† Alert set value 1 Un\G38 Un\G70 Un\G102 Un\G134
CH† Alert set value 2 Un\G39 Un\G71 Un\G103 Un\G135
Page 358, Appendix 2 (18)
CH† Alert set value 3 Un\G40 Un\G72 Un\G104 Un\G136
CH† Alert set value 4 Un\G41 Un\G73 Un\G105 Un\G137

(b) Setting range

The following table lists set values and setting ranges which are available for alert set values set in each alert
mode.

Set
Alert mode Setting range of alert set value
value
0 - (no alert) ⎯
1 Upper limit input alert Within the temperature measurement range of the set input range
2 Lower limit input alert ( Page 345, Appendix 2 (12))
3 Upper limit deviation alert
-(full scale) to +(full scale)
4 Lower limit deviation alert
5 Upper lower limit deviation alert
0 to +(full scale)
6 Within-range alert
7 Upper limit input alert with standby Within the temperature measurement range of the set input range
8 Lower limit input alert with standby ( Page 345, Appendix 2 (12))
9 Upper limit deviation alert with standby
-(full scale) to +(full scale)
10 Lower limit deviation alert with standby
11 Upper lower limit deviation alert with standby 0 to +(full scale)
12 Upper limit deviation alert with standby (second time)
-(full scale) to +(full scale)
13 Lower limit deviation alert with standby (second time)
Upper lower limit deviation alert with standby (second
14 0 to +(full scale)
time)
15 Upper limit deviation alert (using the set value (SV))
-(full scale) to +(full scale)
16 Lower limit deviation alert (using the set value (SV))
17 Upper lower limit deviation alert (using the set value (SV))
0 to +(full scale)
18 Within-range alert (using the set value (SV))

386
 APPENDICES

Set
Alert mode Setting range of alert set value
value
Upper limit deviation alert with standby (using the set
19
value (SV))
-(full scale) to +(full scale)
Lower limit deviation alert with standby (using the set
20
value (SV))
Upper lower limit deviation alert with standby (using the
21 0 to +(full scale)
set value (SV))
Upper limit deviation alert with standby (second time)
22
(using the set value (SV))
-(full scale) to +(full scale)
Lower limit deviation alert with standby (second time)
23
(using the set value (SV)) A
Upper lower limit deviation alert with standby (second
24 0 to +(full scale)
time) (using the set value (SV))

(c) Enablement of setting contents

Enable the setting contents by turning Setting change instruction (YnB) OFF → ON → OFF during the setting
mode (Setting/operation mode status (Xn1): OFF).
When the set value is out of the range, a write data error (error code: †††4H) occurs, and the L60TC4
operates with the previous set value. Turning Setting change instruction (YnB) OFF → ON → OFF after the
error occurrence and setting a value within the range operate the L60TC4 with the new set value.

(d) Default value

The default values are set to 0 in all channels.

(53)CH† Process alarm alert output enable/disable setting (Un\G196, Un\G212,

Un\G228, Un\G244) Temperature
Input

Appendix 2 Details of the Buffer Memory

Set whether to enable or disable alert output of process alarm. For details on the process alarm, refer to the
following.
Page 120, Section 8.1.3 (1)

(a) Setting range

• 0: Enable
• 1: Disable

(b) Enablement of setting contents

Enable the setting contents by turning Setting change instruction (YnB) OFF → ON → OFF during the setting
mode (Setting/operation mode status (Xn1): OFF).

(c) Default value

The default values are set to Disable (1) in all channels.

387
 (54)CH† Process alarm lower lower limit value (Un\G197, Un\G213, Un\G229,
Un\G245) Temperature
Input

CH† Process alarm lower upper limit value (Un\G198, Un\G214, Un\G230,
Un\G246) Temperature
Input

CH† Process alarm upper lower limit value (Un\G199, Un\G215, Un\G231,
Un\G247) Temperature
Input

CH† Process alarm upper upper limit value (Un\G200, Un\G216, Un\G232,
Un\G248) Temperature
Input

Set the lower lower limit value, lower upper limit value, upper lower value, and upper upper limit of process alarm.

(a) Setting range

The setting range should meet the both of the following.
• Within the temperature measurement range of set input range ( Page 345, Appendix 2 (12))
• Process alarm lower lower limit value ≤ Process alarm lower upper limit value ≤ Process alarm upper
lower limit value ≤ Process alarm upper upper limit value (If the setting is out of the setting value, out of
range error (error code: †††8H) occurs.)

(b) Setting unit

The value to be set differs depending on the stored value in CH† Decimal point position (Un\G1 to Un\G4).
( Page 334, Appendix 2 (2))

• No decimal place (0): Set a value in 1°C ( or digit) unit.

• One decimal place (1): Set a value in 0.1°C ( ) unit (tenfold value).

(c) Enablement of setting contents

Enable the setting contents by turning Setting change instruction (YnB) OFF → ON → OFF during the setting
mode (Setting/operation mode status (Xn1): OFF).

(d) Default value

Default value
Item
L60TCTT4/L60TCTT4BW L60TCRT4/L60TCRT4BW
CH† Process alarm lower lower
0 -2000
limit value
CH† Process alarm lower upper
0 -2000
limit value
CH† Process alarm upper lower
1300 6000
limit value
CH† Process alarm upper upper
1300 6000
limit value

388
 APPENDICES

(55)CH† Rate alarm alert output enable/disable setting (Un\G201, Un\G217,

Un\G233, Un\G249) Temperature
Input

Set whether to enable or disable alert output of rate alarm. For details on the rate alarm, refer to the following.
Page 122, Section 8.1.3 (2)

(a) Setting range

• 0: Enable
• 1: Disable

(b) Enablement of setting contents A

Enable the setting contents by turning Setting change instruction (YnB) OFF → ON → OFF during the setting
mode (Setting/operation mode status (Xn1): OFF).

(c) Default value

The default values are set to Enable (1) in all channels.

(56)CH† Rate alarm alert detection cycle (Un\G202, Un\G218, Un\G234,

Un\G250) Temperature
Input

Set the check cycle of the temperature process value (PV) for the rate alarm. Set the frequency of checks in the
unit of sampling cycles.
The check cycle can be calculated from the following formula.
• Rate alarm alert detection cycle = Set value of Rate alarm alert detection cycle × Sampling cycle

(a) Setting range

The setting range is 1 to 6000 (times).

Appendix 2 Details of the Buffer Memory

(b) Enablement of setting contents
Enable the setting contents by turning Setting change instruction (YnB) OFF → ON → OFF during the setting
mode (Setting/operation mode status (Xn1): OFF).

(c) Default value

The default values are set to Every sampling cycle (1) in all channels.

389
 (57)CH† Rate alarm upper limit value (Un\G203, Un\G219, Un\G235, Un\G251) Temperature
Input

CH† Rate alarm lower limit value (Un\G204, Un\G220, Un\G236, Un\G252) Temperature
Input

Set the rate alarm upper limit value and lower limit value.

(a) Setting range

The setting is -32768 to 32767.

(b) Setting unit

The value to be set differs depending on the stored value in CH† Decimal point position (Un\G1 to Un\G4).
( Page 334, Appendix 2 (2))

• No decimal place (0): Set a value in 1°C ( or digit) unit.

• One decimal place (1): Set a value in 0.1°C ( ) unit (tenfold value).

(c) Enablement of setting contents

Enable the setting contents by turning Setting change instruction (YnB) OFF → ON → OFF during the setting
mode (Setting/operation mode status (Xn1): OFF).

(d) Default value

The default values are set to 0 in all channels.

(58)CT† Heater current process value (Un\G256 to Un\G263) Standard Heating-cooling

The heater current value which L60TCTT4BW or L60TCRT4BW detects is stored in this buffer memory area. The
current values within the range of the current sensor selected in CT† CT selection (Un\G272 to Un\G279)
( Page 392, Appendix 2 (60)) is stored.

(a) Supported module

• L60TCTT4BW
• L60TCRT4BW

To perform the measurement of the heater current, the following buffer memory areas need to be set.
• CT† CT input channel assignment setting (Un\G264 to Un\G271) ( Page 391, Appendix 2 (59))
• CT† Reference heater current value (Un\G280 to Un\G287) ( Page 393, Appendix 2 (61))

If the both are set to 0, the heater current cannot be measured. If either of them is not set, the heater current cannot be
measured precisely.

390
 APPENDICES

(59)CT† CT input channel assignment setting (Un\G264 to Un\G271) Standard Heating-cooling

Set the assignment of each current sensor (CT) input to the channels.

(a) Supported modules

• L60TCTT4BW
• L60TCRT4BW

(b) Correspondence between CT input terminal and buffer memory address

CT input terminal Buffer memory address A

CT1 Un\G264
CT2 Un\G265
CT3 Un\G266
CT4 Un\G267
CT5 Un\G268
CT6 Un\G269
CT7 Un\G270
CT8 Un\G271

(c) Setting range

• 0: Unused
• 1: CH1
• 2: CH2
• 3: CH3
• 4: CH4

Appendix 2 Details of the Buffer Memory

(d) Default value
The default values are set to Unused (0) for all terminals.

● If a three-phase heater is used, the same channel should be assigned to two current sensor (CT) inputs.
For setting examples, refer to the following.
Page 105, Section 6.5
● In the heating-cooling control, CH3 and CH4 cannot be assigned to this setting.
In the mix control, CH2 cannot be assigned to this setting.

391
 (60)CT† CT selection (Un\G272 to Un\G279) Standard Heating-cooling

Select the current sensor to be connected to each current sensor (CT) input.

(a) Supported modules

• L60TCTT4BW
• L60TCRT4BW

(b) Setting range

• 0: When CTL-12-S36-8 is used (0.0 to 100.0A)
• 1: When CTL-6-P(-H) is used (0.00 to 20.00A)
• 2: When CT ratio setting is used (0.0A to 100.0A)

(c) Current sensor (CT) to be used and buffer memory setting

When using a current sensor (CT) other than CTL-12-S36-8 and CTL-6-P(-H), set the number of second-
winding (turns) of the current sensor (CT) to be connected in CT† CT ratio setting (Un\G288 to Un\G295).
Set the buffer memory area as follows according to the specification of the current sensor (CT) to be used.
CT† CT ratio setting (Un\G288
Current sensor (CT) to be CT† CT Selection
to Un\G295) ( Page 393, Note
used (Un\G272 to Un\G279)
Appendix 2 (62))
When CTL-12-S36-8 is used
CTL-12-S36-8 Setting not necessary The product is
(0.0A to 100.0A) (0)
discontinued, though it
When CTL-6-P(-H) is used
CTL-6-P Setting not necessary can be used.
(0.00A to 20.00A) (1)
Products of
When CTL-6-P(-H) is used
U.R.D.Co., CTL-6-P-H Setting not necessary ⎯
(0.00A to 20.00A) (1)
LTD.
When CT ration setting is used Set 1000, which is the number of
CTL-12-S36-10 ⎯
(0.0A to 100.0A) (2) second-winding (turns).
When CT ration setting is used Set 1000, which is the number of
CTL-12-S56-10 ⎯
(0.0A to 100.0A) (2) second-winding (turns).
Current sensors (CT)
Set the number of second-winding
When CT ration setting is used whose number of second-
Other current sensors(CT) (turns) depending on the current
(0.0A to 100.0A) (2) wonding (turns) is 600 to
sensor (CT) specification.
9999 can be used.

For the URL of U.R.D.Co., LTD., refer to the following.

Page 82, Section 5.2 (4)

(d) Enablement of setting contents

Enable the setting contents by turning Setting change instruction (YnB) OFF → ON → OFF during the setting
mode (Setting/operation mode status (Xn1): OFF).

(e) Occurrence of write data error

In the following case, a write data error (error code: †††4H) occurs as when the setting is out of the setting
value. Error occurrence flag (Xn2) turns on and the error code is stored in Error code (Un\G0).
• When the set value of CT† CT ratio setting (Un\G288 to Un\G295) is out of the setting when Setting
change instruction (YnB) is turned OFF → ON → OFF

(f) Default value

The default values are set to When CTL-12-S36-8 is used (0.0 to 100.0A) (0) for all terminals.

392
 APPENDICES

When CT ratio setting is used (0.0 to 100.0A) (2) is selected, the setting of CT† CT ratio setting (Un\G288 to Un\G295) is
enabled. In advance, set CT† CT ratio setting (Un\G288 to Un\G295) corresponding to the sensor to be connected. After
that, select When CT ratio setting is used (0.0 to 100.0A) (2).

(61)CT† Reference heater current value (Un\G280 to Un\G287) Standard Heating-cooling

Set the reference value of CT† Heater current process value (Un\G256 to Un\G263) of when the heater is turned
on ( Page 390, Appendix 2 (58)).
A
(a) Supported modules
• L60TCTT4BW
• L60TCRT4BW

(b) Setting range

The setting range is within the heater current range of the current sensor selected in CT† CT selection
(Un\G272 to Un\G279). ( Page 392, Appendix 2 (60))

Setting range Setting of CT† CT selection (Un\G272 to Un\G279)

• When CTL-12-S36-8 is used (0.0 to 100.0A) (0)
0 to 1000 (0.0 to 100.0A)
• When CT ratio setting is used (0.0 to 100.0A) (2)
0 to 2000 (0.00 to 20.00A) When CTL-6-P(-H) is used (0.00 to 20.00A) (1)

(c) Default value

The default values are set to 0 (0.0A) for all terminals.

Appendix 2 Details of the Buffer Memory

(62)CT† CT ratio setting (Un\G288 to Un\G295) Standard Heating-cooling

Set the number of second-winding (turning number) of the current sensor (CT) to be connected.
This buffer memory area is available only when CT† CT selection (Un\G272 to Un\G279) is set to When CT ratio
setting is used (0.0 to 100.0A) (2). ( Page 392, Appendix 2 (60))

(a) Supported modules

• L60TCTT4BW
• L60TCRT4BW

(b) Setting range

The setting range is 600 to 9999.

(c) Default value

The default values are set to 800 for all terminals.

393
 (63)CH† 2-point sensor compensation offset value (measured value) (Un\G544,
Un\G576, Un\G608, Un\G640) Common
The measured value of temperature corresponding to the offset value of the 2-point sensor compensation is
stored in this buffer memory area.
The value to be stored differs depending on the stored value in CH† Decimal point position (Un\G1 to Un\G4).
( Page 334, Appendix 2 (2))
• No decimal place (0): stored as it is.
• One decimal place (1): stored after a multiplication by 10.
For details on the 2-point sensor compensation function, refer to the following.
Page 227, Section 8.3.2 (2)

(a) Enablement of the stored value

Turn Setting change instruction (YnB) OFF → ON → OFF during the setting mode (Setting/operation mode
status (Xn1): OFF) to enable stored contents.

(64)CH† 2-point sensor compensation offset value (compensation value)

(Un\G545, Un\G577, Un\G609, Un\G641) Common
Set the temperature of the offset value of the 2-point sensor compensation.
For details on the 2-point sensor compensation function, refer to the following.
Page 227, Section 8.3.2 (2)

(a) Setting range

The setting range is identical to the temperature measurement range of the set input range. ( Page 345,
Appendix 2 (12))

(b) Setting unit

The value to be set differs depending on the stored value in CH† Decimal point position (Un\G1 to Un\G4).
( Page 334, Appendix 2 (2))

• No decimal place (0): Set a value in 1°C ( or digit) unit.

• One decimal place (1): Set a value in 0.1°C ( ) unit (tenfold value).

(c) Enablement of setting contents

Enable the setting contents by turning Setting change instruction (YnB) OFF → ON → OFF during the setting
mode (Setting/operation mode status (Xn1): OFF).

(d) Default value

The default values are set to 0 in all channels.

394
 APPENDICES

(65)CH† 2-point sensor compensation gain value (measured value) (Un\G546,

Un\G578, Un\G610, Un\G642) Common
The measured value of temperature corresponding to the gain value of the 2-point sensor compensation is stored
in this buffer memory area.
The value to be stored differs depending on the stored value in CH† Decimal point position (Un\G1 to Un\G4).
( Page 334, Appendix 2 (2))
• No decimal place (0): stored as it is.
• One decimal place (1): stored after a multiplication by 10.
For details on the 2-point sensor compensation function, refer to the following. A
Page 227, Section 8.3.2 (2)

(a) Enablement of the stored value

Turn Setting change instruction (YnB) OFF → ON → OFF during the setting mode (Setting/operation mode
status (Xn1): OFF) to enable stored contents.

(66)CH† 2-point sensor compensation gain value (compensation value) (Un\G547,

Un\G579, Un\G611, Un\G643) Common
Set temperature of gain value of the 2-point sensor compensation.
For details on the 2-point sensor compensation function, refer to the following.
Page 227, Section 8.3.2 (2)

(a) Setting range

The setting range is identical to the temperature measurement range of the set input range. ( Page 345,
Appendix 2 (12))

Appendix 2 Details of the Buffer Memory

(b) Setting unit
The value to be set differs depending on the stored value in CH† Decimal point position (Un\G1 to Un\G4).
( Page 334, Appendix 2 (2))

• No decimal place (0): Set a value in 1°C ( or digit) unit.

• One decimal place (1): Set a value in 0.1°C ( ) unit (tenfold value).

(c) Enablement of setting contents

Enable the setting contents by turning Setting change instruction (YnB) OFF → ON → OFF during the setting
mode (Setting/operation mode status (Xn1): OFF).

(d) Default value

The default values are set to 0 in all channels.

395
 (67)CH† 2-point sensor compensation offset latch request (Un\G548, Un\G580,
Un\G612, Un\G644) Common
This request is for storing temperature process value (PV) as 2-point sensor compensation offset value to the
following buffer memory area.
• CH† 2-point sensor compensation offset value (measured value) (Un\G544, Un\G576, Un\G608, Un\G640)
( Page 394, Appendix 2 (63))
For details on the 2-point sensor compensation function, refer to the following.
Page 227, Section 8.3.2 (2)

(a) Setting range

• 0: No request
• 1: Latch request

(b) Default value

The default values are set to No request (0) in all channels.

(68)CH† 2-point sensor compensation offset latch completion (Un\G549, Un\G581,

Un\G613, Un\G645) Common
When 2-point sensor compensation offset value is stored, 1 is stored in this buffer memory area, which is Latch
completed (1).
When CH† 2-point sensor compensation offset latch request (Un\G548, Un\G580, Un\G612, Un\G644) is set to
No request (0), 0 is stored in this buffer memory area, which is No request (0). ( Page 396, Appendix 2 (67))
For details on the 2-point sensor compensation function, refer to the following.
Page 227, Section 8.3.2 (2)

396
 APPENDICES

(69)CH† 2-point sensor compensation gain latch request (Un\G550, Un\G582,

Un\G614, Un\G646) Common
This is a request for storing temperature process value (PV) as 2-point sensor compensation gain value to the
following buffer memory area.
• CH† 2-point sensor compensation gain value (measured value) (Un\G546, Un\G578, Un\G610, Un\G642)
( Page 395, Appendix 2 (65))
For details on the 2-point sensor compensation function, refer to the following.
Page 227, Section 8.3.2 (2)
A
(a) Setting range
• 0: No request
• 1: Latch request

(b) Default value

The default values are set to No request (0) in all channels.

(70)CH† 2-point sensor compensation gain latch completion (Un\G551, Un\G583,

Un\G615, Un\G647) Common
When 2-point sensor compensation gain value is stored, 1 is stored in this buffer memory area, which is Latch
completed (1).
When CH† 2-point sensor compensation gain latch request (Un\G550, Un\G582, Un\G614, Un\G646) is set to
No request (0), 0 is stored in this buffer memory area, which is No request (0). ( Page 397, Appendix 2 (69))
For details on the 2-point sensor compensation function, refer to the following.
Page 227, Section 8.3.2 (2)

Appendix 2 Details of the Buffer Memory

397
 (71)CH† AT simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation flag (Un\G573,

Un\G605, Un\G637, Un\G669) Standard

The status when simultaneous temperature rise AT (auto tuning) calculates simultaneous temperature rise
parameter is stored in this buffer memory area.
• 0: OFF
• 1: ON

b15 to b3 b2 b1 b0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Bit data from b15 to b3 are fixed to 0.

Bit Flag name Description

AT simultaneous temperature rise This flag is set to 1 (ON) when the simultaneous temperature rise parameter*1
b0
parameter calculation completion is calculated by simultaneous temperature rise AT.
AT simultaneous temperature rise This flag is set to 1 (ON) when the simultaneous temperature rise parameter*1
b1
parameter calculation error status cannot be calculated by simultaneous temperature rise AT.
Simultaneous temperature rise AT This flag is set to 1 (ON) when the simultaneous temperature rise AT cannot
b2
disable status be performed.
b3 to b15 - (fixed to 0) - (Unused)

*1 Indicates the values of CH† Simultaneous temperature rise gradient data (Un\G731, Un\G747, Un\G763, Un\G779) and
CH† Simultaneous temperature rise dead time (Un\G732, Un\G748, Un\G764, Un\G780).

This area is enabled only for the following channels (channels of the standard control).
• CH1 to CH4 when the standard control is used
• CH3 and CH4 when mix control (normal mode) or mix control (expanded mode) is used

For details on the simultaneous temperature rise function, refer to the following.
Page 190, Section 8.2.17

398
 APPENDICES

(72)CH† Self-tuning setting (Un\G574, Un\G606, Un\G638, Un\G670) Standard

Perform operation setting of self-tuning with this buffer memory area.
For details on the self-tuning function, refer to the following.
Page 175, Section 8.2.15

(a) Setting range

• 0: Do Not Run the ST
• 1: Starting ST (PID Constants Only)
• 2: Starting ST (Simultaneous Temperature Rise Parameter Only*1)
A
• 3: Starting ST (PID constants and Simultaneous Temperature Rise Parameter*1)
• 4: Starting ST and vibration ST (PID Constants Only)
*1 Indicates the values of CH† Simultaneous temperature rise gradient data (Un\G731, Un\G747, Un\G763, Un\G779) and
CH† Simultaneous temperature rise dead time (Un\G732, Un\G748, Un\G764, Un\G780) to be used in the
simultaneous temperature rise function.

For details on the simultaneous temperature rise function, refer to the following.
Page 190, Section 8.2.17

(b) Default value

The default values are set to Do Not Run the ST (0) in all channels.

This area is enabled only for the following channels (channels of the standard control).
• CH1 to CH4 when the standard control is used
• CH3 and CH4 when mix control (normal mode) or mix control (expanded mode) is used

Appendix 2 Details of the Buffer Memory

399
 (73)CH† Self-tuning flag (Un\G575, Un\G607, Un\G639, Un\G671) Standard
The execution status of self-tuning can be monitored in this buffer memory area.
For details on the self-tuning function, refer to the following.
Page 175, Section 8.2.15

b15 to b10 b9 b8 b7 to b2 b1 b0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Fixed to 0 Fixed to 0

The following contents are stored in each bit.

• 0: OFF
• 1: ON

Condition on which value turns to 1 Condition on which value turns to 0

Bit Flag name
(ON) (OFF)
PID auto-correction This flag is set to 1 (ON) when PID This flag is set to 0 (OFF) when either of the
b0
status constants are corrected by the self-tuning. following operation is performed.
• When the operation mode shifts to the setting
mode by turning off from on Setting/operation
mode instruction (Yn1)
• When CH† Unused channel setting
(Un\G61, Un\G93, Un\G125, Un\G157) is set
to Unused (1)
• When CH† PID control forced stop
Simultaneous instruction (YnC to YnF) is turned on from off
This flag is set to 1 (ON) when simultaneous
temperature rise • When CH† Self-tuning setting (Un\G574,
b1 temperature rise parameter*1 is corrected by Un\G606, Un\G638, Un\G670) is set to Do
parameter correction
self-tuning. not run the ST (0)
status
This flag is also set to 0 (OFF) in the following
cases.
• When the self-tuning starts by changing the
set value (SV)
• When the vibration ST starts by vibration
caused by disturbance of the process value
(PV)
b2 to b7 - (fixed to 0) - (Unused) ⎯
This flag is set to 0 (OFF) when either of the
following operation is performed.
• When the operation mode shifts to the setting
mode by turning off from on Setting/operation
mode instruction (Yn1)
• When CH† Unused channel setting
(Un\G61, Un\G93, Un\G125, Un\G157) is set
to Unused (1)
This flag is set to 1 (ON) when the self- • When CH† PID control forced stop
b8 Self-tuning disable status
tuning cannot be performed. instruction (YnC to YnF) is turned on from off
• When CH† Self-tuning setting (Un\G574,
Un\G606, Un\G638, Un\G670) is set to Do
not run the ST (0)
This flag is also set to 0 (OFF) when all disable
conditions are released.
For disable conditions, refer to Page 181,
Section 8.2.15 (6).

400
 APPENDICES

Condition on which value turns to 1 Condition on which value turns to 0

Bit Flag name
(ON) (OFF)
Simultaneous This flag is set to 1 (ON) when simultaneous
b9 temperature rise temperature rise parameter*1 cannot be
parameter error status calculated by self-tuning.
This flag is set to 1 (ON) when either of the
following operation is performed during the
self-tuning.
• PID constants change
• Setting change rate limiter change This flag is set to 0 (OFF) when either of the
• Output limiter change following operation is performed.
• Control output cycle change
• Sensor correction change
• When the operation mode shifts to the setting
mode by turning off from on Setting/operation
A
• Primary delay digital filter change mode instruction (Yn1)
• AUTO to MAN mode shift • When CH† Unused channel setting
• Forward/reverse action shift (Un\G61, Un\G93, Un\G125, Un\G157) is set
This flag is also set to 1 (ON) in the following to Unused (1)
cases • When CH† PID control forced stop
• When the temperature process value (PV) instruction (YnC to YnF) is turned on from off
is out of the temperature measurement • When CH† Self-tuning setting (Un\G574,
b10 Self-tuning error range Un\G606, Un\G638, Un\G670) is set to ST(0)
• When required measurement data is not This flag is also set to 0 (OFF) in the following
obtained because the manipulated value cases.
(MV) does not reach the upper limit output • When the self-tuning starts by changing the
limiter value or the lower limit output set value (SV)
limiter value until the measurement is • When the vibration ST starts by vibration
completed caused by disturbance of the process value
• When the temperature process value (PV) (PV)
decreases by 1°C ( ) or more though it
should increase after the self-tuning is

Appendix 2 Details of the Buffer Memory

started as the starting ST
• When temperature process value (PV)
increases by 1°C ( ) or more though it
should decrease after the self-tuning is
started as the starting ST
b11 to b15 - (fixed to 0) - (Unused) ⎯
*1 Indicates the values of CH† Simultaneous temperature rise gradient data (Un\G731, Un\G747, Un\G763, Un\G779) and
CH† Simultaneous temperature rise dead time (Un\G732, Un\G748, Un\G764, Un\G780).
For details on the simultaneous temperature rise function, refer to Page 190, Section 8.2.17.

This area is enabled only for the following channels (channels of the standard control).
• CH1 to CH4 when the standard control is used
• CH3 and CH4 when mix control (normal mode) or mix control (expanded mode) is used

401
 (74)CH† Temperature process value (PV) for input with another analog module
(Un\G689 to Un\G692) Standard Heating-cooling

Digital input value of the current/voltage converted in another analog module (such as A/D conversion module) on
system can be used as a temperature process value (PV).
Store digital input values of current/voltage converted by another analog module (such as A/D conversion
module) in this area.
For details, refer to the following.
Page 172, Section 8.2.13 (1)

If a stored value is out of the set input range, the value to be used in control is fixed to the upper limit value or the lower limit
value of the input range.

(75)Conversion enable/disable setting (Un\G693) Temperature

Input

Set enable or disable temperature input. For details on the temperature input function, refer to the following.
Page 116, Section 8.1

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1

Bit data from b15 to b4 are fixed to 0.

(a) Setting range

• 0: Enable
• 1: Disable

(b) Enablement of setting contents

Enable the setting contents by turning Setting change instruction (YnB) OFF → ON → OFF during the setting
mode (Setting/operation mode status (Xn1): OFF).

(c) Default value

All channels are set to Conversion disable (000FH).

402
 APPENDICES

(76)CH† Temperature conversion setting (Un\G695 to Un\G697) Heating-cooling

In the heating-cooling control (normal mode) or the mix control (normal mode), only the temperature
measurement can be performed using temperature input terminals of unused channels.
The following table lists the settable buffer memory addresses for each control mode selection.

Control mode
Heating-
Heating- Mix control
Channel Standard cooling control Mix control
cooling control (expanded
control (expanded (normal mode)
(normal mode)
mode)
mode) A
CH1 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
CH2 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Un\G695 ⎯
CH3 ⎯ Un\G696 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
CH4 ⎯ Un\G697 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

When the combination of the control mode and the buffer memory address is not the setting target in the above
list, the combination is invalid even if it is set.
For details on the temperature conversion function (using unused channels), refer to the following.
Page 212, Section 8.2.23

(a) Setting range

• 0: Not use
• 1: Use

(b) Default value

The default values are set to Not use (0) in all channels.

Appendix 2 Details of the Buffer Memory

● When this setting is set from Not use (0) to Use (1), after completion of the first temperature conversion, Temperature
conversion completion flag (Un\G786) is set to First temperature conversion completed (1H). Before referring to the
temperature process value (PV) of each channel, check Temperature conversion completion flag (Un\G786) has been set
to First temperature conversion completed (1H).

● When the following control mode is selected, this setting is invalid.

• Standard control
• Heating-cooling control (expanded mode)
• Mix control (expanded mode)

403
 (77)Cooling method setting (Un\G719) Heating-cooling
Set the method for the cooling control in the heating-cooling control. Select the suitable cooling method for
cooling characteristics of devices.
The following figure shows the channel assignment of the buffer memory area.

b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0

CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1

For details on the cooling method setting function, refer to the following.
Page 207, Section 8.2.21

(a) Setting range

• 0H: Air cooling
• 1H: Water cooling
• 2H: Linear

(b) Enablement of setting contents

Enable the setting contents by turning Setting change instruction (YnB) OFF → ON → OFF during the setting
mode (Setting/operation mode status (Xn1): OFF).

(c) Default value

The default value is set to Air cooling (0H).

(78)CH† Overlap/dead band function (Un\G723, Un\G739, Un\G755,

Un\G771) Heating-cooling
Configure the overlap/dead band setting.
For details on the overlap/dead band function, refer to the following.
Page 209, Section 8.2.22

(a) Setting range

Set the value within the following ranges for the full scale of the set input range. ( Page 345, Appendix 2
(12))
• -100 to -1 (-10.0% to -0.1%): Overlap
• 0(0.0%): None
• 1 to 100 (0.1% to 10.0%): Dead band

(b) Default value

The default values are set to 0 (0.0%) in all channels.

404
 APPENDICES

(79)CH† Manual reset amount setting (Un\G724, Un\G740, Un\G756, Un\G772)

Standard Heating-cooling

Set the amount of the proportional band (P) to be moved.

For details on the manual reset function, refer to the following.
Page 137, Section 8.2.4

(a) Setting range

Set the value within the range of -1000 to 1000 (-100.0% to 100.0%) for the full scale of the set input range.
( Page 345, Appendix 2 (12)) A
The setting range is the same between the standard control and heating-cooling control.

(b) Default value

The default values are set to 0 (0.0%) in all channels. The default value is the same between the standard
control and the heating-cooling control.

(80)CH† Process value (PV) scaling function enable/disable setting (Un\G725,

Un\G741, Un\G757, Un\G773) Common
Set enable/disable of the temperature process value (PV) scaling function.
For details on the temperature process value (PV) scaling function, refer to the following.
Page 221, Section 8.3.1

(a) Setting range

• 0: Disable
• 1: Enable

Appendix 2 Details of the Buffer Memory

(b) Enablement of setting contents
Enable the setting contents by turning Setting change instruction (YnB) OFF → ON → OFF during the setting
mode (Setting/operation mode status (Xn1): OFF).

(c) Default value

The default values are set to Disable (0) in all channels.

405
 (81)CH† Process value (PV) scaling lower limit value (Un\G726, Un\G742,
Un\G758, Un\G774) Common
CH† Process value (PV) scaling upper limit value (Un\G727, Un\G743,
Un\G759, Un\G775) Common
Set the upper limit value/lower limit value of the temperature process value (PV) scaling function.
For details on the temperature process value (PV) scaling function, refer to the following.
Page 221, Section 8.3.1

(a) Setting range

The setting range is -32000 to 32000.

(b) Enablement of setting contents

Enable the setting contents by turning Setting change instruction (YnB) OFF → ON → OFF during the setting
mode (Setting/operation mode status (Xn1): OFF).

(c) Default value

The default values are set to 0 in all channels.

The setting where the lower limit value is not less than the upper limit value does not cause an error. The temperature
process value (PV) is scaled according to the formula of Page 221, Section 8.3.1 (1).

(82)CH† Process value (PV) scaling value (Un\G728, Un\G744, Un\G760,

Un\G776) Common
When the temperature process value (PV) scaling function is enabled, the scaled temperature process value (PV)
is stored.
For details on the temperature process value (PV) scaling function, refer to the following.
Page 221, Section 8.3.1

406
 APPENDICES

(83)CH† Derivative action selection (Un\G729, Un\G745, Un\G761, Un\G777)

Standard Heating-cooling

Select the type of derivative action. Dynamic performance can be improved by selecting the suitable derivative
action for the fixed value action and the ramp action. For details on the derivative action selection function, refer
to the following.
Page 154, Section 8.2.9

(a) Setting range

• 0: Measured value derivation
A
• 1: Deviation derivation

(b) Enablement of setting contents

Enable the setting contents by turning Setting change instruction (YnB) OFF → ON → OFF during the setting
mode (Setting/operation mode status (Xn1): OFF).

(c) Default value

All channels are set to Measured value derivation (0).

(84)CH† Simultaneous temperature rise group setting (Un\G730, Un\G746,

Un\G762, Un\G778) Standard

Set a group to perform the simultaneous temperature rise function for each channel. The simultaneous
temperature rise function enables channels in the same group to complete the rise of temperature
simultaneously. When the control mode is the heating-cooling control, this setting is invalid.
For details on the simultaneous temperature rise function, refer to the following.

Appendix 2 Details of the Buffer Memory

Page 190, Section 8.2.17

(a) Setting range of the standard control

• 0: No simultaneous temperature rise
• 1: Group 1 selection
• 2: Group 2 selection

(b) Setting range of the mix control

• 0: No simultaneous temperature rise
• 1: Simultaneous temperature rise
The setting range in the mix control does not include group selection because the mix control has only two
channels for the standard control.

(c) Enablement of setting contents

Enable the setting contents by turning Setting change instruction (YnB) OFF → ON → OFF during the setting
mode (Setting/operation mode status (Xn1): OFF).

(d) Default value

The default values are set to No simultaneous temperature rise (0) in all channels.

407
 (85)CH† Simultaneous temperature rise gradient data (Un\G731, Un\G747,

Un\G763, Un\G779) Standard

Set Simultaneous temperature rise gradient data (temperature rising per minute).
For details on the simultaneous temperature rise function, refer to the following.
Page 190, Section 8.2.17

(a) Setting range

The setting range is 0 to (the upper limit of the temperature measurement range of the set input range).

(b) Setting unit

The value to be set differs depending on the stored value in CH† Decimal point position (Un\G1 to Un\G4).
( Page 334, Appendix 2 (2))

• No decimal place (0): Set a value in 1°C ( or digit) unit.

• One decimal place (1): Set a value in 0.1°C ( ) unit (tenfold value).

(c) Default value

The default values are set to 0 in all channels.

This setting can not only be set manually but also be calculated automatically. Automatic calculation is performed when the
simultaneous temperature rise AT (auto tuning) or self-tuning (when the automatic calculation of the temperature rise
parameter is set) is normally completed.

(86)CH† Simultaneous temperature rise dead time (Un\G732, Un\G748, Un\G764,

Un\G780) Standard
Set Simultaneous temperature rise dead time (time taken for the temperature to start rising after the output is
turned on).
For details on the simultaneous temperature rise function, refer to the following.
Page 190, Section 8.2.17

(a) Setting range

The setting range is 0 to 3600 (s).

(b) Default value

The default values are set to 0 in all channels.

This setting can not only be set manually but also be calculated automatically. Automatic calculation is performed when the
simultaneous temperature rise AT (auto tuning) or self-tuning (when the automatic calculation of the temperature rise
parameter is set) is normally completed.

408
 APPENDICES

(87)CH† Simultaneous temperature rise AT mode selection (Un\G733, Un\G749,

Un\G765, Un\G781) Standard

Select mode of the auto tuning.
For details on the auto tuning function, refer to the following.
Page 141, Section 8.2.7
For details on the simultaneous temperature rise function, refer to the following.
Page 190, Section 8.2.17

(a) Setting range A

• 0: Select normal auto tuning
• 1: Simultaneous temperature rise AT

(b) Default value

The default values are set to Select normal auto tuning (0) in all channels.

● This setting can be used with the setting of CH† Auto tuning mode selection (Un\G184 to Un\G187). ( Page 385,
Appendix 2 (51))
● If this setting is changed during the auto tuning, it is enabled in the next auto tuning.

Appendix 2 Details of the Buffer Memory

409
 (88)CH† Simultaneous temperature rise status (Un\G734, Un\G750, Un\G766,

Un\G782) Standard
The execution state of the simultaneous temperature rise is monitored. The following values are stored in this
buffer memory area.
• 0: Simultaneous temperature rise not in process
• 1: Simultaneous temperature rise in process

During control by the simultaneous temperature rise function, Simultaneous temperature rise in process (1) is
stored in this buffer memory area.
The following figure shows the timing when the value is set to Simultaneous temperature rise not in process (0).
(In the following, CH1 and CH2 are set to group 1. ( Page 407, Appendix 2 (84))

Temperature is raised
based on the Temperature is raised
simultaneous based on the PID The temperature rise
temperature rise constants of each completion times match.
function for this interval. channel for this interval.
Temperature
process value (PV)

CH1 Set value (SV)

CH2 Set value (SV)

Temperature rise start Group 1 Time

arrival point
ON
The setting/operation OFF
mode command (Yn1)
CH1 Simultaneous temperature
rise status (Un\G734) and
0 1 0
CH2 Simultaneous temperature
rise status (Un\G750)
CH1 Temperature rise
judgment flag (Un\G17) and
CH2 Temperature rise 0 1
judgment flag (Un\G18)

Executed by the L60TC4

Completion of the temperature rise does not set CH† Simultaneous temperature rise status (Un\G734, Un\G750,
Un\G766, Un\G782) to Simultaneous temperature rise not in process (0). As in the figure above, the temperature
rise is performed by the simultaneous temperature rise function to a certain point, and Simultaneous temperature
rise in process (1) is set during the performance. After the point, the temperature rise is performed based on the
PID constants of each channel, and Simultaneous temperature rise not in process (0) is set.

For details on the simultaneous temperature rise function, refer to the following.
Page 190, Section 8.2.17

410
 APPENDICES

(89)CH† Setting change rate limiter time unit setting (Un\G735, Un\G751, Un\G767,
Un\G783) Standard Heating-cooling

Set the time unit of setting change rate limiter.

For details on the setting change rate limiter time unit setting function, refer to the following.
Page 155, Section 8.2.10

(a) Setting range

• 0 (Not use time unit setting)
• 1 to 3600 (1 to 3600s)
A
(b) Enablement of setting contents
Enable the setting contents by turning Setting change instruction (YnB) OFF → ON → OFF during the setting
mode (Setting/operation mode status (Xn1): OFF).

(c) Default value

The default values are set to 0 (Not use time unit setting) in all channels.

Remark
When 0 is set, the L60TC4 operation is the same as the case when 60, a variation per minute, is set.

Appendix 2 Details of the Buffer Memory

411
 (90)Peak current suppression control group setting (Un\G784) Standard
Set the target channels for the peak current suppression function and the gap of the control output cycle between
channels.

b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0

CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1

For details on the peak current suppression function, refer to the following.
Page 185, Section 8.2.16

(a) Setting range

• 0H: Not divide
• 1H: Group 1
• 2H: Group 2
• 3H: Group 3
• 4H: Group 4

(b) Enablement of setting contents

Enable the setting contents by turning Setting change instruction (YnB) OFF → ON → OFF during the setting
mode (Setting/operation mode status (Xn1): OFF).

(c) Default value

The default value is set to Not divide (0H).

The upper limit output limiter value is automatically set since the division number depends on this setting.
The following table lists the upper limit output limiter values which are set when this setting is enabled.

CH† Upper limit output limiter (Un\G42, Un\G74, Un\G106, Un\G138)

Division Number
( Page 360, Appendix 2 (19))
2 500 (50.0%)
3 333 (33.3%)
4 250 (25.0%)

CH† Lower limit output limiter (Un\G43, Un\G75, Un\G107, Un\G139) is set to 0.

412
 APPENDICES

(91)Sensor compensation function selection (Un\G785) Common

Select the method of the sensor correction for each channel.

b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0

CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1

For details on the sensor compensation function, refer to the following.

Page 223, Section 8.3.2

(a) Setting range

• 0H: 1-point sensor compensation (standard)
A
• 1H: 2-point sensor compensation

(b) Enablement of setting contents

Enable the setting contents by turning Setting change instruction (YnB) OFF → ON → OFF during the setting
mode (Setting/operation mode status (Xn1): OFF).

(c) Default value

The default value is set to 1-point sensor compensation (standard) (0H).

(92)Temperature conversion completion flag (Un\G786) Common

This flag checks whether the temperature conversion has started properly for each channel. The following values
are stored in this buffer memory area.
• 0H: During conversion or unused CH
• 1H: First temperature conversion completed

Appendix 2 Details of the Buffer Memory

This flag becomes During conversion or unused CH (0H) during temperature conversion or for unused channels.
When the first temperature conversion is completed and the temperature process value (PV) is stored in the
buffer memory, First temperature conversion completed (1H) is set.
The following figure shows the channel assignment of this area.

b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0

CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1

413
 (93)Function extension bit monitor (Un\G787) Common
The following settings configured on Switch Setting are stored.
• "Auto-setting at Input Range Change"
• "Setting Change Rate Limiter Setting"
• "Control Output Cycle Unit Selection Setting"
For details on Switch Setting, refer to the following.
Page 108, Section 7.2

The following figure and table show how the setting is stored.

b15 to b3 b2 b1 b0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

(Bit data from b15 to b3 are fixed to 0.)

Flag name (Function extension bit

Bit Description
monitor)
When the input range is changed, the related buffer memory data is
automatically changed to prevent errors of the buffer memory areas that
b0 Auto-setting at Input Range Change are out of the setting range. ( Page 351, Appendix 2 (12) (d))
0: Disable
1: Enable
Select whether the setting change rate limiter to be set in a batch or
individually. ( Page 155, Section 8.2.10)
b1 Setting Change Rate Limiter Setting
0: Temperature Rise/Temperature Drop Batch Setting
1: Temperature Rise/Temperature Drop Individual Setting
Select 0.1s or 1s as a unit for the cycle of turning on/off the transistor
Control Output Cycle Unit Selection output. ( Page 140, Section 8.2.6)
b2
Setting 0: 1s Cycle
1: 0.1s Cycle
b3 to b15 - (fixed to 0) - (Unused)

(94)Sampling cycle monitor (Un\G788) Common

Current sampling cycle is stored.
• 0: 500ms/4 channels
• 1: 250ms/4 channels

Sampling cycle is set on Switch Setting. For details on Switch Setting, refer to the following.
Page 108, Section 7.2

414
 APPENDICES

(95)Latest address of error history (Un\G1279) Common

The latest address of error history is stored.
For details on the error history function, refer to the following.
Page 237, Section 8.3.5

(96)Error history 1 to 16 (Un\G1280 to Un\G1407) Common

Errors and alarms occurred in the module are recorded up to 16.

A
Ex. For the error history 1

Buffer memory
address b15 to b8 b7 to b0
Un\G1280 Error code *1
Un\G1281 First two digits of the year Last two digits of the year
Un\G1282 Month Day
Un\G1283 Hour Minute
Un\G1284 Second Day of the week *2
Un\G1285
to System area
Un\G1287

*1 For error codes and alarm codes, refer to the following.

Page 315, Section 11.6, Page 318, Section 11.7
*2 The following table lists the stored value and corresponding each day of the week.

Stored value Day of the week

0 Sunday

Appendix 2 Details of the Buffer Memory

1 Monday
2 Tuesday
3 Wednesday
4 Thursday
5 Friday
6 Saturday

For details on the error history function, refer to the following.

Page 237, Section 8.3.5

415
Appendix 3 How to Check the Serial Number and
Function Version

For details on how to check the serial number and function version, refer to the following.
MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)
MELSEC-L CC-Link IE Field Network Head Module User's Manual

416
 APPENDICES

Appendix 4 Differences with MELSEC-Q series Modules

Appendix 4.1 Differences with temperature control modules

This section describes the differences in functions and programming methods between the MELSEC-Q series
temperature control modules (Q64TCTTN, Q64TCTTBWN, Q64TCRTN, Q64TCRTBWN) and the L60TC4.

(1) Functional comparison

A
(a) Added functions
The following table lists the functions added in the L60TC4.

Item Description Reference

The following input ranges are available in the L60TC4.
(1) L60TCTT4, L60TCTT4BW
• K: -200.0 to 1300.0°C
• J: -200.0 to 1000.0°C
Input range • E: -200.0 to 1000.0°C Page 36, Section 3.2.2
• N: 0.0 to 1000.0°C
(2) L60TCRT4, L60TCRT4BW
• Pt100: -200.0 to 850.0°C
• JPt100: -200.0 to 640.0°C
The L60TC4 can be used as a temperature input module. It also enables
Temperature input mode application of the primary delay digital filter to temperature input, the alert Page 116, Section 8.1
output, and other functions.
The sampling cycle can be selected from 250ms/4 channels and 500ms/4

Appendix 4.1 Differences with temperature control modules

Appendix 4 Differences with MELSEC-Q series Modules
Switching the sampling Page 38, Section 3.2.3 (1),
channels. (The cycle is fixed to 500ms in MELSEC-Q series temperature
cycle Page 108, Section 7.2
control modules.)
The control output cycle can be selected by 0.1s (0.5s to 100.0s) with the
Switching the unit of control Page 38, Section 3.2.3 (2),
L60TC4. The cycle can be also selected by 1s (1s to 100s) similar to
output cycle Page 108, Section 7.2
MELSEC-Q series temperature control modules.

(b) Function that cannot be used

Online module change is not available with the L60TC4.

417
 (2) Program compatibility
Programs used in the MELSEC-Q series temperature control modules (Q64TCTTN, Q64TCTTBWN,
Q64TCRTN, Q64TCRTBWN) can be used with the L60TC4.

(a) I/O signal

Although some I/O numbers of the L60TC4 have different names from those of the MELSEC-Q series
temperature control modules, they have the same function and are compatible with each other.

(b) Buffer memory

Although some buffer memory areas have been added to the L60TC4, the functions are the same and the
program has compatibility.

(c) Sampling cycle

For the L60TC4, the sampling cycle can be selected from 250ms and 500ms. For the MELSEC-Q series
temperature control modules, the cycle is fixed to 500ms. When using the program used in the MELSEC-Q
series temperature control modules with the L60TC4, check that the sampling cycle for the L60TC4 is set to
500ms. When changing the cycle to 250ms, thoroughly verify that the control of the target system has no
problem.

418
 APPENDICES

Appendix 5 When Using GX Developer

This section describes how to configure the setting of the L60TC4 using GX Developer.

Appendix 5.1 I/O assignment and intelligent function module

switch setting

Configure the setting on the following windows when using GX Developer.

A
Window name Application
I/O assignment Set the type of a module to be connected and the range of I/O signal.
Intelligent function module switch setting Configure the Switch Setting of the intelligent function module.

(1) I/O assignment

Configure the setting on "I/O assignment" in "PLC parameter".

Parameter [PLC parameter] [I/O assignment]

Appendix 5.1 I/O assignment and intelligent function module switch setting
Appendix 5 When Using GX Developer
Item Description
Type Select "Intelli.".
Model name Enter the model name of the module.
Points Select 16point.
Start XY Enter an arbitrary start I/O number of the L60TC4.

Remark
Select 16point in Points when using the L60TCTT4BW or L60TCRT4BW.

419
 (2) Intelligent function module switch setting
Configure the setting on "Switch Setting" in "PLC parameter".

Parameter [PLC parameter] [I/O assignment] Click .

Select "HEX.".

Item Setting item

Control output HOLD/CLEAR setting

H Setting value Output setting

Switch 1 CH4 CH3CH2 CH1
0 CLEAR
Other than 0 HOLD

Mode selection*1
Setting value*2
Control mode Number of control loops
0000H Standard control Standard control 4 loops
Heating-cooling control (normal Heating-cooling control 2
0001H
mode) loops
Heating-cooling control (expanded Heating-cooling control 4
0002H
mode)*3 loops
Switch 2 Temperature
Heating-cooling control 1
control mode
0003H Mix control (normal mode) loop
Standard control 2 loops
Heating-cooling control 2
0004H Mix control (expanded mode)*3 loops
Standard control 2 loops
0100H Temperature input mode ⎯

420
 APPENDICES

Item Setting item

Function extension bit specification, sampling cycle selection

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Extended function bit setting

Fixed to 0 Fixed to 0
b0: Automatic setting when the input
range is changed
0: Disable
1: Enable
Switch 3
b1: Setting change rate limiter setting
0: Temperature rise/Temperature drop
batch setting
A
1: Temperature rise/Temperature drop
individual setting

b12: Sampling cycle selection*1 b2: Control cycle unit switch setting*1
0: 500ms/4 channels 0: 1-second intervals
1: 250ms/4 channels 1: 0.1-second intervals

Switch 4 0: Fixed (empty)

Switch 5 0: Fixed (empty)
*1 Immediately after the setting is changed, a set value discrepancy error (error code: 0††EH) occurs. To clear the set
value discrepancy error, turn off, on, and off Set value backup instruction (Yn8).
*2 When the setting is out of the setting value, a switch setting error (error code: 000FH) occurs. In this case, the module
does not operate properly. Set the correct value.
*3 Control in the expanded mode requires an external output module. For details, refer to Page 127, Section 8.2.1
(3).

Appendix 5.1 I/O assignment and intelligent function module switch setting
Appendix 5 When Using GX Developer

421
Appendix 5.2 Initial setting and auto refresh setting

The initial setting and auto refresh setting cannot be configured when GX Developer is used. Use the program instead.

(1) Initial setting

Configure the initial setting using the program. ( Page 250, CHAPTER 10)

(2) Auto refresh setting

To access the buffer memory using the program, perform one of the following methods.

(a) Access using FROM/TO instruction

Use FROM instruction to store the data read from the buffer memory in the L60TC4 into the specified device.
Use TO instruction to write the data of the specified device to the buffer memory in the L60TC4.
For details on FROM/TO instruction, refer to the following.
MELSEC-Q/L Programming Manual (Common Instructions)

(b) Access using Intelligent function module device

Use Intelligent function module device (Un\G†) to access the buffer memory in the L60TC4.

Ex. When Error code (Un\G0) is transferred to D0 in the CPU module.

422
 APPENDICES

Appendix 6 External Dimensions

The following shows the external dimensions of the L60TC4.

(1) L60TCTT4

4
A
45

90
DIN rail center
(45)

4
95 4
117 28.5

Appendix 6 External Dimensions

(Unit: mm)

(2) L60TCTT4BW
4
45

90

DIN rail center

(45)

4
4

95
117 57.0

(Unit: mm)

423
 (3) L60TCRT4

4
45

90
DIN rail center
(45)

4
95
117 28.5

(Unit: mm)

(4) L60TCRT4BW
4
45

90

DIN rail center

(45)

4
4

95
117 57.0

(Unit: mm)

424
 A

Appendix 6 External Dimensions

APPENDICES

425
Memo
 INDEX

0 to 9 C
1-point sensor compensation (standard) . . . . . 223,413 Checking the completion of auto tuning . . . . . . . . 151
2-point sensor compensation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 Checking the error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
2-point sensor compensation function . . . . . . . . . 227 CH† 2-point sensor compensation gain latch completion
(Un\G551, Un\G583, Un\G615, Un\G647) . . . . . . 397
CH† 2-point sensor compensation gain latch request
A
(Un\G550, Un\G582, Un\G614, Un\G646) . . . . . . 397
Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 CH† 2-point sensor compensation gain value
Added functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 (compensation value) (Un\G547, Un\G579, Un\G611,
Adjustment after auto tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Un\G643) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Air cooled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 CH† 2-point sensor compensation gain value
Air cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 (measured value) (Un\G546, Un\G578, Un\G610,
Alarm code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Un\G642) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Alarm priorities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 CH† 2-point sensor compensation offset latch
Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 completion (Un\G549, Un\G581, Un\G613, Un\G645)
Alert dead band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Alert dead band setting (Un\G164) . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 CH† 2-point sensor compensation offset latch request
Alert mode and settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 (Un\G548, Un\G580, Un\G612, Un\G644) . . . . . . 396
Alert mode and the set value (SV) to be referred . . 162 CH† 2-point sensor compensation offset value
Alert output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 (compensation value) (Un\G545, Un\G577, Un\G609,
Alert with standby. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Un\G641) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Alert with standby (second time) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 CH† 2-point sensor compensation offset value
Algorithm of PID control in process-value incomplete (measured value) (Un\G544, Un\G576, Un\G608,
derivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Un\G640) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
ALM LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29,311 CH† Adjustment sensitivity (dead band) setting
Applicable software version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 (Un\G46, Un\G78, Un\G110, Un\G142)
Applicable solderless terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129,130,363
Applicable systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 CH† Alert 1 mode setting (Un\G192, Un\G208,
Applicable wire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Un\G224, Un\G240) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
AT point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 CH† Alert 2 mode setting (Un\G193, Un\G209,
AT simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation Un\G225, Un\G241) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 CH† Alert 3 mode setting (Un\G194, Un\G210,
AT simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation Un\G226, Un\G242) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
error status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 CH† Alert 4 mode setting (Un\G195, Un\G211,
Auto configuration at input range change . . . . . . . 234 Un\G227, Un\G243) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Auto refresh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 CH† Alert definition (Un\G5 to Un\G8). . . . . . . . . 336
Auto tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 CH† Alert occurrence flag (XnC to XnF) . . . . 313,329
Automatic setting when the input range is change CH† Alert set value 1 (Un\G38, Un\G70, Un\G102,
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 Un\G134) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Auto-setting at input range change . . 108,109,351,352 CH† Alert set value 2 (Un\G39, Un\G71, Un\G103,
Un\G135) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
CH† Alert set value 3 (Un\G40, Un\G72, Un\G104,
B Un\G136) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
CH† Alert set value 4 (Un\G41, Un\G73, Un\G105,
Backup of the calculated value on completion of auto
Un\G137) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
CH† AT bias setting (Un\G53, Un\G85, Un\G117,
Back-up of the set value completion flag (Xn8) . . . 327
Un\G149) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Back-up of the set value fail flag (XnA) . . . . . . 313,328
CH† AT simultaneous temperature rise parameter
Batch/individual setting for temperature rise and
calculation flag (Un\G573, Un\G605, Un\G637, Un\G669)
temperature drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Buffer memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
CH† Auto tuning instruction (Yn4 to Yn7) . . . . . . 331
Buffer memory address by mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
CH† Auto tuning mode selection (Un\G184 to Un\G187)
Buffer memory address for error history . . . . . . . . . 76
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385,409
Buffer memory areas related to auto tuning. . . . . . 142
CH† Auto tuning status (Xn4 to Xn7) . . 312,313,326
Buffer memory areas related to control method . . . 135
CH† AUTO/MAN mode shift (Un\G50, Un\G82,
Buffer memory areas which can be set only in the setting
Un\G114, Un\G146) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367,368
mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
CH† Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID
Buffer memory data backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
constants (Un\G63, Un\G95, Un\G127, Un\G159)
Buffer memory list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

426
CH† Control output cycle setting (Un\G47, Un\G79, CH† PID control forced stop instruction (YnC to YnF)
Un\G111, Un\G143) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
CH† Control response parameter (Un\G49, Un\G81, CH† Primary delay digital filter setting (Un\G48, Un\G80,
Un\G113, Un\G145) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 Un\G112, Un\G144) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
CH† Cooling control output cycle setting (Un\G722, CH† Process alarm alert output enable/disable setting
Un\G738, Un\G754, Un\G770) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 (Un\G196, Un\G212, Un\G228, Un\G244) . . . . . . . 387
CH† Cooling proportional band (Pc) setting (Un\G720, CH† Process alarm lower lower limit value (Un\G197, 2
Un\G736, Un\G752, Un\G768) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Un\G213, Un\G229, Un\G245) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
CH† Cooling transistor output flag (Un\G712 to CH† Process alarm lower upper limit value (Un\G198,
Un\G715) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Un\G214, Un\G230, Un\G246) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
CH† Cooling upper limit output limiter (Un\G721, CH† Process alarm upper lower limit value (Un\G199,
Un\G737, Un\G753, Un\G769) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 Un\G215, Un\G231, Un\G247) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
CH† Decimal point position (Un\G1 to Un\G4) . . . . 334 CH† Process alarm upper upper limit value (Un\G200,
CH† Derivative action selection (Un\G729, Un\G745, Un\G216, Un\G232, Un\G248) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Un\G761, Un\G777) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 CH† Process value (PV) scaling function enable/disable 4
CH† Derivative time (D) setting (Un\G37, Un\G69, setting (Un\G725, Un\G741, Un\G757, Un\G773) . . 405
Un\G101, Un\G133) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 CH† Process value (PV) scaling lower limit value
(Un\G726, Un\G742, Un\G758, Un\G774) . . . . . . . 406
CH† Forward/reverse action setting (Un\G54, Un\G86,
Un\G118, Un\G150) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 CH† Process value (PV) scaling upper limit value
I
CH† Heater disconnection alert setting (Un\G58, (Un\G727, Un\G743, Un\G759, Un\G775) . . . . . . . 406
Un\G90, Un\G122, Un\G154) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 CH† Process value (PV) scaling value (Un\G728,
CH† Heating control output cycle setting (Un\G47, Un\G744, Un\G760, Un\G776) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Un\G79, Un\G111, Un\G143) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 CH† Proportional band (P) setting (Un\G35, Un\G67,
CH† Heating proportional band (Ph) setting (Un\G35, Un\G99, Un\G131) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Un\G67, Un\G99, Un\G131) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 CH† Rate alarm alert detection cycle (Un\G202,
CH† Heating transistor output flag (Un\G21 to Un\G24)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Un\G218, Un\G234, Un\G250) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
CH† Rate alarm alert output enable/disable setting
7
CH† Heating upper limit output limiter (Un\G42, Un\G74, (Un\G201, Un\G217, Un\G233, Un\G249) . . . . . . . 389
Un\G106, Un\G138) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 CH† Rate alarm lower limit value (Un\G204, Un\G220,
CH† Input range (Un\G32, Un\G64, Un\G96, Un\G128) Un\G236, Un\G252) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 8
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 CH† Rate alarm upper limit value (Un\G203, Un\G219,
CH† Integral time (I) setting (Un\G36, Un\G68, Un\G235, Un\G251) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Un\G100, Un\G132) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 CH† Self-tuning flag (Un\G575, Un\G607, Un\G639,
CH† Loop disconnection detection dead band (Un\G60, Un\G671) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Un\G92, Un\G124, Un\G156) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 CH† Self-tuning setting (Un\G574, Un\G606, Un\G638,
CH† Loop disconnection detection judgment time Un\G670) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
(Un\G59, Un\G91, Un\G123, Un\G155) . . . . . . . . . 374 CH† Sensor correction value setting (Un\G45, Un\G77,
CH† Lower limit output limiter (Un\G43, Un\G75, Un\G109, Un\G141) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Un\G107, Un\G139) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 CH† Set value (SV) monitor (Un\G25 to Un\G28)
CH† Lower limit setting limiter (Un\G56, Un\G88, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158,342
Un\G120, Un\G152) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 CH† Set value (SV) setting (Un\G34, Un\G66, Un\G98,
CH† MAN output setting (Un\G51, Un\G83, Un\G115, Un\G130) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158,354
Un\G147) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 CH† Setting change rate limiter (temperature drop)
CH† Manipulated value (MV) (Un\G13 to Un\G16) (Un\G564, Un\G596, Un\G628, Un\G660) . . . . . . . 369
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 CH† Setting change rate limiter (temperature rise)
CH† Manipulated value (MV) for output with another (Un\G52, Un\G84, Un\G116, Un\G148) . . . . . . . . . 369
analog module (Un\G177 to Un\G180) . . . . . . . . . 383 CH† Setting change rate limiter (Un\G52, Un\G84,
CH† Manipulated value for cooling (MVc) (Un\G704 to Un\G116, Un\G148) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Un\G707) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 CH† Setting change rate limiter time unit setting
CH† Manipulated value for heating (MVh) (Un\G13 to (Un\G735, Un\G751, Un\G767, Un\G783) . . . 342,411
Un\G16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 CH† Simultaneous temperature rise AT mode selection
CH† Manipulated value of cooling (MVc) for output with (Un\G733, Un\G749, Un\G765, Un\G781) . . . . . . . 409
another analog module (Un\G708 to Un\G711). . . . 383 CH† Simultaneous temperature rise dead time
CH† Manipulated value of heating (MVh) for output with (Un\G732, Un\G748, Un\G764, Un\G780) . . . . . . . 408
another analog module (Un/G177 to Un\G180). . . . 383 CH† Simultaneous temperature rise gradient data
CH† Manual reset amount setting (Un\G724, Un\G740, (Un\G731, Un\G747, Un\G763, Un\G779) . . . . . . . 408
Un\G756, Un\G772) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 CH† Simultaneous temperature rise group setting
CH† Memory of PID constants read instruction (Un\G62, (Un\G730, Un\G746, Un\G762, Un\G778) . . . . . . . 407
Un\G94, Un\G126, Un\G158) . . . . . . . . . . . . 343,377 CH† Simultaneous temperature rise status (Un\G734,
CH† Output variation limiter setting (Un\G44, Un\G76, Un\G750, Un\G766, Un\G782) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Un\G108, Un\G140) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 CH† Stop mode setting (Un\G33, Un\G65, Un\G97,
CH† Overlap/dead band function (Un\G723, Un\G739, Un\G129) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Un\G755, Un\G771) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 CH† Temperature conversion setting (Un\G695 to
Un\G697) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

427
CH† Temperature process value (PV) (Un\G9 to CT† Reference heater current value (Un\G280 to
Un\G12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Un\G287) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390,393
CH† Temperature process value (PV) for input with Current sensor for heater disconnection detection . . 82
another analog module(Un\G689 to Un\G692) . . . 402
CH† Temperature rise judgment flag (Un\G17 to
D
Un\G20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
CH† Transistor output flag (Un\G21 to Un\G24) . . 341 Data read from non-volatile memory . . . . . . . . . . 236
CH† Unused channel setting (Un\G61, Un\G93, Data write to non-volatile memory . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Un\G125, Un\G157) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 Dead band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
CH† Upper limit output limiter (Un\G42, Un\G74, Dead band setting range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Un\G106, Un\G138) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360,412 Default setting registration instruction (Yn9) . . 332,376
CH† Upper limit setting limiter (Un\G55, Un\G87, Default value write completion flag (Xn9) . . . . . . . 327
Un\G119, Un\G151) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Derivative action (D-action) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Clearing error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Derivative action selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Cold junction temperature compensation accuracy: Deviation alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
(ambient temperature: 0 to 55°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Dielectric withstand voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Cold junction temperature compensation resistor Differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30,87 Differences between auto tuning and self-tuning . . 175
Cold junction temperature compensation selection DIN rail hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
(Un\G182) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 Discontinuation of self-tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Cold junction temperature process value (Un\G29) Display unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14,241
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Displayed in English . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Compensation lead wire . . . . . . . . 93,94,95,96,97,98
Condition for alert judgment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Condition where CH† Alert occurrence flag (XnC to XnF) E
turns off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Effect from wiring resistance of 1 ohm . . . . . . . . . . 36
Conditions for self-tuning (starting ST) . . . . . . . . . 178
ERR. LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29,310
Conditions for self-tuning (vibration ST) . . . . . . . . 180
Error clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Conditions for the simultaneous temperature rise
Error code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Error code (Un\G0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Conditions where auto tuning cannot be executed
Error code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Error code priorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Conditions where auto tuning ends in fail . . . . . . . 150
Error history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Conditions where self-tuning does not complete due to
Error history 1 to 16 (Un\G1280 to Un\G1407) . . . 415
errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Error occurrence flag (Xn2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312,325
Conditions where self-tuning is not executed . . . . . 181
Error reset instruction (Yn2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Connection terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Expanded mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Control method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14,129
External dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14,126
External output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Control mode selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Control output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Control output cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32,38,140 F
Control output cycle unit selection . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Control output cycle unit selection setting . . . . 109,414 Fixed value action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14,407
Control output setting at CPU stop error . . . . . . . . 128 Forward action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24,203
Control switching monitor (Un\G183) . . . . . . . . . . 385 Full scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Conversion enable/disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Function extension bit monitor (Un\G787) . . . . . . . 414
Conversion enable/disable setting (Un\G693) . . . . 402 Function list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Cooling method setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Function version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321,416
Cooling method setting (Un\G719) . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 Functional comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
CPU module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14,81
CT monitor method switching (Un\G176) . . . . . . . 382 G
CT ratio setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
CTL-12-S36-10 (0.0 to 100.0A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 GX Developer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14,419
CTL-12-S36-8 (0.0 to 100.0A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 GX Works2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
CTL-12-S56-10 (0.0 to 100.0A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
CTL-6-P (0.00 to 20.00A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
CTL-6-P-H (0.00 to 20.00A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 H
CT† CT input channel assignment setting (Un\G264 to H/W LED information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Un\G271) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390,391 H/W switch information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
CT† CT ratio setting (Un\G288 to Un\G295) . . 392,393 Hardware error flag (Xn3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312,325
CT† CT selection (Un\G272 to Un\G279). . . . . . . 392 HBA LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
CT† Heater current process value (Un\G256 to Head module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14,81
Un\G263) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Heater disconnection correction function . . . . . . . 217

428
 Heater disconnection correction function selection Module joint levers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
(Un\G170) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Module READY flag (Xn0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312,323
Heater disconnection detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Module selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Heater disconnection detection specifications . . . . . 33 Module’s detailed information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Heater disconnection detection wiring and setting Monitoring the scaling value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
example for three-phase heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Mount position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Heater disconnection/output off-time current error 2
detection delay count(Un\G166) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
N
Heating-cooling control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Heating-cooling control (expanded mode) . . . 126,127 New module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Heating-cooling control (normal mode) . . . . . . . . . 126 Number of accesses to non-volatile memory . . . . . . 32
High response mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Number of alert delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
How to check error history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Number of alert delay (Un\G165) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
How to execute 2-point sensor compensation (when
using GX Works2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Number of connectable modules . . . . . . . .
Number of loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . 82
. . . . . . 14
4
How to execute 2-point sensor compensation (when Number of occupied I/O points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
using the program) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Number of parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Number of temperature input points . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 I
I
O
Indication accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Initial setting change screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Input alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Offset (remaining deviation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132,137
Input filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 ON delay output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Input impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 ON delay output flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174,341,382
Input range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 ON/OFF timing for CH† Automatic backup setting after 7
Input signal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 auto tuning of PID constants (Un\G63, Un\G95,
Input signal list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Un\G127, Un\G159) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Input/output (with another analog module) . . . . . . . 172 Operation at sensor input disconnection . . . . . . . . . 32
Installation of the terminal block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Operation method and formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 8
Insulation method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Operation mode (in operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Insulation resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Operation of the simultaneous temperature rise function
Integral action (I-action) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Internal current consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Operation on completion of auto tuning . . . . . . . . . 151
Operation with starting ST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
L Operation with vibration ST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Outline dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
L60TC4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Output off-time current error detection. . . . . . . . . . 220
L60TC4 actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Output Setting at CPU Stop Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
L60TC4 as a temperature control module . . . . . . . 109 Output setting at CPU stop error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
L60TCRT4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14,424 Output signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
L60TCRT4BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14,424 Output signal list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
L60TCTT4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14,423 Overlap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
L60TCTT4BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14,423
Latest address of error history (Un\G1279) . . . . . . 415
P
LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Linear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207,404 P control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131,137,357
Loop disconnection detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Parameter setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Lower limit deviation alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Part names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
PD control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133,137
M Peak current suppression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Peak current suppression control group setting
MAN mode shift completion flag (Un\G30) . . . 342,368 (Un\G784) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193,412
Manipulated value (MV) and control output cycle . . 339 Performance specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Manual control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139,361,362 PI control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132,357
Manual reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129,137 PID action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
MELSEC-Q series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 PID auto-correction status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Memory of PID constants read/write completion flag PID constant range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
(Un\G31) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 PID constants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Mix control (expanded mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . 126,127 PID continuation flag (Un\G169) . . . . . . . . . . 128,381
Mix control (normal mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 PID control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Mode shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 Platinum resistance thermometer type . . . . . . . . . 350
Module error history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Primary delay digital filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

429
 Procedure before operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Simultaneous temperature rise AT disable status
Procedure for the self-tuning control . . . . . . . . . . . 177 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Procedure of auto tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Simultaneous temperature rise parameter
Process alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193,399,401
Processing of the error history function . . . . . . . . . 237 Simultaneous temperature rise parameter correction
Product information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Program compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 Simultaneous temperature rise parameter error status
Programming procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Programming tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Solderless terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Proportional action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Standard control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Proportional action (P-action) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Standard mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Proportional band setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Starting ST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Proportional gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25,356 Switch setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Q
T
Q64TCRTBWN ......................... 417
Q64TCRTN . . . ......................... 417 Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Q64TCTTBWN ......................... 417 Temperature control method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Q64TCTTN . . . ......................... 417 Temperature control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 13,14,125
Temperature control modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Temperature conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
R
Temperature conversion completion flag (Un\G786)
R1.25-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Ramp action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14,407 Temperature conversion method . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Rate alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Temperature input mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13,14,116
Removal and installation of the terminal block . . . . . 91 Temperature judgment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36,345,351 Temperature measurement range . . . . . . . . . . 36,336
Resolution of the manipulated value for output with Temperature process value (PV) scaling . . . . . . . 221
another analog module(Un\G181) . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 Temperature rise completion range setting (Un\G167)
Reverse action. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24,203 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340,380
RFB limiter function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Temperature rise completion soak time setting
RUN LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29,310 (Un\G168) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340,381
Temperature sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14,345
Temperature unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
S Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Terminal block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Sampling cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32,38,106,117
Terminal block for CT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30,90
Sampling cycle monitor (Un\G788) . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Terminal block for I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30,86,88
Sampling cycle selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108,109
Terminal block mounting screw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Self-tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Terminal screw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Self-tuning disable status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Terms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Self-tuning error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
The condition to be able to perform PID control . . . 134
Sensor compensation function selection (Un\G785)
The simultaneous temperature rise parameter setting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 using self-tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Sensor correction value setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Thermocouple type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Serial number plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Thermocouple wiring resistance value . . . . . . . . . 314
Serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Three-phase heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Set value (SV) and the setting change rate limiter setting
Three-position control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Tightening torque range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Set value (SV) setting range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Time constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Set value backup instruction (Yn8 ) . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Title setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Setting change completion flag (XnB) . . . . . . . . . . 328
To clear the disconnection detection status . . . . . 219
Setting change instruction (YnB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
To forcibly start up self-tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Setting change rate limiter setting . . . . . 109,155,414
Transistor output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Setting manipulated value (MV) in MAN mode . . . 342
Transistor output monitor ON delay time setting
Setting mode (after operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
(Un\G175) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341,382
Setting mode at power-ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Setting value change screen list . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Troubleshooting by symptom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Setting/operation mode instruction (Yn1) . . . . 328,330
Two-position control . . . . . . . . . . . . 129,355,361,362
Setting/operation mode status (Xn1) . . . . . . . . . . 324
Type of usable temperature sensors . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Signal names of terminal blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Simple two-degree-of-freedom . . . . . . . . . . . . 22,153
Simultaneous temperature rise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Simultaneous temperature rise AT . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

430
U
Unused channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Unused channel setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Upper limit deviation alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Upper lower limit deviation alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
2
V
Vibration ST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

W
Watchdog timer error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 4
Water cooled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Water cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
When AUTO mode is shifted to MAN mode . . . . . . 367 I
When measured value exceeds temperature
measurement range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
When measured value falls below temperature
measurement range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
When the auto tuning does not complete . . . . . . . . 313
When the auto tuning does not start . . . . . . . . . . . 312
When the self-tuning does not start . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
When the temperature process value (PV) is abnormal 7
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
When using the L60TC4 as a temperature input module
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 8
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92,93
Within-range alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

431
 REVISIONS
*The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.
Print date *Manual number Revision
July, 2011 SH(NA)-081000ENG-A First edition

Japanese manual version SH-080999-A

This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses. Mitsubishi Electric
Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the
contents noted in this manual.

© 2011 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

432
WARRANTY
Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product.

1. Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range

If any faults or defects (hereinafter "Failure") found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the
product within the gratis warranty term, the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or
Mitsubishi Service Company.
However, if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location, expenses to send an engineer will be
solely at the customer's discretion. Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re-commissioning,
maintenance, or testing on-site that involves replacement of the failed module.
[Gratis Warranty Term]
The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated
place.
Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi, the maximum distribution period shall be six (6) months,
and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen (18) months. The gratis warranty term of
repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs.
[Gratis Warranty Range]
(1) The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state, usage methods and usage environment, etc.,
which follow the conditions and precautions, etc., given in the instruction manual, user's manual and caution
labels on the product.
(2) Even within the gratis warranty term, repairs shall be charged for in the following cases.
1. Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling, carelessness or negligence by the user. Failure
caused by the user's hardware or software design.
2. Failure caused by unapproved modifications, etc., to the product by the user.
3. When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user's device, Failure that could have been avoided if
functions or structures, judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user's device is subject to or
as necessary by industry standards, had been provided.
4. Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts (battery, backlight, fuse, etc.) designated in the
instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced.
5. Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages, and Failure caused by
force majeure such as earthquakes, lightning, wind and water damage.
6. Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from
Mitsubishi.
7. Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user.

2. Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production

(1) Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven (7) years after production of the product is
discontinued.
Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins, etc.
(2) Product supply (including repair parts) is not available after production is discontinued.

3. Overseas service
Overseas, repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi's local overseas FA Center. Note that the repair conditions at
each FA Center may differ.

4. Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability

Regardless of the gratis warranty term, Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any
cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi, loss in opportunity, lost profits incurred to the user by Failures
of Mitsubishi products, special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not, compensation for
accidents, and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products, replacement by the user,
maintenance of on-site equipment, start-up test run and other tasks.

5. Changes in product specifications

The specifications given in the catalogs, manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice.

433
Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, and Windows Vista are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and other countries.
Pentium is a trademark of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries.
Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation.
The SD logo and SDHC logo are trademarks.
All other company names and product names used in this manual are trademarks or
registered trademarks of their respective companies.

SH(NA)-081000ENG-A
434